GE Vernova C30 Instruction manual

C30
Controller System
Instruction Manual
Product version: 8.1x
Publication reference: 1601-0088-AK1
LISTED
IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL
S T ER
GI
ED
RE
E83849
ISO 9001
Copyright © 2025 GE Vernova. All rights reserved.
GridBeats, Universal Relay, Multilin, MiCOM, S1 Agile, P40 Agile, DS Agile, EnerVista,
CyberSentry, HardFiber, FlexLogic, FlexElement, FlexCurve, FlexAnalog, FlexInteger
and FlexState are trademarks or registered trademarks of GE Vernova.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Vernova. This documentation is
furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the
permission of GE Vernova. The content of this manual is for informational use only and
is subject to change without notice.
It is the responsibility of the user for verifying and validating the suitability of all GE
Vernova products. This equipment must be used within its design limits. The proper
application including configuration and setting of this product to suit the power system
assets is the responsibility of the user, who is also required to ensure that all local or
regional safety guidelines are adhered to. Incorrect application of this product could risk
damage to property/the environment, personal injuries or fatalities and shall be the sole
responsibility of the person/entity applying and qualifying the product for use.
The content in this document has been developed to provide guidance to properly install,
configure and maintain this product for its intended applications. This guidance is not
intended to cover every possible contingency that may arise during commissioning,
operation, service, or maintenance activities. Should you encounter any circumstance’s
not clearly addressed in this document, contact your local GE Vernova service site.
IT IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER TO SECURE THEIR NETWORK
AND ASSOCIATED DEVICES AGAINST CYBER SECURITY INTRUSIONS OR
ATTACKS. GE VERNOVA AND ITS AFFILIATES ARE NOT LIABLE FOR ANY
DAMAGES AND/OR LOSSES ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO SUCH SECURITY
INTRUSION OR ATTACKS.
C30 Controller System
Table of contents
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1
Safety symbols and definitions ........................................................................... 1-1
General cautions and warnings .................................................................................... 1-1
For further assistance........................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.1
1.2
2 PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
3 INSTALLATION
3.1
3.2
Product description ............................................................................................... 2-1
Security.................................................................................................................... 2-2
Order codes............................................................................................................. 2-6
2.3.1
Order codes with enhanced CT/VT modules........................................................... 2-6
2.3.2
Order codes with process bus modules ..................................................................2-10
2.3.3
Replacement modules .....................................................................................................2-13
Signal processing ................................................................................................. 2-15
2.4.1
UR signal processing ........................................................................................................2-15
Specifications........................................................................................................ 2-17
2.5.1
Protection elements ..........................................................................................................2-18
2.5.2
User-programmable elements ....................................................................................2-18
2.5.3
Monitoring..............................................................................................................................2-20
2.5.4
Inputs .......................................................................................................................................2-20
2.5.5
Power supply........................................................................................................................2-22
2.5.6
Outputs....................................................................................................................................2-22
2.5.7
Communication protocols..............................................................................................2-24
2.5.8
Inter-relay communications .........................................................................................2-25
2.5.9
CyberSentry security........................................................................................................2-27
2.5.10 Graphical front panel........................................................................................................2-27
2.5.11 Environmental......................................................................................................................2-27
2.5.12 Type tests...............................................................................................................................2-29
2.5.13 Production tests ..................................................................................................................2-29
2.5.14 Approvals ...............................................................................................................................2-30
2.5.15 Maintenance.........................................................................................................................2-30
Unpack and inspect ............................................................................................... 3-1
Panel cutouts .......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1
Horizontal units ..................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.2
Vertical units ........................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.3
Rear terminal layout .........................................................................................................3-10
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.3
Wiring .....................................................................................................................3-14
3.3.1
Typical wiring....................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.3.2
Dielectric strength ............................................................................................................. 3-15
3.3.3
Control power ...................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.3.4
Process bus module for HardFiber ............................................................................ 3-16
3.3.5
Contact inputs and outputs .......................................................................................... 3-17
3.3.6
Transducer inputs and outputs................................................................................... 3-29
3.3.7
RS232 port............................................................................................................................. 3-31
3.3.8
CPU communication ports ............................................................................................ 3-32
3.3.9
IRIG-B....................................................................................................................................... 3-35
3.4 Direct input and output communications .......................................................3-35
3.4.1
Description ............................................................................................................................ 3-35
3.4.2
Fiber: LED and ELED transmitters............................................................................... 3-38
3.4.3
Fiber laser transmitters................................................................................................... 3-38
3.4.4
G.703 interface.................................................................................................................... 3-39
3.4.5
RS422 interface................................................................................................................... 3-43
3.4.6
RS422 and fiber interface .............................................................................................. 3-45
3.4.7
G.703 and fiber interface................................................................................................ 3-46
3.4.8
IEEE C37.94 interface ....................................................................................................... 3-46
3.4.9
C37.94SM interface........................................................................................................... 3-49
3.5 Activate relay ........................................................................................................3-52
3.6 Install software .....................................................................................................3-53
3.6.1
EnerVista communication overview ......................................................................... 3-53
3.6.2
System requirements....................................................................................................... 3-54
3.6.3
Install software.................................................................................................................... 3-55
3.7 Add device to software........................................................................................3-57
3.7.1
Set IP address in UR.......................................................................................................... 3-57
3.7.2
Configure serial connection.......................................................................................... 3-63
3.7.3
Configure Ethernet connection ................................................................................... 3-64
3.7.4
Configure modem connection.....................................................................................3-65
3.7.5
Automatic discovery of UR devices........................................................................... 3-66
3.8 Connect to the C30...............................................................................................3-67
3.8.1
Connect to the C30 in EnerVista ................................................................................. 3-67
3.8.2
Use Quick Connect via front RS232 port................................................................. 3-68
3.8.3
Use Quick Connect via front USB port ..................................................................... 3-69
3.8.4
Use Quick Connect via a rear Ethernet port.......................................................... 3-69
3.9 Set up CyberSentry and change default password .......................................3-70
3.10 Import settings .....................................................................................................3-71
3.10.1 import settings from XML file ....................................................................................... 3-71
3.10.2 Import settings from device files ................................................................................ 3-75
3.11 Connect to D400 gateway ..................................................................................3-76
3.11.1 Oscillography files ............................................................................................................. 3-76
3.11.2 Event records ....................................................................................................................... 3-76
3.11.3 Log files................................................................................................................................... 3-77
3.11.4 Setting files............................................................................................................................ 3-77
4 INTERFACES
4.1
EnerVista software interface................................................................................4-1
Introduction .............................................................................................................................4-1
Settings files ............................................................................................................................4-1
Event viewing..........................................................................................................................4-2
File support ..............................................................................................................................4-2
EnerVista main window .....................................................................................................4-3
Protection summary window..........................................................................................4-5
Settings templates................................................................................................................4-6
Secure and lock FlexLogic equations ....................................................................... 4-10
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
iv
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.1.9
4.2
4.3
4.4
5 SETTINGS
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Settings file traceability...................................................................................................4-13
Front panel interface........................................................................................... 4-16
4.2.1
Front panel ............................................................................................................................4-16
4.2.2
Front panel display............................................................................................................4-18
4.2.3
Front panel navigation keys .........................................................................................4-39
4.2.4
LED indicators ......................................................................................................................4-40
4.2.5
Front panel labelling .........................................................................................................4-44
4.2.6
Menu navigation.................................................................................................................4-51
4.2.7
Change settings ..................................................................................................................4-53
4.2.8
View actual values.............................................................................................................4-58
4.2.9
Breaker control....................................................................................................................4-59
4.2.10 Change passwords............................................................................................................4-60
4.2.11 Invalid password entry ....................................................................................................4-62
Logic diagrams ..................................................................................................... 4-62
FlexLogic design using Engineer ....................................................................... 4-63
4.4.1
Design logic...........................................................................................................................4-65
4.4.2
Send file to and from device .........................................................................................4-75
4.4.3
Monitor logic.........................................................................................................................4-76
4.4.4
View front panel and print labels................................................................................4-77
4.4.5
Generate connectivity report .......................................................................................4-77
4.4.6
Preferences ...........................................................................................................................4-78
4.4.7
Toolbars ..................................................................................................................................4-81
Settings menu......................................................................................................... 5-1
Overview.................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.1
Introduction to elements .................................................................................................. 5-3
Product setup.......................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.1
Security ..................................................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.2
Display properties..............................................................................................................5-23
5.3.3
Graphical front panel........................................................................................................5-24
5.3.4
Clear relay records ............................................................................................................5-37
5.3.5
Communications ................................................................................................................5-37
5.3.6
Modbus user map ........................................................................................................... 5-110
5.3.7
Real-time clock.................................................................................................................5-110
5.3.8
Oscillography ....................................................................................................................5-116
5.3.9
Data logger ........................................................................................................................5-118
5.3.10 User-programmable LEDs ..........................................................................................5-120
5.3.11 User-programmable self-tests .................................................................................5-124
5.3.12 Control pushbuttons ...................................................................................................... 5-125
5.3.13 User-programmable pushbuttons ..........................................................................5-126
5.3.14 Flex state parameters ...................................................................................................5-132
5.3.15 User-definable displays................................................................................................5-133
5.3.16 Direct inputs and outputs............................................................................................5-135
5.3.17 Teleprotection ...................................................................................................................5-141
5.3.18 Installation ..........................................................................................................................5-142
Remote resources ..............................................................................................5-143
5.4.1
Remote resources configuration .............................................................................5-143
System setup ......................................................................................................5-144
5.5.1
Breakers...............................................................................................................................5-144
5.5.2
Switches...............................................................................................................................5-151
FlexLogic ..............................................................................................................5-158
5.6.1
FlexLogic operands ........................................................................................................ 5-158
5.6.2
FlexLogic rules ..................................................................................................................5-166
5.6.3
FlexLogic evaluation ...................................................................................................... 5-167
5.6.4
FlexLogic example ..........................................................................................................5-167
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.6.5
5.6.6
5.6.7
5.6.8
FlexLogic equation editor............................................................................................ 5-172
FlexLogic timers............................................................................................................... 5-172
FlexElements ..................................................................................................................... 5-172
Non-volatile latches....................................................................................................... 5-177
5.7
Control elements ............................................................................................... 5-178
Overview ............................................................................................................................. 5-178
Trip bus ................................................................................................................................ 5-178
Selector switch................................................................................................................. 5-180
Digital elements............................................................................................................... 5-186
Digital counters................................................................................................................ 5-189
8-bit switches.................................................................................................................... 5-191
PID regulator ..................................................................................................................... 5-192
5.8 Inputs/outputs ................................................................................................... 5-195
5.8.1
Contact inputs .................................................................................................................. 5-195
5.8.2
Virtual inputs ..................................................................................................................... 5-197
5.8.3
Contact outputs............................................................................................................... 5-198
5.8.4
Virtual outputs.................................................................................................................. 5-202
5.8.5
Resetting ............................................................................................................................. 5-202
5.8.6
Direct inputs and outputs ........................................................................................... 5-203
5.8.7
Teleprotection................................................................................................................... 5-207
5.9 Transducer inputs/outputs.............................................................................. 5-209
5.9.1
DCmA inputs...................................................................................................................... 5-209
5.9.2
RTD inputs .......................................................................................................................... 5-210
5.9.3
DCmA outputs .................................................................................................................. 5-211
5.10 Testing ................................................................................................................. 5-213
5.10.1 IED mode config .............................................................................................................. 5-213
5.10.2 Force contact inputs ..................................................................................................... 5-216
5.10.3 Force contact outputs .................................................................................................. 5-217
5.11 Simulation ........................................................................................................... 5-217
5.11.1 Subscribe to simulated values.................................................................................. 5-218
5.11.2 Publish simulated values............................................................................................. 5-219
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
5.7.6
5.7.7
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.1
6.2
6.3
vi
Actual Values menu ...............................................................................................6-1
Front panel...............................................................................................................6-3
6.2.1
Enhanced and basic front panels .................................................................................6-3
6.2.2
Graphical front panel ..........................................................................................................6-3
Status........................................................................................................................6-4
6.3.1
IED ................................................................................................................................................6-4
6.3.2
Contact inputs ........................................................................................................................6-4
6.3.3
Virtual inputs ...........................................................................................................................6-4
6.3.4
RxGOOSE boolean inputs ..................................................................................................6-5
6.3.5
RxGOOSE DPS inputs...........................................................................................................6-5
6.3.6
Teleprotection inputs ..........................................................................................................6-5
6.3.7
Contact outputs.....................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.8
Virtual outputs........................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.9
RxGOOSE status.....................................................................................................................6-6
6.3.10 RxGOOSE statistics ...............................................................................................................6-6
6.3.11 Digital counters......................................................................................................................6-7
6.3.12 Selector switches ..................................................................................................................6-7
6.3.13 Flex States ................................................................................................................................6-7
6.3.14 Ethernet .....................................................................................................................................6-8
6.3.15 Real time clock synchronizing ........................................................................................6-8
6.3.16 Direct inputs ............................................................................................................................6-9
6.3.17 Direct devices status ...........................................................................................................6-9
6.3.18 EGD protocol status.......................................................................................................... 6-10
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.3.19
6.3.20
6.3.21
6.3.22
6.3.23
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
7 COMMANDS AND
TARGETS
7.1
Metering................................................................................................................. 6-12
6.4.1
FlexElements.........................................................................................................................6-12
6.4.2
RxGOOSE analogs ..............................................................................................................6-13
6.4.3
Transducer inputs and outputs ...................................................................................6-13
Remote resources ................................................................................................ 6-14
6.5.1
Field unit .................................................................................................................................6-14
Records .................................................................................................................. 6-14
6.6.1
Event records .......................................................................................................................6-14
6.6.2
Oscillography .......................................................................................................................6-16
6.6.3
Data logger ...........................................................................................................................6-16
Product information ............................................................................................ 6-17
6.7.1
Model information..............................................................................................................6-17
6.7.2
Firmware revisions ............................................................................................................6-18
Commands menu ................................................................................................... 7-1
Virtual inputs........................................................................................................................... 7-2
Clear records .......................................................................................................................... 7-2
Set date and time................................................................................................................. 7-3
Relay maintenance ............................................................................................................. 7-3
Security ..................................................................................................................................... 7-4
Targets menu.......................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.1
Target messages .................................................................................................................. 7-5
7.2.2
Relay self-tests ...................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
7.2
8 MAINTENANCE
Teleprotection channel tests ........................................................................................6-10
Remaining connection status.......................................................................................6-11
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) ..........................................................................6-11
TxGOOSE status ..................................................................................................................6-12
Protocol...................................................................................................................................6-12
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
8.13
Monitoring ............................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1
Devices with Site Targets.................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.2
Data with Modbus Analyzer............................................................................................ 8-1
General maintenance............................................................................................ 8-3
8.2.1
In-service maintenance .................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.2
Out-of-service maintenance........................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.3
Unscheduled maintenance (system interruption) ................................................ 8-3
Retrieve files ........................................................................................................... 8-3
8.3.1
CyberSentry security event files ................................................................................... 8-4
Convert device settings ........................................................................................ 8-5
Copy settings to other device.............................................................................. 8-7
Export settings........................................................................................................ 8-7
Compare settings................................................................................................... 8-8
8.7.1
Compare against defaults ............................................................................................... 8-8
8.7.2
Compare two devices......................................................................................................... 8-8
Back up and restore settings ............................................................................... 8-9
8.8.1
Back up settings.................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.8.2
Restore settings ..................................................................................................................8-11
Upgrade software ................................................................................................ 8-14
Upgrade firmware................................................................................................ 8-15
Replace front panel ............................................................................................. 8-16
Replace modules .................................................................................................. 8-25
Battery ................................................................................................................... 8-26
8.13.1 Replace battery...................................................................................................................8-27
8.13.2 Dispose of battery..............................................................................................................8-28
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.14
8.15
8.16
8.17
Clear files and data after uninstall ...................................................................8-31
Repairs....................................................................................................................8-31
Storage ...................................................................................................................8-32
Disposal..................................................................................................................8-32
A FLEXANALOG
OPERANDS
A.1
FlexAnalog items ................................................................................................... A-1
B RADIUS SERVER
CONFIGURATION
B.1
RADIUS server configuration ................................................................................B-1
C COMMAND LINE
INTERFACE
C.1
Command line interface ....................................................................................... C-1
D MISCELLANEOUS
D.1
D.2
Warranty ................................................................................................................. D-1
Revision history ..................................................................................................... D-1
ABBREVIATIONS
INDEX
viii
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C30 Controller System
Chapter 1: Introduction
Introduction
This chapter outlines safety and technical support information.
1.1 Safety symbols and definitions
Before attempting to install or use the device, review all safety indicators in this document to help prevent injury,
equipment damage, or downtime.
The following safety and equipment symbols are used in this document.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates practices not related to personal injury.
1.1.1 General cautions and warnings
The following general safety precautions and warnings apply.
Ensure that all connections to the product are correct so as to avoid accidental risk of shock
and/or fire, for example such as can arise from high voltage connected to low voltage terminals.
Follow the requirements of this manual, including adequate wiring size and type, terminal torque settings, voltage,
current magnitudes applied, and adequate isolation/clearance in external wiring from high to low voltage circuits.
Use the device only for its intended purpose and application.
Ensure that all ground paths are uncompromised for safety purposes during device operation and service.
Ensure that the control power applied to the device, the alternating current (AC), and voltage input match the ratings
specified on the relay nameplate. Do not apply current or voltage in excess of the specified limits.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
1-1
FOR FURTHER ASSISTANCE
1
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
Only qualified personnel are to operate the device. Such personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all safety
cautions and warnings in this manual and with applicable country, regional, utility, and plant safety regulations.
Hazardous voltages can exist in the power supply and at the device connection to current transformers, voltage
transformers, control, and test circuit terminals. Make sure all sources of such voltages are isolated prior to
attempting work on the device.
Hazardous voltages can exist when opening the secondary circuits of live current transformers. Make sure that
current transformer secondary circuits are shorted out before making or removing any connection to the current
transformer (CT) input terminals of the device.
For tests with secondary test equipment, ensure that no other sources of voltages or currents are connected to such
equipment and that trip and close commands to the circuit breakers or other switching apparatus are isolated,
unless this is required by the test procedure and is specified by appropriate utility/plant procedure.
When the device is used to control primary equipment, such as circuit breakers, isolators, and other switching
apparatus, all control circuits from the device to the primary equipment must be isolated while personnel are working
on or around this primary equipment to prevent any inadvertent command from this device.
Use an external disconnect to isolate the mains voltage supply.
Personal safety can be affected if the product is physically modified by the end user. Modifications to the product
outside of recommended wiring configuration, hardware, or programming boundaries is not recommended end-use
practice. Product disassembly and repairs are not permitted. All service needs to be conducted by the factory.
LED transmitters are classified as IEC 60825-1 Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) Class 1M. Class 1M
devices are considered safe to the unaided eye. Do not view directly with optical instruments.
This product is rated to Class A emissions levels and is to be used in Utility, Substation Industrial
environments. Not to be used near electronic devices rated for Class B levels.
1.2 For further assistance
For product support, contact the information and call center as follows:
GE Grid Solutions
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
Worldwide telephone: +1 905 927 7070
Europe/Middle East/Africa telephone: +34 94 485 88 54
North America toll-free: 1 800 547 8629
Fax: +1 905 927 5098
Worldwide e-mail: [email protected]
Europe e-mail: [email protected]
Website: http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin
When contacting GE by e-mail, optionally include a device information file, which is generated in the EnerVista software by
clicking the Service Report button. The service report also can be generated in the field, for example with a USB cable
connected between the graphical front panel and a computer, and the Device Setup configured for the USB connection.
1-2
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
FOR FURTHER ASSISTANCE
Figure 1-1: Generate service report in EnerVista software
1
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
1-3
FOR FURTHER ASSISTANCE
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
1
1-4
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C30 Controller System
Chapter 2: Product description
Product description
This chapter outlines the product, order codes, and specifications.
2.1 Product description
The C30 Controller System is part of the Universal Relay (UR) family of products. It is a microprocessor-based device
designed for power substation control and monitoring.
Diagnostic features include a sequence of records capable of storing 1024 time-tagged events. The internal clock used for
time-tagging can be synchronized with an IRIG-B signal, using the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) over the Ethernet
port, or using the Precision Time Protocol (PTP). This precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be determined
throughout the system. Events can also be programmed (via FlexLogic™ equations) to trigger oscillography data capture
that can be set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a computer. These tools
significantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a system fault.
Several options are available for communication. An RS232 port (USB port with the graphical front panel) can be used to
connect to a computer for the programming of settings and the monitoring of actual values. The rear RS485 port allows
independent access by operating and engineering staff. It can be connected to system computers with baud rates up to
115.2 kbps. All serial ports use the Modbus RTU protocol. The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is supported on the RS485
interface. IEC 60870-5-103, DNP, and Modbus cannot be enabled simultaneously on this interface. Also only one of the
DNP, IEC 60870-5-103, and IEC 60870-5-104 protocols can be enabled at any time on the relay. When the IEC 60870-5-103
protocol is chosen, the RS485 port has a fixed even parity and the baud rate can be either 9.6 kbps or 19.2 kbps. The
100Base-FX or 100Base-TX Ethernet interface provides fast, reliable communications in noisy environments. The Ethernet
port supports IEC 61850, Modbus/TCP, TFTP, and PTP (according to IEEE Std. 1588-2008 or IEC 61588), and it allows access
to the relay via any standard web browser (C30 web pages). The IEC 60870-5-104 protocol is supported on the Ethernet
port. The Ethernet port also supports the Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) of IEC 62439-3 (clause 4, 2012) when
purchased as an option.
GOOSE and secure Routable GOOSE (R-GOOSE) are supported with software options.
Settings and actual values can be accessed from the front panel or EnerVista software.
The C30 uses flash memory technology that allows field upgrading as new features are added. Firmware and software are
upgradable.
Table 2-1: Device functions
Function
Function
Breaker Control
IEC 61850 Communications
Contact Inputs (up to 120)
IEC 62351-9 Data and Communications Security
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-1
SECURITY
2
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Function
Function
Contact Outputs (up to 72)
Modbus Communications
Control Pushbuttons
Modbus User Map
CyberSentry™ Security
Non-Volatile Latches
Data Logger
Non-Volatile Selector Switch
Digital Counters (8)
Oscillography
Digital Elements (96)
Time Synchronization over IRIG-B or IEEE 1588
Direct Inputs/Outputs (64)
Time Synchronization over SNTP
Disconnect Switches
User Definable Displays
DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 Communications
User Programmable LEDs
Ethernet Global Data Protocol
User Programmable Pushbuttons
Event Recorder
User Programmable Self-Tests
FlexElements™ (16)
Virtual Inputs (128)
FlexLogic Equations
Virtual Outputs (256)
IEC 60870-5-103 Communications
2.2 Security
The following security features are available:
•
Password security — Basic security present by default
•
EnerVista security — Role-based access to various EnerVista software screens and configuration elements. The
feature is present by default in the EnerVista software.
•
CyberSentry security — Advanced security available using a software option. When purchased, the option is enabled
automatically, and the default Password security and EnerVista security are disabled.
2.2.0.1 EnerVista security
The EnerVista security management system is a role-based access control (RBAC) system that allows an administrator to
manage the privileges of multiple users. This allows for access control of UR devices by multiple personnel within a
substation and conforms to the principles of RBAC as defined in ANSI INCITS 359-2004. The EnerVista security
management system is disabled by default to allow the administrator direct access to the EnerVista software after
installation. It is recommended that security be enabled before placing the device in service.
Basic password or enhanced CyberSentry security applies, depending on purchase.
2.2.0.2 Password security
Password security is a basic security feature present by default.
Two levels of password security are provided: command and setting. Use of a password for each level controls whether all
users can enter commands and/or change settings.
Two types of connection security are provided: password entry from local or remote connection. Local access is defined as
access to settings or commands via the front panel interface. This includes both keypad entry and the through a front
panel port. Remote access is defined as access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes
both Ethernet and RS485 connections. These two settings are on by default and apply to all users.
When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the
corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the C30, the remote password is used. If the
connection is to a front panel port, the local password applies. (These two local and remote password settings are not
shown the figure.)
Password access events are logged in the Event Recorder.
2-2
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SECURITY
Figure 2-1: Access control by passwords and connection type
2
2.2.0.3 CyberSentry security
CyberSentry security is available using software options that provide advanced security. When the option is purchased,
the basic password security is disabled automatically.
CyberSentry provides security through the following features:
•
An Authentication, Authorization, Accounting (AAA) Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) client that is
managed centrally, enables user attribution, provides accounting of all user activities, and uses secure standardsbased strong cryptography for authentication and credential protection. In other words, this option uses a RADIUS
server for user authentication.
•
A Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) system that provides a permission model that allows access to UR device
operations and configurations based on specific roles and individual user accounts configured on the AAA server.
That is, Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, and Observer roles are used.
•
Security event reporting through the Syslog protocol for supporting Security Information Event Management (SIEM)
systems for centralized cybersecurity monitoring
•
Strong encryption of all access and configuration network messages between the EnerVista software and UR devices
using the Secure Shell (SSH) protocol, the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), and 128-bit keys in Galois Counter
Mode (GCM) as specified in the U.S. National Security Agency Suite B extension for SSH and approved by the National
Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) FIPS-140-2 standards for cryptographic systems
CyberSentry user roles
CyberSentry user roles (Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, Observer) limit the levels of access to various UR
functions. This means that the EnerVista software allows for access to functionality based on the user’s logged in role.
Example: Administrative functions can be segmented from common operator functions, or engineering type access, all of
which are defined by separate roles so that access of UR devices by multiple personnel within a substation is allowed.
One role of one type is allowed to be logged in at a time. For example, one Operator can be logged in but not a second
Operator at the same time. This prevents subsets of settings from being changed at the same time.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-3
SECURITY
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Figure 2-2: CyberSentry user roles
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
2
Observer
Supervisor
842838A2.CDR
The table lists user roles and permissions.
Table 2-2: Permissions by user role with CyberSentry
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Supervisor
Observer
Summary
Complete access Complete access Command
menu
except for
CyberSentry
Security
Authorizes
writing
Default role
Device Definition
R
R
R
R
R
|--------------- Security
(CyberSentry)
RW
R
R
R
R
|--------------- Supervisory
See table notes
R
R
See table
notes
R
|--------------- Display Properties
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Clear Relay Records
(settings)
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Communications
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Modbus User Map
RW
RW
R
R
R
Settings
|---------- Product Setup
|--------------- Real Time Clock
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Oscillography
RW
RW
R
R
R
R
|--------------- Data Logger
RW
RW
R
R
|--------------- Demand
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- User-Programmable RW
LEDs
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- User-Programmable RW
Self Tests
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Control Pushbuttons RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- User-Programmable RW
Pushbuttons
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Flex state
Parameters
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- User-Definable
Displays
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Direct I/O
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Teleprotection
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Installation
RW
RW
R
R
R
RW
RW
R
R
R
|---------- System Setup
2-4
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SECURITY
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Supervisor
Observer
|---------- FlexLogic
RW
RW
R
R
R
|---------- Grouped Elements
RW
RW
R
R
R
|---------- Control Elements
RW
RW
R
R
R
|---------- Inputs / Outputs
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Contact Inputs
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Contact Input
threshold
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Virtual Inputs
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Contact Outputs
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Virtual Outputs
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Resetting
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Direct Inputs
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Direct Outputs
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Teleprotection
RW
RW
R
R
R
|--------------- Direct Analogs
RW
RW
R
R
R
RW
RW
R
R
R
|---------- Transducer I/O
|--------------- Direct Integers
RW
RW
R
R
R
|---------- Testing
RW
RW
R
R
R
|---------- Front Panel Label Designer
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
|---------- Protection Summary
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Commands
RW
RW
RW
R
R
|---------- Virtual Inputs
RW
RW
RW
R
R
|---------- Clear Records
RW
RW
RW
R
R
|---------- Set Date and Time
RW
RW
RW
R
R
User Displays
R
R
R
R
R
Targets
R
R
R
R
R
Actual Values
R
R
R
R
R
|---------- Front Panel
R
R
R
R
R
|---------- Status
R
R
R
R
R
|---------- Metering
R
R
R
R
R
|---------- Transducer I/O
R
R
R
R
R
|---------- Records
R
R
R
R
R
|---------- Product Info
R
R
R
R
R
Maintenance
RW
RW
R
R
R
|---------- Modbus Analyzer
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
|---------- Change front panel
RW
RW
RW
R
R
|---------- Update firmware
Yes
No
No
No
No
|---------- Retrieve file
Yes
No
No
No
No
2
Table Notes:
RW = read and write access
R = read access
Supervisor = RW (default), Administrator = R (default), Administrator = RW (only if Supervisor role is disabled)
NA = the permission is not enforced by CyberSentry security
CyberSentry user authentication
The following types of authentication are supported by CyberSentry to access the UR device:
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-5
ORDER CODES
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
•
Device Authentication (local UR device authenticates)
•
Server Authentication (RADIUS server authenticates)
The EnerVista software allows access to functionality that is determined by the user role, which comes either from the local
UR device or the RADIUS server.
2
The EnerVista software has a device authentication option on the login screen for accessing the UR device. When the
"Device" button is selected, the UR uses its local authentication database and not the RADIUS server to authenticate the
user. In this case, it uses its built-in roles (Administrator, Engineer, Supervisor, Observer, Operator, or Administrator and
Supervisor when Device Authentication is disabled) as login names and the associated passwords are stored on the UR
device. As such, when using the local accounts, access is not user-attributable.
In cases where user-attributable access is required especially to facilitate auditable processes for compliance reasons, use
RADIUS authentication.
When the "Server" Authentication Type option is selected, the UR uses the RADIUS server and not its local authentication
database to authenticate the user.
No password or security information is displayed in plain text by the EnerVista software or UR device, nor is such
information ever transmitted without cryptographic protection.
CyberSentry server authentication
The UR has been designed to direct automatically the authentication requests based on user names. In this respect, local
account names on the UR are considered as reserved and not used on a RADIUS server.
The UR detects automatically whether an authentication request is to be handled remotely or locally. As there are five local
accounts possible on the UR, if the user ID credential does not match one of the five local accounts, the UR forwards
automatically the request to a RADIUS server when one is provided.
If a RADIUS server is provided, but is unreachable over the network, server authentication requests are denied. In this
situation, use local UR accounts to gain access to the UR system.
2.3 Order codes
The order code is on the product label and indicates the product options applicable.
The C30 is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount or reduced-size (¾) vertical unit. It consists of the following
modules: power supply, CPU, CT/VT, contact input and output, transducer input and output, and inter-relay
communications. Module options are specified at the time of ordering.
The order codes shown here are subject to change without notice. See the web page for the product for the latest options.
The letters in the top row of the table correspond to slots in the UR chassis, for example slot F, H, or U.
The R-GOOSE protocol described in IEC 61850-8-1 is available through the IEC 61850 software option. R-GOOSE
security requires the CyberSentry software option.
For Japanese, the settings display in Japanese on the graphical front panel, while the keys printed on the panel are
in English.
2.3.1 Order codes with enhanced CT/VT modules
Table 2-3: C30 order codes for horizontal units
BASE UNIT
CPU
2-6
C30
C30
- *
|
T
U
**
|
|
|
- *
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
* - F **
|
|
|
|
|
|
V |
W |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- H **
|
|
|
- M **
|
|
|
- P **
|
|
|
- U **
|
|
|
- W/X **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Full Size Horizontal Mount
Base Unit
RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 1 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet,
multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 3 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
RS485 with 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode ST + 10/100Base-TX Ethernet, RJ45
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
C30 - *
SOFTWARE OPTIONS
MOUNT/COATING
FRONT PANEL + INTERFACE
** - *
00
|
01
|
03
|
04
|
A0
|
A1
|
A3
|
A4
|
AW |
B0
|
B1
|
B3
|
B4
|
BW |
C0
|
C1
|
C3
|
C4
|
CW |
D0
|
D1
|
D3
|
D4
|
DW |
E0
|
E1
|
E3
|
E4
|
EW
|
F0
|
F1
|
F3
|
F4
|
FW
|
G0
|
G1
|
G3
|
G4
|
GW |
J0
|
J1
|
J3
|
J4
|
JW
|
K0
|
K1
|
K3
|
K4
|
KW
|
L0
|
L1
|
L3
|
L4
|
LW
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* - F **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H | |
A | |
C |
D |
R |
P |
G |
S |
K |
M |
Q |
U |
L |
N |
T |
V |
W |
Y |
I |
J |
H |
O |
E |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ORDER CODES
- H **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- M **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- P **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- U **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- W/X **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Full Size Horizontal Mount
No software options
Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
IEC 61850
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588
IEEE 1588 and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PID controller, and IEC 61850
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
PRP and Ethernet Global Data
PRP and IEC 61850
PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
PRP, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588 and PRP
IEEE 1588, PRP, and Ethernet Global Dada
IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, PID controller, and IEC 61850
PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl1, and Ethernet Global Data
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + PID controller + IEC 61850
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + PID controller + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + PID controller + IEC
61850
Horizontal (19” rack)
Horizontal (19” rack) with harsh-environmental coating
English display
French display
Russian display
English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Turkish display
Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with German display
Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Polish display
Enhanced front panel with Polish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
7" Graphical front panel display in multiple languages with USB front port and
user-programmable pushbuttons (English, French, Chinese, Russian, Turkish,
German, Polish, Japanese)
2-7
2
ORDER CODES
C30 - * **
POWER SUPPLY
(redundant supply must
be same type as main supply)
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
- * *
CONTACT
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
2
TRANSDUCER
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
(select a maximum of 3 per unit or
maximum 6 with 5F)
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
(select a maximum of 1 per unit)
* - F ** - H
H
|
H
|
L
|
L
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
**
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
- M **
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
- P **
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
- U **
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
6W
6X
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
6W
6X
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
6W
6X
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
6W
6X
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
6W
6X
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
2A
2B
2H
2I
2J
72
73
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
- W/X **
|
RH
|
RL
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
Full Size Horizontal Mount
125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
No Module
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a case)
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 Contact inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8
contact inputs
6W 30 Contact inputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
6X 18 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
5A 4 DCmA inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
5C 8 RTD inputs
5D 4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
5E 4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA inputs
5F 8 DCmA inputs
2A C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
2B C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
2H IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
2I Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode,
Laser
2J Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode,
Laser
72 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
73 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channel
76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7A 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
7B 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
7D 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
7F Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
7G Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
7H 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7I 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
7K 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
7M Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
7N Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
7Q Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
7R G.703, 1 Channel
7S G.703, 2 Channels
7T RS422, 1 Channel
7W RS422, 2 Channels
Table 2-4: C30 order codes for reduced-size vertical units
- * ** - *
| |
|
T |
|
U |
|
V |
|
W |
|
SOFTWARE OPTIONS
00
|
01
|
03
|
04
|
A0
|
A1
|
A3
|
A4
|
AW |
B0
|
B1
|
B3
|
B4
|
BW |
C0
|
C1
|
C3
|
C4
|
CW |
D0
|
D1
|
D3
|
D4
|
DW |
BASE UNIT
CPU
2-8
C30
C30
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* - F **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- H **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- M **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- P/R **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below)
Base Unit
RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 1 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 3 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
RS485 with 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode ST + 10/100Base-TX Ethernet, RJ-45
No software options
Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
IEC 61850
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588
IEEE 1588 and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PID controller, and IEC 61850
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
PRP and Ethernet Global Data
PRP and IEC 61850
PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
PRP, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, PID controller, and IEC 61850
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
C30
- *
** - * * * - F ** - H
E0
| | |
|
E1
| | |
|
E3
| | |
|
E4
| | |
|
EW
| | |
|
F0
| | |
|
F1
| | |
|
F3
| | |
|
F4
| | |
|
FW
| | |
|
G0
| | |
|
G1
| | |
|
G3
| | |
|
G4
| | |
|
GW | | |
|
J0
| | |
|
J1
| | |
|
J3
| | |
|
J4
| | |
|
JW
| | |
|
K0
| | |
|
K1
| | |
|
K3
| | |
|
K4
| | |
|
KW
| | |
|
L0
| | |
|
L1
| | |
|
L3
| | |
|
L4
| | |
|
LW
| | |
|
MOUNT/COATING
V | |
|
B | |
|
FRONT PANEL + INTERFACE
F |
|
K |
|
M |
|
Q |
|
U |
|
L |
|
N |
|
T |
|
V |
|
W |
|
Y |
|
I |
|
J |
|
POWER SUPPLY
H
|
L
|
CONTACT
XX
4A
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
6W
6X
TRANSDUCER
5A
5C
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5D
(select a maximum of 3 per unit)
5E
5F
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
(select a maximum of 1 per unit)
For the last module, rear slot P is used for
digital and transducer input/output
modules; rear slot R is used for inter-relay
communications modules.
ORDER CODES
** - M **
- P/R
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
XX
4A
4A
4B
4B
4C
4C
4D
4D
4L
4L
67
67
6A
6A
6B
6B
6C
6C
6D
6D
6E
6E
6F
6F
6G
6G
6H
6H
6K
6K
6L
6L
6M
6M
6N
6N
6P
6P
6R
6R
6S
6S
6T
6T
6U
6U
6V
6V
6W
6W
6X
6X
5A
5A
5C
5C
5D
5D
5E
5E
5F
5F
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
6W
6X
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
2A
2B
2H
2I
2J
72
73
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below)
IEEE 1588 and PRP
IEEE 1588, PRP, and Ethernet Global Dada
IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, PID controller, and IEC 61850
PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl1, and Ethernet Global Data
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + PID controller + IEC 61850
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + PID controller + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + PID controller + IEC 61850
Vertical (3/4 rack)
Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh-environmental coating
English display
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Turkish display
Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with German display
Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
No Module
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a case)
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 Contact inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 contact inputs
30 Contact inputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
18 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
4 DCmA inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
8 RTD inputs
4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA inputs
8 DCmA inputs
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
G.703, 1 Channel
2
2-9
ORDER CODES
C30
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
- *
**
- * *
* - F **
- H **
- M **
- P/R **
7S
7T
7W
Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below)
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
2.3.2 Order codes with process bus modules
Table 2-5: C30 order codes for horizontal units with process bus
2
BASE UNIT
CPU
C30
C30
- *
|
T
U
**
|
|
|
- *
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
* - F **
|
|
|
|
|
|
V |
W |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
SOFTWARE OPTIONS
MOUNT/COATING
FRONT PANEL + INTERFACE
2-10
00
01
03
04
A0
A1
A3
A4
AW
B0
B1
B3
B4
BW
C0
C1
C3
C4
CW
D0
D1
D3
D4
DW
E0
E1
E3
E4
EW
F0
F1
F3
F4
FW
G0
G1
G3
G4
GW
J0
J1
J3
J4
JW
K0
K1
K3
K4
KW
L0
L1
L3
L4
LW
- H **
|
|
|
- M **
|
|
|
- P **
|
|
|
- U **
|
|
|
- W/X **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H | |
A | |
C |
D |
R |
P |
G |
S |
K |
M |
Q |
U |
L |
N |
T |
V |
W |
Y |
I |
J |
H |
O |
E |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Full Size Horizontal Mount
Base Unit
RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 1 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet,
multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 3 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
RS485 with 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode ST + 10/100Base-TX Ethernet, RJ45
No software options
Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
IEC 61850
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588
IEEE 1588 and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PID controller, and IEC 61850
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
PRP and Ethernet Global Data
PRP and IEC 61850
PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
PRP, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588 and PRP
IEEE 1588, PRP, and Ethernet Global Dada
IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, PID controller, and IEC 61850
PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl1, and Ethernet Global Data
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + PID controller + IEC 61850
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + PID controller + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + PID controller + IEC
61850
Horizontal (19” rack)
Horizontal (19” rack) with harsh-environmental coating
English display
French display
Russian display
English display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
French display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Russian display with 4 small and 12 large programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Turkish display
Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with German display
Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Polish display
Enhanced front panel with Polish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
7" Graphical front panel display in multiple languages with USB front port and
user-programmable pushbuttons (English, French, Chinese, Russian, Turkish,
German, Polish, Japanese)
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
C30 - * **
POWER SUPPLY
(redundant supply must
be same type as main supply)
- * *
PROCESS BUS
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
* - F **
H
|
H
|
L
|
L
|
XX
|
ORDER CODES
- H **
|
|
|
|
|
81
- M **
|
|
|
|
XX
|
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
(select a maximum of 1 per unit)
- P **
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
- U **
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
6W
6X
6W
6Y
- W/X **
|
RH
|
RL
|
|
XX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Full Size Horizontal Mount
125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
125 / 250 V AC/DC with redundant 125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) with redundant 24 to 48 V DC power supply
None
IEC 61850 Process Bus Module for HardFiber, 8 x
None
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a case)
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 Contact inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8
contact inputs
|
30 Contact inputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
|
18 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
2A C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
2B C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
2H IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
2I Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode,
Laser
2J Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode,
Laser
72 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
73 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channel
76 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
77 IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7A 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
7B 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
7C 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
7D 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
7F Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
7G Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
7H 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7I 1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
7J 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
7K 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
7M Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
7N Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
7Q Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
7R G.703, 1 Channel
7S G.703, 2 Channels
7T RS422, 1 Channel
7W RS422, 2 Channels
Table 2-6: C30 order codes for reduced-size vertical units with process bus
- * ** - *
| |
|
T |
|
U |
|
V |
|
W |
|
SOFTWARE OPTIONS
00
|
01
|
03
|
04
|
A0
|
A1
|
A3
|
A4
|
AW |
B0
|
B1
|
B3
|
B4
|
BW |
C0
|
C1
|
C3
|
C4
|
CW |
D0
|
D1
|
D3
|
D4
|
DW |
E0
|
E1
|
E3
|
E4
|
BASE UNIT
CPU
C30
C30
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* - F **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- H **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- M **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
- P/R **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below)
Base Unit
RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 1 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 3 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
RS485 with 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode ST + 10/100Base-TX Ethernet, RJ-45
No software options
Ethernet Global Data (EGD)
IEC 61850
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and Ethernet Global Data
CyberSentry Lvl 1 and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
CyberSentry Lvl 1, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588
IEEE 1588 and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588 and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PID controller, and IEC 61850
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
PRP and Ethernet Global Data
PRP and IEC 61850
PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
PRP, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588 and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, CyberSentry Lvl 1, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588 and PRP
IEEE 1588, PRP, and Ethernet Global Dada
IEEE 1588, PRP, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
2-11
2
ORDER CODES
C30
2
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
- *
** - * * * - F **
EW
| | |
|
F0
| | |
|
F1
| | |
|
F3
| | |
|
F4
| | |
|
FW
| | |
|
G0
| | |
|
G1
| | |
|
G3
| | |
|
G4
| | |
|
GW | | |
|
J0
| | |
|
J1
| | |
|
J3
| | |
|
J4
| | |
|
JW
| | |
|
K0
| | |
|
K1
| | |
|
K3
| | |
|
K4
| | |
|
KW
| | |
|
L0
| | |
|
L1
| | |
|
L3
| | |
|
L4
| | |
|
LW
| | |
|
MOUNT/COATING
V | |
|
B | |
|
FRONT PANEL + INTERFACE
F |
|
K |
|
M |
|
Q |
|
U |
|
L |
|
N |
|
T |
|
V |
|
W |
|
Y |
|
I |
|
J |
|
POWER SUPPLY
H
|
L
|
PROCESS BUS
XX
|
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
(select a maximum of 1 per unit)
For the last module, rear slot P is used for
digital and transducer input/output
modules; rear slot R is used for inter-relay
communications modules.
2-12
- H **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
81
- M **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
|
- P/R **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
6W
6X
2A
2B
2H
2I
2J
72
73
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note regarding P/R slot below)
IEEE 1588, PRP, PID controller, and IEC 61850
PRP and CyberSentry Lvl1
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl1, and Ethernet Global Data
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, and CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, Ethernet Global Data, and IEC 61850
IEEE 1588, PRP, CyberSentry Lvl 1, PID controller, and IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + PID controller + IEC 61850
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + IEC 61850
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + EGD + IEC 61850
IEEE1588 + PRP + IEC 60870-5-103 + PID controller + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + EGD + IEC 61850
IEC 60870-5-103 + IEEE1588 + PRP + CyberSentry Lvl 1 + PID controller + IEC 61850
Vertical (3/4 rack)
Vertical (3/4 rack) with harsh environmental coating
English display
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Turkish display
Enhanced front panel with Turkish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with German display
Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
125 / 250 V AC/DC power supply
24 to 48 V (DC only) power supply
None
IEC 61850 Process Bus Module for HardFiber, 8 x
None
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing (maximum of three modules within a case)
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 Contact inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 contact inputs
30 Contact inputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
18 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, MM, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
ORDER CODES
2.3.3 Replacement modules
Replacement modules can be ordered separately. When ordering a replacement CPU module or front panel, provide the
serial number of your existing unit.
Not all replacement modules apply to the C30 relay. The modules specified in the order codes for the C30 are available as
replacement modules for the C30.
The order codes shown here are subject to change without notice. See the web page for the product for the latest options.
2
Table 2-7: UR order codes for replacement modules, horizontal units
UR
POWER SUPPLY
|
redundant supply only available in horizontal |
units and must be same type as main supply
CPU
|
|
|
|
FRONT PANEL + INTERFACE
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONTACT INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CT/VT MODULES
|
(not available for the C30)
|
|
|
PROCESS BUS MODULES
|
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
|
|
|
|
|
- **
SH
SL
- *
A|
A|
T
U
V
W
3C
3D
3R
3A
3P
3G
3S
3B
3K
3M
3Q
3U
3L
3N
3T
3V
3I
3J
3H
3O
3Z
3X
3E
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
6W
6X
8L
8N
8M
8R
81
2A
2B
2H
2I
2J
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
125 / 300 V AC/DC
24 to 48 V (DC only)
RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 1 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 3 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
RS485 with 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode ST + 10/100Base-TX Ethernet, RJ-45
Horizontal front panel with keypad and English display
Horizontal front panel with keypad and French display
Horizontal front panel with keypad and Russian display
Horizontal front panel with keypad and Chinese display
Horizontal front panel with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and English display
Horizontal front panel with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and French display
Horizontal front panel with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Russian display
Horizontal front panel with keypad, user-programmable pushbuttons, and Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with German display
Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Polish display
Enhanced front panel with Polish display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Japanese display
Enhanced front panel with Japanese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
7" Graphical front panel display in multiple languages with USB front port and user-programmable pushbuttons
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 Contact inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 contact inputs
30 Contact inputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
18 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
IEC 61850 Process Bus Module for HardFiber, 8 x
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-13
ORDER CODES
2
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
UR
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- **
72
73
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
7K
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
- *
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
4 DCmA inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
8 RTD inputs
4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
4 DCmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs
8 DCmA inputs
Table 2-8: UR order codes for replacement modules, vertical units
POWER SUPPLY
CPU
FRONT PANEL + INTERFACE
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CT/VT MODULES
(not available for the C30)
PROCESS BUS
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
2-14
UR
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- **
SH
SL
T
U
V
W
3F
3D
3R
3A
3K
3M
3Q
3U
3L
3N
3T
3V
3I
3J
4A
4B
4C
4D
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
6V
6W
6X
8L
8N
8M
8R
81
2A
2B
2H
2I
2J
72
73
76
77
7A
7B
7C
7D
7F
7G
7H
7I
7J
- *
B|
B|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
125 / 300 V AC/DC
24 to 48 V (DC only)
RS485 with 3 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 1 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP RJ-45 + 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode, SFP with LC
RS485 with 3 100Base-TX Ethernet, SFP with RJ-45
RS485 with 2 100Base-FX Ethernet, multimode ST + 10/100Base-TX Ethernet, RJ-45
Vertical front panel with keypad and English display
Vertical front panel with keypad and French display
Vertical front panel with keypad and Russian display
Vertical front panel with keypad and Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display
Enhanced front panel with French display
Enhanced front panel with Russian display
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display
Enhanced front panel with English display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with French display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Russian display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with Chinese display and user-programmable pushbuttons
Enhanced front panel with German display
Enhanced front panel with German display and user-programmable pushbuttons
4 Solid-State (no monitoring) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (voltage with optional current) MOSFET outputs
4 Solid-State (current with optional voltage) MOSFET outputs
16 Contact inputs with Auto-Burnishing
14 Form-A (no monitoring) Latching outputs
8 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (voltage with optional current) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
8 Form-C outputs
16 Contact inputs
4 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
8 Fast Form-C outputs
4 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (voltage with optional current) outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-C and 4 Fast Form-C outputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (current with optional voltage) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (current with optional voltage) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 2 Form-C outputs, 8 contact inputs
2 Form-A (no monitoring) and 4 Form-C outputs, 4 contact inputs
4 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 8 contact inputs
6 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs, 4 contact inputs
2 Form-A outputs, 1 Form-C output, 2 Form-A (no monitoring) latching outputs, 8 contact inputs
30 Contact inputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
18 Form-A (no monitoring) outputs - pin terminals (max 4 modules)
Standard 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Standard 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT with enhanced diagnostics
Sensitive Ground 8CT with enhanced diagnostics
IEC 61850 Process Bus Module for HardFiber, 8 x
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 1 channel single-mode
C37.94SM, 1300 nm single-mode, ELED, 2 channel single-mode
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 128 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - IEEE C37.94, multimode, 64/128 kbps; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, Laser
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, 64 kbps, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
820 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 1 Channel
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode ELED
820 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multimode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
UR
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
- **
7K
7M
7N
7P
7Q
7R
7S
7T
7W
5A
5C
5D
5E
5F
SIGNAL PROCESSING
- *
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1300 nm, single-mode, Laser, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multimode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, Laser
Channel 1 - G.703; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode Laser
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
4 DCmA inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
8 RTD inputs
4 RTD inputs, 4 DCmA outputs (only one 5A or 5D module is allowed)
4 DCmA inputs, 4 RTD inputs
8 DCmA inputs
2
2.4 Signal processing
2.4.1 UR signal processing
The URs are microprocessor-based protective relays that are designed to measure power system conditions directly via
CT and VT inputs and via other sources of information, such as analog inputs, communications inputs, and contact inputs.
The following figure shows the overall signal processing in URs.
An analog low pass anti-aliasing filter with a 3 dB corner frequency is set at 2.4 kHz and is used for current and voltage
analog filtering as well as signal conditioning. The same filtering is applied for phase, ground currents, phase-to-phase
(when applicable), and auxiliary voltages. The 2.4 kHz cut-off frequency applies to both 50 and 60 Hz applications and fixed
in the hardware, and thus is not dependent on the system nominal frequency setting.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-15
SIGNAL PROCESSING
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Figure 2-3: UR signal processing
Analog-toDigital
Converter
Digital bandpass filter
Phasor
estimation
½ cycle
Fourier
A
U
From
CT/VT
2
1 cycle
Fourier
I
DSP module
T
Serial
ports
Commun
i-cation
protocols
IRIG-B
IEEE
1588
SNTP
Accurate
RealTime
clock
RMS
values
Synchrophasors
filtering
Tracking
frequency
selection,
estimation
HMI
Ethernet
ports
Frequency
D
Sampling
frequency
Fundament
al freq.
Phasors,
Seq. components
Analog Outputs
module
Events
Protection
algorithms
I>
Z<
U<
Time
stamping
Control
elements,
monitoring
elements,
FlexLogic,
Synchrophasors
calculations
Aggregation,
post-filtering
Optoisolated
G.703, RS-422,
C37.94, direct fiber
A
D
DCmA, RTD
Analog Inputs
module
Channel
monitorin
g CRC
check
Inter-relay
comms module
Ddebounce
filtering
Contact Inputs
module
CPU module
Comtrade, data
logger
Serial
Analog lowpass filter
DNP, Modbus,
IEC60870
PMU (IEEE C37.118,
IEC 61850-90-5)
IEC 61850 (GOOSE,
MMS Server)
Ethernet
Analog
Inputs
Inter-relay
comms module
Contact Outputs
module
859740A1.vsd
The UR samples its AC signals at 64 samples per cycle, that is, at 3840 Hz in 60 Hz systems, and 3200 Hz in 50 Hz systems.
The sampling rate is adjusted dynamically to the actual system frequency by an accurate and fast frequency tracking
system.
The analog/digital converter has the following ranges of AC signals:
Voltages:
r 2 ˜ 260 V
Eq. 2-1
r 2 ˜ 46rated A
Eq. 2-2
Currents:
Current harmonics are estimated based on raw samples with the use of the full-cycle Fourier filter. Harmonics 2nd through
25th are estimated.
2-16
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
True RMS value for the current is calculated on a per-phase basis. The true RMS can be used for demand recording or as an
input signal to Time Overcurrent function, if the latter is intended for thermal protection. The true RMS is calculated as per
the widely accepted definition:
t
I RMS t =
1
-T
2
³ i t dt
t–T
Eq. 2-3
RMS values include harmonics, inter-harmonics, DC components, and so on, along with fundamental frequency values.
The true RMS value reflects thermal effects of the current and is used for the thermal related monitoring and protection
functions.
Protection and control functions respond to phasors of the fundamental and/or harmonic frequency components
(magnitudes and angles), with an exception for some functions that have an option for RMS or fundamental
measurements, or some function responding to RMS only. This type of response is explained typically in each element's
section in this instruction manual.
Currents are pre-filtered using a Finite Impulse Response (FIR) digital filter. The filter is designed to reject DC components
and low-frequency distortions, without amplifying high-frequency noise. This filter is referred to as a modified MIMIC filter,
which provides excellent filtering and overall balance between speed and accuracy of filtering. The filter is cascaded with
the full-cycle Fourier filter for the current phasor estimation.
Voltages are pre-filtered using a patented FIR digital filter. The filter has been optimized to reject voltage-transformerspecific distortions, such as Capacitive Voltage Transformer (CVT) noise and high-frequency oscillatory components. The
filter is cascaded with the half-cycle Fourier filter for the voltage phasor estimation.
The URs measure power system frequency using the Clarke transformation by estimating the period of the waveform from
two consecutive zero-crossings in the same direction (negative-to-positive). Voltage or current samples are pre-filtered
using a Finite Impulse Response (FIR) digital filter to remove high frequency noise contained in the signal. The period is
used after several security conditions are met, such as true RMS signal must be above 6% nominal for a certain time. If
these security conditions are not met, the last valid measurement is used for a specific time after which the UR reverts to
nominal system frequency.
Synchrophasors are calculated using a patented convolution integral algorithm. This algorithm allows use of the same
time-stamped samples, which are used for protection and taken at the same sampling frequency. This allows URs to use
one sampling clock for both protection algorithms and synchrophasors.
Synchrophasors on firmware versions 7.23 and up have been tested and certified to meet IEEE C37.118-2011 and
C37.118.1a-2014 standards for both metering and protection classes with outputs available up to 60 synchrophasors per
second for the metering class and 120 synchrophasors per second for the protection class. Synchrophasors measurement
is also available via IEC 61850-90-5 protocol.
The contact inputs threshold is settable in the firmware with 17, 33, 84, and 166 V DC settings available. Inputs are scanned
every 0.5 ms and can be conditioned for the critical applications, using debounce time timer, settable from 0.0 to 16.0 ms.
Contact inputs with auto-burnishing are available as well, when external contacts are exposed to the contamination in a
harsh industrial environment.
All measured values are available in the UR metering section on the front panel and via communications protocols.
Measured analog values and binary signals can be captured in COMTRADE format with sampling rates from 8 to 64
samples per power cycle. Analog values can be captured with the Data Logger, allowing much slower rates extended over
a long period of time.
Other advanced UR order code options are available to support IEC 61850 (including fast GOOSE, ICD/CID/IID files, and so
on), IEEE 1588 (IEEE C37.238 power profile) based time synchronization, CyberSentry (advanced cyber security), the Parallel
Redundancy Protocol (PRP), IEC 60870-5-103, and so on.
2.5 Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-17
2
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.5.1 Protection elements
2
The operating times include the activation time of a trip rated form-A output contact unless otherwise indicated. FlexLogic
operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. Take this into account when using FlexLogic to interconnect with other
protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic equations, or interfacing with other intelligent electronic
devices (IEDs) or power system devices via communications or different output contacts. If not specified, the operate times
given here are for a 60 Hz system at nominal system frequency. Operate times for a 50 Hz system are 1.2 times longer.
Timer Accuracy is specified as a percentage of the total operating time that is the sum of the Operate Time and settable
Pickup Delay.
TRIP BUS (TRIP WITHOUT FLEXLOGIC)
Number of elements:
Number of inputs:
Operate time:
Timer accuracy:
6
16
<2 ms at 60 Hz
±3% or 10 ms, whichever is greater
2.5.2 User-programmable elements
FLEXLOGIC
Programming language:
Lines of code:
Internal variables:
Supported operations:
Inputs:
Number of timers:
Pickup delay:
Dropout delay:
Timer accuracy:
Reverse Polish Notation with graphical visualization (keypad programmable)
1024
64
NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2 to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs), NAND (2 to 16 inputs),
latch (reset-dominant), edge detectors, timers
any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
64
0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
±0.1% of operate time or ±1/8 cycle, whichever is greater
FLEXCURVES™
Number:
Reset points:
Operate points:
Time delay:
4 (A through D)
40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
80 (1 through 20 of pickup)
0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
FLEX STATES
Number:
Programmability:
up to 256 logical variables grouped under 16 Modbus addresses
any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
FLEXELEMENTS™
Number of elements:
Operating signal:
Operating signal mode:
Operating mode:
Comparator direction:
Pickup level:
Hysteresis:
Delta dt:
Pickup and dropout delay:
16
any analog actual value, or two values in differential mode
signed or absolute value
level, delta
over, under
–90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
20 ms to 60 days
0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Type:
Number:
Output:
2-18
set-dominant or reset-dominant
16 (individually programmed)
stored in non-volatile memory
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Execution sequence:
SPECIFICATIONS
as input prior to protection, control, and FlexLogic
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs (Enhanced and basic front panels)
Number:
Programmability:
Reset mode:
48 plus trip and alarm
from any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
self-reset or latched
LED TEST
Initiation:
Number of tests:
Duration of full test:
Test sequence 1:
Test sequence 2:
Test sequence 3:
from any contact input or user-programmable condition
3, interruptible at any time
approximately 3 minutes
all LEDs on
all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s
all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s
2
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS (Enhanced and basic front panels)
Number of displays:
Lines of display:
Parameters:
Invoking and scrolling:
16
2  20 alphanumeric characters
up to 5, any Modbus register addresses
keypad, or any user-programmable condition, including pushbuttons
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS (Enhanced and basic front panels)
Number of pushbuttons:
Operation:
7
drive FlexLogic operands
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
Number of pushbuttons:
Mode:
Display message:
Drop-out timer:
Autoreset timer:
Hold timer:
12 on basic front panel
16 on enhanced horizontal front panel
6 on enhanced vertical front panel
48 on graphical front panel (8 physical pushbuttons, 40 graphical interface pushbuttons)
self-reset, latched
2 lines of 20 characters each
0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05
0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
SELECTOR SWITCH
Number of elements:
Upper position limit:
Selecting mode:
Time-out timer:
Control inputs:
Power-up mode:
2
1 to 7 in steps of 1
time-out or acknowledge
3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
step-up and 3-bit
restore from non-volatile memory or synchronize to a 3-bit control input or synch/restore mode
8-BIT SWITCH
Number of elements:
Input signals:
Control signal:
Response time:
6
two 8-bit integers via FlexLogic operands
any FlexLogic operand
< 8 ms at 60 Hz, < 10 ms at 50 Hz
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
Number of elements:
Operating signal:
Pickup delay:
Dropout delay:
Timing accuracy:
96
any FlexLogic operand
0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
±3% or ±4 ms, whichever is greater
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-19
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.5.3 Monitoring
OSCILLOGRAPHY
2
Number of records:
Sampling rate:
Triggers:
Trigger position:
Recorded data:
Data storage:
Format:
3 to 64, configurable
8, 16, 32, or 64 samples per power cycle, configurable
any FlexLogic operand, configurable
0 to 100%, configurable
raw AC input channels
up to 64 configured digital channels, representing any FlexLogic operand
up to 16 configured analog channels, representing any measured analog value
in non-volatile memory
COMTRADE IEEE C37.111 (1999 or 2013)
EVENT RECORDER
Capacity:
Time-tag:
Triggers:
Data storage:
1024 events
to 1 microsecond
any FlexLogic operand, configurable
in non-volatile memory
DATA LOGGER
Number of channels:
Parameters:
Sampling rate:
Trigger:
Mode:
Storage capacity:
1 to 16
any available analog actual value
15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1
any FlexLogic operand
continuous or triggered
(NN is dependent on memory)
1-second rate:
01 channel for NN days
16 channels for NN days

60-minute rate:
01 channel for NN days
16 channels for NN days
2.5.4 Inputs
FREQUENCY
Nominal frequency setting:
25 to 60 Hz
Sampling frequency:
64 samples per power cycle
Tracking frequency range with DSP:
20 to 70 Hz
with Process Bus Module 81, 85, 86, 87: 20 to 65 Hz
CONTACT INPUTS
Dry contacts:
Wet contacts:
Selectable thresholds:
Tolerance:
Contacts per common return:
Recognition time:
Debounce time:
Continuous current draw:
1000  maximum
300 V DC maximum
17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
±10%
4
< 1 ms
0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
4 mA (when energized)
CONTACT INPUTS WITH AUTO-BURNISHING
Dry contacts:
Wet contacts:
Selectable thresholds:
2-20
1000  maximum
300 V DC maximum
17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Tolerance:
Contacts per common return:
Recognition time:
Debounce time:
Continuous current draw:
Auto-burnish impulse current:
Duration of auto-burnish impulse:
SPECIFICATIONS
±10%
2
< 1 ms
0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
4 mA (when energized)
50 to 70 mA
25 to 50 ms
2
DCMA INPUTS
Current input (mA DC):
Input impedance:
Conversion range:
Accuracy:
Type:
RTD INPUTS
Types (3-wire):
Sensing current:
Range:
Accuracy:
Isolation:
0 to –1, 0 to +1, –1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10, 0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable)
379  ±10%
–1 to + 20 mA DC
±0.2% of full scale
Passive
100  Platinum, 100 and 120  Nickel, 10  Copper
5 mA
–50 to +250°C
±2°C
36 V pk-pk
IRIG-B INPUT
IRIG formats accepted:
IRIG control bits:
Amplitude modulation:
DC shift:
Operating range:
TTL logic low:
TTL logic high:
Input impedance:
Isolation:
B000…B007, B120…B127
IEEE Std C37.118.1-2011
1 to 10 V pk-pk
0 to 10 V DC
0.0 to 0.8 V DC
2.0 to 5.0 V DC
50 k
2 kV
DIRECT INPUTS
Input points:
Remote devices:
Default states on loss of comms.:
Ring configuration:
Data rate:
CRC:
CRC alarm:
Responding to:
Monitoring message count:
Alarm threshold:
Unreturned message alarm:
Responding to:
Monitoring message count:
Alarm threshold:
64
16
On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Yes, No
64 or 128 kbps
32-bit
Rate of messages failing the CRC
10 to 10000 in steps of 1
1 to 1000 in steps of 1
Rate of unreturned messages in the ring configuration
10 to 10000 in steps of 1
1 to 1000 in steps of 1
TELEPROTECTION
Input points:
Remote devices:
Default states on loss of comms.:
Ring configuration:
Data rate:
CRC:
16
3
On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
No
64 or 128 kbps
32-bit
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-21
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.5.5 Power supply
LOW RANGE
2
Nominal DC voltage:
Minimum DC voltage:
Maximum DC voltage:
Voltage loss hold-up:
NOTE: Low range is DC only.
24 to 48 V
20 V
75 V for SL power supply module
200 ms duration at maximum load
HIGH RANGE
Nominal DC voltage:
Minimum DC voltage:
Maximum DC voltage:
Nominal AC voltage:
Minimum AC voltage:
Maximum AC voltage:
Voltage loss hold-up:
ALL RANGES
Volt withstand:
Power consumption:
125 to 250 V
88 V
300 V
100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz
88 V at 25 to 100 Hz
265 V at 25 to 100 Hz
200 ms duration at maximum load
2  Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms
typical = 15 to 20 W/VA
maximum = 45 W/VA
contact factory for exact order code consumption
INTERNAL FUSE
Ratings:
Low range power supply:
High range power supply:
Interrupting capacity:
AC:
DC:
8 A / 250 V
4 A / 250 V
100 000 A RMS symmetrical
10 000 A
2.5.6 Outputs
FORM-A RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s:
Carry continuous:
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):
Voltage
Current
24 V
1A
48 V
0.5 A
125 V
0.3 A
250 V
0.2 A
Operate time:
Contact material:
30 A as per ANSI C37.90
6A
< 4 ms
silver alloy
LATCHING RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s:
Carry continuous:
2-22
30 A as per ANSI C37.90
6 A as per IEEE C37.90
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Break (DC resistive as per IEC 61810-1):
Voltage
Current
24 V
6A
48 V
1.6 A
125 V
0.4 A
250 V
0.2 A
Operate time:
Contact material:
Control:
Control mode:
2
< 4 ms
silver alloy
separate operate and reset inputs
operate-dominant or reset-dominant
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR
Applicable voltage:
Trickle current:
approx. 15 to 250 V DC
approx. 1 to 2.5 mA
FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR
Threshold current:
approx. 80 to 100 mA
FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s:
Carry continuous:
Break (DC inductive, L/R = 40 ms):
Voltage
Current
24 V
1A
48 V
0.5 A
125 V
0.3 A
250 V
0.2 A
Operate time:
Contact material:
30 A as per ANSI C37.90
8A
< 8 ms
silver alloy
FAST FORM-C RELAY
Make and carry:
Minimum load impedance:
0.1 A max. (resistive load)
Input voltage Impedance
2 W Resistor
1 W Resistor
250 V DC
20 K
50 K
120 V DC
5 K
2 K
48 V DC
2 K
2 K
24 V DC
2 K
2 K
Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a
required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.
Operate time:
Internal Limiting Resistor:
< 0.6 ms
100  2 W
SOLID-STATE OUTPUT RELAY
Operate and release time:
<100 µs
Maximum voltage:
265 V DC
Maximum leakage current in off state
(excluding voltage monitor circuit current): 100 µA
Maximum continuous current:
5 A at 45°C; 4 A at 65°C
Make and carry:
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-23
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
for 0.2 s:
for 0.03 s:
Breaking capacity:
30 A as per ANSI C37.90
300 A
Specification
UL 508
Utility application
Industrial application
(autoreclose scheme)
Operations per
interval
5000 operations,
1 second on,
9 seconds off
5 operations,
0.2 seconds on,
0.2 seconds off,
within 1 minute
10000 operations,
0.2 seconds on,
30 seconds off
10 A at L/R = 40 ms
10 A at L/R = 40 ms
2
1000 operations,
0.5 seconds on,
0.5 seconds off
Break capability
(0 to 250 V DC)
3.2 A at L/R = 10 ms
1.6 A at L/R = 20 ms
0.8 A
L/R = 40 ms
CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT (For dry contact input)
Capacity:
Isolation:
100 mA DC at 48 V DC
±300 Vpk
DIRECT OUTPUTS
Output points:
64
DCMA OUTPUTS
Range:
Max. load resistance:
–1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA
12 k for –1 to 1 mA range
12 k for 0 to 1 mA range
600  for 4 to 20 mA range
Accuracy:
±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 1 mA range
±0.5% of full-scale for –1 to 1 mA range
±0.75% of full-scale for 0 to 20 mA range
99% Settling time to a step change:
100 ms
Isolation:
1.5 kV
Driving signal:
any FlexAnalog quantity
Upper and lower limit for the driving signal: –90 to 90 pu in steps of 0.001
2.5.7 Communication protocols
IEC 61850
IEC 61850:
Supports IEC 61850 Editions 1.0 and 2.0. See the UR Family Communications Guide and its conformance statements.
RS232 (Enhanced and basic front panels)
Front port:
19.2 kbps, Modbus RTU
USB (Graphical front panel)
Front port:
USB 2.0 type B
RS485
1 rear port:
Typical distance:
Isolation:
2-24
up to 115 kbps, Modbus RTU, DNP 3, IEC 60870-5-103
1200 m
2 kV, isolated together at 36 Vpk
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
FIBER ETHERNET PORT
Operates with 50/125 μm and 62.5/125 μm multimode fiber
Parameter
Fiber type
100 Mb multimode
Wavelength
1310 nm
Connector
LC
Transmit power
–20 dBm
Receiver sensitivity
–30 dBm
Power budget
10 dB
Maximum input power
–14 dBm
Typical distance
2 km
Full duplex
yes
Redundancy
yes
2
ETHERNET (10/100 MB TWISTED PAIR)
Modes:
Connector:
10 Mb, 10/100 Mb (auto-detect)
RJ45
SIMPLE NETWORK TIME PROTOCOL (SNTP)
Clock synchronization error:
<10 ms (typical)
PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (PTP)
PTP IEEE Std 1588-2008 (version 2)
Power Profile (PP) per IEEE Standard PC37.238-2017
Clock:
Slave-only ordinary clock when using station bus Ethernet interface
Boundary clock when using process bus Ethernet interface
Peer delay measurement mechanism
PARALLEL REDUNDANCY PROTOCOL (PRP)
(IEC 62439-3 CLAUSE 4, 2012)
Ethernet ports used:
Networks supported:
2 and 3
10/100 Mb Ethernet
OTHER
TFTP, SFTP, HTTP, IEC 60870-5-104, Ethernet Global Data (EGD), IEEE C37.118
2.5.8 Inter-relay communications
SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS
Interface type
Typical distance
RS422
1200 m
G.703
100 m
RS422 distance is based on transmitter power and does not take into consideration the clock source provided by
the user.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-25
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
LINK POWER BUDGET AND MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER
The following specifications apply to filter interface modules manufactured from January 2012.
Emitter, fiber type
Cable type
Transmit power Received
sensitivity
Power budget Maximum
optical input
power
820 nm, Multimode
62.5/125 μm
-16 dBm
16 dBm
50/125 μm
2
1300 nm, Multimode 62.5/125 μm
-32 dBm
-20 dBm
-16 dBm
-8 dBm
12 dBm
-32 dBm
16 dBm
-8 dBm
50/125 μm
-20 dBm
12 dBm
1300 nm, Single
mode
9/125 μm
-15 dBm
-32 dBm
17 dBm
-8 dBm
1300 nm Laser,
Single mode
9/125 μm
0 dBm
-34 dBm
34 dBm
-8 dBm
1550 nm Laser,
Single mode
9/125 μm
5 dBm
-34 dBm
39 dBm
-10 dBm
The following specifications apply to filter interface modules implemented before January 2012.
Emitter, fiber type
Transmit
power
Received
sensitivity
Power budget Maximum optical
input power
820 nm LED, Multimode
–20 dBm
–30 dBm
10 dB
–7.6 dBm
1300 nm LED, Multimode
–21 dBm
–30 dBm
9 dB
–11 dBm
1300 nm ELED, Single mode
–23 dBm
–32 dBm
9 dB
–14 dBm
1300 nm Laser, Single mode
–1 dBm
–30 dBm
29 dB
–14 dBm
1550 nm Laser, Single mode
+5 dBm
–30 dBm
35 dB
–14 dBm
The power budgets are calculated from the manufacturer’s worst-case transmitter power and worst case receiver
sensitivity.
The power budgets for the 1300 nm ELED are calculated from the manufacturer's transmitter power and receiver
sensitivity at ambient temperature. At extreme temperatures these values deviate based on component tolerance.
On average, the output power decreases as the temperature is increased by a factor of 1 dB / 5 °C.
TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE
Emitter, fiber type
Cable type
Connector
type
Typical distance
Before
January
2012
From
January
2012
820 nm LED,
multimode
62.5/125 μm
ST
1.65 km
2 km
50/125 μm
ST
1.65 km
2 km
1300 nm LED,
multimode
62.5/125 μm
ST
4 km
5 km
50/125 μm
ST
4 km
5 km
1300 nm ELED,
single mode
9/125 μm
ST
11.4 km
20 km
1300 nm Laser,
single mode
9/125 μm
ST
64 km
65 km
1550 nm Laser,
single mode
9/125 μm
ST
105 km
125 km
Typical distances listed are based on the following assumptions for system loss. As actual losses vary from one
installation to another, the distance covered by your system can vary.
2-26
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
CONNECTOR LOSSES (Total of both ends)
ST connector:
0.7 dB (each)
FIBER LOSSES
820 nm multimode:
1300 nm multimode:
1300 nm single mode:
1550 nm single mode:
Splice losses:
3 dB/km
1 dB/km
0.35 dB/km
0.25 dB/km
one splice every 2 km at 0.05 dB loss per splice
2
SYSTEM MARGIN
3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for all other losses.
Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms
2.5.9 CyberSentry security
OPTIONS
Software options:
Level 1
2.5.10 Graphical front panel
DISPLAY
Type:
Size:
Resolution:
Pages:
color graphical back-lit LCD display
7 inches (17.8 cm)
800 by 480 pixels
5 single-line diagram pages with controls, status, and metering values
up to 8 annunciator pages with total of 96 annunciator windows
1 phasor metering page for each AC Source
5 tabular metering pages with dynamic metering and status
event records page with dynamic update
product information page
settings, actual values, error messages (targets)
LED INDICATORS
Functions:
5 device status indicators
9 event cause indicators
8 user-programmable pushbutton indicators
PUSHBUTTONS
Type:
Functions:
membrane
5 bottom Tab pushbuttons and 1 Home pushbutton for page recall
4 directional, 1 ENTER, and 1 ESCAPE pushbutton element selection
10 side pushbuttons for power system element control
RESET pushbutton
INGRESS PROTECTION
IP code:
IP40 front (IP54 front with IP54 mounting collar accessory)
IP10 back (IP20 back with IP20 cover accessory)
2.5.11 Environmental
AMBIENT TEMPERATURES
Maximum operating range:
–40 to 85°C
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-27
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
Continuous operating range:
–40 to 60°C1
1 Based on IEC 60068-2-1 and IEC 60068-2-2, Variant Bd and Ad for 16 hrs. The UR can operate up to a surrounding ambient of 85°C,
however operating outside the recommended continuous temperature range for extended periods can result in MTBF degradation and
decrease the response time of the LCD.
HUMIDITY
Humidity:
2
operating up to 95% (non-condensing) at 55°C (as per IEC 60068-2-30 variant 1, 6 days)
OTHER
Altitude:
Pollution degree:
Overvoltage category:
Ingress protection:
2000 m (maximum)
II
II
IP20 front, IP10 back (basic front panel and Rev. 1 enhanced front panel)
IP40 front, IP10 back (Rev. 2 enhanced front panel)
IP54 front with IP54 mounting collar accessory (Rev. 2 enhanced front panel)
Ingress protection with IP20 cover accessory:
IP20 back
Noise:
0 dB
2-28
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
2.5.12 Type tests
C30 TYPE TESTS
Test
Reference standard
1
Test level
Dielectric voltage withstand
EN 60255-5
Impulse voltage withstand
EN 60255-51
5 kV
Damped oscillatory
IEC 61000-4-18 / IEC 60255-22-1
2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2 / IEC 60255-22-2
Level 3
RF immunity
EN 61000-4-3 / IEC 60255-22-3
Level 3
2.2 kV
Fast transient disturbance
EN 61000-4-4 / IEC 60255-22-4
Class A and B
Surge immunity
EN 61000-4-5 / IEC 60255-22-5
Level 3 and 4
Conducted RF immunity
EN 61000-4-6 / IEC 60255-22-6
Level 3
1
Power frequency immunity
EN 61000-4-7 / IEC 60255-22-7
Voltage interruption and ripple DC
IEC 60255-11
12% ripple, 200 ms interrupts
Radiated and conducted emissions
CISPR11 / CISPR22 / IEC 60255-25
Class A
Sinusoidal vibration
IEC 60255-21-1
Class 1
Shock and bump
IEC 60255-21-2
Class 1
Seismic
IEC 60255-21-3
Class 1
Power magnetic immunity
IEC 61000-4-8
Level 5
Pulse magnetic immunity
IEC 61000-4-9
Level 4
Damped magnetic immunity
IEC 61000-4-10
Level 4
Voltage dip and interruption
IEC 61000-4-11
0, 40, 70, 80% dips; 250 / 300 cycle interrupts
Damped oscillatory
IEC 61000-4-121
2.5 kV CM, 1 kV DM
Conducted RF immunity, 0 to 150 kHz
IEC 61000-4-16
Level 4
Voltage ripple
IEC 61000-4-17
15% ripple
1
2
Class A and B
Ingress protection
IEC 60529
Cold
IEC 60068-2-1
–40°C for 16 hours
Hot
IEC 60068-2-2
85°C for 16 hours
IP20 front, IP10 back
Humidity
IEC 60068-2-30
6 days, variant 1
Damped oscillatory
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1
2.5 kV, 1 MHz
RF immunity
IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
20 V/m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz
Safety
UL 508
e83849 NKCR
Section 43 - Temperature test
Energization of Contact Inputs and/or Contact
Outputs for continuous duty is not to exceed a
total of 31 W of power
Safety
UL C22.2-14
e83849 NKCR7
Safety
UL 1053
e83849 NKCR
Safety
IEC 60255-27
Insulation: class 1, Pollution degree: 2, Over
voltage cat II
1 Not tested by third party.
2.5.13 Production tests
THERMAL
Products go through an environmental test based upon an Accepted Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2-29
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 2: PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.5.14 Approvals
APPROVALS
Compliance
Applicable council directive
According to
CE
Low voltage directive
EN 60255-5
EMC directive
2
EN 60255-26 / EN 50263
EN 61000-6-5
C-UL-US
---
UL 508
UL 1053
C22.2 No. 14
2.5.15 Maintenance
MOUNTING
Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (±2 inch-pounds) of torque.
CLEANING
Normally, cleaning is not required. When dust has accumulated on the front panel display, wipe with a dry cloth.
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a de-energized
state once per year, for one hour continuously.
2-30
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C30 Controller System
Chapter 3: Installation
Installation
This chapter outlines installation of hardware and software. You unpack, mount, wire the unit, turn on power, then install
the software and configure settings.
3.1 Unpack and inspect
1.
Open the relay package and check that the following items have been delivered:
–
C30
–
Mounting screws
–
GE EnerVista™ DVD (software and documentation)
–
C30 Instruction Manual (soft copy on DVD; printed copy if ordered)
–
UR Family Communications Guide (soft copy on DVD; printed copy if Instruction Manual ordered)
–
Certificate of Calibration
–
Test Report
–
EC Declaration of Conformity
–
Front panel label package
2.
Inspect the unit for physical damage.
3.
View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been delivered. The model number is at the top right.
C30
RATINGS:
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA
Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA
Contact Outputs: Refer to Instruction Manual
Controller
E83849
GE Multilin
-
M
A
A
B
9
®
®
7
0
0
0
0
9
9
-
LISTED
IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL
Model:
C30D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A
Mods:
000
Wiring Diagram: See manual
1609-0088
Inst. Manual:
Serial Number: MAZB98000029
D
Firmware:
NOV 26, 2012
Mfg. Date:
60001234.56
PO Num:
Item Num:
-
M
A
A
B
9
7
0
0
0
0
9
9
-
834724A3.CDR
4.
Any protective plastic film on the front panel is normally peeled off, but also can be left on.
5.
For any issues, contact GE as outlined in the For Further Assistance section in chapter 1.
6.
Check that you have the latest copy of the C30 Instruction Manual and the UR Family Communications Guide, for the
applicable firmware version, at http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/manuals/index.htm
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-1
PANEL CUTOUTS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
The Instruction Manual outlines how to install, configure, and use the unit. The Communications Guide is for advanced use
with communication protocols. The warranty is included at the end of this instruction manual and on the GE Grid Solutions
website.
3.2 Panel cutouts
This section does not apply to the HardFiber Brick; see its instruction manual.
Install the relay in an indoor environment within the environmental specifications. The relay complies with Pollution
Category II, which means installation in an office, laboratory, or testing environment.
3
3.2.1 Horizontal units
The C30 is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit with a removable front panel. The front panel is specified as
enhanced, basic, or graphical at the time of ordering. The enhanced and graphical front panels have additional userprogrammable pushbuttons and LED indicators, while the basic front panel has additional user-programmable
pushbuttons.
The modular design allows the relay to be upgraded and repaired by qualified service personnel. The front panel is hinged
to allow access to the modules. The front panel is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth and
for upgrading.
In November 2017, GE began transitioning to a new enhanced horizontal front panel, referred to as the IP54 Front Panel or
Enhanced Front Panel Rev. 2. This panel can be identified by the use of a screw instead of a knob to close the panel. It can
conform to an IP54 rating with the IP54 mounting collar purchased separately. The IP54 mounting collar can be used in
panel-mount installations, not 19-inch rack-mount installations. The IP54 mounting collar cannot be used with Rev. 1
enhanced front panels.
The case dimensions are shown in the following figures, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When
planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the front panel to swing open without
interference to or from adjacent equipment.
Mount the relay such that the front panel sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator access to
the keypad and the front communications port.
3-2
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
PANEL CUTOUTS
Figure 3-1: Horizontal dimensions (Rev. 1 enhanced front panel)
11.016”
[279,81 mm]
9.687”
[246,05 mm]
3
17.56”
[446,02 mm]
7.460”
[189,48 mm]
6.995”
[177,67 mm]
6.960”
[176,78 mm]
19.040”
[483,62 mm]
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
842807A1.CDR
3-3
PANEL CUTOUTS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-2: Horizontal dimensions (Rev. 2 enhanced front panel)
9.687”
[24.605 cm]
10.97”
[27.86 cm]
3
17.59” [44.68 cm]
6.995”
[17.767 cm]
6.96”
[17.68 cm]
18.974” [48.194 cm]
842496A1.cdr
Figure 3-3: Horizontal mounting (enhanced and graphical front panels)
18.370”
[466,60 mm]
0.280”
[7,11 mm]
Typ. x 4
CUT-OUT
4.000”
[101,60 mm]
7.13”
[181.1 mm]
17.750”
[450,85 mm]
3-4
842808A2.CDR
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
PANEL CUTOUTS
Figure 3-4: Horizontal dimensions and mounting (basic front panel)
REMOTE MOUNTING
VIEW FROM REAR OF PANEL
BEZEL OUTLINE
0.375”
(9.5 mm)
8x0.156”
(3.962 mm)
10.90”
8.97”
(227.8 mm) (276.8 mm)
0.375”
(9.5 mm)
4.785”
(121.5 mm)
9.80”
(248.9 mm)
Brackets repositioned
for switchgear mounting
17.52”
(445.0 mm)
9.520”
HORIZONTAL PANEL MOUNTING
4x0.28”
(7.1 mm
diameter)
18.37”
(466.6 mm)
1.875”
(47.6 mm)
HORIZONTAL TOP VIEW (19” 4RU)
0.375”
(9.5 mm)
5.000”
(127.0 mm)
6.960”
(176.8 mm)
0.375”
(9.5 mm)
14.520” (241.8 mm)
(368.8 mm)
17.720”
(450.1 mm)
3
HORIZONTAL FRONT VIEW
CUTOUT
7.13”
(181.1 mm)
4.00”
(101.6 mm)
7.00”
(177.8 mm)
19.00”
(482.6 mm)
17.75”
(450.8 mm)
827704B5.cdr
Figure 3-5: Horizontal dimensions (graphical front panel)
µ
>PP@
´
>PP@
µ
>PP@
µ
>PP@
µ
>PP@
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
$FGU
3-5
PANEL CUTOUTS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-6: Horizontal dimensions (IP54 mounting collar)
MOUNTING PANEL
1.3” [3.3 cm]
3
16.00” [40.64 cm]
Ø 0.200
6 PLACES
8.34”
[21.18 cm]
7.65”
[19.43 cm]
20.19” [51.28 cm]
IP54 COLLAR
NOTES
1. INSPECT THE COLLAR BEFORE INSTALLATION, VERIFY GASKET IS ADHERED TO THE METAL ON ALL SIDES
2. MAKE SURE THE RELAY IS POSITIONED CENTER TO THE CUT OUT
3. INSTALL IP-54 COLLAR, CONFIRM THE GASKET PROPERLY MATES WITH THE PANEL ON ALL SIDES
SECURE USING #8-32 HEX NUT AT 6 PLACES.
842497A1.cdr
3.2.2 Vertical units
The C30 is available as a reduced size (¾) vertical mount unit, with a removable front panel. The front panel is specified as
enhanced or basic at the time of ordering. The enhanced front panel contains additional user-programmable pushbuttons
and LED indicators, while the basic front panel has additional user-programmable pushbuttons.
The modular design allows the relay to be upgraded and repaired by qualified service personnel. The front panel is hinged
to allow easy access to the modules. The front panel is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth
and for upgrading.
The case dimensions are shown in the following figures, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When
planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the front panel to swing open without
interference to or from adjacent equipment.
Mount the relay such that the front panel sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator access to
the keypad and the RS232 communications port.
3-6
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
PANEL CUTOUTS
Figure 3-7: Vertical dimensions and mounting (enhanced front panel)
0RXQWLQJ%UDFNHW
)URQWRI3DQHO
µ
PP
)URQW
%H]HO
µ
PP
µ
PP
3
9HUWLFDO(QKDQFHG6LGH9LHZ
)URQWRI3DQHO
µ
PP
9HUWLFDO(QKDQFHG)URQW9LHZ
µ
PP
µ
PP
µ
PP
µ
PP
7HUPLQDO%ORFNV
µ
PP
µ
PP
)URQWRI3DQHO
5HIHUHQFHRQO\
&87287
µ
PP
µ
PP
0RXQWLQJ%UDFNHW
9HUWLFDO(QKDQFHG7RS9LHZ
µ PP
3ODFHV
9HUWLFDO(QKDQFHG0RXQWLQJ3DQHO
$FGU
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-7
PANEL CUTOUTS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-8: Vertical dimensions and mounting (basic front panel)
PP
)URQWRI
SDQHO
3DQHO
0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW
)URQW
EH]HO
PP
PP
3
9HUWLFDOVLGHYLHZ
9HUWLFDOIURQWYLHZ
µ
PP
PP
µ
PP
µ
PP
3DQHOVKRZQIRU
UHIHUHQFHRQO\
PP
µ
PP
µ
PP
0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW
7HUPLQDOEORFNV
PP
9HUWLFDOERWWRPYLHZ
PP SODFHV
9HUWLFDOSDQHOPRXQWLQJ
$&'5
For side-mounting C30 devices with the enhanced front panel, see the following documents available on the UR DVD and
the GE Grid Solutions website:
•
GEK-113180 — UR-Series UR-V Side-Mounting Front Panel Assembly Instructions
•
GEK-113181 — Connecting a Remote UR-V Enhanced Front Panel to a Vertical UR Device Instruction Sheet
•
GEK-113182 — Connecting a Remote UR-V Enhanced Front Panel to a Vertically-Mounted Horizontal UR Device
Instruction Sheet
3-8
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
STEP 2
MOUNT BRACKETS TO
PANEL
#10-3/8" PAN PHILIPS HEAD
ZINC
P/N: 1410-0006
4 PLACES TO MOUNT THE
BRACKETS
PANEL
#10-32 NYLOCK
NUT
P/N: 1422-1032
4 PLACES
UR 19"
MOUNTING
BRACKET
STEP 1 - CREATE THE HOLES AND CUT-OUT INTO THE PANEL
AS PER DRAWING 843753.
STEP 3
MOUNT FRONT BEZEL TO
PANEL
UR-V FRONT BEZEL
ASSEMBLY
SIDE MOUNT COVER
P/N: 1004-0018
GROUND CABLE
ATTACH CABLE TO
FRONT BEZEL
BEFORE MOUNTING
FRONT BEZEL ON
THE
PANEL
DISPLAY CABLE
#6x1/2" PAN PHILIPS
HEAD
BLACK OXIDE
PLASTITE SCREW
STEP 4
ASSEMBLE UR-V UNIT
TO MOUNTING BRACKETS
UR-V UNIT
PLUG THE DISPLAY CABLE INTO
THE FRONT BEZEL
BEFORE MOUNTING THE
UNIT ON THE PANEL
#8-3/8"
PAN PHILIPS HEAD
BLACK OXIDE
SCREW
843757A2.cdr
#8 LOCKWASHER
EXTERNAL TOOTH
P/N: 1435-0002
8 PLACES TO MOUNT
#8-3/8" PAN PHILIPS HEAD
BLACK OXIDE SCREW
P/N: 1408-0306
8 PLACES TO MOUNT THE UNIT
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
PANEL CUTOUTS
For side-mounting C30 devices with the basic front panel, use the following figures.
Figure 3-9: Vertical side-mounting installation (basic front panel)
3
3-9
PANEL CUTOUTS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-10: Vertical side-mounting rear dimensions (basic front panel)
6.66"
(169.2)
5.33"
(135.4)
INCHES
(MILLIMETERS)
0.68"
(17.3)
2.83"
(71.9)
PANEL SHOWN FOR
REFERENCE ONLY
(VIEWED FROM FRONT)
1.33"
(33.9)
0.04"
(1.0)
3
1.00"
(25.4)
'X'
1.00"
(25.4)
CU
TO
UT
'X'
5.27"
(133.8)
10.05"
(255.3)
0.159" DIA. (6 PLACES)
(4.0)
12.20"
(309.9)
'X'
'X'
0.213" DIA. (5.4)
(4 PLACES)
SEE HOLES MARKED 'X'
843753A3.cdr
3.2.3 Rear terminal layout
The rear terminals depend on order code. An example is shown.
3-10
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
PANEL CUTOUTS
Ground
C30
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA
Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA
Contact Outputs: Refer to Instruction Manual
Controller
E83849
GE Multilin
-
M
A
A
B
9
7
0
0
0
0
9
9
-
LISTED
IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL
®
®
X
W
V
U
T
Model:
C30D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A
Mods:
000
Wiring Diagram: See manual
1609-0088
Inst. Manual:
Serial Number: MAZB98000029
D
Firmware:
NOV 26, 2012
Mfg. Date:
60001234.56
PO Num:
Item Num:
RATINGS:
S
R
P
N
M
L
K
J
c
b
-
M
A
A
B
H
G
a
c
9
7
0
0
0
0
9
9
-
F
b
D
B
a
b
LK1
Tx1
a
1
1
2
Rx1
ACT1
2
3
LK2
Tx1
3
4
4
5
Tx2
b
1
5
ACT2
a
1
2
LK3
6
7
3
4
3
6
2
3
Rx2
7
4
8
Tx2
8
ACT3
IN
Optional
direct
input/output
module
Optional
Optional
contact
contact
input/output input/output
module
module
CPU module
(T module shown)
Power
supply
module
834776A2.CDR
Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized, else death or serious injury can
result from electrical shock.
Small form-factor pluggable ports (SFPs) are pluggable transceivers. They transmit, receive, and
convert electrical signals to optical signals and vice-versa. Supplied with the device, they are
inserted into the Ethernet ports on the CPU module. A photo in the Maintenance chapter shows this
plug-in device. Do not use non-validated transceivers or install validated transceivers in the wrong
Ethernet slot, else damage can occur.
Terminal number assignments are three characters long and assigned by module slot position, row number, and column
letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the first slot position (nearest to CPU module), indicated by
an arrow on the terminal block. The figure shows an example of rear terminal assignments.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-11
PANEL CUTOUTS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-11: Example of modules in F and H slots
J
c
3
H
b
a
G
Slot position
F
c
b
a
Column letter
Torque 9 inch-pounds
1
H1c
H1b
H1a
F1c
F1b
F1a
1
2
H2c
H2b
H2a
F2c
F2b
F2a
2
3
H3c
H3b
H3a
F3c
F3b
F3a
3
4
H4c
H4b
H4a
F4c
F4b
F4a
4
5
H5c
H5b
H5a
F5c
F5b
F5a
5
6
H6c
H6b
H6a
F6c
F6b
F6a
6
7
H7c
H7b
H7a
F7c
F7b
F7a
7
8
H8c
H8b
H8a
F8c
F8b
F8a
8
Row number
Torque 19 ±1 inch-pounds
842761A2.CDR
The torque used to connect the screws that connect the terminal blocks (top screws a, b, c) and the metal plates over
empty slots to the chassis is 9 inch-pounds. For the screws used to wire the terminal blocks (rows 1 to 8), use 19±1 inchpounds.
The CPU module type depends on order code. During manufacturing, the power supply and CPU modules are installed in
slots B and D of the chassis with 13 inch-pounds of torque on the screws at the top and bottom of the modules. Wire
connections to these two modules at 13 inch-pounds.
Figure 3-12: CPU modules and power supply
56 (WKHUQHW 56 (WKHUQHW 56 (WKHUQHW 56 (WKHUQHW 3RZHU
%
E
/.
/.
/.
5-
FRSSHU
/&
ILEHU
$&7
$&7
$&7
/.
/.
/.
/LQN
$FWLYLW\
D
E
$&7
D
E
/.
/.
$&7
D
E
$&7
D
/.
E
%1&
IRU
,5,*%
$&7
D
$&7
$&7
,1
,1
,1
,1
7&38PRGXOH
8&38PRGXOH
9&38PRGXOH
:&38PRGXOH
67
ILEHU
3RZHUVXSSO\
PRGXOH
$&'5
The following figure shows the optical connectors for CPU modules.
3-12
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
PANEL CUTOUTS
Figure 3-13: LC fiber connector (left) and ST fiber connector (right)
3
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-13
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3.3 Wiring
3.3.1 Typical wiring
6XUJH
+D
+E
+F
+D
+E
+F
+D
+E
+F
+D
+E
+F
+D
+E
+F
+D
+E
+F
+D
+F
+D
+F
+E
$&RU'&
)LEUH
RSWLF
6KLHOGHG
WZLVWHGSDLUV
&RD[LDO
1R$:*
PLQLPXP
)DVWIRUP$
RXWSXW3
)DVWIRUP$
RXWSXW3
)DVWIRUP$
RXWSXW3
)DVWIRUP$
RXWSXW3
&RQWDFWLQSXW0D
&RQWDFWLQSXW0F
&RQWDFWLQSXW0D
&RQWDFWLQSXW0F
&RPPRQ0E
0D
0E
0F
0D
0E
0F
0D
0E
0F
0D
0E
0F
0D
0F
0D
0F
0E
&RQWDFWLQSXW0D
&RQWDFWLQSXW0F
&RQWDFWLQSXW0D
&RQWDFWLQSXW0F
&RPPRQ0E
0D
0F
0D
0F
0E
6XUJH
0E
,
9
)RUP$
RXWSXW+
)RUP&
RXWSXW0
9
)RUP&
RXWSXW+
)RUP&
RXWSXW0
9
)RUP&
RXWSXW+
)RUP&
RXWSXW0
9
9
&RQWDFWLQSXWDQGRXWSXWPRGXOH
)RUP&
RXWSXW+
&RQWDFWLQSXWDQGRXWSXWPRGXOH
)RUP&
RXWSXW0
)RUP$
RXWSXW+
)RUP&
RXWSXW+
&RQWDFWLQSXW+D
&RQWDFWLQSXW+F
&RQWDFWLQSXW+D
&RQWDFWLQSXW+F
&RPPRQ+E
6XUJH
,
,
,
&
7;' 5;'
6*1' &ULWLFDOIDLOXUH
9'&RXWSXW
+,
/2
&RQWUROSRZHU
6XUJH
)LOWHU
3RUW
7[ %DVH);
5[
3RUW
7[ %DVH);
5[
3RUW
56&20
&20
,5,*%LQSXW
%1&
&&RQWUROOHU6\VWHP
SLQ
FRQQHFWRU
&RPSXWHU
5;'
7;'
6*1'
SLQ
FRQQHFWRU
56
'%
IURQW
&217$&76$5(
6+2:1:,7+12
&21752/32:(5
$&'5
*URXQGEXV
;
0RGXOHVPXVWEH
JURXQGHGLIWHUPLQDO
LVSURYLGHG
&RQWDFWLQSXWDQGRXWSXWPRGXOH
)RUP$
RXWSXW3
*
)RUP$
RXWSXW+
&RQWDFWLQSXWDQGRXWSXWPRGXOH
)RUP$
RXWSXW3
%
)RUP$
RXWSXW+
9
7[ %DVH);
5[
'D
'D
'D
'E
'D
)RUP$
RXWSXW3
3RZHUVXSSO\
%E
%D
%E
%D
%E
%E
%E
%D
%D
%E
.
+E
3D
3E
3F
3D
3E
3F
3D
3E
3F
3D
3E
3F
3D
3E
3F
3D
3E
3F
3D
3E
3F
3D
3E
3F
)RUP$
RXWSXW3
)RUP$
RXWSXW+
&387
9ROWDJHDQG
FXUUHQWVXSHUYLVLRQ
9ROWDJHVXSHUYLVLRQ
'&RQO\
&RQWDFWLQSXW+D
&RQWDFWLQSXW+F
&RQWDFWLQSXW+D
&RQWDFWLQSXW+F
&RPPRQ+E
+E
'&
*URXQGDW
85
GHYLFH
7&
+D
+F
+D
+F
+E
)RUP$
RXWSXW+
,
7&
&RQWDFWLQSXW+D
&RQWDFWLQSXW+F
&RQWDFWLQSXW+D
&RQWDFWLQSXW+F
&RPPRQ+E
,
3
+D
+E
+F
+D
+E
+F
+D
+E
+F
+D
+E
+F
+D
+F
+D
+F
+E
(
Figure 3-14: Typical wiring diagram (T module shown for CPU)
2SWLRQDO
:
9
8
7
6
5
0RGXOHDUUDQJHPHQW
3 1 0 / . - +
,QSXW ,QSXW
RXWSXW RXWSXW
*
)
,QSXW ,QSXW
RXWSXW RXWSXW
'
%
&38
3RZHU
VXSSO\
5HDUYLHZ
3-14
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
WIRING
3.3.2 Dielectric strength
Dielectric strength is the maximum electric strength that can be sustained without breakdown. It is measured in volts.
The table shows the dielectric strength of the UR-series module hardware.
Table 3-1: Dielectric strength of UR modules
Module type
Module function
Terminals
From
Dielectric strength
To
1
Power supply
High (+); Low (+); (–)
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
1
Power supply
48 V DC (+) and (–)
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
1
Power supply
Relay terminals except
terminals 8a and 8b
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
2
Reserved
N/A
N/A
N/A
3
Reserved
N/A
N/A
N/A
4
Digital contact inputs/
outputs
All
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
5
Analog inputs/outputs
All except 8b
Chassis
< 50 V DC
6
Digital contact inputs/
outputs
All
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
2000 V AC for 1 minute
7
9
G.703
All except 2b, 3a, 7b, 8a
Chassis
RS422
All except 6a, 7b, 8a
Chassis
< 50 V DC
CPU
All
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
3
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in the hardware to prevent damage caused
by high peak voltage transients, radio frequency interference (RFI), and electromagnetic interference
(EMI). These protective components can be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90
specified test voltage for longer than the specified minute.
3.3.3 Control power
Power supplied to the relay must be connected to the matching power supply range of the relay. If
incorrect voltage is applied or voltage is applied to the wrong terminals, damage can occur.
The C30, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are wellknown to deteriorate over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be avoided by
powering up the relay at least once a year.
The power supply module is ordered with one of two possible voltage ranges, and the C30 can be ordered with or without
a redundant power supply module option. Each range has a dedicated input connection for proper operation. The ranges
are as follows (see the Specifications section of chapter 2 for details):
•
Low (LO) range — 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal
•
High (HI) range — 125 to 250 V nominal
The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections.
The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see the
Typical Wiring Diagram earlier). The critical failure relay is a form-C device that is energized once control power is applied
and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If ongoing self-test diagnostic checks detect a
critical failure (see the Self-Test Errors section in chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay de-energizes.
Connect all wires at the back of a UR before connecting to power, else death or serious injury can
result from electrical shock.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-15
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
To connect power to the relay:
1.
On the power supply module in the first slot, slot B, on the back of the device, connect the three wires to the terminals,
or connect two to the terminals and the third to the ground screw. 14 gauge stranded wire with disconnect devices is
recommended. Use 13 inch-pounds torque. Connect all wires to the relay before turning on power.
For high-reliability systems, the C30 has a redundant option in which two C30 power supplies are placed in parallel on the
bus. If one of the power supplies becomes faulted, the second power supply assumes the full load of the relay without any
interruptions. Each power supply has a green LED on the front of the module to indicate that it is functional. The critical fail
relay of the module also indicates a faulted power supply.
An LED on the front of the control power module shows the status of the power supply, as outlined in the table.
Table 3-2: Power supply LED on module
3
LED indication
Power supply
Continuous on
OK
On/off cycling
Failure
Off
Failure or no power
Figure 3-15: Control power connection
127(
JDXJHVWUDQGHG
ZLUHZLWKVXLWDEOH
GLVFRQQHFWGHYLFHV
LVUHFRPPHQGHG
$&RU'&
)XVHV
+HDY\FRSSHUFRQGXFWRU
RUEUDLGHGZLUH
%E %D %D %E %E
¯
),/7(5 685*(
/2:
+,*+
&21752/
32:(5
6ZLWFKJHDU
JURXQGEXV
85
SURWHFWLRQV\VWHP
$&'5
3.3.3.1 Non-volatile data storage
Non-volatile data is temporary data required after a power cycle for relay state, such as latch status before reboot. The
relay saves this data in non-volatile storage every two minutes or when a state change occurs.
If a state change occurs just before a power down (less than two minutes) and the relay power is cycled, some temporary
data can be saved and the prior state is retained at power up. Otherwise, a two-minute powered on period after a state
change ensures that all temporary state changes required after reboot have been saved. A command also is available to
initiate saving of data in the compact flash memory using Commands > Relay Maintenance > Save Volatile Data.
3.3.4 Process bus module for HardFiber
The C30 can be ordered with a process bus interface module to interface with the HardFiber Process Bus System, or
HardFiber Brick, allowing bidirectional IEC 61850 fiber-optic communications with up to eight HardFiber Bricks. The
HardFiber system integrates seamlessly with the existing UR-series applications, including protection functions, FlexLogic,
metering, and communications.
This process bus system offers the following benefits:
3-16
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
WIRING
•
Reduces labor associated with design, installation, and testing of protection and control applications using the UR by
reducing the number of individual copper terminations
•
Integrates seamlessly with existing UR applications, since the IEC 61850 process bus interface module replaces the
traditional CT/VT modules
•
Communicates using open standard IEC 61850 messaging
For details on the HardFiber system, see its Instruction Manual.
3.3.5 Contact inputs and outputs
Nearly all contact input/output modules have 24 terminal connections. The connections are arranged typically as three
terminals per row, with eight rows in total. A given row of three terminals can be used for the outputs of one relay. For
example, for form-C relay outputs, the terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common
contacts of the relay. For a form-A output, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision,
depending on the module ordered. The terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications.
The contact inputs are grouped with a common return. The input/output modules have three versions of grouping: four
inputs per common return, five inputs per common return on a high-density module, and two inputs per common return.
When a contact input/output module is ordered, four inputs per common is used. If the inputs must be isolated per row,
then two inputs per common return are selected (4D module). If the space limitation in the relay requires use of a highdensity input module (6W), five inputs share one common return and the module has six banks of inputs.
The tables and diagrams that follow illustrate the module types (6A and so on) and contact arrangements that can be
ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot
position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot
position, row number, and column position.
Some form-A / solid-state relay outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is
open, and the DC current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector
whose output is set to logic “On = 1” when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is
set to “On = 1” when there is a voltage across open contact (the detector allows a current of about 1 to 2.5 mA), and the
current monitor is set to “On = 1” when the current flowing through the closed contact exceeds about 80 to 100 mA. The
voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be used to seal-in the
output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow. If enabled, the current monitoring can be used as a
seal-in signal to ensure that the form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized inductive coil circuit and weld the
output contacts.
Block diagrams are shown as follows for form-A and solid-state relay outputs with optional voltage monitor, optional
current monitor, and with no monitoring. The actual values shown for contact output 1 are the same for all contact
outputs. Form-A contact output with or without a current or voltage monitoring option is not polarity sensitive. The polarity
shown in the figure is required for solid-state contact output connection.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-17
3
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-16: Form-A and solid-state contact outputs with voltage and current monitoring
~#a
~#a
I
I
~#b
V
a) Voltage with optional
current monitoring
+
Voltage monitoring only
~#c
+
Both voltage and current monitoring
~#a
~#a
V
3
Load
V
Load
~#c
~#b
V
I
~#b
I
~#b
Load
~#c
+
Load
~#c
b) Current with optional
voltage monitoring
+
Current monitoring only
Both voltage and current monitoring
(external jumper a-b is required)
~#a
~#b
Load
~#c
c) No monitoring
+
827862A5.CDR
The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic operands (CONT OP # VON, CONT
OP # VOFF, and CONT OP # ION) that can be used in protection, control, and alarm logic. The typical application of the voltage
monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current monitor is seal-in of the control
command.
See the Digital Elements section of chapter 5 for an example of how form-A and solid-state relay contacts can be applied
for breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring.
Consider relay contacts unsafe to touch when the unit is energized. Death or serious injury can
result from touching live relay contacts.
USE OF FORM-A AND SOLID-STATE RELAY OUTPUTS IN HIGH-IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS
For form-A and solid-state relay output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring circuit across the
contact, the circuit has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high-input
impedance monitoring equipment, such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits can
continue to read the form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured
as an impedance.
The solution is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the form-A contact
through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used as a
source, a 500 Ω, 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the form-A contact or
the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output.
Where a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute the slot position of the module. Where a number sign “#” appears,
substitute the contact number.
3-18
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
WIRING
When current monitoring is used to seal-in the form-A and solid-state relay contact outputs, give the
FlexLogic operand driving the contact output a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of the output
contact (in situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the
region of the pickup value).
For high-density input/output modules 6W and 6X, use the following guidelines to connect. The new I/O modules use pin
type terminal blocks instead of the current ring type. The new terminals are required to achieve higher I/O count per
module.
•
12 to 24 AWG (3.3 mm2 to 0.2 mm2), single wire termination
•
16 to 24 AWG (1.31 mm2 to 0.2 mm2), multiple wire termination with matching wire sizes and stranding. Two wires
maximum per circuit.
•
Suggested wiring screw tightening torque is a minimum 4.43 in-lb (0.5 Nm) and maximum 5.31 in-lb (0.6 Nm)
•
Minimum suggested temperature rating for the conductors is 75°C
•
Wire type: copper
3
Table 3-3: Contact input and output module assignments
~6A module
~6B module
~6C module
~6D module
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output
Terminal
assignment
Output
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-C
~1a, ~1c
2 Inputs
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-C
~2a, ~2c
2 Inputs
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3a, ~3c
2 Inputs
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4a, ~4c
2 Inputs
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-C
~5
Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-C
~6
Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
Form-C
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Form-C
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~6E module
~6F module
~6G module
~6H module
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
~1
Form-C
~1
Fast Form-C
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~2
Form-C
~2
Fast Form-C
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Fast Form-C
~3
Form-A
~3
Form-A
~4
Form-C
~4
Fast Form-C
~4
Form-A
~4
Form-A
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Fast Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-A
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Fast Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-A
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
Fast Form-C
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Fast Form-C
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~6K module
~6L module
~6M module
~6N module
Terminal
assignment
Output
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
~1
Form-C
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~2
Form-C
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-A
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-A
~5
Fast Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-19
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
~6K module
~6L module
~6N module
Output
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
~6
Fast Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~7
Fast Form-C
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8
Fast Form-C
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~3
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-A
~4
Form-A
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-A
~5
Form-A
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~6P module
3
~6M module
Terminal
assignment
~6R module
Output or
input
~6S module
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
~6T module
~6
Form-A
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1a
Input
~1a, ~2a
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2a
Input
~3a, ~4a
Form-A
~3
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3a
Input
~5a, ~6a
Form-A
~4
Form-A
~4
2 Outputs
~4a
Input
~7a, ~8a
Form-A
~5
Form-A
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5a
Input
~9a, ~10a
Form-A
~6
Form-A
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~7a
Input
~11a, ~12a
Form-A
~6U module
~6V module
~6W module
6X module
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8a
Input
~13a, ~14a
Form-A
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~9a
Input
~15a, ~16a
Form-A
---
---
---
---
~10a
Input
~17a, ~18a
Form-A
---
---
---
---
~11a
Input
~1b, ~2b
Form-A
---
---
---
---
~13a
Input
~3b, ~4b
Form-A
---
---
---
---
~14a
Input
~5b, ~6b
Form-A
---
---
---
---
~15a
Input
~7b, ~8b
Form-A
---
---
---
---
~16a
Input
~9b, ~10b
Form-A
---
---
---
---
~17a
Input
~11b, ~12b
Form-A
---
---
---
---
~1b
Input
~13b, ~14b
Form-A
---
---
---
---
~2b
Input
~15b, ~16b
Form-A
---
---
---
---
~3b
Input
~17b, ~18b
Form-A
---
---
---
---
~4b
Input
---
---
---
---
---
---
~5b
Input
---
---
---
---
---
---
~7b
Input
---
---
---
---
---
---
~8b
Input
---
---
---
---
---
---
~9b
Input
---
---
---
---
---
---
~10b
Input
---
---
---
---
---
---
~11b
Input
---
---
3-20
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
~6U module
WIRING
~6V module
~6W module
6X module
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
Terminal
assignment
Output or
input
---
---
---
---
~13b
Input
---
---
---
---
---
---
~14b
Input
---
---
---
---
---
---
~15b
Input
---
---
---
---
---
---
~16b
Input
---
---
---
---
---
---
~17b
Input
---
---
~67 module
~4A module
~4B module
~4C module
Terminal
assignment
Output
Terminal
assignment
Output
Terminal
assignment
Output
Terminal
assignment
Output
~1
Form-A
~1
Not Used
~1
Not Used
~1
Not Used
~2
Form-A
~2
Solid-State
~2
Solid-State
~2
Solid-State
~3
Form-A
~3
Not Used
~3
Not Used
~3
Not Used
~4
Form-A
~4
Solid-State
~4
Solid-State
~4
Solid-State
~5
Form-A
~5
Not Used
~5
Not Used
~5
Not Used
~6
Form-A
~6
Solid-State
~6
Solid-State
~6
Solid-State
~7
Form-A
~7
Not Used
~7
Not Used
~7
Not Used
~8
Form-A
~8
Solid-State
~8
Solid-State
~8
Solid-State
~4D module
3
~4L module
Terminal
assignment
Output
Terminal
assignment
Output
~1a, ~1c
2 Inputs
~1
2 Outputs
~2a, ~2c
2 Inputs
~2
2 Outputs
~3a, ~3c
2 Inputs
~3
2 Outputs
~4a, ~4c
2 Inputs
~4
2 Outputs
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
2 Outputs
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
2 Outputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
2 Outputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Not Used
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-21
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-17: Contact input and output module wiring (Sheet 1 of 3)
3
842762A4.CDR
3-22
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
WIRING
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a
.
Figure 3-18: Contact input and output module wiring (Sheet 2 of 3)
a
a
a
a D
a F
a D
a F
a E
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&20021E
a
a D
a F
a D
a F
a E
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&20021E
a
a E
685*(
',*,7$/,2
/
a
a
a
a
9
,
9
,
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a F
a D
a F
a E
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&20021E
a
a E
685*(
',*,7$/,2
0
a
a
a
a
a D
a F
a D
a F
a E
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&20021E
a
a D
a F
a D
a F
a E
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&20021E
a
a E
685*(
',*,7$/,2
3
1
a
a
a
a
9
,
9
,
9
,
9
,
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a F
a D
a F
a E
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&20021E
a
a E
685*(
',*,7$/,2
3
a
a
a
a
a
a D
a F
a D
a F
a E
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&20021E
a
a D
a F
a D
a F
a E
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&20021E
a
a E
685*(
a D
a F
a D
a F
a E
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&20021E
a
a D
a F
a D
a F
a E
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&20021E
a
a E
685*(
',*,7$/,2
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
5
a
a
a
a
a
a D
a F
a D
a F
a E
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&20021E
a
a E
685*(
',*,7$/,2
6
a
a
a
a D
a F
a D
a F
a E
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&20021E
a
a D
a F
a D
a F
a E
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&20021E
a
a E
685*(
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
',*,7$/,2
a
a
9
,
a
a
a
9
,
a
',*,7$/,2
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
7
a
a
a
a
',*,7$/,2
9
a
a
a
a D
a F
9
,
9
,
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a
a
a
a D
a F
a D
a F
a E
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1F
a
&20021E
a
a E
685*(
',*,7$/,2
8
a
a
a
a
a
a
9
,
9
,
9
,
9
,
9
,
9
,
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
a D
a E
a F
$&'5
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-23
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-19: Contact input and output module wiring (Sheet 3 of 3)
',*,7$/,2
&217$&7,1E
a E
a
&217$&7,1E
a
a E
&217$&7,1E
a
a E
&217$&7,1E
a
a E
&217$&7,1E
a
a E
&20021aE
a E &217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&20021aD
a E
a E
a E
aE
aE
aE
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&217$&7,1
a
&217$&7,1D
a
&20021aD
a E
a E
a E
aE
aE
aE
3
&217$&7,1E
a
&217$&7,1E
a
&217$&7,1E
a
&217$&7,1E
a
&217$&7,1E
a
&20021aE
&217$&7,1E
&217$&7,1D
a
a
&217$&7,1E
&217$&7,1D
a
a
&217$&7,1E
&217$&7,1D
a
a
&217$&7,1E
&217$&7,1D
a
a
&217$&7,1E
&217$&7,1D
a
a
&20021aD
&20021aE
:
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
aD
aD
aD
a D
a D
a D
aD
aD
aD
',*,7$/,2
a E
a E
a E
a E
a E
a E
a E
a E
a E
aE
aE
aE
aE
aE
aE
aE
aE
aE
a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a ;
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
a D
$&'5
For proper functionality, observe the polarity shown in the figures for all contact input and output
connections.
3.3.5.1 Contact inputs
A dry contact has one side connected to terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power
supply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input
group has its own common (negative) terminal that must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power
supply module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA flows through the associated circuit.
A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this
contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. If a wet contact is used, then the negative side of the external
source must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact group. The maximum external source
voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC.
The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs detects a closed contact input is programmable as
17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
Figure 3-20: Dry and wet contact input connections
Terminals from type 6B
contact input/output module
Contact input 1
Contact input 2
Contact input 3
Contact input 4
Common
Surge
~7a
~7c
~8a
~8c
~7b
~8b
B1b
B1a
B2b
B3a
B3b
B5b
B6b
B6a
B8a
B8b
(Wet)
24 to 250 V
Terminals from type 6B
contact input/output module
~7a
~7c
~8a
~8c
~7b
~8b
Contact input 1
Contact input 2
Contact input 3
Contact input 4
Common
Surge
Critical failure
48 V DC output
HI+
LO+
Control power
Surge
Filter
Power supply module
(Dry)
827741A5.CDR
Where a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute the slot position of the module.
3-24
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
WIRING
There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We recommend
using an external DC supply.
3.3.5.2 General application considerations
Contacts outputs of protective relays, auxiliary contacts from breakers, disconnectors and other devices are connected
generally to contacts inputs of protective relays. In some situations, the contact outputs of some protective relays can
have high impedance connected across it. When such a contact output is connected across a C30 contact input, it can
spuriously operate the C30 input even when the output is open, if there is a substantial distributed capacitance
(represented by C1) present in the wiring between the output and the C30 input, and the debounce time setting in the C30
relay is low enough. This false assertion of the contact input, when there is inadvertent ground present at the DC positive
terminal, can be prevented by inserting a resistor across the C30 input.
The following figure shows a typical DC circuit, with battery ground detection, of contact input. The contact output has
parallel impedance across it (represented by R1).
Figure 3-21: Typical contact input DC circuit
$POUBDU*OQVU
$FGU
The presence of the impedance path (R1) across the contact output allows the stray (distributed) capacitance C1 to charge
as shown, thus developing a voltage across the contact input enough to momentarily operate the input while the
capacitance discharges in the presence of DC ground on the positive terminal of the battery.
The duration of the discharge depends on the value of the distributed capacitance, the initial voltage of the distributed
capacitance, and the input impedance of the contact input. If the duration is greater than the debounce time setting, then
the contact input operates.
The application example that follows describes how to mitigate this issue by connecting a resistor across the contact
input, as shown in the next figure, or by adjusting the debounce time setting to a value greater than the discharge time to
prevent spurious operation of the contact input only if the voltage (with output open) across the contact input due to trickle
current is less than the threshold voltage. This operation of contact inputs also can be prevented by using the Auto-Burnish
contact inputs or contact inputs with active impedance.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-25
3
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-22: Contact input connected to a contact output with resistor (R2) across the input
$POUBDU*OQVU
3
$FGU
Application example
This example is for illustrative purposes only and the calculations present the worst-case scenario. In practice, the value of
debounce time can be lower.
Contact input ON state impedance used in the calculation of the discharge period is based on the following table.
Table 3-4: Discharge period
Battery voltage (V)
Input impedance (kΩ)
130
50
250
97
Debounce time setting = 2 ms
Assume a stray capacitance of 0.1 μF.
Assume an initial voltage across the stray capacitance "Vinitial" = 19 V (Vthreshold - 65 V), where Vthreshold = 84 V. The
initial voltage Vinitial depends on values of impedance of R1 and contact inputs when the contact input is OFF (nonactivated state).
Therefore, discharge time constant (τ) =50 kΩ *0.1 μF = 5 ms.
Discharge period t is calculated from the following equation:
Vthreshold = (Vbatt - VInitial) *e^ (-t/τ)
84 = -149 *e^ (t/0.005)
Eq. 3-1
T = -0.005 * ln (84/149) = 0.0029 s
Therefore, in this example the contact inputs operate.
To prevent this operation, the debounce time must be increased to 4 ms (set debounce time as per the following table) or
insert a resistor less than or equal to "R" as calculated later.
Table 3-5: Typical debounce time setting
Stray capacitance (μF)
Battery voltage (V)
Debounce time (ms)
0.05
130
2
0.1
130
4
0.2
130
6
0.05
250
3
0.1
250
6*
3-26
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
WIRING
Stray capacitance (μF)
Battery voltage (V)
Debounce time (ms)
0.2
250
11
* Default debounce time on contact inputs is 6 ms.
The value of this resistor "R" is calculated as follows:
1.
Determine the minimum voltage (V threshold) required to turn on the input. This is determined by direct measurement
or referenced in the input specifications.
2.
Calculate the resistance necessary to limit the voltage to 1/3 V threshold (when the contact is OFF, the non-activated
state) as follows:
R = (Vthreshold / 3) / (2 mA)
Eq. 3-2
The 2 mA current is used in case the contact input is connected across the GE Form A contact output with voltage
monitoring. Otherwise use the amperage of the active circuit connected to the contact input when its contact output
is open and the voltage across the contact input is third trigger threshold to calculate the resistor value.
3.
When the contact is ON (operate state), the battery voltage appears across the resistor. The wattage rating of the
resistor is then:
4.
Applying the following equation to our example:
PR = 1.3 * (Vbatt) ^2 / R Watts
Eq. 3-3
R = 84 V / 3 * (1 / 2 mA) = 14 kΩ
PR = 1.57 Watts
5.
Eq. 3-4
Calculating the voltage across the contact input with the Burden Resistor, Voltage across the contact Input:
Vresistor = 2 mA * 14 Kohm = 28 V
Vresistor < contact input threshold (84 V)
Eq. 3-5
In conclusion, in this example, the contact input does NOT operate falsely with the Burden Resistor across its input AND
when a battery ground is present.
3.3.5.3 Use of contact inputs with auto-burnishing
The contact inputs sense a change of state of the external device contact based on the measured current. When external
devices are located in a harsh industrial environment (either outdoor or indoor), their contacts can be exposed to various
types of contamination. Normally, there is a thin film of insulating sulfidation, oxidation, or contaminates on the surface of
the contacts, sometimes making it difficult or impossible to detect a change of state. This film must be removed to
establish circuit continuity — an impulse of higher than normal current can accomplish this.
The contact inputs with auto-burnish create a high current impulse when the threshold is reached to burn off this oxidation
layer as a maintenance to the contacts. Afterwards the contact input current is reduced to a steady-state current. The
impulse has a five-second delay after a contact input changes state.
Figure 3-23: Current through contact inputs with auto-burnishing
Current
50 to 70 mA
3 mA
Time
25 to 50 ms
842749A1.CDR
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-27
3
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Regular contact inputs limit current to less than 3 mA to reduce station battery burden. In contrast, contact inputs with
auto-burnishing allow currents up to 50 to 70 mA at the first instance when the change of state is sensed. Then, within 25
to 50 ms, this current is slowly reduced to 3 mA as indicated. The 50 to 70 mA peak current burns any film on the contacts,
allowing for proper sensing of state changes. If the external device contact is bouncing, the auto-burnishing starts when
external device contact bouncing is over.
Another important difference between the auto-burnishing input module and the regular input modules is that only two
contact inputs have common ground, as opposed to four contact inputs sharing one common ground (see the Contact
Input and Output Module Wiring diagrams). This is beneficial when connecting contact inputs to separate voltage sources.
Consequently, the threshold voltage setting is also defined per group of two contact inputs.
The auto-burnish feature can be disabled or enabled using the DIP switches found on each daughter card. There is a DIP
switch for each contact, for a total of 16 inputs.
Figure 3-24: Auto-burnish DIP switches
3
&RQWDFWLQSXWDXWREXUQLVK 2II
&RQWDFWLQSXWDXWREXUQLVK 2II
&RQWDFWLQSXWDXWREXUQLVK 2Q
&RQWDFWLQSXWDXWREXUQLVK 2II
&RQWDFWLQSXWDXWREXUQLVK 2II
&RQWDFWLQSXWDXWREXUQLVK 2Q
&RQWDFWLQSXWDXWREXUQLVK 2Q
&RQWDFWLQSXWDXWREXUQLVK 2Q
$&'5
The auto-burnish circuitry has an internal fuse for safety purposes. During regular maintenance, check the auto-burnish
functionality using an oscilloscope.
3.3.5.4 Use of contact inputs with active impedance
Contact inputs can be susceptible to parasitic capacitance, caused by long cable runs affected by switching surges from
external circuits. This can result in inadvertent activation of contact inputs with the external contact open. In this case, GE
recommends using the contact I/O module with active impedance circuit.
Active impedance contact input can tolerate external cable capacitance of up to 0.2 µF, without entering the ON state for
more than 2 ms. The contact input debounce time can still be set above 2 ms for added security to prevent contact input
activations caused by external transient ON states.
An active impedance contact input is normally in Low impedance mode during OFF contact state (non-activated
condition). During Low impedance state, contact input impedance is maintained at 10 K Ohms impedance to allow fast
discharge of the stray capacitance of the long cables.
When the contact input voltage exceeds the set threshold, active impedance maintains 10 K Ohms impedance. If voltage
starts rapidly decreasing, this indicates that stray capacitance is being discharged through the contact input. If, however,
voltage stabilizes above the set threshold, the input impedance is switched to High impedance mode of 100 K Ohms. This
value reduces the input current to <3 mA, and contact input switches to the ON state (operated state).
The figure shows the active impedance contact input V-I characteristic. Different thresholds with their corresponding
characteristics are shown by color. The contact input is in the ON (operated) state if the input voltage is to the right of the
colored threshold band (+/-10% tolerance), and the contact input is in the OFF (non-activated) state when input voltage is
to the left of the band. A contact input is in LOW state during non-operated system condition, and actively switches to
HIGH state upon detection of input voltage above the settable threshold.
3-28
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
WIRING
st
at
e
im
pe
da
nc
e
84 V threshold
Lo
w
25
33 V threshold
17 V threshold
30
166 V threshold
Figure 3-25: Active impedance contact input V-I characteristic
3
K
oh
m
s
15
10
Current (millamperes)
20
10
166 V threshold
84 V threshold
33 V threshold
17 V threshold
5
dance state
100 K ohms
0
0
5
0
100
HIgh impe
150
Voltage (Volts)
200
250
300
859757A2.vsd
3.3.6 Transducer inputs and outputs
Transducer input modules receive input signals from external DCmA output transducers (DCmA In) or resistance
temperature detectors (RTDs). Hardware and software are provided to receive signals from these external transducers and
convert these signals into a digital format for use as required.
Transducer output modules provide DC current outputs in several standard DCmA ranges. Software is provided to
configure virtually any analog quantity used in the relay to drive the analog outputs.
Each transducer input/output module has 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three terminals per
row over eight rows. A given row can be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a" having positive
polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/output channel,
the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number.
Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to terminal 8b. The current outputs
require a twisted-pair shielded cable, where the shield is grounded at one end only. The following figure illustrates the
transducer module types (5A, 5C, 5D, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that can be ordered for the relay.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-29
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
In September 2020, GE released revision D1 of the type 5F Transducer DCMA Inputs module. This revision enables
the use of greater than three 5F modules (24 DCMA inputs) in one C30 device with Firmware version 8.10 and
higher. Revision D1 of the module can be identified with MFG DATE: SEP 1, 2020 or later. For customers having more
than three 5F modules in one C30 device, failure to use revision D1 modules can result in degraded DCMA input
readings.
Where a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute the slot position of the module.
Figure 3-26: Transducer input/output module wiring
3
$&'5
The following figure show how to connect RTDs.
3-30
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
WIRING
Figure 3-27: RTD connections
7KUHHZLUHVKLHOGHGFDEOH
5RXWHFDEOHLQVHSDUDWHFRQGXLWIURP
FXUUHQWFDUU\LQJFRQGXFWRUV
57'WHUPLQDOV
aE
685*(
a
57'
57'
+RW aD
&RPS aF
)RU57' a a 5HWXUQ aE
a
57'
57'WHUPLQDOV
+RW aD
&RPS aF
3
57'
0D[LPXPWRWDOOHDGUHVLVWDQFH
RKPVIRU3ODWLQXP57'V
$&'5
3.3.7 RS232 port
On the enhanced and basic front panels is a nine-pin RS232C serial port for programming with a computer. All that is
required to use this interface is a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay. Cabling for
the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for the nine-pin connector on the UR and nine or 25-pin connector on a
computer.
The baud rate for this port can be set, with a default of 115200 bps.
Figure 3-28: RS232 front panel port connection
Front panel 9 pin RS232 Program port
RELAY
PERSONAL
COMPUTER
FRONT PANEL
PROGRAM PORT
9 PIN
RS232
D CONNECTOR
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
N/A
(TXD)
(RXD)
N/A
(SGND) Signal Ground
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
RS232
D CONNECTOR
URS232 INTERFACE
RELAY
TXD
RXD
SGND
COM1 OR COM2
SERIAL PORT
COMPUTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9 PIN
CONNECTOR
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
8
3
2
20
7
6
4
5
22
827758A3.cdr
RXD
TXD
SGND
25 PIN
CONNECTOR
3-31
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3.3.8 CPU communication ports
3.3.8.1 Overview
There is a rear RS485 communication port on the CPU module. The CPU module does not require a surge ground
connection.
3
3-32
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
WIRING
6KLHOGHGWZLVWHGSDLUFDEOH
7[
5[ %DVH);
3RUW
7[
5[ %DVH);
3RUW
7[
5[ %DVH);
3RUW
'D
'D
'D
'E
'D
*URXQGDW
85
GHYLFH
³
&20021
³
%1&
56
&20
,5,*%
LQSXW
&38
00ILEHU
RSWLFFDEOH
7
Figure 3-29: CPU module communications wiring
&RD[LDOFDEOH
*URXQGFRD[LDOFDEOHXVLQJWHUPLQDO'D
6KLHOGHGWZLVWHGSDLUFDEOH
*URXQGDW
85
GHYLFH
3RUW
7[
5[ %DVH);
3RUW
7[
5[ %DVH);
3RUW
'D
'D
'D
'E
'D
³
&20021
³
%1&
3
8
%DVH7;
56
&20
,5,*%
LQSXW
&38
6KLHOGHG(WKHUQHWFDEOH
00ILEHU
RSWLFFDEOH
6KLHOGHGWZLVWHGSDLUFDEOH
*URXQGDW
85
GHYLFH
'D
'D
'D
'E
'D
%DVH7;
3RUW
%DVH7;
3RUW
%DVH7;
3RUW
³
&20021
³
%1&
56
&20
,5,*%
LQSXW
&38
6KLHOGHG(WKHUQHWFDEOH
9
&RD[LDOFDEOH
*URXQGFRD[LDOFDEOHXVLQJWHUPLQDO'D
00ILEHU
RSWLFFDEOH
6KLHOGHGWZLVWHGSDLUFDEOH
*URXQGDW
85
GHYLFH
%DVH7;
3RUW
7[
5[ %DVH);
3RUW
7[
5[ %DVH);
3RUW
'D
'D
'D
'E
'D
³
&20021
³
%1&
&RD[LDOFDEOH
*URXQGFRD[LDOFDEOHXVLQJWHUPLQDO'D
56
&20
,5,*%
LQSXW
&38
6KLHOGHG(WKHUQHWFDEOH
:
&RD[LDOFDEOH
*URXQGFRD[LDOFDEOHXVLQJWHUPLQDO'D
$&'5
3.3.8.2 RS485 port
RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted-pair wire with transmit and receive data
alternating over the same two wires. Through the use of the port, continuous monitoring and control from a remote
computer, SCADA system, or Power Line Carrier (PLC) is possible.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-33
WIRING
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted-pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must be observed.
For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 “+” terminals connected together, and all RS485 “–” terminals
connected together. Though data is transmitted over a two-wire twisted pair, all RS485 devices require a shared reference,
or common voltage. This common voltage is implied to be a power supply common. Some systems allow the shield (drain
wire) to be used as common wire and to connect directly to the C30 COM terminal (#3); others function correctly only if the
common wire is connected to the C30 COM terminal, but insulated from the shield.
To avoid loop currents, ground the shield at only one point. If other system considerations require the shield to be
grounded at more than one point, install resistors (typically 100 ohms) between the shield and ground at each grounding
point. Each relay needs to be daisy-chained to the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this
manner without exceeding driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also
possible to use commercially available repeaters to have more than 32 relays on a single channel. Avoid star or stub
connections entirely.
3
Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the
communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are provided internally at both communication ports. An
isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum
reliability, ensure that all equipment has similar transient protection devices installed.
Terminate both ends of the RS485 circuit with an impedance as shown in the figure.
Figure 3-30: RS485 serial connection
SCADA / PLC / computer
UR-series device
ZT (*)
Shield
Twisted pair
RS485 +
Optocoupler Data
Data Optocoupler
RS485 –
COM
COMP 485COM
Ground shield at SCADA / PLC /
computer only or at
UR-series device only
Relay
RS485 +
ZT (*) Terminating impedance at
each end (typically 120 Ω and 1 nF)
RS485 –
COMP 485COM
Up to 32 devices,
maximum 4000 feet
(1200 m)
Relay
ZT (*)
RS485 +
RS485 –
COMP 485COM
Last device
827757AA.CDR
3.3.8.3 10Base-FL and 100Base-FX fiber optic ports
The fiber-optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 100 Mbps. Optical
fiber can be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 1310 nm in multimode.
Ensure that the dust covers are installed when the fiber is not in use. Dirty or scratched connectors can lead to high losses
on a fiber link.
3-34
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
3.3.9 IRIG-B
There is a round IRIG-B connector at the back of the CPU module, marked "IN." Use is optional.
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices. The
IRIG-B code allows time accuracies of up to 100 ns. The GE MultiSync 100 1588 GPS Clock as well as third-party equipment
are available for generating the IRIG-B signal. This equipment can use a global positioning system (GPS) satellite system to
obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can be synchronized. The IRIG time code
formats are serial, pulse width-modulated codes that can be either DC level shifted or amplitude modulated (AM). Using
IRIG-B input, the C30 operates an internal oscillator with 1 µs resolution and accuracy.
Figure 3-31: Options for IRIG-B connection
3
*36VDWHOOLWHV\VWHP
*36FRQQHFWLRQ
85
,5,*%
WLPHFRGHJHQHUDWRU
% ,5,*% $ ,5,*% ²
5HFHLYHU
5*FRD[LDOFDEOH
'&VKLIWRU
DPSOLWXGHPRGXODWHG
VLJQDOFDQEHXVHG
*36VDWHOOLWHV\VWHP
*36FRQQHFWLRQ
,5,*%
WLPHFRGHJHQHUDWRU
'&VKLIWRU
DPSOLWXGHPRGXODWHG
VLJQDOFDQEHXVHG
%1& LQ
6KLHOGHGWZLVWHGSDLUFDEOH
85
% ,5,*% $ ,5,*% ²
5HFHLYHU
%1& LQ
$&'5
Using an amplitude-modulated receiver causes errors up to 1 ms in event time stamping.
3.4 Direct input and output communications
3.4.1 Description
The direct inputs and outputs feature makes use of the type 7 series of communications modules and allows direct
messaging between UR devices. The communications modules are outlined in the table later in this section.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-35
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
The communications channels are normally connected in a ring configuration, as shown in the following figure. The
transmitter of one module is connected to the receiver of the next module. The transmitter of this second module is then
connected to the receiver of the next module in the ring. This is continued to form a communications ring. The figure
illustrates a ring of four UR-series relays with the following connections: UR1-Tx to UR2-Rx, UR2-Tx to UR3-Rx, UR3-Tx to
UR4-Rx, and UR4-Tx to UR1-Rx. A maximum of 16 URs can be connected in a single ring.
Figure 3-32: Direct input and output single-channel connection
Tx
UR 1
Rx
Tx
UR 2
Rx
3
Tx
UR 3
Rx
Tx
UR 4
Rx
842006A2.CDR
Inter-relay communication (IRC) modules with protocol C37.94 and G.703 are designed for back-to-back communication
connections, so the ring configuration shown in the previous figure does not apply. To establish inter-relay communication
in more than two URs, you need to have a two-channel IRC module and enable the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting
in all relays, as shown in the next figure. This configuration can be expanded to 16 URs, and this configuration does not
provide a redundancy ring since both channels are made into a single ring by the channel crossover function. As per the
figure entitled Typical Pin Interconnection between Two G.703 Interfaces later in this chapter, the clock is supplied typically
by multiplexer (MUX) and all URs are in Loop Timing Mode. If there is no MUX, then UR1 and UR3 can be in Internal Timing
Mode and UR2 and UR4 can be in Loop Timing Mode. That is, connected channels must have opposite timing modes.
Figure 3-33: Ring configuration for C37.94 module (concept also applies to G.703)
7[
5[
08;
5[
5[
5[
08;
08;
5[
7[
7[
85
7[
85
08;
5[
7[
08;
7[
7[
85
08;
7[
85
08;
5[
08;
5[
$&'5
The interconnection for dual-channel type 7 communications modules is shown as follows. Two-channel modules allow
for a redundant ring configuration. That is, two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path. The
required connections are: UR1-Tx1 to UR2-Rx1, UR2-Tx1 to UR3-Rx1, UR3-Tx1 to UR4-Rx1, and UR4-Tx1 to UR1-Rx1 for the
first ring; and UR1-Tx2 to UR4-Rx2, UR4-Tx2 to UR3-Rx2, UR3-Tx2 to UR2-Rx2, and UR2-Tx2 to UR1-Rx2 for the second ring.
3-36
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
Figure 3-34: Direct input and output dual-channel connection
Tx1
Rx1
UR 1
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR 2
Tx2
Rx2
3
Tx1
Rx1
UR 3
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
Rx1
UR 4
Tx2
Rx2
842007A3.CDR
The following figure shows the connection for three UR-series relays using two independent communication channels.
UR1 and UR3 have single type 7 communication modules; UR2 has a dual-channel module. The two communication
channels can be of different types, depending on the type 7 modules used. To allow the direct input and output data to
cross-over from channel 1 to channel 2 on UR2, set the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting to “Enabled” on UR2. This
forces UR2 to forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2, and messages received on Rx2 out Tx1.
Figure 3-35: Direct input and output single/dual channel combination connection
Tx
UR 1
Rx
Channel 1
Tx1
Rx1
UR 2
Tx2
Rx2
Channel 2
Tx
UR 3
Rx
842013A2.CDR
The inter-relay communications modules are available with several interfaces and some are outlined here in more detail.
Those that apply depend on options purchased. The options are outlined in the Inter-Relay Communications section of the
Order Code tables in Chapter 2. All of the fiber modules use ST type connectors.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-37
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3.4.2 Fiber: LED and ELED transmitters
The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
Figure 3-36: LED and ELED fiber modules
7A, 7B, and
7C modules
7H, 7I, and
7J modules
Rx1
Rx1
Tx1
Tx1
3
Rx2
Tx2
1 channel
2 channels
831719A3.CDR
3.4.3 Fiber laser transmitters
The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser modules.
Figure 3-37: 7x Laser fiber modules
72 and 7D
modules
73 and 7K
modules
Tx1
Tx1
Rx1
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
1 channel
2 channels
831720A5.CDR
The following figure shows configuration for the 2I and 2J fiber-laser modules.
3-38
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
Figure 3-38: 2I and 2J laser fiber modules
2I and 2J
modules
Rx1
Tx1
Rx2
3
Tx2
2 channels
831827A1.CDR
Observing any fiber transmitter output can injure the eye.
When using a laser Interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the
maximum optical input power to the receiver.
3.4.4 G.703 interface
3.4.4.1 Description
G.703 is an International Telecommunications Union (ITU) standard for the transmission of data and voice signals. Modules
7R (one channel) and 7S (two channels) apply.
The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration. This is module 7S.
The G.703 module is fixed at 64 kbps. The SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O  DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not
applicable to this module.
AWG 24 twisted shielded pair wiring is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end.
Connecting the shield to pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are connected internally to ground. Thus, if
pin X1a or X6a is used to ground the shield at one end, do not ground the shield at the other end. This interface module is
protected by surge suppression devices.
7S
Figure 3-39: G.703 interface configuration
G.703 communications
G.703
channel 1
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Surge
G.703
channel 2
Surge
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
~1a
~1b
~2a
~2b
~3a
~3b
~6a
~6b
~7a
~7b
~8a
~8b
842773A3.CDR
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-39
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical
arrangement of these pins, see the Rear Terminal Layout section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be
maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
G.703 communications
G.703
channel 1
3
Surge
G.703
channel 2
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Surge
X1a
X1b
X2a
X2b
X3a
X3b
X6a
X6b
X7a
X7b
X8a
X8b
X1a
X1b
X2a
X2b
X3a
X3b
X6a
X6b
X7a
X7b
X8a
X8b
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
7S
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
G.703
channel 1
Surge
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
G.703
channel 2
Surge
G.703 communications
7S
Figure 3-40: Typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces
831727A5.CDR
Pin nomenclature differs from one manufacturer to another. It is not uncommon to see pinouts numbered TxA, TxB,
RxA, and RxB. In such cases, assume that “A” is equivalent to “+” and “B” is equivalent to “–.”
3.4.4.2 G.703 selection switch procedures
1.
With the power to the relay off, remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S) as follows. Record the original location of the
module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
2.
Simultaneously pull the ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to release
the module for removal. (For more information on accessing modules, see the Maintenance chapter.)
3.
Remove the module cover screw.
4.
Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
5.
Set the timing selection switches (channels 1 and 2) to the required timing modes.
6.
Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
7.
Re-insert the G.703 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position.
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the
module is inserted smoothly into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips
simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module is inserted fully.
3-40
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
Figure 3-41: G.703 timing selection switch setting
Bottom cover
Ejector/inserter clip
FRONT
Channel 1
Timing selection
switches
Top cover
3
Channel 2
Cover screw
Ejector/inserter clip
REAR
831774A3.CDR
Table 3-6: G.703 timing selections
Switches
Function
S1
OFF octet timing disabled
ON octet timing 8 kHz
S5 and S6
S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF loop timing mode
S5 = ON and S6 = OFF internal timing mode
S5 = OFF and S6 = ON minimum remote loopback mode
S5 = ON and S6 = ON dual loopback mode
3.4.4.3 G.703 octet timing
If octet timing is enabled (ON), this 8 kHz signal is asserted during the violation of bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connecting to
higher order systems. When C30s are connected back-to-back, octet timing is disabled (OFF).
3.4.4.4 G.703 timing modes
There are two timing modes for the G.703 module: internal timing mode and loop timing mode (default).
•
Internal Timing Mode — The system clock is generated internally. Therefore, set the G.703 timing selection to internal
timing mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For back-to-back connections, set octet timing (S1 = OFF) and
timing mode to internal timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF).
•
Loop Timing Mode — The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, set the G.703 timing
selection to loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (URto-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to octet timing (S1 = ON) and set timing mode to loop timing (S5 = OFF and S6 =
OFF).
The switch settings for the internal and loop timing modes are shown.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-41
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-42: Switches
Internal timing mode
Loop timing mode
(factory default)
842752A2.CDR
3.4.4.5 G.703 test modes
3
In minimum remote loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any
processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 line-side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs,
passes through the data stabilization latch that also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer,
and then returns to the transmitter. The differential received data is processed and passed to the G.703 transmitter module
after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and
passes it to the differential Manchester transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is
expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.
Figure 3-43: G.703 minimum remote loopback mode
DMR
G7X
DMX
G7R
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver
DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
842774A1.CDR
In dual loopback mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each receiver/
transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data
enters the Differential Manchester receiver module and then is returned to the differential Manchester transmitter module.
Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 transmitter module to be
returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks
are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing.
One source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the differential Manchester side of the
interface.
Figure 3-44: G.703 dual loopback mode
DMR
G7X
DMX
G7R
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver
DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
842775A1.CDR
3-42
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
3.4.5 RS422 interface
3.4.5.1 Description
There are two RS422 inter-relay communications modules available: single-channel (module 7T) and dual-channel (module
7W). The modules can be configured to run at 64 kbps or 128 kbps. AWG 20 to 24 twisted shielded pair cable is
recommended for external connections. These modules are protected by optically-isolated surge suppression devices.
The shield pins (6a and 7b) are connected internally to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows:
•
Site 1 — Terminate shield to pins 6a or 7b or both
•
Site 2 — Terminate shield to COM pin 2b
Match the clock terminating impedance with the impedance of the line.
Figure 3-45: RS422 interface connections
RS422
channel 1
Clock
Common
Surge
7W
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
+
–
COM
3
Dual-channel RS422 module
~3b
~3a
~2a
~4b
~6a
~7a
~8b
~2b
~8a
RS422
channel 1
RS422 communications
RS422 communications
7T
Single-channel RS422 module
~ indicates the slot position
RS422
channel 2
Clock
Common
Surge
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
COM
~3b
~3a
~2a
~4b
~6a
~5b
~5a
~4a
~6b
~7b
~7a
~8b
~2b
~8a
842776A3.CDR
The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two single-channel RS422 interfaces installed in slot W.
All pin interconnections are to be maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
RS422
channel 1
Clock
Common
Surge
W3b
W3a
W2a
W4b
W6a
W7a
W8b
W2b
W8a
W3b
W3a
W2a
W4b
W6a
W7a
W8b
W2b
W8a
+
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
+
–
COM
7T
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
+
–
COM
RS422
channel 1
Clock
Common
Surge
RS422 communications
RS422 communications
7T
Figure 3-46: Typical pin interconnect between two RS422 interfaces
–
64 or 128 kbps
831728A5.CDR
3.4.5.2 Two-channel application via multiplexers
The RS422 interface can be used for single-channel or two-channel applications over SONET/SDH or multiplexed systems.
When used in single-channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher-order systems in a typical way, observing
transmit (Tx), receive (Rx), and send timing (ST) connections. However, when used in two-channel applications, certain
criteria must be followed since there is one clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system functions correctly when
the following connections are observed and your data module has a terminal timing feature. Terminal timing is a common
feature in most synchronous data units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the
terminal timing feature, two-channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: the send timing
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-43
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
outputs from the multiplexer (data module 1) connects to the clock inputs of the UR RS422 interface in the usual way. In
addition, the send timing outputs of data module 1 are also paralleled to the terminal timing inputs of data module 2. By
using this configuration, the timing for both data modules and both UR RS422 channels is derived from a single clock
source. As a result, data sampling for both of the UR RS422 channels is synchronized via the send timing leads on data
module 1, shown as follows. If the terminal timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not wanted, the
G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.
Figure 3-47: Timing configuration for RS422 two-channel, three-terminal application
'DWDPRGXOH
:
6LJQDOQDPH
56
&+$11(/
3
56&20081,&$7,216
&/2&.
56
&+$11(/
&20021
685*(
7[ :D
6' $ 6HQGGDWD
7[ ²
:E
6' % 6HQGGDWD
5[ :E
5' $ 5HFHLYHGGDWD
5[ ²
:D
5' % 5HFHLYHGGDWD
6KLHOG
:D
56 $ 5HTXHVWWRVHQG 576
:D
56 % 5HTXHVWWRVHQG 576
²
:E
57 $ 5HFHLYHWLPLQJ
7[ :D
57 % 5HFHLYHWLPLQJ
7[ ²
:E
&6 $ &OHDU7RVHQG
5[ :E
&6 % &OHDU7RVHQG
5[ ²
:D
/RFDOORRSEDFN
6KLHOG
:E
5HPRWHORRSEDFN
&20
:E
6LJQDOJURXQG
:D
67 $ 6HQGWLPLQJ
67 % 6HQGWLPLQJ
'DWDPRGXOH
6LJQDOQDPH
77 $ 7HUPLQDOWLPLQJ
77 % 7HUPLQDOWLPLQJ
6' $ 6HQGGDWD
6' % 6HQGGDWD
5' $ 5HFHLYHGGDWD
5' % 5HFHLYHGGDWD
56 $ 5HTXHVWWRVHQG 576
56 % 5HTXHVWWRVHQG 576
&6 $ &OHDU7RVHQG
&6 % &OHDU7RVHQG
/RFDOORRSEDFN
5HPRWHORRSEDFN
6LJQDOJURXQG
67 $ 6HQGWLPLQJ
67 % 6HQGWLPLQJ
$&'5
Data module 1 provides timing to the C30 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data module 1 also provides
timing to data module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The data module pin numbers have been
omitted in the figure because they vary by manufacturer.
3.4.5.3 Transmit timing
The RS422 interface accepts one clock input for transmit timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz transmit
timing clock of the multiplexer interface is sampling the data in the center of the transmit data window. Therefore, it is
important to confirm clock and data transitions to ensure proper system operation. For example, the following figure
shows the positive edge of the Tx clock in the center of the Tx data bit.
3-44
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
Figure 3-48: Clock and data transitions
7[FORFN
7[GDWD
3
$&'5
3.4.5.4 Receive timing
The RS422 interface utilizes NRZI-MARK modulation code and therefore does not rely on an Rx clock to recapture data.
NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code.
To recover the Rx clock from the data-stream, an integrated digital phase lock loop (DPLL) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is
driven by an internal clock, which is 16-times over-sampled, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a
data clock that can be used as the serial communication controller (SCC) receive clock.
3.4.6 RS422 and fiber interface
The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus fiberoptic interface configuration at 64 K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P,
and 74 modules are used in two-terminal with a redundant channel or three-terminal configurations where channel 1 is
employed via the RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and channel 2 via direct fiber.
AWG 20 to 24 twisted shielded pair wiring is recommended for external RS422 connections. Ground the shield only at one
end. For the direct fiber channel, address power budget issues properly.
When using a laser interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed
maximum optical input power to the receiver.
RS422
communications
7L, 7M, 7N,
7P, and 74
Figure 3-49: RS422 and fiber interface connection
Clock
channel 1
Common
RS422
channel 1
Fiber
channel 2
Surge
+
–
COM
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Shield
Tx2
~1a
~1b
~2b
~3b
~3a
~2a
~4b
~6a
Rx2
~8a
842777A3.CDR
The connections shown in the figure are for multiplexers configured as data communications equipment (DCE) units.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-45
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3.4.7 G.703 and fiber interface
The following figure shows the combined G.703 plus fiber-optic interface configuration at 64 kbps. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and
75 modules are used in configurations where channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer)
and channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 24 twisted shielded pair wiring is recommended for external G.703 connections
connecting the shield to pin 1a at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, address power budget issues properly. See
previous sections for details on the G.703 and fiber interfaces.
When using a laser interface, attenuators can be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed the
maximum optical input power to the receiver.
75, 7E, 7F, 7G,
G.703
and 7Q
communications
Figure 3-50: G.703 and fiber interface connection
3
G.703
channel 1
Shield
Tx –
Rx –
Tx +
Rx +
Surge
Fiber
channel 2
~1a
~1b
~2a
~2b
~3a
~3b
Tx2
Rx2
842778A2.CDR
3.4.8 IEEE C37.94 interface
IEEE C37.94 is a standard interface between teleprotection equipment and digital multiplexers.
The UR-series IEEE C37.94 modules (module types 2G, 2H, 2I, 2J, 76, and 77) are designed to interface with IEEE C37.94
compliant digital multiplexers or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input and output
applications. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data between a multiplexer
and a teleprotection device. Data speed is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n
= 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series C37.94 communication modules are either 64 kbps (with n fixed at 1) or 128 kbps (with n fixed at
2). The frame is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of
framing and data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048
kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
•
IEEE standard — C37.94 for 1  128 kbps optical fiber interface (for 2G and 2H modules) or C37.94 for 2  64 kbps
optical fiber interface (for 76 and 77 modules)
•
Fiber-optic cable type — 50 nm or 62.5 μm core diameter optical fiber
•
Fiber-optic mode — multimode
•
Fiber-optic cable length — up to 2 km
•
Fiber-optic connector — type ST
•
Wavelength — 820 ±40 nm
•
Connection — as per all fiber-optic connections, a Tx-to-Rx connection is required
The UR-series C37.94 module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports the IEEE C37.94
standard. The figure shows the concept.
3-46
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
Figure 3-51: IEEE C37.94 connection to compliant digital multiplexer
IEEE C37.94
fiber interface
Digital
multiplexer,
IEEE C37.94
compliant
UR-series
device
up to 2 km
842755A2.CDR
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a noncompliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard. The
following figure shows the concept.
3
Figure 3-52: IEEE C37.94 connection to non-compliant digital multiplexer
IEEE C37.94
fiber interface
UR-series
device
RS422
interface
IEEE C37.94
converter
up to 2 km
Digital
multiplexer
with EIA-422
interface
842756A2.CDR
In 2008, GE Grid Solutions released revised modules 76 and 77 for C37.94 communication to enable multi-ended fault
location functionality with firmware 5.60 release and higher. All modules 76 and 77 shipped since the change support this
feature and are fully backward compatible with firmware releases below 5.60. For customers using firmware release 5.60
and higher, the module can be identified with "Rev D" printed on it and is to be used on all ends of C30 communication for
two and three terminal applications. Failure to use it at all ends results in intermittent communication alarms. For
customers using firmware revisions below 5.60, it is not required to match the revision of the modules installed.
The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six switches to set the clock configuration. The following figure shows
the functions of these control switches.
Figure 3-53: Switches
Internal timing mode
Loop timing mode
(factory default)
842753A2.CDR
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, set the timing switch selection to internal
timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, set the timing selection to
loop timing mode for connections to higher order systems.
To remove the IEEE C37.94 communications module cover and set the switches:
1.
With power to the relay off, remove the IEEE C37.94 module (type 2G, 2H, 2I, 2J, 76, or 77 module) as follows. Record
the original location of the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct
slot.
2.
Simultaneously pull the ejector/inserter clips located at the top and bottom of each module in order to release the
module for removal.
3.
Remove the module cover screw.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-47
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
4.
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
5.
Set the timing selection switches (channels 1 and 2) to the required timing modes (see description earlier).
6.
Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
7.
Re-insert the IEEE C37.94 module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot
position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged
position as the module is inserted smoothly into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis,
engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module is inserted fully.
Figure 3-54: IEEE C37.94 timing selection switch setting
Bottom cover
Ejector/inserter clip
3
FRONT
Channel 1
Timing selection
switches
Top cover
Channel 2
Cover screw
Ejector/inserter clip
REAR
831774A3.CDR
Modules shipped since January 2012 have status LEDs that indicate the status of the DIP switches, as shown in the
following figure.
3-48
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
Figure 3-55: Status LEDs
Tx1
CH1 Link/Activity LED
COMMS
Rx1
2B
C37.94SM
1300nm single-mode
ELED
2 channel
Tx1
Tx2
CH2 Link/Activity LED
REV. D
Technical support:
Tel: (905)294-6222
Fax: (905)201-2098
(NORTH AMERICA)
1 800 547-8629
3
Rx2
GE Multilin
Tx2
Made in Canada
CH1 Clock Configuration LED
CH2 Clock Configuration LED
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
842837A1.cdr
The clock configuration LED status is as follows:
•
Flashing green — loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet
•
Flashing yellow — internal mode while receiving a valid data packet
•
Solid red — (switch to) internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet
The link/activity LED status is as follows:
•
Flashing green — FPGA is receiving a valid data packet
•
Solid yellow — FPGA is receiving a "yellow bit" and remains yellow for each "yellow bit"
•
Solid red — FPGA is not receiving a valid packet or the packet received is invalid
3.4.9 C37.94SM interface
The UR-series C37.94SM communication modules (2A and 2B) are designed to interface with modified IEEE C37.94
compliant digital multiplexers or IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converters that have been converted from 820 nm multimode fiber optics to 1300 nm ELED single-mode fiber optics. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link
for synchronous data between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard
provides for speeds up to 64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series C37.94SM communication module is 64 kbps only
with n fixed at 1. The frame is a valid ITU-recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and data rate. The
frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
•
Emulated IEEE standard — Emulates C37.94 for 1  64 kbps optical fiber interface (modules set to n = 1 or 64 kbps)
•
Fiber-optic cable type — 9/125 m core diameter optical fiber
•
Fiber-optic mode — Single-mode, ELED compatible with HP HFBR-1315T transmitter and HP HFBR-2316T receiver
•
Fiber-optic cable length — Up to 11.4 km
•
Fiber-optic connector — Type ST
•
Wavelength — 1300 ±40 nm
•
Connection — As per all fiber-optic connections, a Tx-to-Rx connection is required
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-49
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
The UR-series C37.94SM communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that
supports C37.94SM, as shown.
C37.94SM
fiber interface
Digital
multiplexer
C97.94SM
UR-series
device
up to 10 km
842757A2.CDR
It also can be connected directly to any other UR-series relay with a C37.94SM module, as shown.
3
C37.94SM
fiber interface
UR-series
device with
C37.94SM
module
UR-series
device with
C37.94SM
module
up to 10 km
842758A2.CDR
In 2008, GE Grid Solutions released revised modules 2A and 2B for C37.94SM communication to enable multi-ended fault
location functionality with firmware 5.60 release and higher. All modules 2A and 2B shipped since the change support this
feature and are fully backward compatible with firmware releases below 5.60. For customers using firmware release 5.60
and higher, the module can be identified with "Rev D" printed on it and is to be used on all ends of C30 communication for
two and three terminal applications. Failure to use it at all ends results in intermittent communication alarms. For
customers using firmware revisions below 5.60, it is not required to match the revision of the modules installed.
The UR-series C37.94SM module has six switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The following figure shows
the functions of these control switches.
Figure 3-56: Switches
Internal timing mode
Loop timing mode
(factory default)
842753A2.CDR
For the internal timing mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, set the timing switch selection to internal
timing for relay 1 and loop timed for relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the looped timing mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, set the timing selection to
loop timing mode for connections to higher-order systems.
To remove the C37.94SM communications module cover and set the switches:
1.
With power to the relay off, remove the C37.94SM module (module 2A or 2B) as follows. Record the original location of
the module to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot.
2.
Simultaneously pull the ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module in order to release
the module for removal.
3.
Remove the module cover screw.
4.
Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
5.
Set the timing selection switches (channels 1 and 2) to the required timing modes (see description earlier).
3-50
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
DIRECT INPUT AND OUTPUT COMMUNICATIONS
6.
Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
7.
Re-insert the C37.94SM module. Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot
position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged
position as the module is inserted smoothly into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis,
engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module is inserted fully.
Figure 3-57: C37.94SM timing selection switch setting
Bottom cover
Ejector/inserter clip
FRONT
3
Channel 1
Timing selection
switches
Top cover
Channel 2
Cover screw
Ejector/inserter clip
REAR
831774A3.CDR
Modules shipped since January 2012 have status LEDs that indicate the status of the DIP switches, as shown in the
following figure.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-51
ACTIVATE RELAY
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-58: Status LEDs
Tx1
CH1 Link/Activity LED
COMMS
Rx1
2B
C37.94SM
1300nm single-mode
ELED
2 channel
Tx1
Tx2
CH2 Link/Activity LED
REV. D
3
Technical support:
Tel: (905)294-6222
Fax: (905)201-2098
(NORTH AMERICA)
1 800 547-8629
Rx2
GE Multilin
Tx2
Made in Canada
CH1 Clock Configuration LED
CH2 Clock Configuration LED
FRONT VIEW
REAR VIEW
842837A1.cdr
The clock configuration LED status is as follows:
•
Flashing green — loop timing mode while receiving a valid data packet
•
Flashing yellow — internal mode while receiving a valid data packet
•
Solid red — (switch to) internal timing mode while not receiving a valid data packet
The link/activity LED status is as follows:
•
Flashing green — FPGA is receiving a valid data packet
•
Solid yellow — FPGA is receiving a "yellow bit" and remains yellow for each "yellow bit"
•
Solid red — FPGA is not receiving a valid packet or the packet received is invalid
3.5 Activate relay
The relay is in the default “Not Programmed” state when it leaves the factory. When powered up successfully, looking at
the front panel, the "Trouble" LED is on and the "In Service" LED is off. The relay in the “Not Programmed” state blocks
signaling of any output relay. These conditions remain until the relay is explicitly put into “Programmed” state.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
When the relay is powered up, the "Trouble LED" is on, the "In Service" LED is off, and this message
displays, indicating that the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is safeguarding (output
relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings have not been entered. This
message remains until the relay is explicitly put into "Programmed" state.
The relay can be activated on the front panel or in the EnerVista software.
To activate the relay using the front panel:
1.
Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message displays.
2.
Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the SECURITY message displays.
3.
Press the MESSAGE down arrow until the INSTALLATION message displays.
4.
Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message displays.
3-52
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
INSTALL SOFTWARE
SETTINGS

 SETTINGS
 PRODUCT SETUP

 SECURITY


 DISPLAY
 PROPERTIES


 INSTALLATION


RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
5.
After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message displays, press a VALUE key to change the selection to
"Programmed."
6.
Press the ENTER key to save the change.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
7.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Programmed
3
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay is in "Programmed" state and the "In Service"
LED turns on.
To activate the relay using EnerVista software:
1.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Installation and change the Relay Settings field to "Programmed."
2.
Save the change.
3.6 Install software
3.6.1 EnerVista communication overview
The EnerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the front panel RS232 or USB port or the rear RS485 /
Ethernet ports.
To communicate via the RS232 port, use a standard straight-through serial cable. Connect the DB-9 male end to the relay
and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end to the computer COM2 port as described in the CPU Communication Ports section
earlier in this chapter.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-53
INSTALL SOFTWARE
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-59: Relay communication options
Regional
control
center
Remote
communications link
Ethernet
10/100 Mbps
Local
control
UR-series IED
EnerVista
3
Engineer
GE Multilin F485
communications converter
Modem
RS485 115 kbps
RS232
EnerVista
Reports
EnerVista
Troubleshooting
Commissioning
Setting changes
842759A2.CDR
To communicate through the C30 rear RS485 port from a computer RS232 port, the GE Grid Solutions RS232/RS485
converter box is required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a straight-through serial
cable. A shielded twisted-pair wire (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the C30 rear communications port.
The converter terminals (+, –, GND) are connected to the C30 communication module (+, –, COM) terminals. See the CPU
Communication Ports section in chapter 3 for details. The line is terminated with an R-C network (that is, 120 , 1 nF) as
described in this chapter.
3.6.2 System requirements
The relay front panel or the EnerVista UR Setup software can be used to communicate with the relay. The software
interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the computer monitor can display more
information.
The system requirements for the EnerVista software are as follows:
•
Intel Pentium processor (dual core) or (recommended) Core Duo
•
One of the following operating systems in the required EnerVista language, such as English or French:
•
3-54
–
Windows 7 with Service Pack 1 (32-bit or 64-bit)
–
Windows 10
–
Windows Server 2008 Release 2 with Service Pack 1 (64-bit)
–
Windows Server 2012 Release 2 (64-bit)
–
Windows Server 2016
1 GB free hard drive space
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
•
2 GB RAM
•
1280 x 800 display screen
INSTALL SOFTWARE
3.6.3 Install software
After ensuring that the requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup software are met, there are three ways to install the
software:
•
From the DVD
•
Download EnerVista Launchpad software from http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin and install it
•
Download the EnerVista UR Setup software from http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin and install it
Install on a computer that has an operating system in the required language, for example a German operating system for
use with EnerVista software in German.
Unless specifically granted, the software can be installed on one computer and used by one user.
The front panel can be switched in the EnerVista software between enhanced and basic panels under
Maintenance > Change Front Panel.
To install the software from the DVD and using EnerVista Launchpad:
1.
Insert the DVD into the DVD drive of your computer.
2.
Click the Install Now button and follow the instructions.
3.
When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4.
Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.
Figure 3-60: Adding a UR device in Launchpad window
5.
In the EnerVista Launch Pad window, click the Add Product button and select the appropriate product as follows.
Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software release, or select CD if you do not have an Internet
connection, then click the Add Now button to list software items for the product. EnerVista Launchpad obtains the
software from the Internet or DVD and automatically starts the installation program after prompting about updates.
From the web, the software is downloaded. A wizard opens.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-55
3
INSTALL SOFTWARE
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-61: Identifying the UR device type
3
6.
In the wizard, click the Next button and complete the process. The files are installed in the directory indicated, and the
installation program automatically creates icons and adds an entry to the Windows start menu.
The UR device is added to the EnerVista Launchpad window, as shown.
Figure 3-62: UR device added to Launchpad window
7.
For other than English, configure the language for the front panel in the EnerVista software under Settings > Product
Setup > Display Properties. User-entered strings are not translated, for example relay names, so setting the
language now ensures that the names are entered/displayed in the required language. For the EnerVista software
language, access the View > Language menu item.
3.6.3.1 Install EGD software
Install Ethernet Global Data (EGD) software separately if required. Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5 or later is required.
1.
Access the folder in which the UR software is installed, such as C:\Program Files (x86)\GE Power Management\URPC
2.
Access the EGD Client Installer folder, double-click the .exe file, such as the EgdClient6101.exe file, and complete the
wizard.
The software installs. When Microsoft .NET Framework 4.5 or higher is not installed, it installs automatically version 4.5.
When an EGD device/client is connected to a UR, an Ethernet Global Data item displays in the UR EnerVista Setup
software.
3-56
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
ADD DEVICE TO SOFTWARE
3.7 Add device to software
You connect remotely to the C30 through the rear RS485 or Ethernet port with a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup
software. The C30 also can be accessed locally with a computer through the front panel RS232 or USB port or the rear
Ethernet port using the Quick Connect feature.
The following procedures are outlined:
•
Add device for serial access; see the Configure Serial Connection section
•
Add device for the rear Ethernet port; see the Configure Ethernet Connection section
•
Add device for access using a modem; see the Configure Modem Connection section
•
Connect locally with a computer through either the front RS232 or USB port or rear Ethernet port; see the Connect to
the C30 section
•
Discover automatically UR devices within a network; see the Automatic Discovery of UR Devices section
Devices in the Device Setup window are listed in the order entered.
Devices in the main software window are listed alphabetically. Use the Device Name to order them as required, for
example B30 Odessa, B30 Truro, B90, T35.
You cannot import a file to add a device to the software. You can import settings as outlined at the end of the chapter.
The Quick Connect button also can be used to add devices. The device is added to a Quick Connect menu item in the
Online Window area, cannot be moved from it to another grouping, and needs to be renamed in the Device Setup window.
GE instead recommends using the Device Setup window to add devices, as outlined here.
3.7.1 Set IP address in UR
Implement IP addresses for the computer and a C30 device as follows.
The UR family supports the use of subnetworks as documented in RFC 950, which divides class-based networks into
subnetworks (non-CIDR). The classes and IP address ranges are defined as follows.
Table 3-7: IP address classes
Classes
IP address range
Default subnet mask address
UR devices
A
1.0.0.0 to 127.255.255.255
255.0.0.0
65,535 or more
B
128.0.0.0 to 191.255.255.255
255.255.0.0
255 to 65,534
C
192.0.0.0 to 223.255.255.255
255.255.255.0
0 to 254
D
224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255
(Reserved for multicasting)
E
240.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
(Reserved)
Both network and subnet addresses are contained within a range. The number of hosts determines the class and
addresses as follows:
•
Class A 255.0.0.0 — The first octet (255) specifies the network, the second to fourth octets (0) specify the subnet and
host. Use this class when you have more than 65,535 hosts (UR devices).
•
Class B 255.255.0.0 — The first two octets (255) specify the network, the third octet (0) specifies the subnet, and the
fourth octet (0) specifies the host. Use this class when you have 255 to 65,534 hosts (UR devices).
•
Class C 255.255.255.0 — The first three octets (255) specify the network and the last octet (0) specifies the subnet and
host. Use this class when you have up to 254 hosts (UR devices).
An example of implementation is one computer and one UR device. Because there is one UR device, class C addressing is
required. So we use UR 192.167.2.x with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and computer 192.167.3.x with subnet mask
255.255.255.0.
For older, non-CIDR routing protocols, such as RIP version 1, follow these restrictions:
•
Identical subnet masks — Use a single mask for all subnets within a network
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-57
3
ADD DEVICE TO SOFTWARE
•
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Contiguous subnets — The subnets must be contiguous and not split among networks. The subnets cannot pass
traffic through other networks.
The IP and subnet addresses need to be added to the UR for Ethernet communication.
For serial communication, for example using any front RS232 port and the Quick Connect feature, the addresses are not
required, but typically they are entered to add/configure devices for regular use.
To add the IP addresses:
3
1.
On the front of the UR, press the MENU key until the SETTINGS menu displays.
2.
Navigate to SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  NETWORK PORT  PRT IP ADDRESS.
3.
Enter an IP address, for example 10.11.33.01, and press the ENTER key to save the value. For example, press the period
key to clear any existing address, then press the number keys to add anew address.
4.
In the same menu, select the PRT SUBNET IP MASK setting. Enter a subnet IP address, for example 255.000.000.000 for
255.0.0.0.
5.
Press the ENTER key to save a value.
The gateway address also needs to be configured when connecting through an Ethernet network. Access SETTINGS 
PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IPv4 ROUTE TABLE  DEFAULT IPv4 ROUTE  GATEWAY ADDRESS.
If using a blue or grey Ethernet cable, skip the rest of the this section. If using an orange cross-over Ethernet cable, the
computer needs to be set up as follows.
1.
Use an orange Ethernet cross-over cable to connect the computer to the rear Ethernet port. In case you need it, the
following figure shows the pinout for an Ethernet cross-over cable.
Figure 3-63: Ethernet cross-over cable PIN layout
2
1
3
4 5 6
7
8
END 1
Pin
Wire color
1
White/orange
2
Orange
3
White/green
4
Blue
5
White/blue
6
Green
7
White/brown
8
Brown
Diagram
END 2
Pin
Wire color
1
White/green
2
Green
3
White/orange
4
Blue
5
White/blue
6
Orange
7
White/brown
8
Brown
Diagram
842799A1.CDR
Next, assign the computer an IP address compatible with the relay’s IP address.
1.
3-58
From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network
connections window. Or in Windows 7, access the Network and Sharing Center in the Control Panel.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
2.
ADD DEVICE TO SOFTWARE
Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select Properties.
3
3.
Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list, and click the Properties button.
4.
Click the “Use the following IP address” box.
5.
Enter an IP address with the first three numbers the same as the IP address of the C30 relay and the last number
different (in this example, 1.1.1.2).
6.
Enter a subnet mask equal to the one set in the C30 (in this example, 255.0.0.0).
7.
Click the OK button to save the values.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-59
ADD DEVICE TO SOFTWARE
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Before continuing, test the Ethernet connection.
1.
Open a Windows console window, for example by selecting Start > Run from the Windows Start menu and typing
“cmd” or clicking the Start button and entering "cmd".
2.
Type the following command, substituting the IP address of 1.1.1.1 with yours:
C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1
3.
If the connection is successful, the system returns four replies similar to the following:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Reply from 1.1.1.1: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=255
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milliseconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
3
4.
Note that the values for time and TTL vary depending on local network configuration.
5.
If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milliseconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
verify the physical connection between the C30 and the computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in
the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  IP ADDRESS setting, then repeat step 2.
6.
If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Hardware error.
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milliseconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
verify the physical connection between the C30 and the computer, and double-check the programmed IP address in
the PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  IP ADDRESS setting, then repeat step 2.
7.
If the following sequence of messages appears when entering the C:\WINNT>ping 1.1.1.1 command:
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
Destination host unreachable.
Destination host unreachable.
Destination host unreachable.
Destination host unreachable.
Ping statistics for 1.1.1.1:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip time in milliseconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0 ms
Pinging 1.1.1.1 with 32 bytes of data:
verify the IP address is programmed in the local computer by entering the ipconfig command in the command
window.
C:\WINNT>ipconfig
Windows IP Configuration
3-60
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
ADD DEVICE TO SOFTWARE
Ethernet adapter <F4FE223E-5EB6-4BFB-9E34-1BD7BE7F59FF>:
Connection-specific DNS suffix. . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection:
Connection-specific DNS suffix . :
IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . : 1.1.1.2
Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . : 255.0.0.0
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . :
C:\WINNT>
Before using the Quick Connect feature through the Ethernet port, disable any configured proxy settings in Internet
Explorer.
1.
Start the Internet Explorer software.
2.
Select the Tools > Internet Options menu item and click the Connections tab.
3.
Click on the LAN Settings button to open the following window.
4.
Ensure that the “Use a proxy server for your LAN” box is not checked.
3
If this computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the computer has been
disconnected from the C30 relay.
1.
Start the Internet Explorer software.
2.
Select the UR device from the EnerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-61
ADD DEVICE TO SOFTWARE
3
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3.
Click the Quick Connect button to open the window.
4.
Select the Ethernet interface and enter the IP address assigned to the C30, then click the Connect button. The
EnerVista UR Setup software creates a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named “Quick
Connect” and displays them on the left side of the screen.
5.
Expand the sections to view data directly from the C30 device.
Each time that the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct
communications to the C30. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the C30 model
number.
When direct communications with the C30 via Ethernet is complete, make the following changes:
1.
From the Windows desktop, right-click the My Network Places icon and select Properties to open the network
connections window.
2.
Right-click the Local Area Connection icon and select the Properties item.
3.
Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item from the list provided and click the Properties button.
4.
Set the computer to “Obtain a relay address automatically” as shown.
3-62
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
ADD DEVICE TO SOFTWARE
If the computer is used to connect to the Internet, re-enable any proxy server settings after the computer has been
disconnected from the C30 relay.
3.7.2 Configure serial connection
Two options are possible: local connection between computer and front RS232 port, and remote connection using the rear
RS485 terminals.
If using Windows 10 and a GE USB-to-Serial Cable Converter (part number 0100-0001) connected between a USB port on
the computer and the front serial port on the UR, use the Prolific driver version 3.2.0.0 from the Internet.
To use the RS485 terminals at the back of the relay, a GE Grid Solutions F485 converter (or compatible RS232-to-RS485
converter) is required. See the F485 instruction manual for details.
1.
Connect the computer to the F485 and the F485 to the RS485 terminal on the back of the UR device. Or connect the
computer to the RS232 port on the front of the relay.
2.
Start the EnerVista UR Setup software, or in EnerVista Launchpad select the UR device to start the software.
3.
Click the Device Setup button. The window opens.
4.
Click the Add Site button. A new category is added. Enter a site name in the Site Name field. Optionally add a short
Description of the site. This example uses “Location 1” as the site name.
5.
Click the Add Device button. A new device is added.
6.
Enter a name in the Device Name field, up to 15 characters, and optionally add a Description of the site. The Color is
for the text in the device list in the Online Window.
7.
Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list. Interface parameters display that must be entered for serial
communications. Try to load automatically the fields by clicking the Read Order Code button.
Figure 3-64: Configuring serial communication
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-63
3
ADD DEVICE TO SOFTWARE
8.
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Enter the COM port used by the computer, the baud rate, and parity settings from the front panel SETTINGS 
PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  SERIAL PORTS menu, and the relay slave address setting from the front panel
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  MODBUS PROTOCOL  MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS menu in their
respective fields.
Baud Rate — Typically 19200 bits per second (bps) for RS232, and higher for RS485. Both modems need to use the
same rate, meaning at the computer and the C30 ends.
Parity — Set to None if unsure
Bits — Set to 8 if unsure
Stop Bits — Set to 1 if unsure
3
Post Terminal Window — Enable this option if you have a Schweitzer Engineering (SEL) SEL-203x Communications
Processor, such as an SEL-2030 or SEL-2032. This option enables display of a terminal window to allow interaction
with the other device.
9.
Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the C30 and upload the order code to the EnerVista software. If a
communications error occurs, ensure that the EnerVista software serial communications values entered in the
previous step correspond to the relay setting values, and also ensure that the same IP address is not assigned to
multiple C30 ports.
10. Click the OK button when the relay order code has been received. The new site and device are added to the Online
Window.
The device has been configured for serial communications. Proceed to the Connect to the C30 section to begin
communication.
3.7.3 Configure Ethernet connection
You connect the Ethernet cable, define a site in the software, then add the relay as a device for the site.
The Ethernet cable can be connected from the relay to an Ethernet network or directly to the computer. The computer and
UR device must be on the same subnet.
1.
Connect the Ethernet network cable and any SFP supplied with the C30 to the Ethernet port on the back of the device.
2.
Start the EnerVista UR Setup software, or in EnerVista Launchpad select the UR device to start the software.
3.
Click the Device Setup button. The window opens.
4.
Click the Add Site button. A new category is added. Enter a site name in the Site Name field. Optionally add a short
Description of the site. This example uses “Location 1” as the site name.
5.
Click the Add Device button. A new device is added.
6.
Enter a name in the Device Name field, up to 15 characters, and optionally add a Description of the site. The Color is
for the text in the device list in the Online Window.
7.
Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. This displays a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for Ethernet functionality.
3-64
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
ADD DEVICE TO SOFTWARE
Figure 3-65: Configuring Ethernet communication
3
8.
Enter the relay IP Address, which can be viewed on the device front panel under SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP 
COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK  NETWORK PORT  PRT IP ADDRESS. Once the IP address is entered, try to load
automatically the fields by clicking the Read Order Code button.
9.
Enter the relay Slave address and Modbus Port address values from the settings in the front panel SETTINGS 
PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS MODBUS PROTOCOL menu.
10. If using a gateway to connect to the device, select Yes from the drop-down list.
11. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the C30 device and upload the order code. If the device was entered
already, a message displays "Device ’x’ is also using IP address...." If a communications error occurs, ensure that the
values entered in the previous steps correspond to the relay setting values, and also ensure that the same IP address
is not assigned to multiple C30 ports.
12. Click the OK button when the relay order code has been received. The new site and device are added to the Online
Window.
The device has been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to the Connect to the C30 section to begin
communications.
3.7.4 Configure modem connection
A modem connection allows a computer to communicate with a UR device over phone lines.
Two modems are required. One modem is connected to the UR device, either by connecting the serial cable to the front
panel port or through a RS485 box to the rear terminals of the UR device. The second modem is connected to the
computer that initiates the connection.
To add a UR device for modem connections:
1.
Connect the modems to the computer and UR.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-65
ADD DEVICE TO SOFTWARE
2.
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Start the EnerVista UR Setup software, or in EnerVista Launchpad select the UR device to start the software.
3.
Click the Device Setup button. The window opens.
4.
Click the Add Site button. A new category is added. Enter a site name in the Site Name field, such as London East.
Optionally add a short Description of the site, such as the address or intersection.
5.
Click the Add Device button. A new device is added.
6.
Enter a name in the Device Name field, up to 15 characters, and optionally add a Description of the site. The Color is
for the text in the device list in the Online Window.
7.
Select “Modem” from the Interface drop-down list. This displays a number of interface parameters that must be
entered.
8.
Select "Generic Modem" from the Modem Name drop-down list, then enter the Phone Number to dial to establish
communication with the remote modem.
Post Terminal Window — Enable this option if you have a Schweitzer Engineering (SEL) SEL-203x Communications
Processor, such as an SEL-2030 or SEL-2032. It enables display of a terminal window to allow interaction with the
other device.
3
9.
Once the phone number is entered, try to load automatically the device information by clicking the Read Order Code
button.
10. Click the OK button when the relay order code has been received. The new device is added to the Online window.
The UR device has been added to the software.
3.7.5 Automatic discovery of UR devices
The EnerVista UR Setup software can find and communicate to all UR-family devices located on an Ethernet network.
Using the Discover button in the Device Setup window, a single click of the mouse triggers the software to detect any URs
located on the network. This is done by searching a range of IP addresses based on the subnet mask of the computer.
When a UR device is detected, the EnerVista UR Setup software proceeds to configure all settings and order code options
in the window. This feature allows the user to identify and interrogate all UR devices at a location.
Examples of address ranges are as follows:
•
If the host has an IP address of 3.94.247.10 and its subnet mask is 255.255.252.0, then the host’s subnet is 3.94.244.0,
and the possible IP addresses in this subnet are
3.94.244.1 to 254
3.94.245.1 to 254
3.94.246.1 to 254
3.94.247.1 to 254
The discover function scans all those possible IP addresses to detect UR relays.
•
If the host has an IP address of 3.94.247.145 and its subnet mask is 255.255.255.128, then the host’s subnet is
3.94.247.128, and the discover function scans IP addresses of 3.94.247.128 to 3.94.248.254 for UR relays
To automatically add UR devices:
1.
In the EnerVista software, click the Device Setup button. The window opens.
2.
Click the Discover button. The software searches for UR devices on the computer subnet and adds any found to the
Online Window area. If a required device is not found, add it manually as outlined earlier.
3-66
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
CONNECT TO THE C30
Figure 3-66: Discover button to detect UR devices in network
3.8 Connect to the C30
3
There are four ways to the connect to the device, as follows:
•
RS232 or USB port (outlined here)
•
RS485 port
•
Ethernet port (outlined here)
•
LAN
When unable to connect because of an "ACCESS VIOLATION," access Device Setup and refresh the order code for the
device.
When unable to connect, ensure that the same IP address is not assigned to multiple C30 ports, for example under
Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Network.
If still unable to connect, try unplugging and replugging the Ethernet connection. If that does not work, try to ping the
device from the computer, and if unsuccessful, restart the computer.
When multiple computers are connected to a C30 device, EnerVista settings windows are not updated
automatically. They are refreshed when re-opened. If a user changes a setting on one computer, the other users
need to refresh the display by closing and opening the settings window to see the change. To ensure that current
settings are always viewed, close settings windows when not in use so that they are up-to-date when next
accessed.
3.8.1 Connect to the C30 in EnerVista
For information on using the EnerVista software, see the Interfaces chapter.
To access the relay in EnerVista:
1.
Open the Settings > Product Setup > Display Properties window as shown. The window opens with a status indicator
on the lower left of the EnerVista UR Setup window.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-67
CONNECT TO THE C30
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-67: EnerVista window
Quick action hot links
3
Expand the site list by double-clicking
or selecting the +/– box.
Communications status indicators:
Green = OK
Red = No communications
UR icon = report is open
842743A3.CDR
2.
If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the
back of the relay and that the relay has been properly set up for communication.
3.
If a relay icon appears in place of the status indicator, then a report (such as an oscillography or event record) is open.
Close the report to re-display the green status indicator.
4.
The Display Properties settings can now be viewed, edited, or printed.
3.8.1.1 Quick action hot links
The EnerVista UR Setup software has several quick action buttons to provide instant access to several functions that are
performed often when using URs. From the online window, users can select the relay to interrogate from a pull-down
window, then click the button for the action to perform. The following quick action functions are available:
•
View the event record
•
View the last recorded oscillography record
•
View the C30 protection summary
•
View all of the C30 metering values
•
View the status of all C30 inputs and outputs
•
Generate a service report
3.8.2 Use Quick Connect via front RS232 port
This feature applies to the enhanced and basic front panels.
To connect to the UR from a computer using a serial cable:
1.
3-68
Connect an RS232 serial cable to the computer and the front panel RS232 port. For example, use a USB-to-serial
RS232 DB9M converter cable when connecting to the USB port on the computer. If using Windows 10 and a GE USBto-Serial Cable Converter (part number 0100-0001) connected between a USB port on the computer and the front
serial port on the UR, use the Prolific driver version 3.2.0.0 from the Internet.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
CONNECT TO THE C30
2.
Start the EnerVista UR Setup software, or in EnerVista Launchpad select the UR device to start the software.
3.
Click the Quick Connect button. The window opens.
Figure 3-68: Quick Connect window to access a device
3
4.
Select the serial Interface and the communications port (COM Port) from the drop-down lists, then click Connect. The
COM Port is that of the computer.
5.
The EnerVista software creates a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named “Quick
Connect” and displays them in the Online Window. Expand the sections to view data directly from the UR device. Use
the Device Setup button to change the site name.
Each time that the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct
communications to the C30. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the C30 model
number.
3.8.3 Use Quick Connect via front USB port
This feature applies to the graphical front panel.
To connect to the UR from a computer using a USB cable:
1.
Connect the cable to the computer and the front panel USB port (square connector).
2.
Start the EnerVista UR Setup software, or in EnerVista Launchpad select the UR device to start the software.
3.
Click the Quick Connect button to open the window.
4.
Select the USB Interface and the "GE Virtual Serial Port" driver from the drop-down list, then click Connect. If the GE
driver does not display, it means that the USB cable was connected on Windows 10 when upgrading the UR software.
You need to re-install the EnerVista software with the USB cable disconnected.
5.
The EnerVista software creates a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named “Quick
Connect” and displays them in the Online Window. Expand the sections to view data directly from the UR device. Use
the Device Setup button to change the site name.
Each time that the EnerVista UR Setup software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct
communications to the C30. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the C30 model
number.
3.8.4 Use Quick Connect via a rear Ethernet port
To connect to a UR using an Ethernet cable:
1.
In the EnerVista software, click the Quick Connect button. The window opens.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-69
SET UP CYBERSENTRY AND CHANGE DEFAULT PASSWORD
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-69: Quick Connect window for Ethernet connection
3
2.
Select the Ethernet interface and enter the IP address assigned to the C30, then click the Connect button. The
EnerVista UR Setup software creates a site named “Quick Connect” with a corresponding device also named "Quick
Connect" and displays them in the Online Window.
3.
Expand the sections to view data directly from the C30 device. Use the Device Setup button to change the site name.
Each time that the EnerVista software is initialized, click the Quick Connect button to establish direct communications to
the C30. This ensures that configuration of the EnerVista UR Setup software matches the C30 model number.
3.9 Set up CyberSentry and change default password
If and when first using CyberSentry security, use the following procedure for set up.
1.
Log in to the relay as Administrator by using the VALUE keys on the front panel or through EnerVista connected serially
(so that no IP address is required). If logging in through EnerVista choose Device authentication (see figure). Enter the
default password "ChangeMe1#". Note that the LOCK SETTINGS setting needs to be disabled (default) in the SETTINGS 
PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SUPERVISORY menu.
2.
Enable the Supervisor role if you have a need for it.
3.
Make any required changes in configuration, such as setting a valid IP address for communication over Ethernet.
4.
Log out of the Administrator account by choosing None.
Next, device or server authentication can be chosen on the login screen, but the choice is available only in EnerVista. Use
Device authentication to log in using the five pre-configured roles (Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, Observer,
or Administrator and Supervisor when Device authentication is disabled). When using a serial connection, only Device
authentication is supported. When Server authentication is required, characteristics for communication with a RADIUS
server must be configured on the UR. This is possible only through the EnerVista software. The RADIUS server itself also
must be configured. At the end of this instruction manual, the appendix called RADIUS Server Configuration gives an
example of how to set up a simple RADIUS server. Once both the RADIUS server and the parameters for connecting the UR
to the server have been configured, you can choose Server authentication on the login screen of EnerVista.
3-70
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
IMPORT SETTINGS
Figure 3-70: Login screen for CyberSentry
3
During the commissioning phase, you have the option to bypass the use of passwords. Do so by enabling the Bypass
Access setting under Settings > Product Setup > Security > Supervisory. Be sure to disable this bypass setting after
commissioning the device.
You can change the password for any role either from the front panel or through EnerVista. If using EnerVista, navigate to
Settings > Product Setup > Security. Change the Local Administrator Password, for example. It is strongly
recommended that the password for the Administrator be changed from the default. Changing the passwords for the
other three roles is optional.
3.10 Import settings
Options are
•
Import settings from XML file — Import all settings or a group of settings from an XML file to a device in the Offline
Window area. Examples are Control elements, FlexLogic operands, and System Setup settings. This feature uses a
built-in import/export tool.
•
Import settings from device files — Import a URS, IID, or CID file to a device in the Offline Window area
3.10.1 import settings from XML file
All settings, groups of settings, and/or individual settings can be imported, such as System Setup, FlexLogic operands,
inputs/outputs, protection, and Control elements. A built-in import/export tool is used.
Note the following behavior:
•
Available in English only
•
Works in the Offline Window area
•
Supports older firmware versions too, such as 6.x
•
Import must be to same version, such as 8.03 to 8.03
•
Except for B90, import can be to a different product, such as L90 to D60; order codes do not need to match
•
Setting must exist in target device
•
Complete single-line diagram can be imported, not parts of it
•
Engineer function/menu item is not included
•
Order codes must match when applying settings from the Offline Window area to a live device in the Online Window
area. For example, settings from a C30 in the Offline Window area cannot be applied directly to a live C60 device.
A B90 device can import settings only from a B90 device.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-71
IMPORT SETTINGS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
For information on exporting, see the Maintenance chapter.
Features in the tool include
3
•
Ability to perform global import (Import All button), by current window (Import button), or individual setting (rightclick)
•
Can import from a different dataset, such as from Dataset 3 to Dataset 2
•
When a setting is not present in the target device, it cannot be selected/activated for the import device and the
Import button is inactive
•
Use the search box at the top-left to locate setting names and values, highlighted in blue
•
Use the Compare by Lines and Compare VOs drop-down lists to sort display of FlexLogic equations
•
Use the Left Entry From / Left Entry To boxes to display select rows
•
Enable the Synchronous Scrolling check box to lock scrolling for target and import devices
•
Add rows by right-clicking; validation is done later by the software
•
Use the Comparison Report button to view quickly all differences, whether saved or not
•
Use the Target Device Report to view quickly the imported settings, whether saved or not
•
Click the Save button to save imports, otherwise none are
The following procedures outline how to import settings, apply to a live device, compare settings, and view imported
settings.
To import settings:
1.
In EnerVista, right-click the device in the Offline Window area and select the Import Settings option. A window opens.
If the device is not listed in the Offline Window area, right-click it in the Online Window area and select the Add Device
to Offline Window option.
2.
Select the XML file to import, and click the Open button.
When the firmware versions differ, a message displays and the file cannot be imported.
When the firmware versions match, a window opens that compares existing and import settings. Existing settings are
on the left, and settings to be imported are on the right. The window for FlexLogic operands differs, allowing more
granularity.
When the order codes of the existing and imported setting files do not match, but both devices share the same
function(s), then the comparison list shows the common settings instead of all the settings. For example, the distance
protection function exists both in L90 and D60. The software allows importing L90 distance protection to D60 distance,
and vice versa.
With successful launch, the device with the settings to be imported displays on the right, and the targeted device to
receive these settings is on the left. The differences are highlighted in orange. When check boxes are deselected on
the right side, it means that there are no differences or that settings are not present in the target device. (For a
summary, click the Comparison Report button at the top-right, as outlined in the next procedure.)
3-72
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
IMPORT SETTINGS
Figure 3-71: Import settings window before clicking Import button
3
3.
Review the settings, either in the main window or using the Comparison Report.
If required, deselect any settings on the right side that are no longer wanted for import.
If required, copy any setting in the import device by right-clicking the value, selecting the Copy option, and Pasting it
in the target setting field. Or select the Import option.
4.
To filter FlexLogic operands, click the Compare by Lines / Compare VOs button to toggle.
Compare by Lines — Displays FlexLogic operands 1 to 1024.
Compare VOs — For virtual outputs, enable the check boxes of those wanted, for both the import and target devices.
5.
To import the settings for the window currently active, click the Import button. Or to import all settings, click the
Import All button. The settings are imported, as shown in green.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-73
IMPORT SETTINGS
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
Figure 3-72: Import settings window after clicking Import button
3
6.
If required, to undo an import, click the Undo Import button. Or, to undo an import and to refresh all entries to their
original state, click the Restore button.
7.
To save the changes, click the Save button and confirm at the prompt. Or to cancel all changes, click the Cancel
button. The window closes.
To apply the settings to a live device:
1.
Drag-and-drop the device entry from the Offline Window area to an entry in the Online Window area. Individual
settings also can be dragged and dropped. The order codes must match.
To compare settings:
1.
Click the Comparison Report button at the top-right of the window. This displays a summary of activity and includes
following settings: different, missing, imported, and invalid.
Number of Differences — The number of settings in the target device having setting values different from the import
device
Number of Missing Settings — The number of settings that are not found in the target device settings
Number of Settings Imported — The number of settings imported in the target device
Number of Invalid Settings — The number of settings that are same in both devices but the import device setting
value is not within range (out-of-range) of the target device setpoint range. For example, a 'FuncName Block' setting is
available in both import and target devices. The import device 'FuncName Block' setting is configured as '87L TRIP
OPIOC 1 OP,' however operand '87L TRIP OPIOC 1 OP' is not within the range of the target device.
2.
To save the display as an HTML file, click the Save to File button.
To view imported settings on the target device:
1.
3-74
Click the Target Device Report button at the top-right of the window.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
IMPORT SETTINGS
When no settings have been imported yet, the window shows basic information about the receiving device, such as
order code.
When settings have been imported, whether saved or not, a report displays. It is a comparison of the target device
before and after import.
For invalid settings for the target device, a message displays, they are highlighted in red in the main window, and they
are listed in red at the bottom of the window. This means that the target device does not have the feature and cannot
accept the settings. In the example shown, the device does not have bus functions, so the settings are invalid. Scroll
through the list to review the invalid settings. Note that the sets of invalid setting groups are highlighted in red on the
left side of the window (not shown).
Figure 3-73: Invalid settings on the target device in red
3
2.
To save the display as an HTML file, click the Save to File button.
3.10.2 Import settings from device files
The following file types can be imported:
•
URS — UR settings file (firmware version7.3x or earlier)
•
IID — Instantiated IED capability description file — Actual settings on UR
•
CID — Configured IED description file — Settings sent to the UR (may or may not be actual settings). When using IEC
61850, network settings can also be configured by accepting a CID file that includes them, as long as the IP address of
at least one port is manually configured in the relay before the CID file is sent and the IP address matches that in the
file.
The import is done in the Offline Window area.
To import a settings file:
1.
In the Offline Window area, right-click the device and select the Add Device from File option. The device is that from
which you want to import settings.
2.
If required, change the Files of type drop-down list.
3.
Select the file to import.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-75
CONNECT TO D400 GATEWAY
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
To apply the settings to a live device:
1.
Drag-and-drop the device entry from the Offline Window area to its entry in the Online Window area. Individual
settings also can be dragged and dropped. The order codes must match.
This is what happens:
•
CID — For version 7.30 or later, a new URS file generates and moves into a new device folder, generating SCL files from
the new URS file. Files in the folder have new time stamps. The CID file retains its time stamp.
•
URS — When not IEC 61850 and version is lower than 7.30, the file is added and time stamp is unchanged. When
clicking in the software on the tree element, a device folder is created, the original file moves into it, and time stamp is
on the URS file is retained.
When EIC 61850 and version is 7.30 or later, the file is added and time stamp is unchanged. When clicking in the
software on the tree element, a device folder is created, the original file moves into it, SCL files are generated there,
and the "Last modified" time stamp on the URS file changes.
3
3.11 Connect to D400 gateway
A GE Multilin D400 Substation Gateway can be used to collect data from UR devices in a local area network (LAN). It collects
metering, status, event, and fault report data from serial or LAN-based intelligent substation devices, and it pre-processes
the data. The D400 supports up to 16 serial and eight network connections, with multiple devices possible on each serial
connection. Up to 10 concurrent file transfer sessions are possible, meaning data for up to 10 URs can be transferred at
the same time and any additional IEDs are queued on a first-come-first-served basis. The D400 can then upload files to a
demilitarized zone (DMZ) server at the enterprise level.
Setup is as follows. For UR devices with the CyberSentry software option, when there is a need to retrieve periodically the
logs from the UR securely without a human interface, the following approach can be used. See the D400 manual for
configuration details to achieve it.
A UR in the substation can authenticate a user either connecting to a RADIUS server or on the device itself. This depends on
the user name used for authentication on a connection. The D400 connects to the UR device using an Ethernet, USB, or
serial port on the UR. At the other end, the cable attaches to the rear of D400. Use the D400 software to configure a serial
or network communication/connection for the UR, then to configure the IED device blocks/clients for the UR, and then to
configure record retrieval. Once configured, the UR and D400 use a keyfile authentication mechanism to establish
communication.
For UR devices with the IEC 61850 software option, also use the D400 IEC 61850 Loader software.
When a D400 detects new files available for download from a UR, it connects to the UR and reads the files via Secure File
Transfer Protocol (SFTP) protocol. The following files can be transferred:
•
Oscillography files
•
Event records
•
Log files
•
Configuration (setting) files
The D400 information is viewable in its software and in a web browser.
3.11.1 Oscillography files
These are stored in COMTRADE format in the D400 folder system using the UR site and device name.
3.11.2 Event records
These are stored as the EVT.TXT file in the D400 folder system using the UR site and device name.
3-76
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
CONNECT TO D400 GATEWAY
3.11.3 Log files
Log files can be retrieved for UR 7.0 and later. The following file types are possible, stored in the D400 folder system using
the UR site and device name:
•
factory_event.txt — Information about change methods and origins. Saved with a "_YYMMDDhhmmss" retrieval time
stamp, for example FACTORY_EVENT_170525183124.TXT.
•
setting_changes.log — Information on what settings have been changed. Saved with a "_YYMMDDhhmmss" retrieval
time stamp, for example SETTING_CHANGES_170525183124.TXT.
3.11.4 Setting files
These are the configuration/settings files in the IEC 61850 SCL/IID format. The ur.iid file is saved with a
"_YYMMDDhhmmss" retrieval time stamp, for example ur_170525183124.iid. It is stored in the D400 folder system using
the UR site and device name.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3-77
3
CONNECT TO D400 GATEWAY
CHAPTER 3: INSTALLATION
3
3-78
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C30 Controller System
Chapter 4: Interfaces
Interfaces
This chapter explains the EnerVista software interface, the front panel interface, logic diagrams, and Engineer interface for
logic design and monitoring.
4.1 EnerVista software interface
4.1.1 Introduction
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and troubleshoot relays
connected over local or wide-area networks. It can be used while disconnected (offline) or connected (online) to a UR
device. In offline mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to the device. In online mode,
communication with the device is real-time.
The EnerVista UR Setup software is provided with every C30. This chapter outlines the EnerVista software interface. The
EnerVista UR Setup help file in the software also provides details for getting started and using the software interface.
4.1.2 Settings files
The EnerVista software supports the following three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
•
In offline mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later transfer to relays
•
While connected to a relay to modify relay settings, and then save the settings to the relay
•
Create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while connected to the relay
See the back up section in the Maintenance chapter for instructions on how to create a settings file either offline or online.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the
following types of relay settings:
•
Device definition
•
Product setup
•
FlexLogic
•
Control elements
•
Inputs/outputs
•
Remote resources
•
Testing
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-1
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The following communications settings are not transferred to the C30 with settings files:
Modbus Slave Address
Modbus TCP Port Number
RS485 COM2 Baud Rate
RS485 COM2 Parity
COM2 Minimum Response Time
COM2 Selection
RRTD Slave Address
RRTD Baud Rate
IP Address (see end of previous chapter for information)
IP Subnet Mask
IP Routing
When a settings file is loaded to a C30 that is in-service, the following sequence occurs:
4
1.
The C30 takes itself out of service.
2.
The C30 issues a UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED major self-test error.
3.
The C30 closes the critical fail contact.
The Maintenance chapter outlines how to use a settings file in the .urs format for backup and restore.
4.1.3 Event viewing
In online or offline mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered parameters as follows:
•
Event recorder — The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed
chronologically from most recent to oldest
•
Oscillography — The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of power
system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events
Event records are viewable at software and device-specific levels. Access the former under Admin > Event Log > View.
Access the latter under Actual Values > Records > Event Record.
Event record entries for CyberSentry are explained in the next chapter. The following table outlines some software-level
entries.
Table 4-1: Event record descriptions
Event
Description
EnerVista UR Setup SESSION STARTED
The EnerVista software was launched
Language was changed.
The user changed the software language using the View > Language menu item
DEFAULT USERS CREATED
The user management window was launched using the Admin > User Management menu
item
: Successful upload of firmware
END
Firmware verified
Firmware uploaded
Firmware erased
START: Upload new firmware
The firmware on a device was upgraded
EnerVista UR Setup EVENT LOG CLEARED The event record was cleared. All event records were deleted using the Admin > Event Log >
Clear menu item.
4.1.4 File support
The following support applies, where the Settings List is at the bottom left and the Site List is at the top left of the EnerVista
window:
4-2
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
•
Execution — Any EnerVista UR Setup file that is opened launches the application or provides focus to the already
opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a .urs extension) that had been removed from the Settings List
navigation menu, it is added back to the menu.
•
Drag and Drop — The device settings and individual settings can be dragged and dropped between the Online and
Offline Window areas. Also, any Windows Explorer directory folder is a file drag source and drop target.
New files that are dropped into the Offline Window are added to the tree, which is automatically sorted alphabetically
with respect to settings file names. In the Online Window, files or individual menu items that are dropped in the
selected device menu are sent automatically to the online device.
4.1.5 EnerVista main window
The EnerVista UR Setup software window has the following components:
1.
Title bar that shows the pathname of the active data view or the name of the software
2.
Main window menu bar
3.
Main window toolbar
4.
Site list / online window area
5.
Settings list / offline window area
6.
Software windows, with common toolbar
7.
Settings file data view windows, with common toolbar
8.
Workspace area with data view tabs
9.
Status bar
4
10. Quick action hot links
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-3
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-1: EnerVista UR Setup software window
2
7
6
1
3
10
4
4
5
9
8
842786A2.CDR
When the Offline Window has devices saved to it, it includes a Reserved entry with spare settings when customer-specific
functions are provided on a UR.
4-4
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
Figure 4-2: Reserved settings
4
4.1.6 Protection summary window
The Protection Summary is a graphical user interface to manage elements, such as enabling and disabling them. Access it
under Settings > Protection Summary. See the Settings chapter for information on use.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-5
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-3: Protection Summary interface (B30 example shown)
4
4.1.7 Settings templates
Settings file templates simplify the configuration and commissioning of multiple relays that protect similar assets. An
example is a substation that has 10 similar feeders protected by 10 UR F60 relays.
In these situations, typically 90% or greater of the settings are identical among devices. The templates allow engineers to
configure and test these common settings, then lock them so that they are not available to users. For example, locked
settings can be hidden from view for field engineers, allowing them to quickly identify and concentrate on specific settings.
The remaining settings (typically 10% or less) can be specified as editable and made available to field engineers installing
the devices. These are settings such as protection element pickup values and CT and VT ratios.
The settings template mode allows the user to define which settings are visible in the software. Settings templates can be
applied to both settings files (settings file templates) and online devices (online settings templates). The functionality is
identical for both purposes.
Template mode is available in the English software only.
Settings file conversion from previous firmware versions is supported.
4.1.7.1 Enable the settings template
The settings file template feature is disabled by default. It can be enabled in offline or online mode.
To enable in offline mode the settings template for UR settings files:
1.
Locate the settings file in the Offline Window area of the EnerVista UR Setup software. If not there, a file can be added
from an online device by right-clicking it and selecting the Add Device to Offline Window option.
2.
In the Offline Window area, right-click the selected device or settings file and select the Template Mode > Create
Template option.
The settings file template is now enabled and the file menus display in light blue. The settings file is now in template
editing mode. To undo the action, select Template Mode > Remove Template.
4-6
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
Alternatively, to apply the settings template to online settings:
1.
Locate the device in the Online Window area of the EnerVista UR Setup software.
2.
Right-click the device and select the Template Mode > Create Template option. The software prompts for a template
password. This password is required to use the template feature and must be at least four characters in length.
Figure 4-4: Entering a settings file password
3.
Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The online settings template is now enabled. The device is now in template editing mode.
4.1.7.2 Edit the settings template
The settings template editing feature allows the user to specify which settings are available for viewing and modification
in EnerVista UR Setup. By default, all settings except the FlexLogic equation editor settings are locked.
1.
With the template already enabled, locate the device or settings file in the Online or Offline Window area in the
software.
2.
Right-click the device or file and select the Template Mode > Edit Template option to verify or place the device in
template editing mode (check mark beside option). If prompted, enter the template password then click OK.
3.
Open the relevant settings window that contains settings to be specified as viewable.
By default, all settings are specified as locked and displayed against a grey background. The icon on the upper right of
the settings window indicates that the EnerVista software is in EDIT mode. The following example shows the phase
time overcurrent settings window in edit mode.
Figure 4-5: Settings template with all settings specified as locked
4.
Specify the settings to make viewable by clicking them.
A setting available to view displays with a yellow background.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-7
4
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-6: Settings template with two settings specified as editable
4
5.
Click the Save button to save changes to the settings template.
6.
Continue through any other settings window to specify all viewable settings.
The next time that the device/settings are accessed, only those specified as viewable/editable display in the menu
hierarchy.
4.1.7.3 Add password protection to a template
GE recommends that templates be saved with password protection to maximize security.
When templates are created for online settings, the password is added during the initial template creation step. It
does not need to be added after the template is created.
To add password protection to a settings file template:
1.
In the Offline Window area, right-click the device and select the Template Mode > Password Protect Template
option.
The software prompts for a template password. This password must be at least four characters in length.
2.
Enter and re-enter the new password, then click OK to continue.
The settings file template is now secured with password protection.
4.1.7.4 View the settings template
Once all necessary settings are specified for viewing, users are able to view the settings template on the online device or
settings file. There are two ways to specify the settings view with the settings template feature:
•
Display only those settings available for editing
•
Display all settings, with settings not available for editing greyed-out
To display settings available for editing:
1.
Right-click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and apply the template by selecting the Template Mode >
4-8
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
View In Template Mode option.
2.
Enter the template password if prompted, then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users are limited to view and edit the settings specified by the template. The effect of
applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown.
Figure 4-7: Applying templates using the View in Template Mode command
4
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied.
Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via
the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve
settings be available.
842858A1.CDR
Viewing the settings in template mode also modifies the settings menu, showing only the settings categories that contain
editable settings. The effect of applying the template to a typical settings menu is shown as follows.
Figure 4-8: Applying templates using the View in Template Mode settings command
To display settings available for editing and settings locked by the template:
1.
Right-click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and apply the template by selecting the Template Mode >
View All Settings option.
2.
Enter the template password then click OK to apply the template.
Once the template has been applied, users are limited to edit the settings specified by the template, but all settings are
shown. The effect of applying the template to the phase time overcurrent settings is shown as follows.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-9
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-9: Applying templates using the View All Settings command
Phase time overcurrent settings window without template applied.
4
Phase time overcurrent window with template applied via
the Template Mode > View All Settings command.
The template specifies that only the Pickup and Curve
settings be available.
842859A1.CDR
4.1.7.5 Remove the settings template
Once a settings template is removed, it cannot be reapplied and a new settings template needs to be defined before use.
1.
Right-click the device in the Online or Offline Window area and select the Template Mode > Remove Template option.
2.
Enter the template password if prompted and click OK to continue.
3.
Confirm that you want to remove the template by clicking Yes.
The EnerVista software removes all template information and all settings are available.
4.1.8 Secure and lock FlexLogic equations
The UR allows users to secure some or all FlexLogic equations, preventing unauthorized viewing or modification of critical
FlexLogic applications. This is accomplished using the settings template feature to lock individual entries within FlexLogic
equations.
Secured FlexLogic equations remain secure when files are sent to and retrieved from any UR-series device.
Locking can be tied to the serial number too.
4.1.8.1 Lock FlexLogic equations
To lock individual entries of a FlexLogic equation:
1.
Right-click the settings file or online device and select the Template Mode > Create Template item to enable the
settings template feature.
2.
If prompted, enter the template password.
3.
Select the FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor settings menu item.
By default, all FlexLogic entries are specified as viewable and display against a yellow background. The icon on the
upper right of the window also indicates that EnerVista UR Setup is in EDIT mode.
4.
Specify the entries to lock by clicking them.
The locked entries display a grey background as shown in the example.
4-10
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
Figure 4-10: Locking FlexLogic equation entries in Edit Mode
4
5.
Click the Save button to save and apply changes to the settings template.
6.
Select the Template Mode > View In Template Mode option to view the template.
7.
Optionally apply a password to the template by right-clicking the device and selecting the Template Mode >
Password Protect Template option.
Once the template has been applied, users are limited to view and edit the FlexLogic entries not locked by the template.
The effect of applying the template to the FlexLogic entries is shown here.
Figure 4-11: Locking FlexLogic entries through settings templates
Typical FlexLogic™ entries without template applied.
Typical FlexLogic™ entries locked with template via
the Template Mode > View In Template Mode command.
842861A1.CDR
The FlexLogic entries are also shown as locked in the graphical view and on the front panel display.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-11
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-12: Secured FlexLogic in graphical view
4
4.1.8.2 Lock FlexLogic equations to the serial number
A settings file and associated FlexLogic equations also can be locked to a UR serial number. Once FlexLogic entries in a
settings file have been secured, use the following procedure to lock the settings file to a serial number. A serial number is
viewable under Actual Values > Product Info > Model Information, the inside front panel, and the rear of the device.
1.
4-12
Right-click the setting file in the Offline Window area and select the Edit Device Properties item. The window opens.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
Figure 4-13: Settings file properties window
4
2.
Enter the serial number of the C30 device to lock to the settings file in the Serial # Lock field.
3.
Click the OK button to apply the change. The serial number is not validated.
The settings file and corresponding secure FlexLogic equations are now locked to the C30 device specified by the serial
number.
4.1.9 Settings file traceability
A traceability feature for settings files allows the user to quickly determine if the settings in a C30 device have been
changed since the time of installation from a settings file. When a settings file is transferred to a C30 device, the date, time,
and serial number of the C30 are sent back to EnerVista UR Setup and added to the settings file on the local computer. This
information can be compared with the C30 actual values at any later date to determine if security has been compromised.
The traceability information is only included in the settings file if a complete settings file is either transferred to the C30
device or obtained from the C30 device. Any partial settings transfers by way of drag and drop do not add the traceability
information to the settings file.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-13
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-14: Settings file traceability
1
SETTING FILE TRANSFERRED
TO UR-SERIES DEVICE
The serial number and last setting change date
are stored in the UR-series device.
The serial number of the UR-series device and the file transfer
date are added to the setting file when setting files
are transferred to the device.
4
Compare transfer dates in the setting file and the
UR-series device to determine if security
has been compromised.
2
SERIAL NUMBER AND TRANSFER DATE
SENT BACK TO ENERVISTA AND
ADDED TO SETTING FILE.
842864A2.CDR
With respect to the figure, the traceability feature is used as follows.
•
The transfer date of a settings file written to a C30 is logged in the relay and can be viewed in the EnerVista software
or the front panel display. Likewise, the transfer date of a settings file saved to a local computer is logged in the
EnerVista software.
•
Comparing the dates stored in the relay and on the settings file at any time in the future indicates if any changes have
been made to the relay configuration since the settings file was saved.
4.1.9.1 Settings file traceability information
The serial number and file transfer date are saved in the settings files when they are sent to a C30 device.
The C30 serial number and file transfer date are included in the settings file device definition within the EnerVista UR Setup
offline window as shown in the example.
Figure 4-15: Device definition showing traceability data
Traceability data in settings
file device definition
842863A1.CDR
This information is also available in printed settings file reports as shown in the example. A report is generated by rightclicking and selecting the Print Settings option.
4-14
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
ENERVISTA SOFTWARE INTERFACE
Figure 4-16: Settings file report showing traceability data
Traceability data
in settings report
4
842862A1.CDR
4.1.9.2 Online device traceability information
The C30 serial number and file transfer date are available for an online device through the actual values. Select the Actual
Values > Product Info > Model Information menu item within the EnerVista online window as shown in the example.
Figure 4-17: Traceability data in Actual Values window
This information is also available from the front panel display through the following actual values:
ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION  SERIAL NUMBER
ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION  LAST SETTING CHANGE
4.1.9.3 Additional traceability rules
The following additional rules apply for the traceability feature:
•
If the user changes any settings within the settings file in the offline window, then the traceability information is
removed from the settings file
•
If the user creates a new settings file, then no traceability information is included in the settings file
•
If the user converts an existing settings file to another revision, then any existing traceability information is removed
from the settings file
•
If the user duplicates an existing settings file, then any traceability information is transferred to the duplicate settings
file
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-15
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
4.2 Front panel interface
This section explains use of the enhanced, basic, and graphical front panels.
4.2.1 Front panel
4.2.1.1 Enhanced front panel
The enhanced front panel consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional
user-programmable pushbuttons.
The front panel is hinged to allow access to removable modules inside the chassis. The C30 enhanced front panel can be
horizontal or vertical. The following figure shows the horizontal front panel.
Figure 4-18: Enhanced horizontal front panel
Five column LED indicator panel
4
Display
Keypad
Control
pushbuttons (3)
Front panel
RS232 port
User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 16
842810A2.CDR
4.2.1.2 Basic front panel
The basic front panel consists of LED panels, an RS232 port, keypad, LCD display, control pushbuttons, and optional userprogrammable pushbuttons.
The front panel is hinged to allow easy access to removable modules inside the chassis. There is also a removable dust
cover that is to be removed when accessing the keypad. The C30 basic front panel can be horizontal or vertical. The
following figure shows the horizontal front panel.
4-16
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-19: Basic horizontal front panel
LED panel 1
LED panel 3
LED panel 2
Display
Front panel
RS232 port
Small user-programmable
(control) pushbuttons 1 to 7
Keypad
User-programmable
pushbuttons 1 to 12
827801A9.CDR
The following figure shows the vertical front panel for relays ordered with the vertical option.
4
Figure 4-20: Basic vertical front panel
GE Multilin
MENU
HELP
MESSAGE
ESCAPE
VALUE
ENTER
Display
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
.
+/-
1
3
5
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
2
4
6
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
Keypad
User-programmable
pushbuttons 1 to 6
LED panel 2
Front panel
RS232 port
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE
IN SERVICE
VOLTAGE
TROUBLE
CURRENT
TEST MODE
FREQUENCY
TRIP
OTHER
ALARM
PHASE A
PICKUP
PHASE B
RESET
USER 1
USER 2
LED panel 1
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
USER 3
827830A3.CDR
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-17
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
4.2.1.3 Graphical front panel
The graphical front panel consists of a USB port, LED panel, color screen display, user-programmable pushbuttons, and
navigation keys. The screen is used to read data, such as metering actual values, alarms, self-test messages, and event
records, and for viewing single-line diagrams. Settings can be changed on the front panel, except for the graphical front
panel itself and for IEC 61850. The USB port connects to a computer with the EnerVista software and can be used to
upgrade the relay and to transfer files and settings. The USB port is the square type B.
User-programmable pushbuttons 9 to 40 can be programmed among the 10 pushbuttons on the left and right sides of the
display.
Figure 4-21: Graphical front panel
Side pushbuttons
Display
LEDs
IN SERVICE
TROUBLE
User-programmable pushbuttons
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
TEST MODE
TRIP
ALARM
4
PICKUP
VOLTAGE
USB port
CURRENT
FREQUENCY
OTHER
PHASE A
PHASE B
Not used
PHASE C
NEUTRAL / GND
RESET
ESC
ENTER
Reset
Tab pushbuttons
Home Escape Navigation keys
859760A1.CDR
4.2.2 Front panel display
4.2.2.1 Enhanced and basic front panels
Messages display on a backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. When the
keypad and display are not actively being used, the display defaults to user-defined messages. Any high-priority eventdriven message overrides the default messages.
Up to 20 characters can be used to configure some setting names in the software, while up to 12 characters display on the
front panel. A tilde ~ symbol is used for the twelfth character on the front panel when a name extends beyond the 12
character limit. An example is shown for a Virtual Input.
Figure 4-22: Tilde symbols displays with names 12 or more characters long
The front panel can be viewed and used in the EnerVista software, for example to view an error message displayed on the
front panel or the LEDs.
To view the front panel in EnerVista software:
1.
4-18
Click Actual Values > Front Panel, then any option.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-23: Front panel use in the software (C60 shown)
4
4.2.2.2 Graphical front panel
The graphical front panel has a seven-inch (17.8 cm) color liquid crystal display (LCD). The display provides convenient
access to operational data generated by the relay, enables local control of power system devices, and allows display/
editing of settings.
Header content varies by page. The home page displays any active icons, such as security status, active setting group, and
active target messages. It shows the date and time of the relay. If the relay synchronizes to an external time source via PTP,
IRIG-B, SNTP, and so on, the date/time is shown in white, and otherwise in yellow. On pages other than the home page, the
header displays the name of the page.
The footer dynamically labels the Tab, or control, pushbuttons immediately below.
Page content displays between the header and footer.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-19
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-24: Home page example with default content (product information)
Setting Group
Alarm Target
Relay Date and Time
1
4
859850A1.cdr
There are multiple ways to navigate pages, by using the pushbuttons and the menu hierarchy. The menu hierarchy is
similar to the other front panels whereby you select a submenu using Up and Down arrow pushbuttons, and press the
ENTER or Right pushbutton. On setting pages, opening a setting for editing is done by highlighting the setting using Up and
Down pushbuttons, and pressing the ENTER or Right pushbutton.
Home page
Press the Home pushbutton to display the root page no matter the state. Any edit, control, or password entry sessions are
canceled. The header shows several relay/system status icons. The default content of the home page is the product
information page and can be user-configured to show the content of any single-line diagram page, annunciator page,
metering page, or event records page for example. The Tab pushbuttons on the bottom row each navigate to their page.
The home page displays for a user-configured time period, then scrolls through user-configured pages, a feature referred
to as rolling.
Holding the Home pushbutton for one second displays the product information page. The Home page also can display
when settings are saved.
Security indicator, showing how many people are logged in, including local and remote users. The lock is red
when one or more users are logged in and other otherwise green.
When no users are logged in because login is not required, an icon does not display.
Identifies the active setting group number (not shown)
Displays when an abnormal annunciator alarm is present. Navigate to the Annunciator for details. When there
are no such alarms, the icon does not display.
Even when you acknowledge/reset an alarm, the icon displays as long as the condition remains. For example, a
breaker trouble alarm displays, you acknowledge it, but the icon remains because the breaker trouble remains.
Active targets symbol, where targets are error messages.
View error messages by pressing the Menu Tab pushbutton, then accessing the TARGETS menu. Pressing the
RESET button clears those messages that can be.
Configure the home page in the software under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Home Page. The menu
does not display when there is no graphical front panel.
4-20
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Rolling mode
After a user-defined period of inactivity, the graphical front display rolls among up to 10 user-selected pages. The roll-topages are selected in the EnerVista software, with the defaults being the product information page. Each page displays for
less than five seconds. Also, the display backlight intensity is lowered after a configurable period to a user-defined level (0,
10, 20, or 30%); lower intensity extends the life of the display.
Configure rolling mode in the software under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Rolling Mode.
Operation works as follows:
•
Press the Home pushbutton or ESCAPE pushbutton twice to cancel rolling, restore full backlight intensity, and return
to the Home page
•
Press the ENTER, ESCAPE, or a pushbutton to pause rolling once and restore full backlight intensity
Rolling is disabled by setting the delay to 0.
The following buttons display at the top of the window:
•
Save — Updates the connected device if online or the open setting file if offline with changes made
•
Restore — Undoes changes that have not been saved
•
Default — Changes all rolling mode settings to their factory default values
•
Reset — Displays factory default values. Previous changes are not lost unless you save the reset window.
4
Single-line diagrams
A single-line diagram, or mimic diagram, is a line drawing of elements in an electrical system. The graphical front panel
displays up to five single-line diagrams. Each can be configured to show the arrangement of a portion of the power
system, the status of circuit breakers and of ground and disconnect switches, user-programmable pushbuttons, and
metering and status values. Each also enables control of the displayed breakers and switches when operand status
assigned to the Enable Controls from GFP setting is ON.
One diagram is provided by default, single_bus_line_dsc.mif, which can be modified.
Configure the diagrams under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Single Line Diagram Editor.
Each single-line diagram page has a user-configurable name that appears in the header and in the footer Tab pushbutton
label. Factory default names are SLD 1 to SLD 5. Pages that have no configured content have a blank Tab pushbutton
label, and the Tab pushbutton does nothing. The label for the current page has a blue background.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-21
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-25: Toolbar options for single-line diagram
Select
Breaker IEEE
Transformer 3W IEEE
Line
Breaker IEC
Transformer 2W IEEE
Line Crossover
Breaker GE
Transformer 3W IEC
Bus Crossover
Switch IEEE
Transformer 2W IEC
Bus
Switch IEC
Reactor IEEE
Feeder
Switch GE
Reactor IEC
Metering
Capacitor General IEC
Generator
Status
Capacitor Polarity IEEE
Motor
Text
Current Transformer IEEE
Pushbutton
Current Transformer IEC
Ground
AC Source
Voltage Transformer IEEE
4
Voltage Transformer IEC
859875A1.cdr
The letters T, S, B, R, and X next to a controllable element have the following meaning. An example (TSB) is shown in the
next figure.
•
T — The element is "tagged." Local and remote control of the device are inhibited, both open and close. Tripping is
unaffected unless additional logic has been configured.
•
S — The position indication of the device is substituted with a manually entered value
•
B — Blocking open/close command is bypassed
•
R — Autoreclose is enabled and not blocked
•
X — The device is out-of-service and control is not available
Single-line diagram example
The following example outlines how to create a circuit breaker diagram, then how to close the second circuit breaker. The
figure shows six switches (SW, M), two breakers (CB), feeder (arrow), and ground (lined arrow).
4-22
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-26: Single-line diagram of open circuit breakers
4
Under Settings > System Setup > Switches and Breakers, enable and name the six switches and two breakers. Switch 6,
M568G, has the A/3 Pole Opened setting on.
Figure 4-27: Configure Breaker and Switch settings
In the EnerVista software, open the single-line diagram editor under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Single
Line Diagram Editor.
Add the four switches for the top line by clicking the GE switch symbol in the toolbar, then clicking in the window. (If the UR
device is not online, the software attempts to connect.) Right-click to edit properties. Rotate switches SW569 and SW5682
to 270 degrees. Rotate switches 5681 and SW523 to 90 degrees. Ignore the TSB text.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-23
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Add the two lower switches. Leave rotation at 0 degrees.
Add the two breakers by clicking the GE breaker symbol in the toolbar, then click in the window. Right-click to edit
properties, rotating 90 degrees and setting the color to red (open).
Draw lines to fill in the gaps between the switches and breakers by clicking the line symbol in the toolbar, then clicking and
dragging on the canvas to draw a line. Do not draw a single line for the top line, but instead draw several small lines.
Add the feeder arrow head by clicking the symbol in the toolbar, then clicking the end of the line.
Add the ground symbol by clicking the symbol in the toolbar, then clicking the end of the line.
Add three metered values by clicking the M symbol in the toolbar, then clicking near the feeder arrow. Double-click to edit.
The three metered values are SRC1 Vag Mag, SRC 1 P, and SRC 1 Q.
Name the page by right-clicking the bottom tab. Here, page 1 is renamed "Milton line M568M."
Note that active symbols in the toolbar display and those that are inactive are greyed-out.
The diagram has been created. Save it by clicking the Save button.
Next is to close circuit breaker CB523. This circuit breaker is shown at the top right of the figure. A vertical line means that
it is open, and the color can be set as red or green.
4
On the graphical front panel, press the Home pushbutton, then press the SLDs pushbutton to activate the first single-line
diagram page.
Figure 4-28: Single-line diagram on graphical front panel
Press the Enable Control pushbutton, which displays when the Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Home Page
> Enable Controls From GFP setting is configured and its FlexLogic operand is ON. The side pushbutton labels display.
4-24
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-29: Side pushbutton display on graphical front panel
Press the CB523 breaker pushbutton. Its menu displays.
4
Figure 4-30: Pushbuttons to control the breaker
Press the pushbutton to close the breaker, confirming the action at the prompt.
If at the prompt the control action is prevented this is because status of the operand assigned to the Enable
Controls From GFP setting has changed back to OFF before confirming the prompt action. As a result, the
command is not issued, and the screen goes to the top SLD page.
In this diagram, the two circuit breakers have hard-coded actions available to them. No action is possible on the switches.
Note the USER PB 9 and 10 entries in the earlier figure. As outlined later, these are activated by clicking the PB icon on the
software toolbar. These two pushbuttons can be configured under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable
Pushbuttons.
Single-line diagram editor use
Start the application in the EnerVista software under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Single Line Diagram
Editor.
The following buttons display at the top of the window:
•
Save — Updates the connected device if online or the open setting file if offline with changes made
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-25
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
•
Restore — Undoes changes that have not been saved
•
Load — Opens single-line diagram files, which replaces one or all windows with that in the file selected
•
Store — Saves all single-line diagrams as a .mif file. Because single-line diagrams are not retained when using the
Convert Device Settings function, for example when converting in the Offline Window area from version 7.6 to 7.7, GE
recommends making backup files using this function.
On the right side of the window is a toolbox containing the components that can be added to the window. These include
line, breaker, disconnect, metering value, status value, text, and miscellaneous power system elements. To create the
single-line diagram, click the symbol, then click in the window. Once in the window, the component can be positioned and
its properties modified. When using the pointing device to position a component, the component can snap to the nearest
snap point. Snap points are in a 4 x 4 rectangular grid. The keyboard arrow keys move the selected component(s) in one
pixel increments when snap locations are inadequate. Multiple components can be selected and moved or deleted as a
group, or copied and pasted to another location. Right- or double-clicking a component opens the properties window.
Ctrl+A selects all objects in a diagram.
Lines
Line components represent power system buses or electrical connections between power system elements. They can also
be used as visual dividers and underline.
4
To add a line component, click it in the toolbox, then click in the window. Double-click a line to open its properties window
to set orientation.
Figure 4-31: Line and bus crossover symbols
Static symbols
Static symbols depicting power system elements are available. For information, see the ANSI/IEEE 315A and IEC 60617
standards.
Up to 32 static symbols can be used per single-line diagram.
To add a symbol, click it in the toolbox, then click in the window. Double-click the symbol to open its properties window to
set orientation.
4-26
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-32: IEEE and IEC static symbols
4
Breaker and disconnect components
Breaker components and disconnect components are interfaces to the UR breaker control elements and disconnect
switch elements. On a UR device they show dynamically the breaker or disconnect status as calculated by the element,
and provide means to open, close, tag, bypass interlock, and substitute (force status of) the element. Breaker components
in addition provide means to enable/disable breaker autoreclose.
Each breaker and disconnect component can be configured to use UR-style symbols, IEC symbols, or simple square/slash
symbols as shown in the following figure. The symbols assume horizontal symbol orientation, red - closed color, and green
- open scheme. With vertical orientation, they are rotated 90 degrees.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-27
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-33: Single-line diagram symbols
4
To add a breaker or disconnect component, click it in the toolbox, then click in the window. Up to 10 dynamic components
can be added to each single-line diagram.
Breaker and disconnect components have three different parts: label, symbol, and flags. Drag each of its parts to their final
locations. Double or right-click any of these parts to open the properties window. Properties that can be edited are label
text, breaker control element or disconnect switch element number, symbol orientation (horizontal or vertical), color
scheme (red - closed, or red - open), and assigned side button (if any). If the selected breaker or disconnect element does
not exist in the target relay or has not been enabled, then the component is displayed in the graphical front panel and in
the drawing edit window in grey. The color scheme selection has no effect when an IEC style symbol is used because IEC
style symbols do not use color.
4-28
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Symbol orientation
The figure shows the orientation available for the breaker and disconnect switch (taking Open status as examples). The
default position is 0 degrees.
Figure 4-34: Single-line diagram symbol orientation
4
A question mark displays in a symbol on the graphical front panel when status is bad. The question mark does not rotate
with orientation.
Figure 4-35: Symbols when status is bad
The following figures show the orientation available for the static components. The default position is 0 degrees.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-29
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-36: Single-line diagram static symbol orientation (sheet 1 of 2)
4
4-30
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-37: Single-line diagram static symbol orientation (sheet 2 of 2)
4
User-programmable pushbuttons
User-programmable pushbuttons 1 to 8 are physical pushbuttons on the right side of the graphical front panel, numbering
down the two columns.
Any remaining user-programmable pushbuttons are programmed among the 10 pushbuttons on the left and right sides of
the screen display. They show dynamically and provide a means to perform the same control as the other pushbuttons.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-31
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-38: Assigning pushbuttons to the display
4
As an example, if you set up a single-line diagram with two breakers and six switches, then eight of the side pushbuttons
are used automatically for control of the breakers and switches. Side pushbuttons 9 and 10 are available. In the single-line
diagram, let us set side pushbutton 9 to clear event records as follows:
•
Show side pushbutton 9 on the graphical front panel — Click the PB symbol in the toolbar, then set Side button 9 to
pushbutton 9 in the drop-down list. This pushbutton then displays when appropriate on the right side of the screen
display.
•
Program event record clearing — Set Settings > Product Setup > Clear Relay Records > Clear Event Records to
FlexLogic operand PUSHBUTTON 9 ON
•
Program pushbutton 9 — Set Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable Pushbuttons > Pushbutton 9
Function to "Self-reset." When pressed, pushbutton 9 clears the event records.
To instead set the second user pushbutton (not a side pushbutton) to clear events, follow the second and third bullet
points, selecting settings of PUSHBUTTON 2 ON and Pushbutton 2.
Metering components
Metering components show dynamically the value of a FlexAnalog operand or actual value. Up to 16 metering
components can be added to each single-line diagram.
To add a metering component, click the M symbol in the toolbox, then click in the window. Drag it to its final location.
Double-click it to open the properties window. The figure shows the properties that can be edited.
4-32
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-39: Metering properties
4
Status components
Status components show dynamically the value of a FlexLogic operand. Up to 16 can be used in a diagram and 30 in all
single-line diagrams.
An example is to show the Off or On state of the ANY MAJOR ERROR FlexLogic operand. The name of the operand displays in
the single-line diagram editor, then as Off or On on the graphical front panel.
To add a status component, click the S symbol in the toolbox, then click in the window. Drag it to its final location. Doubleclick it to open the properties window. Properties that can be edited include parameter (any FlexLogic operand), text color
background color, and on and off text.
Optionally add a text label to display beside the status.
Text
Text components show a single line of user-configured text.
Up to 16 text components can be used per single-line diagram.
To add a text component, click the T symbol in the toolbox, then click in the window. Drag it to its final location. Doubleclick it to open the properties window. Properties that can be edited are text, color, and size.
Annunciator
An annunciator is a grid of small windows for alarms, actual values, self-test messages, and product information.
The graphical front panel emulates a conventional annunciator panel. The annunciator has 96 windows, each with a
description of the alarm condition that lights the window. The windows are arranged in rows and columns of 3 x 4, 4 x 6, or
6 x 8 over several pages. Each window can have up to three lines of configurable text, and one line can instead be a
metered value. Normally the window background is dark, and when the configured FlexLogic operand becomes On, the
window lights up.
The figure shows that two alarms are active. One alarm is configured red and the other alarm is configured blue. The red
alarm type is Self Reset, so the alarm displays in a solid color. The blue alarm type is Acknowledgeable, so the alarm flashes
until it is acknowledged, for example by navigating with the arrow keys and pressing the ENTER button. The alarm then
remains blue until the trigger condition is eliminated.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-33
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-40: 3x4 annunciator page with two active windows
Alarms do not display automatically. Set the Home page and/or rolling pages to display annunciator pages.
The Tab pushbutton labels populate with the annunciator pages. The label text for each annunciator page is configurable
and displays in the header and Tab label. The current page has a blue Tab label. Tab labels for annunciator pages that
have an active window (that is, on, latched, or unacknowledged) are red. Pages where alarms are not triggered have a grey
Tab label. Pages that have no configured windows do not have Tab pushbuttons and do not display.
The Up, Down, Left, and Right pushbuttons cause the selection to move one window in the indicated direction. Pressing the
Right pushbutton past the last window in a row scrolls the display to any next annunciator page, not the next row. The
behavior is similar for the other pushbuttons, for example pressing the Up pushbutton while in the top row goes to any
previous page. If no previous page exists, no action occurs.
Annunciator windows are positioned statically, so that all windows are visible no matter their state.
Alarm types of each window can be configured as Self Reset, Latched, or Acknowledgeable. In Self Reset mode, the
window lighting follows the state of the configured FlexLogic operand. The self-reset mode alarm sequence conforms to
ISA-18.1-1979 (R2004) standard type A 4 5 6.
Figure 4-41: Annunciator alarm sequence in Self Reset mode
Normal
Normal
Off
Process:
Sequence:
Visual:
To Abnormal
Process:
Sequence:
Visual:
Return to Normal
4
To display the annunciator, press the Home pushbutton, then the Annunciator Tab pushbutton. If there is one or more
window in alarm or requiring reset, the annunciator page showing the first of these opens. Otherwise the first annunciator
page opens.
Abnormal
Acknowledged
On
859856A1.vsd
4-34
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Latched mode is intended for transient signals such as trip, and it conforms to ISA-18.1-1979 (R2004) standard type M 6.
Figure 4-42: Annunciator alarm sequence in Latched mode
Normal
Normal
Off
To Abnormal
Return to Normal
Process:
Sequence:
Visual:
Process:
Sequence:
Visual:
Reset while
Normal
Process:
Sequence:
Visual:
Abnormal
Acknowledged
On
Abnormal or Normal
Alarm
Fast Flash
Reset while
Abnormal
859857A1.vsd
In Acknowledgeable mode, both Off to On and On to Off state changes in the configured operand cause the background to
flash; the window must be acknowledged/reset to cancel flashing. This mode conforms to ISA-18.1-1979 (R2004) standard
type R-6.
Figure 4-43: Annunciator alarm sequence in Acknowledgeable mode
Reset
Process:
Sequence:
Visual:
Normal
Ringback
Slow Flash
Return to Normal
Process:
Sequence:
Visual:
Normal
Normal
Off
To Abnormal
Process:
Sequence:
Visual:
Reset while Normal
Return to Abnormal
Process:
Sequence:
Visual:
Abnormal
Acknowledged
On
Abnormal or Normal
Alarm
Fast Flash
Reset while
Abnormal
859858A1.vsd
To reset all annunciator windows:
1.
In the software, access Actual Values > Graphical Panel > Annunciator Panel.
To acknowledge/reset all annunciator windows on a page:
1.
On the graphical front panel with none of the annunciator windows selected, press the RESET pushbutton once for
acknowledgement and twice for reset. The flashing stops.
To acknowledge an annunciator window:
1.
On the graphical front panel, press the Up, Down, Left, and Right pushbuttons to select the window, so that is has a
yellow outline. Press the RESET or ENTER pushbutton. While a window is selected, if that window has activated since
the last restart, the date/time of the last activation of that window displays in the header.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-35
4
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
An alarm remains in an alarm state (for example, displays red) when the condition remains. That is, if you acknowledged a
flashing alarm but the alarm condition remains, the background color remains red.
The SETTINGS > INPUTS/OUTPUTS > RESETTING > RESET ANNUNCIATOR setting can be used to select a FlexLogic
operand that when activated acknowledges/resets all annunciator windows.
Annunciator editor
The annunciator editor is used to configure alarms and actual value displays for the graphical front panel.
The path in the EnerVista software is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Annunciator Editor.
The figure shows the annunciator editor and its preview window. The page name is entered as General at the top right.
Acknowledgeable and self-resetting alarms are set for basic functions, such as online/offline, Ethernet ports, unauthorized
access/failed logins, and battery failure. The text to display in the annunciator window is entered. The IN SERVICE LED is set
to be green because when the device is on, this LED is green. The preview shows what the annunciator looks like with all
alarms triggered. The last window is not configured and displays blank/grey. In order for the Ethernet and battery alarms
to work, the corresponding self-test alarms have been enabled under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable
Self Tests (not shown). The LEDs can be viewed on the front panel, so adding them to the annunciator is for illustrative
purposes only.
4
Figure 4-44: Annunciator editor and preview window
4-36
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
The three page layouts (3 × 4, 4 × 6, and 6 × 8) select the number of rows x columns of windows that appear in a page.
Annunciator window size and text size shrink as the number of annunciator windows in a page increases.
Properties that can be edited include alarm type (acknowledgeable, latched, self-reset), alarm input (any FlexLogic
operand), text color, and alarm background color.
The following buttons display at the top of the window:
•
Save — Updates the connected device if online or the open setting file if offline with changes made
•
Restore — Undoes changes that have not been saved
•
Default — Changes all annunciator settings to their factory default values
•
Reset — Displays factory default values. Previous settings are not lost unless you save the reset window.
Metering editor
The metering editor is an actual values display tool. It creates pages of actual values for the graphical front panel. There
are two types: tables and phasor diagrams. Tabular actual values pages have settings to configure, while phasor actual
values pages have no settings. Five tabular metering pages can be configured, while there can be a phasor page for each
configured AC source. They display on the graphical front panel using the Metering Tab pushbutton.
The path to the editor is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Metering Editor.
4
Figure 4-45: Metering editor with preview window
The inputs are selected at the top. Select from the drop-down list or start typing in the field.
The page, page name, and grid layout are set below the inputs.
Content to display is configured with the cell lines. The content can be actual values, a status indicator, or text.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-37
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
•
Actual value — Select from the FlexAnalogs applicable to the C30, where a FlexAnalog is an analog parameter
•
Status — Select from the FlexLogic operands identified in the Status Inputs at the top of the window. An example is to
display text to indicate whether the BATTERY FAIL operand is on or off.
•
Text — Enter text to display in the table, for example name of table or column heading
If the metering input is other than OFF, the value of the selected metering input displays, formatted according to the size,
text color, units, multiplier, and decimal configuration. Otherwise either the Text or the Off Text displays depending on the
value of the operand selected by setting Status Input/Index.
A maximum of eight Status Inputs/Indexes can be used per metering page and 16 in all metering pages.
The following buttons display at the top of the window:
•
Save — Updates the connected device if online or the open setting file if offline with changes made
•
Restore — Undoes changes that have not been saved
•
Default — Changes all actual value settings to their factory default values
•
Reset — Displays factory default values. Previous settings are not lost unless you save the reset window.
Configurable navigation editor
4
Configurable Navigation is a feature that opens specified pages when specific FlexLogic operands are activated. This
feature is useful to open the annunciator page containing an annunciator window that has entered its abnormal state.
In the example shown, failure of any of the three Ethernet ports triggers the Product Information page to display. With
unauthorized access (such as wrong password), IRIG-B clock failure, or breaker trouble, the Event Records display. When a
breaker opens, a single-line diagram displays. For the Ethernet and IRIG-B failure pages to work, these functions also have
been enabled under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable Self Tests. For the breaker trouble, the single-line
diagram has been configured.
Figure 4-46: Navigation editor
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Configurable Navigation.
The settings consist of 64 field pairs, each with a condition and an activation page. The condition selects any FlexLogic
operand. The activation page selection is the standard set, such as product information, event records, annunciator pages,
and single-line diagrams.
To use the feature, select a CONDITION, select its ACTIVATE PAGE option, then save. When selecting the condition
operand, open the drop-down list and start typing in the field to auto-fill. For example, typing F displays FIRST ETHERNET
FAIL.
The following buttons display at the top of the window:
•
Save — Updates the connected device if online or the open setting file if offline with changes made
•
Restore — Undoes changes that have not been saved
4-38
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
•
Default — Changes all settings in the window to factory default values
•
Reset — Displays factory default values. Previous settings are not lost unless you save the reset window.
4.2.3 Front panel navigation keys
4.2.3.1 Enhanced and basic front panel
Display messages are organized into pages under the following headings: actual values, settings, commands, and targets.
The MENU key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is divided further into further submenus.
The MESSAGE keys navigate through the submenus. The VALUE keys increment or decrement numerical setting values when
in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit mode. Alternatively, values can
be entered with the numeric keypad.
The decimal key initiates and advances to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point.
The HELP key can be pressed at any time for context-sensitive help messages.
The ENTER key stores setting values.
When entering an IP address on the front panel, key in the first sequence of the number, then press the • key for the
decimal place. For example, for 127.0.0.1, press 127, then •, then 0, then •, then 0, then •, then 1. To save the address, press
the ENTER key.
When entering or changing an order code with two lines, press the down arrow to access the second line. On a basic front
panel, do this under ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION.
The figure shows the sequence to use to enter a setting. Subsequent sections provide more detail.
Figure 4-47: Front panel keypad use (basic front panel shown)
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
1. Press to scroll top level:
SETTINGS
MENU
3. Press to scroll third level fields
HELP
MESSAGE
ESCAPE
4. Press to scroll through values
5. Press to save change
ENTER
VALUE
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
.
+/-
2. Press to scroll second level:
PRODUCT SETUP.
842231A1.cdr
4.2.3.2 Graphical front panel
These keys and pushbuttons navigate and select items.
Up/Down/Left/Right — These pushbuttons move the selector among the options on a page. The selection is
indicated by a yellow background or a yellow border. On menu pages, the Right pushbutton activates the
selected submenu drilling down the menu hierarchy, and the Left pushbutton backs up the menu hierarchy.
These pushbuttons have a typematic feature on some pages: after a short pause, the pushbutton repeats as long
as it is pressed.
ENTER — Activates the selection on the display, for example a submenu, a control, a keypad key, or a setting. Also
stores updated settings.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-39
4
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
ESCAPE — If a setting is open for edit, this pushbutton closes the setting without saving. If an item is selected, this
pushbutton deselects it. Otherwise this pushbutton activates the previous page in the page hierarchy.
RESET — Clears all latched LED indications and target messages. When a page with acknowledgeable/resettable
items is displayed, it instead resets/acknowledges all items on that page, or if an item on that page is selected, it
resets/acknowledges that item.
If you reset/acknowledge alarms, they stop flashing but remain in the alarm state as long as that state remains.
In other words, a red alarm does not switch off just because you acknowledged the alarm.
Home — Activates the home page, which is the root page. The page displays product information by default and
is configurable.
Side pushbutton — Five pushbuttons on the left side of the display and five pushbuttons on the right side of the
display. They perform various functions depending on the displayed page, such as switchgear controls. The
display dynamically shows its label next to each side pushbutton when the pushbutton has an assigned function.
These pushbuttons can also be programmed to function as user-programmable pushbuttons 9 and above.
Tab pushbutton — Five pushbuttons under the display. They navigate through the page hierarchy, and on some
pages activate other actions. The display footer dynamically labels the page or action that is activated by the Tab
pushbutton.
User-programmable pushbutton — Eight physical pushbuttons are associated with the first eight userprogrammable pushbutton elements. Numbering is down, that is, 1 to 4 down the left column and 5 to 8 down the
right column.
These elements control a set of FlexLogic operands that can be used to initiate outputs or select modes. Each
physical pushbutton has an integrated LED indicator that can be user-configured to display the appropriate
status.
These pushbuttons have clear covers behind which custom labels can be mounted. A utility is available to print
the labels, under File > Front Panel Report in the software.
4
4.2.4 LED indicators
4.2.4.1 Enhanced front panel
The enhanced front panel display provides five columns of LED indicators. The first column contains 14 status and eventcause LEDs. The next four columns contain the 48 user-programmable LEDs.
The RESET key is used to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these
latched conditions can also be reset via the SETTINGS  INPUT/OUTPUTS  RESETTING menu).
The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature.
Figure 4-48: Typical LED panel for enhanced front panel
842811A1.CDR
The status indicators in the first column are as follows:
4-40
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
•
IN SERVICE — Indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are fine, and
the relay is in (online) Programmed mode (under Settings > Product Setup > Installation)
•
TROUBLE — Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem. Check the self-test messages outlined at the
end of the Commands and Targets chapter, and view the event records under Actual Values > Records. For a beta /
pre-release, this LED is always on.
•
TEST MODE — Indicates that the relay is in test mode. For information, see the Testing section in the Settings chapter.
•
TRIP — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a trip input has operated. Set the operand under
Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable LEDs > Trip & Alarm LEDs. This indicator latches; initiate the reset
command to reset the latch.
•
ALARM — Indicates that the FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm switch has operated. Set the operand under
Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable LEDs > Trip & Alarm LEDs. This indicator never latches.
•
PICKUP — Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator never latches.
The event-cause indicators in the first column are as follows.
Event-cause LEDs are below the status LEDs. They are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective
target setting selected as either “Enabled” or “Latched.” If a protection element target setting is “Enabled,” then the
corresponding event-cause LEDs remain on as long as the operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a
protection element target setting is “Latched,” then the corresponding event-cause LEDs turn on when the operate
operand associated with the element is asserted and remains on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after
the operand is reset.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B, or C LEDs. This
includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, and so on. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate
operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B, or C LEDs.
•
VOLTAGE — This LED indicates voltage was involved
•
CURRENT — This LED indicates current was involved
•
FREQUENCY — This LED indicates frequency was involved
•
OTHER — This LED indicates a composite function that is not solely current, voltage, or frequency based (distance or
power for example) or a control function (digital element or trip bus for example)
•
PHASE A — This LED indicates phase A was involved
•
PHASE B — This LED indicates phase B was involved
•
PHASE C — This LED indicates phase C was involved
•
NEUTRAL/GROUND — This LED indicates that neutral or ground was involved
In the C30, only the OTHER indicator is applicable and indicates that a digital element was involved.
The user-programmable LEDs consist of 48 amber LED indicators in four columns. The operation of these LEDs is userdefined. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided. Default labels are shipped in the label
package of every C30, together with custom templates. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used
to communicate with operators. See the User-Programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
4.2.4.2 Basic front panel
The basic front panel consists of three panels with LED indicators, keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is used
to reset any latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can
also be reset via the SETTINGS  INPUT/OUTPUTS  RESETTING menu). The RS232 port is for connection to a computer.
The USER keys are used by the breaker control feature.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-41
4
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-49: LED panel 1
Status indicators
4
•
IN SERVICE — Indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are fine, and
the relay is in (online) Programmed mode (under Settings > Product Setup > Installation)
•
TROUBLE — Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem. Check the self-test messages outlined at the
end of the Commands and Targets chapter, and view the event records under Actual Values > Records. For a beta /
pre-release, this LED is always on.
•
TEST MODE — Indicates that the relay is in test mode. For information, see the Testing section in the Settings chapter.
•
TRIP — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; initiate the reset command to reset the latch.
•
ALARM — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm switch has operated. This indicator never
latches.
•
PICKUP — Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator never latches.
Event-cause indicators
Event-cause LEDs are turned on or off by protection elements that have their respective target setting selected as either
“Enabled” or “Latched.” If a protection element target setting is “Enabled,” then the corresponding event cause LEDs remain
on as long as the operand associated with the element remains asserted. If a protection element target setting is
“Latched,” then the corresponding event cause LEDs turn on when the operate operand associated with the element is
asserted and remains on until the RESET button on the front panel is pressed after the operand is reset.
All elements that are able to discriminate faulted phases can independently turn off or on the phase A, B, or C LEDs. This
includes phase instantaneous overcurrent, phase undervoltage, and so on. This means that the phase A, B, and C operate
operands for individual protection elements are ORed to turn on or off the phase A, B, or C LEDs.
•
VOLTAGE — Not used
•
CURRENT — Not used
•
FREQUENCY — Not used
•
OTHER — Indicates a digital element was involved
•
PHASE A — Not used
•
PHASE B — Not used
•
PHASE C — Not used
•
NEUTRAL/GROUND — Not used
User-programmable indicators
The second and third panels provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Custom labeling
can be done.
4-42
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used
to communicate with operators. See the User-programmable LEDs section in chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
Figure 4-50: LED panels 2 and 3 (index template)
Default labels for LED panel 2
The default labels are intended to represent the following:
•
4
GROUP 1...6 — The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group
Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support six setting
groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight setting groups. Even
though the LEDs have default labels, they are fully user-programmable.
The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the
pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-programmable LEDs section of chapter 5. The
LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both panels as explained
in the next section.
4.2.4.3 Graphical front panel
The graphical front panel has 14 LEDs. LEDs 1 to 5 are fixed status LEDs, and LEDs 6 to 14 are programmable. The
programmable LEDs can be configured to show the status of any selected FlexLogic operand; each is able to assert an
output operand to indicate its status.
Status indicators
•
IN SERVICE — Indicates that control power is applied, all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are fine, the
relay’s test mode is disabled, and the relay is in (online) Programmed mode (under Settings > Product Setup >
Installation)
•
TROUBLE — Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem. Check the self-test messages outlined at the
end of the Commands and Targets chapter, and view the event records under Actual Values > Records. For a beta /
pre-release, this LED is always on.
•
TEST MODE — Indicates that the relay is in Test-Blocked (solid) or Test (flashing) mode. For information, see the Testing
section in the Settings chapter.
•
TRIP — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as a trip input has operated. Set the operand under
Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable LEDs > Trip & Alarm LEDs. This indicator latches; initiate the reset
command to reset the latch.
•
ALARM — Indicates that the selected FlexLogic operand serving as an alarm input has operated. Set the operand
under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable LEDs > Trip & Alarm LEDs.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-43
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-51: Example of LEDs on graphical front panel
4.2.5 Front panel labelling
4
4.2.5.1 Enhanced front panel
The following procedure requires these pre-requisites:
•
The UR front panel label cutout sheet (GE part number 1006-0047) has been downloaded from
http://www.gegridsolutions.com/products/support/ur/URLEDenhanced.doc and printed
•
Small-bladed knife
To create custom LED and pushbuttons labels for the enhanced front panel:
1.
Start the EnerVista UR Setup software.
2.
If not already copied to the Offline Window area, right-click the online device and select the Add Device to Offline
Window option. Click the Receive button in the window that opens to save the settings file to the Offline Window area.
3.
Type labels as follows. Select the File > Front Panel Report. The window opens.
4-44
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-52: Enhanced front panel label designer
4
4.
Enter the text to appear next to each LED and above each user-programmable pushbutton in the fields provided. The
LED Offsets and Button Offsets buttons move all labels left/right and up/down on the page (they both do the same
action, so use either button). The Button Offsets button does not display when there are no pushbuttons to
customize.
5.
Feed the UR front panel label cutout sheet into a printer and press the Print button in the front panel report window.
6.
When printing is complete, fold the sheet along the perforated lines and punch out the labels.
7.
Remove the UR label insert tool from the package and bend the tabs as described in the following procedures. These
tabs are used for removal of the default and custom LED labels.
Use the tool with the printed side containing the GE part number facing the user.
The label package shipped with every C30 contains the three default labels, the custom label template sheet, and the label
removal tool.
If the default labels are suitable for your application, insert them in the appropriate slots and program the LEDs to match
them. If you require custom labels, use the following procedures to remove the original labels and insert the new ones.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-45
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
To set up and use the label removal tool:
1.
Bend the tabs at the left end of the tool upwards as shown.
Bend the tab at the center of the tool tail as shown.
4
To remove the LED labels from the C30 front panel and insert the custom labels:
1.
4-46
Use the knife to lift the LED label and slide the label tool underneath. Ensure that the bent tabs are pointing away from
the relay.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
2.
Slide the label tool under the LED label until the tabs snap out as shown. This attaches the label tool to the LED label.
3.
Remove the tool and attached LED label as shown.
4
4.
Slide the new LED label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the LEDs, as shown.
To remove the user-programmable pushbutton labels from the C30 front panel and insert the custom labels:
1.
Use the knife to lift the pushbutton label and slide the tail of the label tool underneath, as shown. Ensure that the bent
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-47
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
tab points away from the relay.
2.
Slide the label tool under the user-programmable pushbutton label until the tabs snap out as shown. This attaches the
label tool to the user-programmable pushbutton label.
3.
Remove the tool and attached user-programmable pushbutton label.
4.
Slide the new user-programmable pushbutton label inside the pocket until the text is properly aligned with the
4
4-48
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
buttons.
4
4.2.5.2 Basic front panel
After programming LEDs and pushbuttons under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable Leds and UserProgrammable Pushbuttons, labels can be created for the front panel.
To create LED and pushbutton labels for a basic front panel:
1.
In the EnerVista software, if the C30 is not already listed in the Offline Window area, add it by right-clicking it and
selecting the Add Device to Offline Window option.
2.
Click the File > Front Panel Report menu item and select the device.
3.
In the Front Panel Report window, double-click an LED or pushbutton slot and type a label. If you need to see the
existing front panel remotely, access Actual Values > Front Panel for the online device. If you need to see the In the
figure, note that labeling is being done for the third set of LEDs because the second panel of LEDs was factory-labeled.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-49
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-53: Basic front panel label designer (LEDs shown)
4
4.
Optionally save the changes by clicking the Save icon on the toolbar.
5.
Click the Print icon on the toolbar. Consider printing to PDF format and adjusting the zoom for appropriate label size,
then print on a physical printer.
6.
Cut labels as a block or individually, for example with scissors or an Exacto knife.
7.
If there is a plastic cover over the front panel, remove it by gently pushing in on the right side and lifting off the cover.
8.
Remove the plastic cover over the LEDs or pushbutton(s) using a screw driver.
9.
Insert the labels.
10. Re-attach the plastic covers.
4.2.5.3 Graphical front panel
The C30 includes software for labeling the LEDs and pushbuttons on the graphical front panel and a sticker sheet with preprinted and blank labels. The pre-printed labels are on the top-left of the template sheet, and the blank labels are on the
bottom-right. Use the pre-printed labels, or use the designer provided in the software and print labels onto the template.
One sheet is provided.
The example shows LED labeling, with pushbutton labeling below it (cut off).
To create LED and pushbutton labels for the front panel:
1.
In the EnerVista software, in the Online or Offline Window area, access Settings > Front Panel Label Designer or
Front Panel Label Designer (at the product root level). The designer window opens with pre-configured labels.
2.
Under File > Print Setup, change the page orientation to Landscape.
3.
In the label designer window, delete all labels not wanted for printing. This can be done by clicking the Reset button to
clear all labels, or by selecting each unwanted label and deleting it. Otherwise, all labels displayed print on the
template and use up the template. If you make a mistake, exit the window and open it again to view the default labels.
4.
Based on the location on the template on which to print, create the labels by typing in the appropriate slots.
4-50
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-54: Front panel label designer for graphical front panel
4
5.
Click the Print button in the window and select the printer.
6.
Once printed, peel the labels off the template and stick them on the front panel. For the enhanced and graphical front
panels, they go over the clear plastic inserts, not under. For the basic front panel, they go under or over the plastic
covers.
Any changes are not saved. Each time that the label designer window opens, the original template displays. Any labels
deleted are not lost.
4.2.6 Menu navigation
Press the MENU key to display selections or home page. Each press of the key advances through the following main
headings:
•
Actual Values
•
Settings
•
Commands
•
Targets
•
Factory Service
•
User displays (when enabled)
4.2.6.1 Enhanced and basic front panels
The setting and actual value pages are arranged hierarchically. Header display pages are indicated by double scroll bars
(), while sub-header pages are indicated by a single scroll bar (). The header display pages represent the highest level
of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. Use the down, right, left, and up arrows to navigate
the menu. The MESSAGE up and down arrow keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-51
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
values. Continually pressing the MESSAGE right arrow from a header display displays specific information for the category.
Conversely, continually pressing the MESSAGE left arrow from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header
display.
Default values are indicated in this instruction manual in mixed case. In the example shown here, the default access level is
Restricted.
Highest level
Lowest level (setting value)
 SETTINGS
 PRODUCT SETUP

 SECURITY


ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted

 SETTINGS
 FLEXLOGIC
Example
 ACTUAL VALUES
 STATUS
4
Press the MENU key until the Actual Values header page appears. This page contains system
and relay status information.

 SETTINGS
 PRODUCT SETUP
Press the MENU key until the Settings header page appears. This category contains settings to
configure the relay.

 SECURITY

Press the MESSAGE right arrow once to display the first sub-header (Security).

ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
Press the MESSAGE right arrow once to display the first setting for Security.

 SECURITY

Press the MESSAGE left arrow to return to the Security heading.

 DISPLAY
 PROPERTIES
Press the MESSAGE down arrow to display the second setting sub-header associated with the
Product Setup header.

LANGUAGE:
English
Press the MESSAGE right arrow once to display the first setting for Display Properties.

 SETTINGS
 FLEXLOGIC
Press the MESSAGE left arrow to return to the Display Properties page, then again to return to
the Product Setup Page. Press the MESSAGE down arrow to move to the next Settings page. This
page contains settings for FlexLogic.
4.2.6.2 Graphical front panel
Access the main menu by pressing the Home pushbutton, then the Menu Tab pushbutton.
Use the Up and Down arrow pushbuttons to select a submenu, then press the Right or ENTER pushbutton to drill into that
submenu. The Left and ESCAPE pushbuttons back up the menu hierarchy.
The Page Up and Page Down Tab pushbuttons also navigate through the list. When there is only a single page of options,
they jump to the first and last entries.
The options displayed depend on order code.
4-52
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-55: Main menu on graphical front panel
4.2.7 Change settings
4
4.2.7.1 Enhanced and basic front panels
Numerical data
Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define
what values are acceptable for a setting.
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 10.0 s
For example, select the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES  FLASH
MESSAGE TIME setting.

MINIMUM: 0.5
MAXIMUM: 10.0
Press the HELP key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the key again to view the
next context sensitive help message.
Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.
•
0 to 9 and decimal point — The relay numeric keypad works the same as a calculator. A number is entered one digit at
a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the MESSAGE left arrow or
pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display.
•
VALUE keys — The VALUE up arrow increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value
allowed. While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE up arrow again allows the setting selection to continue
upward from the minimum value. The VALUE down arrow decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to
the minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE down arrow again allows the setting selection to
continue downward from the maximum value.
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 2.5 s
As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate numeric
keys in the sequence “2 . 5". The display message changes as the digits are being entered.

NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
Until ENTER is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Press ENTER to store the
new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation of the storing
process. Numerical values that contain decimal places are rounded-off if more decimal place digits
are entered than specified by the step value.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-53
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Enumeration data
Enumeration settings have data values that are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set has
two or more members.
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted," "Command," "Setting," and
"Factory Service."
Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE up arrow displays the next selection while the
VALUE down arrow displays the previous selection.
ACCESS LEVEL:
Setting
If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting," press the VALUE keys until the proper selection displays.
Press HELP at any time for the context sensitive help messages.

NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
4
Changes are not registered by the relay until the ENTER key is pressed. Pressing ENTER stores the
new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation.
Alphanumeric text
Text settings have data values that are fixed in length, but user-defined in characters. They can be upper-case letters,
lower-case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.
There are several places where text messages can be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific
applications. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages.
For example, enter the text “Breaker #1”.
1.
Press the decimal point to enter text edit mode.
2.
Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
3.
Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.
4.
Press ENTER to store the text.
5.
If you have any problem, press HELP to view context sensitive help. Flash messages appear sequentially for several
seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing HELP displays how to edit and store new values.
4.2.7.2 Graphical front panel
When enabling an element in the EnerVista software that outputs to an actual value, the actual values menu is not
updated on the graphical front panel via Ethernet connection when that menu is active on the graphical front panel.
Navigate out and back into the menu for activation.
Numerical data
This example outlines how to change the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. Flash messages are status, warning, error, and
information messages displayed in response to certain key presses during settings programming. An example is a
confirmation message upon saving settings. This setting specifies how long to display the message.
Press the Menu pushbutton to display the main menu.
4-54
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-56: Main menu
Use the Up or Down pushbutton to select SETTINGS, then press the Right or ENTER pushbutton.
4
Figure 4-57: Settings menu
With PRODUCT SETUP selected, press the Right or ENTER pushbutton.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-55
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-58: Product Setup menu
4
Use the Up or Down pushbutton to select DISPLAY PROPERTIES, then press the Right or ENTER pushbutton.
Figure 4-59: Display Properties menu
Use the Up or Down pushbutton to select FLASH MESSAGE TIME, then press the Right or ENTER pushbutton. If the relay is
configured to require login to edit settings, and the user is not already logged in, the login page displays. When the user
has successfully logged in, the setting is opened for edit. As the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting accepts a numerical value, a
keypad displays. The time is to be changed to 4.0 seconds.
The current setting displays. A flashing cursor line marks the insertion point, initially positioned after the last character of
the setting. The setting range displays under the text.
Press the <-- Move Cursor and Move Cursor --> Tab pushbuttons to move the insertion point. Place it after the 2.
Press the Backspace Tab pushbutton to remove the character to the left of the cursor, in this case the 2.
Using the arrow keys, enter another time, for example 4 for four seconds. These Up, Down, Left, and Right pushbuttons
move the keypad key selector. Pressing the ENTER pushbutton with the - key selected inverts the sign. Pressing the ENTER
pushbutton with the decimal point selected enters that character at the insertion point. Push ENTER now to accept the 4.
4-56
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-60: Settings page with numeric keypad
Press the Save Tab pushbutton, which does a range check on the value, saves the setting when valid, closes the page, and
displays the previous page.
When a setting is not saved due to an invalid value, a message flashes, for example being out of range. In cases where the
relay needs to be restarted for settings to take effect, the flash message advises.
Setting entry can be canceled without impact on the original value by pressing the ESCAPE or Home pushbutton.
Alphanumeric text
Settings that accept alphanumeric values display a keyboard. An example is a pushbutton name.
The &123 key toggles between text and numbers.
The shift key (up arrow on keyboard) is green upon activation, while the keyboard letters switch to upper case. Doubleclick the shift key to lock capital lettering, or full capitals.
The globe key (shown greyed-out) toggles the keyboard language between English and another display language
selected, for example between English and French. (The second language needs to be activated under Settings > Product
Setup > Display Properties.)
For Japanese and Chinese, up to 10 characters can be input in a field, not 20.
To add accents, highlight a key and hold the ENTER pushbutton on the graphical front panel. Any special characters
associated with the key display.
To avoid conflict with XML programming, do not enter the following characters on the Annunciator and Metering editor
panels: " (quotation mark), ' (apostrophe), < (less than), > (greater than), & (ampersand). When used, the text following the
character does not display or the Annunciator and Metering panels do not display on the graphical front panel.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-57
4
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-61: Settings page with keyboard and accents
4
4.2.8 View actual values
4.2.8.1 Graphical front panel
In addition to data viewable in the Actual Values menu on the front panel, phasor diagrams and metered data can be
displayed. The metered data can be arranged as a table.
The update rate of metered values is 500 ms.
A phasor page for each configured AC Source and up to five user-configurable metering pages can be displayed. The
phasor pages are not configurable. Each phasor page shows a phasor plot and numerical values of all currents, voltages,
and symmetrical components of a single AC source.
The Annunciator and Metering pages can be configured to display data. Each has a user-configured number of rows and
columns. Each cell can include either configurable static text or the value of a selected FlexLogic operand, FlexAnalog
operand, or actual value.
To display a metering page, press the Home pushbutton, then the Metering Tab pushbutton. The first metering page
opens, with phasor pages listed before tabular pages. The Tab pushbuttons display any other metering page, as do the Up,
Down, Left and Right pushbuttons. The current page is highlighted with a blue Tab pushbutton.
Each phasor page has a name, which consists of the value of the SOURCE NAME # setting appended with " Phasors."
Phasor pages that have no configured CTs or VTs do not have a Tab pushbutton, and phasor pages that have no
configured cells cannot be displayed.
4-58
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 4-62: Phasor display
The configurable name displays in the header and Tab pushbutton label. Factory default names are Page 1, Page 2, and so
on.
Figure 4-63: Metered actual values
The phasor sources are configured under Settings > System Setup > Signal Sources. The tables to display the actual
values are configured in the software under Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Metering Editor.
4.2.9 Breaker control
The C30 can interface with associated circuit breakers. In many cases the application monitors the state of the breaker,
that can be presented on front panel LEDs, along with a breaker trouble indication. Breaker operations can be manually
initiated from the front panel keypad or automatically initiated from a FlexLogic operand. A setting is provided to assign
names to each breaker; this user-assigned name is for the display of related flash messages. These features are provided
for two breakers; the user can use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker 1.
It is assumed in the following discussion that the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  BREAKER 1(2)  BREAKER
FUNCTION setting is "Enabled" for each breaker.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-59
4
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
4.2.9.1 Control mode selection and monitoring
Installations can require that a breaker be operated in the three-pole only mode (3-pole), or in the one and three-pole (1pole) mode, selected by setting. If the mode is selected as three-pole, a single input tracks the breaker open or closed
position. If the mode is selected as one-pole, all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay. These inputs must be
in agreement to indicate the position of the breaker.
For the following discussion it is assumed that the SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  BREAKER 1(2)  BREAKER
1(2) PUSH BUTTON CONTROL setting is “Enabled” for each breaker.
4.2.9.2 Front panel (user key) control
After the 30 minute interval during which command functions are permitted after a correct command password, the user
cannot open or close a breaker via the keypad. The following discussions begin from the not-permitted state.
4.2.9.3 Control of two breakers
For the following setup example, the (Name) field represents the user-programmed variable name.
4
For this example, the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker 1 and breaker 2. The USER 1 key performs the
selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. The USER 2 key manually closes the breaker, and
the USER 3 key manually opens the breaker.
ENTER COMMAND
PASSWORD
This message appears when the USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3 key is pressed and a COMMAND
PASSWORD is required, that is, if COMMAND PASSWORD is enabled and no commands have been
issued within the last 30 minutes.
Press USER 1
To Select Breaker
This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required. This message
displays for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again.
BKR1-(Name) SELECTED
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP
This message displays after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time. Three possible actions
can be performed from this state within 30 seconds as per the following items (1), (2) and (3).
(1)
USER 2 OFF/ON
To Close BKR1-(Name)
If the USER 2 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 2 key is pressed
again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an output relay to
close breaker 1.
(2)
USER 3 OFF/ON
To Open BKR1-(Name)
If the USER 3 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 3 key is pressed
again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an output relay to
open breaker 1.
(3)
BKR2-(Name) SELECTED
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP
If the USER 1 key is pressed at this step, this message appears showing that a different breaker is
selected. Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per (1), (2) and (3). Repeatedly
pressing the USER 1 key alternates between available breakers. Pressing keys other than USER 1, 2,
or 3 at any time cancels the breaker control function.
4.2.9.4 Control of one breaker
For this application, the relay is connected and programmed for breaker 1 only. Operation for this application is identical
to that described in the previous section for two breakers.
4.2.10 Change passwords
The information in this section refers to password security. For information on how to set the password for the first time or
change CyberSentry passwords, see the previous chapter or the Settings > Product Setup > Security > CyberSentry section
in the next chapter.
4-60
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FRONT PANEL INTERFACE
The C30 supports password entry from a local or remote connection.
Local access is defined as access to settings or commands via the front panel. This includes both keypad entry and the
RS232 port. Remote access is defined as access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes
both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any change to the local or remote password enables this functionality.
When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the
corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the C30, the remote password must be used. If the
connection is to the RS232 port of the front panel, the local password must be used.
There are two user security access levels, setting and command, for which you can set a password for each. Use of a
password for each level controls whether users can enter commands or change settings. Another option is to specify
setting and/or command access for individual user accounts.
•
•
Setting — Allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values:
–
Changing any setting
–
Test mode operation
Command — Restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the following
operations:
–
Changing the state of virtual inputs
–
Clearing the event records
–
Clearing the oscillography records
–
Changing the date and time
–
Clearing the data logger
–
Clearing the user-programmable pushbutton states
4
To enter the initial setting or command password:
1.
Press the MENU key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the PRODUCT SETUP message appears on the
display.
2.
Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the ACCESS LEVEL message appears on the display.
3.
Press the MESSAGE down arrow until the CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS message appears on the display.
4.
Press the MESSAGE right arrow until the CHANGE SETTING PASSWORD or CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD message
appears on the display.
 SECURITY


ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted

 CHANGE LOCAL
 PASSWORDS

CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No

CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
5.
After the CHANGE...PASSWORD message appears on the display, press the VALUE up or down arrow to change the
selection to “Yes.”
6.
Press the ENTER key and the display prompts you to ENTER NEW PASSWORD.
7.
Type in a password and press the ENTER key.
8.
When VERIFY NEW PASSWORD displays, re-type the password and press ENTER.
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: Yes
ENTER NEW
PASSWORD: ##########
VERIFY NEW
PASSWORD: ##########
NEW PASSWORD
HAS BEEN STORED
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-61
LOGIC DIAGRAMS
9.
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
When the NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED message appears, your new Setting (or Command) password is active.
4.2.11 Invalid password entry
By default, when an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via the front panel three times within five
minutes, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to “On” and the C30 does not allow settings or command level
access via the front panel for five minutes.
By default, when an incorrect Command or Setting password has been entered via any external communications interface
three times within five minutes, the REMOTE ACCESS DENIED FlexLogic operand is set to “On” and the C30 does not allow
settings or command access via the any external communications interface for five minutes. The REMOTE ACCESS DENIED
FlexLogic operand is set to “Off” after five minutes for a Command password or 30 minutes for a Settings password.
These default settings can be changed in EnerVista under Settings > Product Setup > Security.
4.3 Logic diagrams
Logic diagrams in this instruction manual provide an overview of function and settings. A logic diagram is based on
4
•
Inputs-on the left side, which are setting and operands
•
Logical gates, which is Boolean algebra to combine logical lines using AND, OR, NOT, and other gates to get a new
logical state
•
Logical operators, which are timers, one-shot operations, latches, and so on
•
Outputs-on the right side, which are products of the manipulations with inputs, logical gates, and logical operators to
produce new operands and define the output state of the element
True and false values are denoted by 1 and 0 respectively. A function usually is high/on/enabled when 1.
Reading from right to left in the following diagram, the TRIP BUS 1 OP and TRIP BUS 1 PKP FlexLogic operands on the right side
are triggered when either the settings or reset latch in the middle of the diagram is triggered. When this applies, the TRIP
BUS 1 OP operand is triggered after the delay set by the TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY or TRIP BUS 1 RESET DELAY setting, while the
TRIP BUS 1 PKP operand initiates immediately. The settings or reset latch in the middle of the diagram is triggered as follows.
•
For the reset, one of three conditions are required to meet the OR requirement shown at the bottom left. That is, the
TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING setting must be 0=Disabled (which is negated by the NOT function to become 1=Enabled), output
from the TRIP BUS 1 RESET FlexLogic operand must be 1, or output from the RESET OP FlexLogic operand must be 1.
•
For the settings, one of 16 input conditions at the top left must be met for the OR, the TRIP BUS 1 FUNCTION must be
Enabled, and the TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK output must output as 0, which is then negated/reversed by NOT to become 1.
Table 4-2: Logic diagram symbols
Symbol
Description
= Off
Output from FlexLogic operand, so user-defined
= Enabled
1 = Enabled and 0 = Disabled
OR
Any function input on the left side satisfies the condition
AND
All functions input on the left side are required to satisfy the condition

Not. Negates/reverses the output, for example 0 becomes 1.

Connection
S, R
Set, Reset
TPKP
Timer pickup. Triggered by the settings latch in the diagram.
TRST
Timer reset. Triggered by the reset latch in the diagram.
4-62
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
Figure 4-64: Logic diagram
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1
SETTINGS
= Off
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2
= Off
Non-volatile,
set-dominant
***
OR
AND
S
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 OP
TPKP
Latch
= Off
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP
DELAY
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
DELAY
R
TRST
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
FUNCTION
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 PKP
AND
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
= Off
4
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESET OP
842023A1.CDR
4.4 FlexLogic design using Engineer
Parts of EnerVista Viewpoint Engineer software are integrated in the EnerVista UR Setup software. Engineer can be used to
create and modify FlexLogic that is used by a device, such as to monitor output, monitor triggers, and create self-tests.
Features include
•
Automatically displays existing FlexLogic
•
Drag-and-drop interface
•
Open multiple tabs and edit simultaneously
•
Display symbols in IEC, ISO, or UR formats
•
Export a diagram as BMP file or copy it to the clipboard for import into other applications
•
Scale and print files in various paper sizes
•
Works with all UR firmware versions
The figure shows an example where several inputs are used to trigger an output. With the OR function, any one of the
inputs can trigger the output.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-63
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-65: Inputs triggering output in Engineer
4
The process is as follows:
•
Modify or create a logic diagram in the Offline Window area of the EnerVista UR Setup software
•
Compile it and troubleshoot any errors
•
The logic populates automatically into the FlexLogic Equation Editor
•
Upload the file to the live device
•
Monitor the output
This section explains how to use Engineer. It outlines the following topics:
•
Design logic
•
Send file to and from device
•
Monitor logic
•
View front panel
•
Generate connectivity report
•
Preferences
4-64
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
•
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
Toolbars
4.4.1 Design logic
FlexLogic can be created with a block diagram. Note that although work is completed in the Offline Window area of the
software, communication occurs with the online device, for example when switching to monitoring mode.
The following procedures are outlined:
•
Examples
•
Add existing FlexLogic equations
•
Create a logic diagram/sheet
•
Rapidly add logic blocks in sequence
•
Connect two logic diagrams/sheets
•
Optimize the logic
•
Change logic order
•
Search logic
•
Exclude sheet from compile
4
4.4.1.1 Examples
The symbols are displayed in the UR format.
Create oscillography trigger every three minutes
Figure 4-66: Three-minute timer turns on LED for 10 seconds
Preparation — Under Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Virtual Outputs, the first and second virtual outputs are named
OscTrigger
Top logic — Three-minute timer trigger
Bottom logic — Turn on LED 1 for 10 seconds when the trigger starts
Create data logger trigger every seven minutes
Figure 4-67: Seven-minute timer turns on LED for 10 seconds
Preparation — Under Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Virtual Outputs, virtual outputs 3 and 4 are named DLTrigger
Top logic — Seven-minute timer trigger
Bottom logic — Turn on LED 9 for 10 seconds when the trigger starts
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-65
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Create events every minute, then every 100 ms
Figure 4-68: One-minute timer turns on LED and creates events every 100 ms
4
Preparation — Under Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Virtual Outputs, virtual output 5 is named EVStart, 6 is named
EVTriggered, and 7 is named EVMakeEvent
Top logic — One-minute timer trigger
Middle logic — Turn on LED 17 for 10 seconds when trigger starts
Bottom logic — Create events at 100 ms intervals for the same 10 second period
4.4.1.2 Add existing FlexLogic equations
A logic diagram can be created using existing FlexLogic equations (this section) or by creating new ones (next section).
When using existing equations, you modify them in the FlexLogic Equation Editor in the Offline Window area, then apply
them.
The FlexLogic Equation Editor window is in view-only mode when the Logic Designer is open. To instead work in the
FlexLogic Equation Editor, close the Logic Designer window, then re-open the FlexLogic Equation Editor.
To create a logic diagram using existing FlexLogic equations:
1.
In the Offline Window area, modify the FlexLogic for the device under FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor. If the
device is not listed, right-click the device in the Online Window area and select the Add Device to Offline Window
option.
Upon saving the modified FlexLogic, a yellow icon appears for the device in the Offline Window area to indicate that
the logic differs from the Online device.
2.
In the Offline Window area, access Engineer for the device, then Logic Designer. The logic opens.
3.
Click the Edit > Auto Populate Workbook menu item. If the software prompts if you want to keep or discard existing
sheets, either is acceptable, with the older excluded sheeted being denoted by brackets, such as < Sheet 1 >. The logic
displays in the various tabs. The FlexLogic created in the equation editor appears in Sheet 1, for example.
4.4.1.3 Create logic diagram
Upon access of the Logic Designer, the FlexLogic equations of the device display. You can create new logic in new sheets or
modify the ones that display.
This procedure uses input / output logic as an example.
1.
4-66
In the Offline Window area, access Engineer for the device, then Logic Designer. If the device is not listed, right-click
the device in the Online Window area and select the Add Device to Offline Window option.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
Figure 4-69: Access Engineer in the Offline Window area
4
A default block diagram opens that shows 48 inputs (boxes) and 48 user-programmable LEDs (circles).
For the graphical front panel, no LEDs can be added to the window and the LEDs are removed when opening any
existing files. For these existing files with the LEDs removed, save the file without them.
Figure 4-70: Default view of FlexLogic designer
2.
Optionally delete the default logic diagram by right-clicking its tab at the bottom of the window and selecting Delete.
3.
To add a blank sheet, click Edit > Add Sheet. A new tab displays. Or use the last tab displayed, which is a blank sheet.
4.
Optionally right-click the new tab and Rename it.
5.
Add the input blocks to the logic diagram. For example, click the I/O Tokens tab on the right, click the Input element,
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-67
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
then click in the logic sheet to add it. Or drag-and-drop it.
6.
Double-click the block on the sheet to configure it, selecting from the two drop-down lists. The figure shows that
virtual input 61 is being added. The View Associated Screen button opens its settings window.
Figure 4-71: Configuring an input block
4
7.
Add the output blocks to the logic diagram. For example, click the I/O Tokens tab, click the Virtual Output element,
then click in the logic sheet to add it. Double-click the block on the sheet to configure it. For the name, make it unique.
The figure shows virtual output 61 is being added, with a suffix of "io" added to the name to make it unique. Note that
the outline color of a block is red until it is configured, and that this properties window varies by block and the
selectable options by order code.
Figure 4-72: Configuring an output block
8.
4-68
Connect the input blocks to the output blocks by drawing a line as follows. Click at the end of one block and drag the
line to the next block. Or click the Drawing Tools tab, then select the Line option. The cursor needs to be at the
connection point to end the line, not elsewhere on the block. Note that the outline color is no longer red on the blocks.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
Figure 4-73: Completed inputs and outputs
9.
Add any remaining blocks or information. Right-click a block to copy and paste it. Notes are as follows.
Add a text box — Drawing Tools > Text
Add a FlexElement — Elements > FlexElement. An analog input is expected where a small arrow head shows in the
box.
Figure 4-74: FlexElement accepts analog inputs on left side where arrow heads display
4
Add an Element — Elements tab. Available elements reflect the product, for example the Control Elements category.
Figure 4-75: Elements reflect Control Elements
10. Check for any blocks that have a red outline. These are invalid. Fix them before continuing, for example by configuring
them.
11. Compile the logic diagram to check for errors by clicking the Compile button at the bottom left or by pressing the F7
key.
If prompted about a message about sorting, click Yes to apply the default (for this example), which can be automatic
sorting based on an algorithm that applies fastest execution time.
With successful compiling, the file is saved and the FlexLogic equations populate automatically. Scroll up through the
compile messages, with the red errors being the only messages that require fixing before proceeding.
The figure shows that we forgot to add the "Io" suffix to the names of virtual outputs 62 and 63, as indicated by
"Warning: Virtual output xx using default name." This warning is a minor warning.
The warning "input using disabled feature" means that input needs to be enabled. Double-click the block, click the
View Associated Screen button, enable the setting, save, and recompile.
The output and messages are explained in the next section.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-69
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Some information displayed in the compile messages updates automatically, for example messages after a device is
unplugged.
Figure 4-76: Compile and check the logic
12. View the FlexLogic equations by navigating in the Offline Window area to FlexLogic > FlexLogic Equation Editor. The
window opens with the entries displayed in the next tab.
Figure 4-77: Logic displayed in FlexLogic Equation Editor
4
13. Save the work.
The logic diagram has been created and the FlexLogic equations populated. The next steps are to upload the file to the
device and to monitor the device.
4.4.1.4 Compiled results and warning messages
When a yellow caution symbol displays in the Offline Window area, it means that the settings file is not synchronized with
the online device. Right-click the device in the Offline Window area, and select the Update SCL files option. SCL refers to
the Substation Configuration Language. An Instantiated IED capability description (IID) file is an example of an SCL file and
contains the actual settings on a UR device.
Figure 4-78: Settings files not synchronized between offline and online files
When the Update SCL files option is selected, the CID and IID files in the device folder are updated by the user
configuration in the IEC 61850 panel and thereby become synchronized. The CID file and the IID file (depending on the
preference 'Do not update IID file when updating SCL files') are updated. If the CID file is not already there, it is generated.
4-70
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
The location of these files is C:\ProgramData\GE Power Management\urpc, for example, in the Offline and Online folders.
Any FlexLogic equations entered in the Offline Window area are erased. The logic drawn in the Logic Designer window in
Engineer in the Offline Window area remain. The warning icon disappears after updating.
The following information is contained in the compile window.
Figure 4-79: Compiled results
4
Number of Lines Saved — The number of compiled logic lines eliminated by using the optimization algorithm, as set in the
Optimize Compiled Output option of the Preferences. In the example shown, no lines were saved because the optimizer is
disabled.
FlexLogic Lines — The number of lines that the compiled logic uses, for example seven of 512 available.
Virtual Output equations — The number of FlexLogic equations used in the Logic Designer window.
Timers used — The number of timers used in the Logic Designer window.
Memory Used — The percent of memory used in the Logic Designer window.
Errors
Table 4-3: Errors from compiling
Category
Block or gate Message
affected
Description
Error
All
Number of lines (nnn) exceeds
maximum limit of 512
The compiled result exceeds the limit of 512. Reduce the number of
equations to 512 or less.
Error
Tag-In
Tag-in not configured (TAG_ID,
SheetReference)
A Tag-In is connected to a circuit but the Tag-In is not referencing an
existing Tag-Out
Error
1 Shots
One Shot is over limit
(SYMBOL_ID, SheetReference)
The number of One-Shots contained within all of the VO blocks has
exceeded the maximum allowed for the firmware revision. This value can
either be 0 or 32.
Error
=VO
VO has no inputs (VO_ID,
SheetReference)
A Virtual Output block is located within the FlexLogic diagram and there
is no block connected as input to it. Connect and identify the inputs.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-71
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Category
Block or gate Message
affected
Description
Error
Timer
Timer used more than once
(TIMER_ID, SheetReference)
The same timer is used in more than one place in the editor. This means
either the circuit that the Timer belongs to has been branched, or the
Timer has been duplicated.
Error
Input
An Input symbol is configured to an item that is not recognized by the
Unrecognized Parameter
(SYMBOL_ID,Name,SheetRefere current order code and version. Possible cause: The order code and/or
version of the settings file was converted causing the input parameter to
nce)
become unavailable.
Warnings
When using the 'Reset OP' operand, a warning can appear indicating that this is a disabled feature. This means that the
Reset Settting's FlexLogic operand is set to OFF. Resetting of the relay can be done by pressing the reset button on the
front panel of the relay or by sending a Reset command through communications.
Table 4-4: Warning messages from compiling
4
Category
Block or
gate
affected
Message
Description
Minor warning
Input
Input set to unused VO
(SYMBOL_ID,Name,Sheet)
An Input symbol is using an unassigned Virtual Output
Major warning
Tag-Out
Tag-out not connected
(TAG_ID,Sheet)
A Tag-Out symbol has no input
Major warning
All
Symbol not connected
(SYMBOL_ID,Name,Sheet)
A symbol’s input and/or output is not connected and is not part of a
VO block. Draw the input and/or output to the block.
Minor warning
=VO
Virtual Output n using default
name (VO_ID,Sheet)
The Assigned Virtual Output is using the default name. Change the
name.
Minor warning
Input
Input using default name
(SYMBOL_ID,Name,Sheet)
An Input symbol is using a Contact Input, Contact Output, Digital
Element, FlexElement, or Digital Counter set to the default name.
Change the name so that it is unique.
Setting warning
Input
Input using disabled feature
(SYMBOL_ID,Name,Sheet)
An Input symbol is using a disabled Virtual Input, Contact Input, Digital
Element, FlexElement, Digital Counter, Control Pushbutton,
Programmable Pushbutton, Contact Output, or Protection/Monitoring
Element. Enable it and try again.
Major warning
Input
Input set to OFF
(SYMBOL_ID,Sheet)
An Input symbol is set to OFF
Major warning
Input
Input set to ON
(SYMBOL_ID,Sheet)
An Input symbol is set to ON
Setting warning
Input
Contact Output Operate is OFF The symbol block is using the default setting of OFF
(SYMBOL_ID, Contacts)
Setting warning
Input
Contact Output Seal-In is OFF
(SYMBOL_ID, Contacts)
The symbol block is using the default setting of OFF
4.4.1.5 Rapidly add logic blocks in sequence
Blocks are added by clicking an element then clicking in the drawing area, or by dragging and dropping the element onto
the canvas. Blocks can be added rapidly in sequence, for example when you have inputs 1 to 10, without having to select
the element each time.
1.
In Engineer, click File > Preferences. The window opens.
2.
Click the Editor entry.
3.
Enable the Repeat Symbol check box.
4.
Click the Ok button to save and exit from the window.
5.
In the logic diagram, select an element, then click in the drawing area to add it, click again to add a second box, and
so on.
4-72
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
4.4.1.6 Connect two logic diagrams
When the logic is complex and requires two sheets, for example, these two sheets can be connected. By connecting them,
the logic is continuous from one sheet to the next.
1.
In the first sheet, click the I/O Tokens tab.
2.
Scroll to the bottom, and click and drag the Tag Out element to the sheet where the next sheet is to connect.
3.
Double-click the element and in the window that opens, give it a name, such as "To Sheet 2" or "To IO Sheet 2."
Figure 4-80: Connecting sheet 1 to sheet 2
4
4.
In the second sheet, click and drag the Tag In element to the sheet where the first sheet is to connect.
5.
Double-click the element and in the window that opens, select the first sheet from the drop-down list to connect the
two sheets.
6.
Save the work.
4.4.1.7 Optimize the logic
The number of available FlexLogic entries depends on firmware, for example 515 or 1024 lines. The software can
automatically optimize a logic diagram to reduce space and free up entries.
1.
In Engineer, under File > Preferences, select the Compiler option. Ensure that the Optimize Compiled Output option is
enabled.
2.
Run the compiler again, for example by clicking the Compile button at the bottom left of the software. The results
display in the Optimization Summary. Changes also display when the FlexLogic Equation Editor is accessed. The logic
diagram does not change. In the example shown, no lines were saved to free up space.
Figure 4-81: Code optimization results
4.4.1.8 Change logic order
The order in which the FlexLogic is populated in the FlexLogic Equation Editor window depends on settings.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-73
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
First, when automatic sorting is not enabled, the sequence in which the blocks were drawn is followed.
Second, the order in which equations are executed can be manually changed, as outlined here.
Third, automatic sorting can be set in preferences, as outlined here. It is enabled by default and means that an algorithm is
implemented to give best results and quickest performance, For example, the block with the fastest execution time is
entered first in the FlexLogic. When two block functions have the same execution time the block drawn first displays first in
the FlexLogic. For example, drawing input 61 to output 61, then input 62 to output 62 causes the input/output 61 to be
entered into the FlexLogic first. Automatic sorting takes precedence over manual sort; if you enable this option, manual
sorting is not implemented.
To manually change logic order:
1.
In the compile area, click the VO Order tab.
2.
If the window is blank, click the Refresh button.
3.
Select an entry and click the up or down arrow. To cancel any manual changes, click the Sort or Refresh button.
4.
Recompile. The change is not executed or saved if automatic sorting is enabled.
Figure 4-82: Ordering FlexLogic entries
4
To set automatic sorting:
1.
In Engineer, under File > Preferences, select the Compiler option. The Automatically Sort VOs option means that the
block with the fastest execution time is entered first in the FlexLogic. When two block functions have the same
execution time the block drawn first displays first in the FlexLogic. For example, drawing input 61 to output 61, then
input 62 to output 62 causes the input/output 61 to be entered into the FlexLogic first.
4.4.1.9 Search logic
Items that can be searched in a logic diagram include gates, Input, Contact Input, Contact Output, Timer, Virtual Output,
Tag In, Tag Out, and User-programmable LED. A search can be performed while designing or monitoring.
1.
In the compiler area of Engineer, click the Search tab.
2.
Use one of the following methods to set search criteria:
–
Select an element from the first drop-down list. Results display automatically.
–
Type in the second text string box, or select any of the 32 previous searches from the drop-down list. Click the
Search button. Any results display.
The search applies to all tabs, not just the active tab.
3.
Double-click a search result to view the item.
Figure 4-83: Search function
4-74
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
You can also select an element from the drop-down list on the toolbar. It is then highlighted in the logic diagram.
4.4.1.10 Exclude sheet from compile
While designing the FlexLogic equations, entire sheets can be removed from the compile logic. This allows the user to test
various schemes by placing schemes on separate sheets and including either sheet at compile time.
1.
In the Logic Designer window, right-click the tab and select the Exclude from Compile option so that the check mark
displays. When sheets are excluded, a message displays with each compile that "excluded sheets will not be reflected
in the RPN." An excluded sheet is denoted with end brackets, similar to < Sheet 1 >.
Figure 4-84: Excluding a tab from compiling
4
Figure 4-85: Tab excluded from compiling
4.4.2 Send file to and from device
With the logic diagram created, compiled, and errors eliminated, the FlexLogic can be sent to a live device. And,
conversely, a file from a live device can be added to the Offline Window area for additional work.
To send a file to a device:
1.
In the Offline Window area of the software, right-click the device name and select the Write Settings to Device option.
A prompt can appear that the URS file has been repaired; acknowledge the message.
2.
When a window opens, select the device to which you want to send the file, then click the Send button and confirm.
The order codes and IEC 61850 edition must match. The file is sent to the live device. Any errors can be viewed in the
log file at the prompt.
To import a file from a device:
1.
Close all open files in Engineer that relate to the device, else a message displays to that effect, for example to close
the FlexLogic view associated with the file. When the file is not associated with a live device, a message displays to
that effect; you need to identify the device to which you want to send the file. The order codes must match.
2.
Right-click the device in the Online Window area and select the Add Device to Offline Window option. After you enter
a name for the file, it is written to the Offline Window area.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-75
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
4.4.3 Monitor logic
After creating the logic diagram, validating it, and uploading the FlexLogic to a device, the results from the device can be
viewed.
The following checks are performed automatically when switching from design to monitoring, and prompts display when
necessary:
•
Verify that the order code of the linked relay matches the settings file
•
Verify that the version of the linked relay matches the settings file
•
Verify that the FlexLogic Equation Editor of the linked relay matches the settings file. Solution: Compile the FlexLogic
logic diagram and send the settings file to the relay.
•
Verify that the FlexLogic Timers of the linked relay match the settings file. Solution: Compile the FlexLogic logic
diagram and send the settings file to the relay.
•
If the settings file contains a serial number lock, then verify that the serial number of the linked relay matches the
settings file
To view results:
4
1.
In the Offline Window area of the software, expand the Engineer entry for the device.
2.
Double-click the Logic Designer entry and Compile the logic.
3.
Double-click the Logic Monitor entry, or click the M button in the toolbar at the top of the window. With successful
launch, the logic displays and a green indicator displays at the bottom of the tab.
When the file is not associated with a live device, a message displays to that effect; you need to identify the device to
which you want to send the file. The order codes must match between the Offline Window and the Online Window.
When the device is offline, a message indicates problems communicating with the device.
When the devices are not synchronized, a message indicates the FlexLogic does not match the settings file. To send
the offline file to the device, right-click the device name and select the Write Settings to Device option.
When the state of a symbol is OFF, the symbol is shown in the default color or no color.
When a symbol's state changes to ON, the symbol and connection line turns green.
The state of some symbols can either be unknown or the state transitions faster than the update interval. For these
two cases, the state of the symbol is considered 'UNKNOWN' and the symbol is outlined in red.
The colors for the ON and Unknown state can be customized in the Preferences.
The figure shows that the software is communicating with devices (square green indicator) and that a minor error is
present (green box outline). In this case, the battery is weak and needs to be replaced. This can be viewed as the
Replace Battery message on the front panel of the device and in the EnerVista software under Actual Values > Front
Panel > Front Panel or Display/Keypad.
Figure 4-86: Monitoring a device, with minor error caused by weak battery
4-76
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
4.4.4 View front panel and print labels
This window displays the LEDs that are on the front panel. You can create labels and print them for the device. You do not
use the window to add text labels and upload them to the device. Custom labelling is also outlined earlier in this chapter;
see the Front Panel Labelling section.
To view the front panel:
1.
In the Offline Window area of the software, expand the Engineer entry for the device.
2.
Double-click the Front Panel Report entry. The report displays. The Device Summary is read from the settings file and
cannot be changed. The LEDs and pushbuttons display below the summary.
3.
To save the report, click File > Save As, enter a file name, and select the front panel report (FPR), JPG, or PDF format.
Figure 4-87: Front panel display in Engineer
4
To print labels:
1.
In the Front Panel Report window, double-click an LED or pushbutton and enter text.
2.
To print the labels, click the Print icon on the toolbar.
3.
To save the report and labels, click File > Save As, enter a file name, and select the FPR, JPG, or PDF format.
4.
Use the instructions in the second tab of the window to add the labels to the physical device.
4.4.5 Generate connectivity report
This report displays basic information about a device, such as order code, port numbers, inputs and outputs. You can use it
to create a PDF file of basic information. The report is based on CID and/or IID files, and not the system or full SCD. All
device details including Remote Inputs, Remote Outputs, and Analog Inputs/Outputs are indicated, including quantities
used and available.
To display a device report:
1.
In the Offline Window area of the software, expand the Engineer entry for the device.
2.
Double-click the Device Connectivity Report entry. The report displays.
3.
To save as a PDF file, click File > Save As.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-77
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Figure 4-88: Device Connectivity Report
4
4.4.6 Preferences
Preferences determine functionality. As such, you are encouraged to review them. This section outlines some options
available in the menus and preference panels.
Access them in the Logic Designer panel under the View menu and under File > Preferences. The Logic Designer and
Logic Monitor preferences are outlined here, not all preferences for a device.
4.4.6.1 View menu
View > Toolbar > Advanced Actions — Active when in Logic Designer. Toggles a toolbar to nudge, rotate, flip, or change
the order of an element.
View > Show Unused Pins — Enable to display unconnected pins. Disable to eliminate unconnected pins from the view, for
example when printing.
Figure 4-89: Unused pins on and off
4.4.6.2 Logic designer
The path is File > Preferences > Logic Designer.
4-78
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
Workbook Setup
Size and Units
Size and Units — Changes the size of diagram area displayed in Engineer. If you set the size to be smaller than an existing
logic diagram, the content is cut off.
WorkBook
Print Scale — The scale for logic diagram when printing. Scaling a large diagram to 200 percent, for example, results in the
diagram being cut off.
Orphan Protection — When enabled, the printing output prevents Virtual Output circuits from spanning more than a single
page. The largest Virtual Output circuit is scaled to fit on a single page and all remaining Virtual Output circuits are scaled
so that all circuits are printed using the same scale.
Show Title Block — When enabled, places an information box at the bottom right of the diagram when printing. Enter the
information in the File Information panel.
Show Sheet Name — When enabled, shows Sheet 1, Sheet 2, or any other name at the top of the logic diagram when
printing.
Start Sheet On New Page — Places the sheet on the next page when printing.
Show Notes Selection — When other than None, prints the text from any information notes added to the document (under
Drawing Tools tab > Note). The text is printed after the logic diagram.
File Information
The text entered here displays at the bottom right of a diagram when printing, provided that the Show Title Block option is
enabled. Note the option to change the logo from the GE logo to your company logo.
Display
The panel sets how the element boxes display. The figure shows how an AND gate displays when the UR default, IEC, or
ISO symbol type is selected.
Figure 4-90: AND gate varies by standard selected
Symbol Style — IEC, ISO, UR Setup — Sets how the gates display in the logic diagram.
Symbol Color — When set to Black & White, only logic blocks with issues continue to display red.
Zoom Operation — Determines what happens when the View > Zoom functions are used. When set to Sheet Only and the
zoom is changed, the single tab changes. When set to Workbook, all tabs change.
Editor
Repeat Symbol — Enable this feature to add element blocks rapidly in sequence, for example when you have inputs 1 to
10, without having to select the element each time. Select the element block from the toolbox, click the diagram, then
continue to click to add additional blocks.
Use first available VO / Timer — When enabled and you copy and paste a virtual output or timer element, the numbering
continues in sequence. For example, you copy timer 5 and paste it as timer 6. When disabled and you copy and paste a
virtual output or timer element, the same number is used. For example, you copy timer 5 and paste it as timer 5.
Auto-Save Logic Designer every x minutes — Logic diagrams with changes are saved automatically according to this
interval. The range is 5 minutes (default) to 30 minutes. With auto-save, the file extension of the saved file is .auto. This file
remains until you save the file manually.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-79
4
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Auto Populate
These options work in the Edit > Auto Populate Workbook function.
VOs per Worksheet — When an existing settings file is opened in the Logic Designer, the Logic Designer populates the
canvas and attempts to evenly distribute the Virtual Output circuits across multiple sheets. A value of 100 in this setting
places all FlexLogic equations on a single sheet until there are 100, then the next ones are placed on another sheet. A value
of 1 places each Virtual Output circuit on a separate sheet.
Show / FlexLogic Merge / Show Unused — If Show Contact Outputs and Show LEDs are selected, for example, the function
places Contact Output and User-programmable LED symbols for settings that are configured. If you disable the LED check
boxes, then the LED tab/sheet does not display when you next open the Logic Designer window. The settings apply to all
products, not just the active window when it is next opened. Close then reopen the Logic Designer window for the setting
to take effect.
Compiler
Show Warnings — Options to filter the messages that display when logic compiles.
4
Minor — Enable to display minor errors. An example is using the default values of an element added to the diagram, such
as the name of the element. An example is "Warning: Virtual output xx using default name," for which you simply click into
the element to rename it.
Major — Enable to display major errors. Examples are an input that does not have a corresponding output, using disabled
features, and failing to connect a symbol. Fix these errors.
Setting — Enable to display error message related to settings, such as an improperly configured setting, such as using ON
or OFF.
Automatically Sort VOs — When enabled, the logic is compiled with an algorithm to give best results and quickest
performance, for example the fastest logic first. The fastest logic displays in the FlexLogic Equation Editor output as the
first entries in the table. Use sorting when virtual outputs have dependencies on other virtual outputs. This setting takes
precedence over order set manually in the VO Order tab in the compiler.
When disabled, the sequence in which the blocks were drawn is followed.
Optimize Compiled Output — With this option enabled, the software automatically optimizes a logic diagram to reduce
space and free up FlexLogic entries. Run the compiler again, for example by clicking the Compile button at the bottom left
of the software. The number of saved lines displays in the Optimization Summary. Changes also display when the
FlexLogic Equation Editor is accessed. The logic diagram does not change.
4.4.6.3 Logic monitor
Display
The software displays the color specified when an element is on. There is no color when the element is off.
The software displays another color when the status cannot be determined and is unknown.
Timing
Timing Information can be displayed in the monitoring window. This timing information is only an approximate
representation of how Engineer sees transitions. Use the device's Event Record to view accurate timing information.
The timing information can also be streamed to a comma-separated values (CSV) spreadsheet.
The timing information displayed and recorded can be filtered based on six categories. If a category is not selected, any
timing information related to that category does not display and is not recorded to the CSV file.
Show Timing Information in Output Window — Enable to display times in the monitoring window.
Because of the update rate of the Logic Monitoring, the timing information cannot be used as an accurate representation
of the events that occur within the relay. Use instead the device's event record. Timing information can be delayed by 30
seconds.
4-80
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
Save Timing Information to CSV File — Enable to write timing information in a spreadsheet. The timing information is
recorded in a text file that uses commas to separate each of the fields. This file uses the extension CSV that is supported
by any spreadsheet application.
Every change written to the CSV file requires a timestamp.
The format for the timing information in the output window is as follows:
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss
devicename offline
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss
devicename ONLINE
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss
VO1: Virt Out 1- 0
VI4: Virt In 4- 1
DI3: Direct In 3- 0
RI2: Remote In 2- 1
H5a: Contact In 1- 1
4
H1: Contact Output 1- 0
Data is only appended to the CSV file. The format for the data is as follows:
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, devicename, offline
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, devicename, ONLINE
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, VO1: Virt Out 1, 0
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, VI4: Virt In 4, 1
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, DI3: Direct In 3, 0
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, RI2: Remote In 2, 1
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, H5a: Contact In 1, 1
yyyy/mm/dd hh:dd:ss, H1: Contact Output 1, 0
Options display for filtering, such as recording timing for Virtual Inputs and Outputs, but not Communications Status.
4.4.6.4 COMTRADE waveforms
Waveform files are viewable in the EnerVista software. The preferences are unrelated to Engineer and are outlined in the
UR Family Communications Guide.
4.4.7 Toolbars
These are toggled in the View > Toolbar menu.
The UR symbols are displayed for the toolbox icons. They change when the default setting is changed to IEC or ISO
symbols. The symbols displayed in the toolbox also vary by firmware version, reflecting what is supported for each
release.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-81
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
4.4.7.1 FlexLogic Editor toolbar
4
New Device
Create a new settings file
Open File
Open an existing settings file in the URS, CID, or IID format
Save FlexLogic
Save the Logic Designer diagram
PDF Report
Create a PDF document from Logic Designer diagram(s). Settings can be
changed under File > Preferences > Workbook Setup.
Toggle Compile Window
Display or hide the compile window area
Sort Order
Select to change the sort order of the Virtual Output list to the right of the
icon. Virtual Outputs can be sorted numerically in ascending and
descending order based on numbers and names.
Select VO to View (x - x)
Select a Virtual Output to locate and select it in the workbook. Each Virtual
Output listed also contains the name of the sheet where the Virtual Output
is located.
Edit Mode
Logic Designer
Switch to Logic Designer mode
Monitor Mode
Logic Monitor
Switch to Logic Monitor mode
Turn On ALL Communications Turn on all communications to all Logic Designer diagrams that are in the
monitoring mode. Default upon each launch of Engineer.
Turn Off All Communications
Turn off all communications to all Logic Designer diagrams that are in the
monitoring mode. This is a legacy function for serial communication to turn
off communication to devices. Turning off communication applies to the
current session only. When you re-launch the EnerVista software,
communication is on by default.
4.4.7.2 Token Toolbox
Drawing Tools
Draw a line. Click and drag to draw.
Draw multiple joined lines. Click and drag for each line. Double-click to finish.
Draw multi-sided object. Click for each line. Double-click to finish.
Draw four-sided object. Click and drag to draw.
4-82
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
Draw multiple curves. Click for each line. Double-click to finish.
Draw multiple, closed curves. Click for each line. Double-click to finish.
Draw oval or circle. Click and drag to draw.
Add text box with rectangle around it. Click to add. Double-click it to change text.
Add figure. Select file in the window that opens, then click on diagram canvas to add figure.
Add note icon and text. Click to add. Double-click to edit the title and text.
4
I/O Tokens
These are parts used in FlexLogic equations. They are the inputs and outputs of the Virtual Output equations. The display
can vary from that shown here.
Input symbol that can be configured to any FlexLogic operand value
Remote inputs from other devices
Input from another UR device. Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive and
cannot be used simultaneously.
Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive and cannot be used simultaneously.
FlexAnalog symbol that can be used as the input to a FlexElement or use the FlexAnalog symbol to monitor an actual
value when in logic Monitoring mode
Contact Input Gate is similar to the Input symbol but is restricted to the operands associated with a Contact Input
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-83
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Contact Output Gate is similar to the Input symbol but is restricted to the operands associated with a Contact Output.
The Operate and Seal-In settings can be configured graphically.
The Non-Volatile Latch is similar to the Input symbol but is restricted to the operands associated with a Non-Volatile
Latch. The Set and Reset settings can be configured graphically.
The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual output. Virtual outputs can be used as an input
operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a seal-in or other type of feedback.
Place and configure a Remote Output. The UR's order code and firmware version then determine the availability of the
Remote Output.
Place and configure a Direct Output. The UR's order code and firmware version then determine the availability of the
Direct Output to another UR device.
4
Place and configure a Teleprotection Output. The UR's order code and firmware version then determine the availability
of the Teleprotection Output.
Place a User Programmable LED in the Logic Designer diagram. Not applicable when using a graphical front panel.
A Tag Out can be used in 1 of 2 ways. The first use of the Tag Out is to break up logic that needs to span several sheets.
The second use of the Tag Out is to associate a frequently used block of code with the Tag Out and then repeatedly use
the same block of code using a Tag In. When a Tag Out is referenced more than once, the Tag Out is replaced with a
Virtual Output during the compile phase.
Tag-In can is used to reference an existing Tag-Out. It joins another diagram to a previous diagram.
Boolean Tokens
These symbols are used to create FlexLogic Equations. Use them as intermediate logic for the Virtual Output equations.
The display can vary from that shown here.
Place an OR gate in the Logic Designer diagram. Only one action needs to occur. Any function input on the left side
satisfies the condition.
The number of inputs is configurable from two to 16.
Place an AND gate in the Logic Designer diagram. Multiple actions need to occur. All functions input on the left side are
required to satisfy the condition.
The number of inputs is configurable from two to 16.
4-84
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
Place a NOR gate in the Logic Designer diagram. Gives the value of one when all input operands have a value of zero
and otherwise gives a value of zero. It gives an output signal when there are no input signals. An inverter that reverses
the logic state.
The number of inputs is configurable from two to 16.
Place a NAND gate in the Logic Designer diagram. Gives the value of zero when all input operands have a value of one
and otherwise gives a value of one. It gives an output signal until all signals are present on its inputs. An inverter that
reverses the logic state.
The number of inputs is configurable from two to 16.
Place a XOR gate in the Logic Designer diagram, which is two exclusive OR gates. Only one action needs to occur. If
there are two inputs or there is no input, there is no output.
Place a NOT gate in the Logic Designer diagram. Gives the value of one when the input operand has a value of zero and
otherwise gives a value of zero. It gives an output signal when there is no input signal. An inverter that reverses the
logic state.
Place a latch in the Logic Designer diagram. A latch has two inputs and one output. One input is the Set input, and
other input is the Reset input.
Place a positive one shot symbol that responds to a positive going edge in the Logic Designer diagram. A "one shot" is a
single input gate that generates a pulse ins response to an edge on the input.
4
Place a negative one shot symbol that responds to a negative going edge in the Logic Designer diagram
Place a positive one shot and a negative one shot symbol in the Logic Designer diagram
Place a timer in the Logic Designer diagram
Elements
These blocks configure properties of the element or use element operands as input to FlexLogic equations.
Place and configure a FlexElement. A FlexElement is a universal comparator used to monitor any analog actual value
calculated by the relay or a net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type.
Place and configure the Settings Group settings
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-85
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
Place and configure a Selector Switch element. Firmware version determines feature availability. The Selector Switch
element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group
control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic. The element provides for two control inputs.
Place and configure a Digital Element. A Digital Element can monitor any FlexLogic operand
and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state.
Place and configure a Digital Counter element. A Digital Counter counts the number of state transitions
from Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element.
4.4.7.3 Basic Actions toolbar
4
Select
Select components. Click one component and hold down the CTRL key to select others.
Or click and drag an area that contains multiple components to select.
Edit Vertices
Shows vertices points for the component selected (if the component support vertices
manipulation)
Properties
Shows the properties of the selected component
Zoom Normal
Zoom in and center the screen to the spot selected
Zoom to Fit
Zoom in to a magnitude that fits your entire schema layout on your entire screen
Zoom Custom
Zoom in on the components that you have selected
Pan
Move the viewable area of your screen around the schema. To activate, select this tool
and then place the hand icon over and part of your schema. Click and drag the hand in
a direction to move around the schema.
Align Top, Middle, Bottom
Align the selected components to the top, middle, or bottom of the reference
component
Align Left, Center, Right
Align the selected components to the left, middle, or right of the reference component
Space Across
Evenly space the selected components across a horizontal axis, starting from the far
left component and ending at the far right component
Space Down
Evenly space the selected components across a vertical axis, starting from the top
component and ending at the bottom component
Same Width
Set the width of the selected components to the same width as the reference
component
Same Height
Set the height of the selected components to the same height as the reference
component
Same Size
Set the width and height of the selected components to the same width and height of
the reference component
4.4.7.4 Advanced Actions toolbar
Only basic objects (lines, rectangles, ellipses) can be rotated and flipped.
4-86
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
Only objects from the Drawing Toolbar can be structured (grouped, ungrouped, forward, backward).
Nudge Up, Down, Left, Right
Moves selected component one pixel upward, downward, left, right
Rotate
Rotates selected component freely. Once selected, put your mouse cursor over the
component and move the component clockwise or counter-clockwise depending on
what you need.
Rotate Left, Right
Rotates selected component 90 degrees counter-clockwise or clockwise
Flip Vertical
Flips the selected component on the vertical axis
Flip Horizontal
Flips the selected component on the horizontal axis
Group, Ungroup
Combines all selected components into one combined entity. Ungroups them into
separate components.
Front, Back
Moves current components to the absolute front or back of all viewable layers
Forward, Backward
Moves current components on layer higher or lower than its original layer hierarchy
4
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4-87
FLEXLOGIC DESIGN USING ENGINEER
CHAPTER 4: INTERFACES
4
4-88
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C30 Controller System
Chapter 5: Settings
Settings
This chapter outlines front panel and/or software settings. The relay is not taken out of service when saving settings; the
relay is taken out of service when a settings file is written to it.
Settings can be viewed remotely in a web browser by entering the IP address of the relay, accessing the Device
Information Menu option, then the Front-Panel Display Report option.
When indicated that a restart is required for a setting change to take effect, use the Maintenance > Reboot Relay
Command in the software.
Settings file conversion from previous firmware versions is supported. See the Maintenance chapter.
5.1 Settings menu
 SETTINGS
 PRODUCT SETUP


 SECURITY

See page 5-4

 DISPLAY
 PROPERTIES
See page 5-23

 GRAPHICAL FRONT PANEL

Access in EnerVista
See page 5-24

 CLEAR RELAY
 RECORDS
See page 5-37

 COMMUNICATIONS

See page 5-37

 MODBUS USER MAP

See page 5-110

 REAL TIME
 CLOCK
See page 5-110

 OSCILLOGRAPHY

See page 5-116

 DATA LOGGER

See page 5-118
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-1
SETTINGS MENU

 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 LEDS
See page 5-120

 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 SELF TESTS
See page 5-124

 CONTROL
 PUSHBUTTONS
See page 5-125

 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 PUSHBUTTONS
See page 5-126

 FLEX STATE
 PARAMETERS
See page 5-132

 USER-DEFINABLE
 DISPLAYS
See page 5-133

 DIRECT I/O

See page 5-135

 TELEPROTECTION

See page 5-141

 INSTALLATION

See page 5-142
 REMOTE RESOURCES




Access in EnerVista
See page 5-143
 SETTINGS
 SYSTEM SETUP

 BREAKERS

See page 5-144


 SWITCHES

See page 5-151
 SETTINGS
 FLEXLOGIC

 FLEXLOGIC
 EQUATION EDITOR
See page 5-158


 FLEXLOGIC
 TIMERS
See page 5-172

 FLEXELEMENTS

See page 5-172

 NON-VOLATILE
 LATCHES
See page 5-177

 TRIP BUS

See page 5-178

 SELECTOR SWITCH

See page 5-178

 DIGITAL ELEMENTS

See page 5-186

 DIGITAL COUNTERS

See page 5-189

 8-BIT SWITCHES

See page 5-191

 PID REGULATOR

See page 5-192

 CONTACT INPUTS

See page 5-195

 VIRTUAL INPUTS

See page 5-197

5
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

 SETTINGS
 CONTROL ELEMENTS


 SETTINGS
 INPUTS / OUTPUTS

5-2
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
OVERVIEW

 CONTACT OUTPUTS

See page 5-198

 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

See page 5-202

 RESETTING

See page 5-202

 DIRECT INPUTS

See page 5-203

 DIRECT OUTPUTS

See page 5-203

 TELEPROTECTION

See page 5-207

 DCMA INPUTS

See page 5-209


 RTD INPUTS

See page 5-210


 DCMA OUTPUTS

See page 5-211

 IED MODE CONFIG

See page 5-213


 FORCE CONTACT
 INPUTS
See page 5-216


 FORCE CONTACT
 OUTPUTS
See page 5-217
 SETTINGS
 SIMULATION

 SUBSCRIBE TO
 SIMULATED VALUES
See page 5-217

 PUBLISH
 SIMULATED VALUES
See page 5-219

 SETTINGS
 TRANSDUCER I/O
 SETTINGS
 TESTING
5
5.2 Overview
5.2.1 Introduction to elements
The main characteristics of an element are shown on a logic diagram. This includes the inputs, settings, fixed logic, and the
output operands generated. The previous chapter explains how to read a logic diagram, and the abbreviations used in a
diagram are defined in the Abbreviations chapter.
•
FUNCTION setting — This setting programs the element to operate when selected as “Enabled.” The factory default is
“Disabled.” Once “Enabled,” any element associated with the function becomes active and all options become
available.
•
NAME setting — This setting is used to uniquely identify the element.
•
PICKUP DELAY setting — This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the pickup
and operate output states.
•
RESET DELAY setting — This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the
operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range.
•
BLOCK setting — The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or “flag not set.” The comparator
remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN
input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise
the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN control.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-3
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
•
TARGET setting — This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to "Disabled,"
no target message or illumination of a front panel LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to
“Self-Reset,” the target message and LED indication follow the operate state of the element and self-resets once the
operate element condition clears. When set to “Latched,” the target message and LED indication remains visible after
the element output returns to logic 0 until a RESET command is received by the relay.
•
EVENTS setting — This setting is used to control whether the pickup, dropout, or operate states are recorded by the
event recorder. When set to “Disabled,” element pickup, dropout, or operate are not recorded as events. When set to
“Enabled,” events are created for
<Element> PKP (pickup)
<Element> DPO (dropout)
<Element> OP (operate)
The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to
the dropout state (logic 0). This can happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not zero.
Not every operand of a given element in a UR relay generates events, only the major output operands. Elements,
asserting output per phase, log operating phase output only, without asserting the common three-phase operand
event.
5.3 Product setup
5.3.1 Security
5
5.3.1.1 Security overview
The following security features are available:
•
Password security — Basic security present by default
•
EnerVista security — Role-based access to various EnerVista software screens and configuration elements. The
feature is present by default in the EnerVista software.
•
CyberSentry security — Advanced security available using a software option. When purchased, the option is enabled
automatically, and the default Password security and EnerVista security are disabled.
Lost password
If all passwords are lost, recovery is possible by resetting the unit to default values. Note that the relay is reset to default
values, not just the passwords.
To reset the unit after a lost password:
1.
Email GE customer service at [email protected] with the serial number and using a recognizable corporate email
account. Customer service provides a code to reset the relay to the factory defaults.
2.
Enter the reset code on the front panel, under COMMANDS  RELAY MAINTENANCE  SERVICE COMMAND.
3.
Change the default password of ChangeMe1# as outlined in the Set Up CyberSentry and Change Default Password
section at the end of the Installation chapter.
Password requirements
A user account requires an alpha-numeric password that meets the following requirements:
•
Password is case-sensitive
•
Password cannot contain the user account name or parts of the user account that exceed two consecutive
characters
•
Password must be 8 to 20 characters in length
•
Password must contain characters from all of the following categories:
–
5-4
English uppercase characters (A through Z)
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
–
English lowercase characters (a through z)
–
Base 10 digits (0 through 9)
–
Non-alphabetic characters (for example, ~, !, @, #, $,%, &)
5.3.1.2 Password security
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY
 SECURITY


ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,
Factory Service (for factory use only)

 CHANGE LOCAL
 PASSWORDS
See page 5-6

 CHANGE REMOTE
 PASSWORDS
See page 5-7

 AC CESS
 SUPERVISION
See page 5-7

 DUAL PERMISSION
 SECURITY ACCESS
See page 5-8

PASSWORD ACCESS
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The C30 supports password entry from a local or remote connection.
Local access is defined as access to settings or commands via the front panel. This includes both keypad entry and the
RS232 port. Remote access is defined as access to settings or commands via any rear communications port. This includes
both Ethernet and RS485 connections. Any change to the local or remote password enables this functionality.
For a relay without a CyberSentry software option, any user can activate the RESET button or Reset/Acknowledge
an alarm in the Graphical Front Panel Annunciator without password entry.
ACCESS LEVEL — This setting is viewable on the front panel. The Setting and Command passwords can be changed in the
EnerVista interface.
The "Restricted" option means that settings and commands can be accessed, but there is no access to factory
configuration. Access automatically reverts to the Restricted level according to the access level timeout setting values. The
access level is set to Restricted when control power is cycled.
The "Factory Service" level is for factory functions.
There are two user security access levels, setting and command, for which you can set a password for each. Use of a
password for each level controls whether users can enter commands or change settings. Another option is to specify
setting and/or command access for individual user accounts.
•
•
Setting — Allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values:
–
Change any setting
–
Test mode operation
Command — Restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the following
operations:
–
Change the state of virtual inputs
–
Clear the event records
–
Clear the oscillography records
–
Change the date and time
–
Clear the data logger
–
Clear the user-programmable pushbutton states
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-5
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
When entering a settings or command password via EnerVista or any serial interface, the user must enter the
corresponding connection password. If the connection is to the back of the C30, use the remote password. If the
connection is to the RS232 port of the front panel, use the local password.
The local setting and command sessions are initiated by the user through the front panel display and are disabled either
by the user or by timeout (via the setting and command level access timeout settings). The remote setting and command
sessions are initiated by the user through the EnerVista software and are disabled either by the user or by timeout.
The state of the session (local or remote, setting or command) determines the state of the following FlexLogic operands:
•
ACCESS LOC SETG OFF — Asserted when local setting access is disabled
•
ACCESS LOC SETG ON — Asserted when local setting access is enabled
•
ACCESS LOC CMND OFF — Asserted when local command access is disabled
•
ACCESS LOC CMND ON — Asserted when local command access is enabled
•
ACCESS REM SETG OFF — Asserted when remote setting access is disabled
•
ACCESS REM SETG ON — Asserted when remote setting access is enabled
•
ACCESS REM CMND OFF — Asserted when remote command access is disabled
•
ACCESS REM CMND ON — Asserted when remote command access is enabled
A command or setting write operation is required to update the state of the remote and local security operands
listed.
When a setting password or command password is set or updated, user access with a graphical front panel is
removed. Simply log in again on the graphical front panel.
When the setting password is set or updated, the graphical front panel Access Level displays as Command. This is
because the graphical front panel is a Modbus client and it does not have automatic access to the password
change.
5
PASSWORD ACCESS EVENTS — This setting allows recording of password access events in the event recorder.
Change local passwords
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  CHANGE LOCAL PASSWORDS
 CHANGE LOCAL
 PASSWORDS

CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes

CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes
As outlined in the previous section, there are two user security access levels, setting and command. Use of a password for
each level controls whether users can enter commands or change settings.
Proper password codes are required to enable each access level. When a CHANGE COMMAND PASSWORD or CHANGE
SETTING PASSWORD setting is programmed to “Yes” via the front panel interface, the following message sequence is
invoked:
1.
ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
2.
VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________.
3.
NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED.
To gain write access to a “Restricted” setting, program the ACCESS LEVEL setting in the main security menu to “Setting” and
then change the setting, or attempt to change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the
password is correctly entered, access is allowed. Access automatically reverts to the “Restricted” level according to the
access level timeout setting values and when power is cycled.
If the setting and command passwords are identical, then this one password allows access to both commands and
settings.
If a remote connection is established, local passcodes are not visible.
5-6
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Change remote passwords
Proper passwords are required to enable each command or setting level access, which are explained in the previous
section.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  CHANGE REMOTE PASSWORDS
 CHANGE REMOTE
 PASSWORDS

CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes

CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes
To set the command or setting password in EnerVista:
1.
In the EnerVista software or from the front panel, navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Security menu item to open
the remote password settings window.
2.
Click the command or setting password Change button.
3.
Enter the new password in the New Password field. Requirements are outlined in the Password Requirements section
earlier in this chapter. When an original password has already been used, enter it in the Enter Password field and click
the Send Password to Device button.
4.
Re-enter the password in the Confirm Password field.
5.
Click the OK button. The password is checked to ensure that it meets requirements.
5
If you establish a local (serial) connection to the relay, you cannot view remote passcodes.
Access supervision
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  ACCESS SUPERVISION
 ACCESS
 SUPERVISION

 ACCESS LEVEL
 TIMEOUTS
See below

INVALID ATTEMPTS
BEFORE LOCKOUT: 3
Range: 2 to 5 in steps of 1

PASSWORD LOCKOUT
DURATION: 5 min
Range: 5 to 60 minutes in steps of 1

FACTORY SERVICE MODE:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

LOCK FIRMWARE: Enabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
This menu displays when the ACCESS LEVEL setting is other than Restricted or Command.
The following access supervision settings are available.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-7
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT — This setting specifies the number of times that an incorrect password can be entered
within three minutes before lockout occurs. When lockout occurs, the LOCAL ACCESS DENIED or REMOTE ACCESS DENIED
FlexLogic operands are set to “On.” These operands return to the “Off” state upon expiration of the lockout.
PASSWORD LOCKOUT DURATION — This setting specifies the time that the C30 locks out password access after the number
of invalid password entries specified by the INVALID ATTEMPTS BEFORE LOCKOUT setting.
The C30 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. If password verification fails while accessing a
password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic operand is
asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature can be
used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.
The UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS  RESET UNAUTHORIZED ALARMS
command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, password-protect the Command level. The operand does not
generate events or targets.
If events or targets are required, the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS operand can be assigned to a digital element programmed with
event logs or targets enabled.
FACTORY SERVICE MODE — A factory service user is supported to perform additional operations intended only for them. A
factory service user can log in only when this setting is configured as Enabled. It is disabled by default. When Enabled, the
relay logs events and activates the TROUBLE LED.
GE recommends that Factory Service Mode be disabled when factory operations are not intended to be performed. The
TROUBLE LED de-activates when a user disables Factory Service Mode.
Login is required for this user, and the password is unique for each relay.
A factory service user is logged out with any of the following circumstances:
5
•
UR restarts
•
FACTORY SERVICE MODE setting is disabled by Administrator or factory service user
•
ACCESS LEVEL setting is changed from "Factory Service" via front panel or serial connection
LOCK FIRMWARE — This setting determines whether the device accepts or blocks a firmware upgrade. When Disabled,
firmware can be updated. When Enabled, the firmware cannot be updated. When Enabled/locked and a firmware
upgrade is attempted using the software, the UNAUTH FW ATTEMPT FlexLogic operand does not assert. When locked and a
firmware upgrade is attempted without using the software, the operand asserts. A user with an Access Level of "Settings"
can modify this setting.
The following table outlines access level timeout settings.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  ACCESS SUPERVISION  ACCESS LEVEL TIMEOUTS
 ACCESS LEVEL
 TIMEOUTS

COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS
TIMEOUT: 5 min
Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1

SETTING LEVEL ACCESS
TIMEOUT: 30 min
Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1
These settings allow the user to specify the length of inactivity required before returning to the Restricted access level.
Note that the access level is set to Restricted when control power is cycled.
COMMAND LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT — This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to
return to Restricted access from the Command password level.
SETTING LEVEL ACCESS TIMEOUT — This setting specifies the length of inactivity (no local or remote access) required to return
to Restricted access from the Command password level.
Dual-permission security access
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  DUAL PERMISSION SECURITY ACCESS
 DUAL PERMISSION
 SECURITY ACCESS
5-8

LOCAL SETTING AUTH:
On
Range: selected FlexLogic operands (see below)
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP

REMOTE SETTING AUTH:
On
Range: FlexLogic operand

ACCESS AUTH
TIMEOUT: 30 min
Range: 5 to 480 minutes in steps of 1
This menu displays when the ACCESS LEVEL setting is other than Restricted or Command.
This feature provides a mechanism to prevent unauthorized or unintended upload of settings to a relay through the local
or remote interface.
The following settings are available through the local (front panel) interface only.
•
LOCAL SETTING AUTH — This setting is used for local (front panel or RS232 interface) setting access supervision. Valid
values for the FlexLogic operands are either “On” (default) or any physical “Contact Input ~~ On” value.
If this setting is “On,“ then local setting access functions as normal; that is, a local setting password is required. If this
setting is any contact input on FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (on) prior to providing the local
setting password to gain setting access.
If setting access is not authorized for local operation (front panel or RS232 interface) and the user attempts to obtain
setting access, then the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS message displays on the front panel.
If this setting is "Off," firmware upgrades are blocked. If this setting is "On," firmware upgrades are allowed.
•
REMOTE SETTING AUTH — This setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interface) setting access supervision.
If this setting is “On” (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is
required. If this setting is “Off,” then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is
provided. If this setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (set as on) prior to
providing the remote setting password to gain setting access.
If this setting is "Off," firmware upgrades are blocked. If this setting is "On," firmware upgrades are allowed.
•
ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT — This setting represents the timeout delay for local setting access. This setting is applicable
when the LOCAL SETTING AUTH setting is programmed to any operand except “On.” The state of the FlexLogic operand
is monitored continuously for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, local access is permitted and the timer
programmed with the ACCESS AUTH TIMEOUT setting value is started. When this timer expires, local setting access is
immediately denied. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected, the
timeout is restarted. The status of this timer updates every five seconds.
The following settings are available through the remote (EnerVista UR Setup) interface only. Select the Settings > Product
Setup > Security menu item to display the security settings window.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-9
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The Remote Settings Authorized setting is used for remote (Ethernet or RS485 interface) setting access supervision. If this
setting is “On” (the default setting), then remote setting access functions as normal; that is, a remote password is required.
If this setting is “Off,” then remote setting access is blocked even if the correct remote setting password is provided. If this
setting is any other FlexLogic operand, then the operand must be asserted (on) prior to providing the remote setting
password to gain setting access.
The Access Authorized Timeout setting represents the timeout delay remote setting access. It applies when the Remote
Settings Authorized setting is programmed to any operand except “On” or “Off.” The state of the FlexLogic operand is
continuously monitored for an off-to-on transition. When this occurs, remote setting access is permitted, and the timer
programmed with the Access Authorized Timeout setting value is started. When this timer expires, remote setting access
is denied immediately. If access is permitted and an off-to-on transition of the FlexLogic operand is detected, the timeout
is restarted. The status of this timer updates every five seconds.
5.3.1.3 EnerVista security
Enable the security management system
Access to files is controlled by the operating system and EnerVista software as follows:
5
•
Access privileges to files are defined by the Windows operating system. A standard user does not have access to a file
created by an administrator or another user.
•
When the EnerVista UR Setup software security system is disabled (passwords are not required), all users have
administrator access
The EnerVista security system allows an administrator to manage access privileges of multiple users of EnerVista. It is
disabled by default to allow access to the device immediately after installation. When security is disabled, all users have
administrator access. GE recommends enabling the EnerVista security before placing the device in service.
To enable the security system and require password use:
1.
Select the Security > User Management menu to open the user management window.
2.
Enable the Enable Security check box in the lower-left corner to enable the security management system.
3.
Click the Ok button.
If you force password entry by using this feature, ensure that you know the Administrator password. If you do not
know the password and are locked out of the software, contact GE Grid Solutions for the default password of a UR
device. When using CyberSentry, the default password is "ChangeMe1#".
Security is now enabled for the EnerVista UR Setup software. Upon starting the software, users are now required to enter a
username and password.
5-10
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Add a new user
The following pre-requisites are required to add user accounts to the EnerVista security management system:
•
The user adding the account must have administrator rights
•
The EnerVista security management system must be enabled (previous section)
To add a user account:
1.
Select the Security > User Management item from the top menu to open the user management window.
2.
Enter a username in the User field. The username must be four to 20 characters in length.
3.
Select the user access rights by enabling the check box of one or more fields.
5
The table outlines access rights.
Table 5-1: Access rights summary
4.
Field
Description
Delete Entry
Deletes the user account when exiting the user management window
Actual Values
Allows the user to read Actual Values
Settings
Allows the user to read Settings values
Commands
Allows the user to execute Commands
Event Recorder
Allows the user to use the Event Recorder
FlexLogic
Allows the user to read FlexLogic values
Update Info
Allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges. When any of the Settings, Event
Recorder, and FlexLogic check boxes are enabled by themselves, the user is granted read access. When
any of them are enabled in conjunction with the Update Info box, they are granted read and write access.
The user is not granted write access to functions that are not enabled, even if the Update Info field is
enabled.
Admin
When the check box is enabled, the user becomes an EnerVista UR Setup administrator and has all
administrative rights. Exercise caution when granting administrator rights.
Click OK to add the user account to the system.
Modify user privileges
The following pre-requisites are required to modify user privileges in the EnerVista security management system:
•
The user modifying the privileges must have administrator rights
•
The EnerVista security management system must be enabled (the Enable Security check box enabled)
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-11
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
To modify user privileges:
1.
Select the Security > User Management item from the top menu to open the user management window.
2.
Locate the username in the User field.
3.
Modify the user access rights by enabling or disabling one or more of the check boxes.
The table outlines access rights.
5
Table 5-2: Access rights summary
4.
Field
Description
Delete Entry
Deletes the user account when exiting the user management window
Actual Values
Allows the user to read actual values
Settings
Allows the user to read setting values
Commands
Allows the user to execute commands
Event Recorder
Allows the user to use the digital fault recorder
FlexLogic
Allows the user to read FlexLogic values
Update Info
Allows the user to write to any function to which they have read privileges. When any of the Settings, Event
Recorder, and FlexLogic check boxes are enabled by themselves, the user is granted read access. When
any of them are enabled in conjunction with the Update Info box, they are granted read and write access.
The user is not granted write access to functions that are not enabled, even if the Update Info field is
enabled.
Admin
When this check box is enabled, the user becomes an EnerVista UR Setup administrator and has all
administrative rights. Exercise caution when granting administrator rights.
Click OK to save the changes.
5.3.1.4 CyberSentry security
This feature requires a CyberSentry software option, specified at the time of ordering.
The EnerVista software provides the means to configure and authenticate the C30 access using either a server or the
device. Access to functions depends on user role.
The login screen of EnerVista has two options for access to the C30, these being Server and Device authentication.
5-12
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-1: Login screen for CyberSentry
When the "Server" Authentication Type is selected, the C30 uses the RADIUS server and not its local authentication
database to authenticate the user.
When the "Device" button is selected, the C30 uses its local authentication database and not the RADIUS server to
authenticate the user. In this case, it uses built-in roles (Administrator, Engineer, Supervisor, Operator, Observer, or
Administrator and Supervisor when Device Authentication is disabled), as login accounts and the associated passwords
are stored on the C30 device. In this case, access is not user-attributable. In cases where user-attributable access is
required, especially for auditable processes for compliance reasons, use server authentication (RADIUS) only.
No password or security information is displayed in plain text by the EnerVista software or the UR device, nor are they ever
transmitted without cryptographic protection.
Only (TCP/UDP) ports and services that are needed for device configuration and for customer enabled features are
open. All the other ports are closed. For example, Modbus is on by default, so its TCP port 502, is open. But if
Modbus is disabled, port 502 is closed. This function has been tested and no unused ports have been found open.
When CyberSentry is enabled, Modbus communications over Ethernet is encrypted, which is not always tolerated by
SCADA systems. The UR has a bypass access feature for such situations, which allows unencrypted Modbus over Ethernet.
The Bypass Access setting is available on the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SUPERVISORY screen. Note that
other protocols (DNP, 101, 103, 104, EGD) are not encrypted, and they are good communications options for SCADA
systems when CyberSentry is enabled.
When using the rear RS485 port and CyberSentry, registers can be read with a maximum buffer of 64 bytes. Settings may
not be written, so use another port or configure the SERIAL INACTIVITY TIMEOUT setting to a high value, such as eight
minutes, to give the relay enough time to finish the task.
CyberSentry settings through EnerVista
CyberSentry security settings are configured under Device > Settings > Product Setup > Security.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-13
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-2: Security panel when CyberSentry installed
For the Device > Settings > Product Setup > Supervisory option, the panel looks like the following.
Figure 5-3: Supervisory panel (version 7.3)
5
For the Security panel, the following settings are available.
5-14
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Table 5-3: RADIUS server settings
Setting name
Description
Primary RADIUS IP
Address
IP address of the main RADIUS server. 0.0.0.0
Default value indicates no Primary
RADIUS server is configured, and hence
RADIUS is disabled.
Restart the relay for any change to take
effect.
Primary
Authentication Port
RADIUS authentication port
Primary Accounting RADIUS accounting port
Port
Minimum
Maximum
Default
Units
Minimum
permission
223.255.255.254 0.0.0.0
-
Administrator
1
65535
1812
-
Administrator
1
65535
1813
-
Administrator
Administrator
Value that
represents
General
Electric
Vendor ID
An identifier that specifies RADIUS
vendor-specific attributes used with the
protocol
RADIUS
Authentication
Method
Authentication method used by RADIUS EAP-TTLS
server
RADIUS
Authentication
(Shared) Secret
Shared secret used in authentication. It
displays as asterisks. This setting must
meet the CyberSentry password
requirements.
Timeout
PAP
EAP-TTLS
-
Administrator
See the following N/A
See the
password section
Password
Requirements for requirements
section earlier
in this chapter
-
Administrator
Timeout in seconds between retransmission requests
0
9999
10
sec
Administrator
Retries
Number of retries before giving up
0
9999
3
-
Administrator
Confirm RADIUS
Authentication
(Shared) Secret
Confirmation of the shared secret. The
entry displays as asterisks.
245 characters
See the
Password
Requirements
section
N/A
-
Administrator
Table 5-4: General security settings
Setting name
Description
Minimum
Maximum Default
Units
Minimum
permission
Session Lockout
Number of failed authentications before the
device blocks subsequent authentication
attempts for the lockout period
0 (lockout
disabled)
99
3
-
Administrator
Session Lockout
Period
The period in minutes that a user is prevented 0 (no period)
from logging in after being locked out
9999
3
min
Administrator
Syslog Server IP
Address
The IP address of the target Syslog server to
which all security events are transmitted
0.0.0.0
223.255.
255.254
0.0.0.0
-
Administrator
Syslog Server Port
Number
The UDP port number of the target syslog
server to which all security events are
transmitted
1
65535
514
-
Administrator
Device
Authentication
Disabled
When enabled, local Device authentication
with roles is allowed. When disabled, the UR
only authenticates to the AAA server (RADIUS).
NOTE: Administrator and Supervisor (if still
enabled) remain active even after Device
authentication is disabled. The only
permission for local Administrator is to reenable Device authentication when Device
authentication is disabled. To re-enable Device
authentication, the Supervisor unlocks the
device for setting changes, and then the
Administrator can re-enable Device
authentication.
Enabled
Enabled
-
Administrator
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-15
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Setting name
Description
Factory Service
Mode
Minimum
Maximum Default
Units
Minimum
permission
When enabled, the device can go into factory Disabled
service mode. To enable, Supervisor
authentication is necessary.
Enabled
Disabled
-
Supervisor
(Administrator
when Supervisor
is disabled)
Lock Settings
When disabled, the device allows modification Disabled
of settings. To enable, Supervisor
authentication is necessary.
Enabled
Disabled
-
Supervisor
(Administrator
when Supervisor
is disabled)
Lock Firmware
When enabled, the device denies firmware
upload. To change setting, Supervisor
authentication is necessary.
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
-
Supervisor
(Administrator
when Supervisor
is disabled)
Restore to Defaults
Sets the device to factory defaults
No
Supervisor Role
When enabled, the Supervisor role is active. To Disabled
enable, Administrator authentication is
necessary. When disabled, the Supervisor role
is inactive. To disable, Supervisor
authentication is necessary.
Yes
No
-
Administrator
Enabled
Enabled
-
Administrator to
enable and
Supervisor to
disable
RADIUS user names Ensures that RADIUS user names are not the
same as local/device role names
See RADIUS
server
documents
See
RADIUS
server
document
s
-
Administrator
Password
See the
Password
Requirements
section earlier
in this chapter
Change
See the
following Me1#
password
section for
requireme
nts
Text
The specified
role and
Administrator,
except for
Supervisor,
where it is only
itself
5
Local/device roles except for Observer are
password-protected. All RADIUS users are
password-protected.
Table 5-5: Security alarm settings
Setting name
Description / Details
Min
Max
Failed
Authentications
A threshold number indicating when an alarm
is set off to indicate too many failed
authentication attempts
Disabled
Firmware Lock
A value indicating if the device can receive a
firmware upgrade. If Enabled and a firmware
upgrade attempt is made, the device alarm
activates. If Disabled, the device alarm does
not activate. On each firmware upgrade this
setting goes back to the default.
Settings Lock
Default
Units
Minimum
permissions
Enabled Enabled
-
Administrator
Disabled
Enabled Enabled
-
Administrator
A value indicating if the device can accept any Disabled
settings changes. If Enabled and a settings
change attempt is made, the device alarm
activates. If Disabled, the device alarm does
not activate.
Enabled Enabled
-
Supervisor
(Administrator if
Supervisor has
been disabled)
CyberSentry settings through the front panel
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY
 SECURITY

5-16

LOGIN:
None
Range: Administrator, Engineer, Supervisor,
Operator, Factory (for factory use only), None

 CHANGE DEVICE
 PASSWORD
See page 5-17
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP

 SESSION
 SETTINGS
See page 5-18

 RESTORE DEFAULTS

See page 5-18

 SUPERVISORY

See page 5-18

SYSLOG IP ADDRESS:
0.0.0.0
Range: 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255

SYSLOG PORT NUMBER:
514
Range: 1 to 65535
LOGIN — This setting is applicable for Device authentication only. This setting allows a user to log in with a specific role, as
outlined here. For the Supervisor role, enable the “Supervisor Role” setting. Log out by right-clicking the device in EnerVista
and selecting the Disconnect option.
Whenever a new role is logged in, the user is prompted to enter a password. Passwords must obey the requirements
specified earlier in the chapter in the Password Requirements section.The UR device supports five roles. Roles have their
corresponding passwords, except the Observer role, which does not require a password. There are no time-outs for the
Administrator, Engineer, Operator, and Supervisor when logged in using the front panel; log out manually or use the
Command > Security commands in the software.
The roles are defined as follows:
•
Administrator — Complete read/write access to all settings and commands. This role does not allow concurrent
access. This role has an operand to indicate when it is logged on.
•
Engineer — Complete read/write access to all settings and commands except configuring Security settings and
firmware upgrades. This role does not allow concurrent access.
•
Operator — The Operator has read/write access to all settings under the Commands menu/section. This role does not
exist offline.
•
Supervisor — This is only an approving role. This role’s authentication commits setting changes submitted by
Administrator or Engineer. The Supervisor role authenticates to unlock the UR relay for setting changes and not
approve changes after the fact. Only a Supervisor can set the Settings Lock and Firmware Lock in the Security
settings. This role also has the ability to forcefully log off any other role and clear the security event log. This role can
also be disabled, but only through a Supervisor authentication. When this role is disabled its permissions are assigned
to the Administrator role.
•
Observer — This role has read-only access to all C30 settings. This role allows unlimited concurrent access but it has
no download access to any files on the device. Observer is the default role if no authentication has been done to the
device. This role displays as "None" on the front panel. When local authentication is used, no password is required for
this role. When RADIUS server authentication is used, a password is required.
The Factory service role is not available. It is for factory use only. The FACTORY SERVICE MODE setting must be
enabled for access.
The Local Access Denied message on the front panel can mean that you need to log in to the UR in order to
complete the action.
Change device password
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  CHANGE DEVICE PASSWORD
 CHANGE DEVICE
 PASSWORD

NEW PASSWORD:
Range: 20 alphanumeric characters

CONFIRM PASSWORD:
Range: 20 alphanumeric characters
The menu displays on the front panel upon successful login of the Administrator role.
Passwords are stored in text format. No encryption is applied.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-17
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
In Device authentication mode, the Observer role does not have a password associated with it. In Server
authentication mode the Observer role requires a password.
If you are locked out of the software, contact GE Grid Solutions for the default password. When using CyberSentry,
the default password is "ChangeMe1#".
Once the passwords are set, the Administrator with Supervisor approval can change the role-associated password.
In CyberSentry, password encryption is not supported.
Session settings
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SESSION SETTINGS
 SESSION
 SETTINGS

SESSION LOCKOUT:
3
Range: 0 to 99

SESSION LOCKOUT
PERIOD: 3 min
Range: 0 to 9999 minutes
SESSION LOCKOUT — This setting specifies the number of failed authentications before the device blocks subsequent
authentication attempts for the lockout period. A value of zero means lockout is disabled.
SESSION LOCKOUT PERIOD — This setting specifies the period of time in minutes of a lockout period. A value of 0 means that
there is no lockout period.
Restore defaults
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  RESTORE DEFAULTS
5
 RESTORE DEFAULTS


LOAD FACTORY
DEFAULTS: No
Range: Yes, No
LOAD FACTORY DEFAULTS — This setting is used to reset all the settings, communication, and security passwords. An
Administrator role is used to change this setting and a Supervisor role (if not disabled) approves it.
Supervisory
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SUPERVISORY
 SUPERVISORY

5-18

DEVICE
AUTHENTICATION: Yes
Range: Yes, No

BYPASS ACCESS:
Disabled
Range: Local, Remote, Local and Remote, Disabled,
Pushbuttons

RESET KEY ACCESS:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

FACTORY SERVICE
MODE: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

 SELF TESTS

See below

SUPERVISOR ROLE:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

SERIAL INACTIVITY
TIMEOUT: 1 min
Range: 1 to 9999 minutes

LOCK SETTINGS:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

LOCK FIRMWARE:
Enabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
The Supervisory menu settings are available for Supervisor role only, or if the Supervisor role is disabled then for the
Administrator role only.
DEVICE AUTHENTICATION — This setting is enabled by default, meaning "Yes" is selected. When enabled, Device
authentication with roles is enabled. When this setting is disabled, the UR only authenticates to the AAA server (RADIUS).
However, the Administrator and Supervisor (when enabled) remain active even after device authentication is disabled and
their only permission is to re-enable Device authentication. To re-enable Device authentication, the Supervisor unlocks the
device for settings changes, then the Administrator re-enables device authentication.
BYPASS ACCESS — The bypass security feature provides an easier access, with no authentication and encryption for those
special situations when this is considered safe. Only the Supervisor, or the Administrator when the Supervisor role is
disabled, can enable this feature.
Mode
Front panel or serial (RS232, RS485)
Ethernet
Normal mode
Authentication — Role Based Access Control (RBAC)
and passwords in clear
Authentication — RBAC and passwords encrypted
SSH tunneling
Bypass access mode
No passwords for allowed RBAC levels
No passwords for allowed RBAC levels
No SSH tunneling
The bypass options are as follows:
•
Local — Bypasses authentication for push buttons, keypad, RS232, and RS485
•
Remote — Bypasses authentication for Ethernet
•
Local and Remote — Bypasses authentication for push buttons, keypad, RS232, RS485, and Ethernet
•
Pushbuttons — Bypasses authentication for front panel push buttons only. On the graphical front panel, the
authentication for side pushbuttons to control breakers and disconnects also is bypassed.
RESET KEY ACCESS — Indicates whether the device needs user authentication for executing the RESET button on the front
panel or the front panel in the software. When Disabled, user authentication is required. When Enabled, any user can
execute the RESET command without authentication. A Supervisor, or the Administrator if the Supervisor role is disabled,
can enable this feature.
FACTORY SERVICE MODE — When Enabled, the device can go into factory service mode. A Supervisor role is necessary to
enable the setting, and otherwise an Administrator role when the Supervisor role is disabled. The default value is Disabled.
An event is generated when disabling and enabling, and the TROUBLE LED activates when enabled. The factory service
user enters a password that is unique for each device.
When a factory service user is logged in on the front panel, a remote user cannot access the device at the same time.
A factory service user is logged out with any of the following circumstances:
•
UR restarts
•
Factory Service Mode setting is disabled by Administrator or factory service user
•
When a non-factory service user logs in via front panel or serial connection
SUPERVISOR ROLE — When Enabled, the Supervisor role is active. To Disable this setting a Supervisor authentication is
necessary. If disabled, the Supervisor role is not allowed to log in. In this case, the Administrator can change the settings
under the Supervisory menu.
If enabled, Supervisor authentication is required to change the settings in the Supervisory menu. If the Supervisor disables
their role after authentication, the Supervisor session remains valid until they switch to another role using MMI or until they
end the current Supervisor session if using communications.
This role is disabled by default.
SERIAL INACTIVITY TIMEOUT — The role logged via a serial port is auto logged off after the Serial Inactivity timer times out. A
separate timer is maintained for RS232 and RS485 connections. Set this value to a high number, such as eight minutes,
when using the rear RS485 terminals for settings write.
GE recommends setting this value to at least 3 minutes for the following scenario: while connected to a CyberSentry
device, with serial or USB cable connected to the front panel, and performing "Add Device to Offline Window" or an online/
offline comparison. With less than the recommended 3 minutes, the serial activity timeout interrupts the connection and
the security role login window appears. Upon login, the process resumes.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-19
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
LOCK SETTINGS — Specifies whether the device accepts settings changes, with a default of Disabled to allow changes. The
Supervisor role Disables this setting for the relay to start accepting setting changes or command changes. After all the
setting changes are applied or commands executed, the Supervisor then Enables the setting to lock setting changes.
LOCK FIRMWARE — Specifies whether the device accepts a firmware upgrade, with a default of Enabled to deny upgrade.
The Supervisor role Disables this setting to allow upgrades. After the upgrade, the Supervisor then Enables the setting to
prevent upgrades.
Self-tests
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SUPERVISORY  SELF TESTS
 SELF TESTS


 FAILED
 AUTHENTICATE
See below

FIRMWARE LOCK:
Enabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

SETTINGS LOCK:
Enabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
FAILED AUTHENTICATE — If this setting is Enabled then the number of failed authentications is compared with the Session
Lockout threshold. When the Session Lockout threshold is exceeded, this minor alarm indication comes up.
FIRMWARE LOCK — If this setting is Enabled, then any firmware upgrade operation attempt when the LOCK FIRMWARE
setting is enabled brings up this self test alarm.
SETTINGS LOCK — If this setting is Enabled then an unauthorized write attempt to a setting for a given role activates this self
test.
5
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  SECURITY  SUPERVISORY  SELF TESTS  FAILED AUTHENTICATE
 FAILED
 AUTHENTICATE

FAILED AUTHENTICATE:
Enabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
CyberSentry setup
When first using CyberSentry security, use the following procedure for setup.
1.
Log in to the relay as Administrator by using the VALUE keys on the front panel to enter the default password
"ChangeMe1#". Note that the LOCK SETTINGS setting needs to be disabled (default) in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP
 SECURITY  SUPERVISORY menu.
2.
Enable the Supervisor role if you have a need for it.
3.
Make any required changes in configuration, such as setting a valid IP address for communication over Ethernet.
4.
Log out of the Administrator account by choosing None.
5.
Next, Device or Server authentication can be chosen on the login screen, but the choice is available only in EnerVista.
Use Device authentication to log in using the five pre-configured roles (Administrator, Supervisor, Engineer, Operator,
Observer). When using a serial connection, only Device authentication is supported. When Server authentication is
required, characteristics for communication with a RADIUS server must be configured. This is possible only in the
EnerVista software. The RADIUS server itself also must be configured. The appendix called RADIUS Server at the end of
this instruction manual gives an example of how to set up a simple RADIUS server. Once both the RADIUS server and
the parameters for connecting the UR to the server have been configured, you can choose Server authentication on
the login screen of EnerVista.
5-20
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
The use of CyberSentry for devices communicating through an Ethernet-to-RS485 gateway is not
supported. Because these gateways do not support the secure protocols necessary to communicate
with such devices, the connection cannot be established. Use the device as a non-CyberSentry
device.
Users logged in through the front panel are not timed out and cannot be forcefully logged out by a
supervisor. Roles logged in through the front panel that do no allow multiple instances (Administrator,
Supervisor, Engineer, Operator) must switch to None (equivalent to a logout) when they are done in
order to log out.
For all user roles except Observer, only one instance can be logged in at a time, for both login by
front panel and software.
To configure Server authentication:
1.
In the EnerVista software, choose Device authentication and log in as Administrator.
2.
Configure the following RADIUS server parameters: IP address, authentication port, shared secret, and vendor ID.
3.
On the RADIUS server, configure the user accounts. Do not use the five pre-defined roles as user names (Administrator,
Supervisor, Engineer, Operator, Observer) in the RADIUS server. If you do, the UR relay automatically provides the
authentication from the device.
4.
In the EnerVista software, choose Server authentication and log in using the user name and password configured on
the RADIUS server for Server authentication login.
5.
After making any required changes, log out.
When changing settings offline, ensure that only settings permitted by the role that performs the
settings download are changed because only those changes are applied.
Pushbuttons (both user-control buttons and user-programmable buttons) located on the front panel can be pressed by an
Administrator or Engineer role. This also applies to the RESET button, which resets targets, where targets are errors
displayed on the front panel or the Targets panel of the EnerVista software. The RESET button has special behavior in that it
allows these two roles to press it even when they are logged in through the RS232 port and not through the front panel.
To reset the security event log and self-test operands:
1.
Log in as Supervisor (if the role is enabled) or Administrator (if the Supervisor role is disabled) and execute a clear
security command under Commands > Security > Clear Security.
Security events
The security events produced when the CyberSentry option is purchased are sent as sytem log (syslog) messages to a
syslog server, if one is configured. The format is as follows.
Security log
Event Number
Date &
Timestamp
Username
IP address
Role
Activity Value
Event Number — Event identification number (index)
Date & Timestamp — UTC date and time
Username — 255 chars maximum, but in the security log it is truncated to 20 characters
IP address — Device IP address
Role — 16 bit unsigned, of type format F617
Enumeration Role
0
None
1
Administrator
2
Supervisor
3
Engineer
4
Operator
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-21
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Enumeration Role
5
Factory
Activity Value — 16 bit unsigned
Enumeration Description
5
1
Authentication Failed
2
User Lockout
3
FW Upgrade
4
FW Lock
5
Settings Lock
6
Settings Change. Because this can fill the entire event log, it is supported by the
already existing Settings_Change.log file. This event is not required.
7
Clear Oscillography command
8
Clear Data Logger command (not applicable to all UR products)
9
Clear Demand Records command (not applicable to all UR products)
10
Clear Energy command (not applicable to all UR products)
11
Clear Unauthorized Access command
12
Clear Teleprotection Counters command (not applicable to all UR products)
13
Clear All Relay Records command
14
Role Log in
15
Role Log out
16
WRITE_SETTING_FILE
17
Factory Mode enabled
18
Factory Mode disabled
In addition to supporting syslog, a C30 with CyberSentry also saves the security events in two local security files, these
being SECURITY_EVENTS.CSV and SETTING_CHANGES.LOG. Details on these files and how to retrieve them are available in
the EnerVista software under Maintenance > Retrieve File. Depending on the level of criticality/severity, a syslog server or
a reporting tool gathering information from a syslog server can produce reports, charts, and so on. All severity levels are
per RFC 5424.
Table 5-6: CyberSentry system events recorded
Event
Severity
Description
FAILED_AUTH, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP
Notice (5)
A failed authentication with origin information (username and IP:MAC
address), a time stamp in UTC time when it occurred
AUTH_LOCKOUT, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP Warning (4)
An authentication lockout has occurred because of too many failed
authentication attempts
FIRMWARE_UPGD, ORIGIN,
TIMESTAMP
Information (6)
Indicates that a change of firmware has occurred
FIRMWARE_LOCK, ORIGIN,
TIMESTAMP
Warning (4)
An attempt was made to change firmware while the firmware lock was
enabled
SETTING_CHG, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP
Notice (5)
Indicates setting change(s)
SETTING_LOCK, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP
Warning (4)
An attempt was made to change settings while the settings lock was enabled
LOGIN, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP
Information (6)
Indicates when a certain role logged in
LOGOUT, ORIGIN, TIMESTAMP
Information (6)
Indicates when a certain role logged out or timed out
CLEAR_OSCILLOGRAPHY
Notice (5)
Clear oscillography command was issued
CLEAR_DATA_LOGGER
Notice (5)
Clear data logger command was issued
CLEAR_DEMAND_RECS
Notice (5)
Clear demand records command was issued
CLEAR_ENERGY
Notice (5)
Clear energy command was issued
RESET_UNAUTH_ACCESS
Notice (5)
Reset Unauthorized access command was issued
CLEAR_TELEPROTECTION_CNT
Notice (5)
Clear teleprotection counters command was issued
5-22
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Event
Severity
Description
CLEAR_ALL_RECS
Notice (5)
Clear all records command was issued
WRITE_SETTING_FILE
Notice (5)
Write settings file to the relay
FACTORY_MODE_ENABLED
Warning (4)
Factory Service Mode activated
FACTORY_MODE_DISABLED
Warning (4)
Factory Service Mode deactivated
5.3.2 Display properties
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES
 DISPLAY
 PROPERTIES

LANGUAGE:
English
Range:
English; English, French; English, Russian; English,
Chinese; English, German (examples; depends on order code)
Visible when language other than English purchased

FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1

DEFAULT MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 300 s
Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1

DEFAULT MESSAGE
INTENSITY: 25 %
Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
Visible when a VFD is installed

SCREEN SAVER
FEATURE: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Visible when an LCD is installed

SCREEN SAVER WAIT
TIME: 30 min
Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1
Visible when an LCD is installed

CURRENT CUT-OFF
LEVEL: 0.020 pu
Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001

VOLTAGE CUT-OFF
LEVEL: 1.0 V
Range: 0.1 to 2.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1
5
Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings.
LANGUAGE — This setting selects the language used to display settings, actual values, and targets. This setting displays
when a language other than English was purchased, and the range depends on the order code of the relay.
For Japanese, the settings display in Japanese on the graphical front panel, while the keys printed on the panel are in
English.
For Japanese and Chinese, up to 10 characters can be input in a field on the graphical front panel, not 20.
With the graphical front panel, the language can be changed regardless of the language purchased. That is, all languages
can be used. If you select a language with which you are unfamiliar and want to switch back to English for example, the
menu order remains the same. That is, Settings is always second, Product Setup is always first, Display Properties is
always second, and Language is always first.
If the language is changed after entering user-configured names, such as relay names, the strings are not translated. For
example, a relay name is entered in English, the language is changed to Japanese, and the relay name remains in English.
Set the language before changing settings.
Restart the relay after changing the LANGUAGE setting.
The language can be selected also for the front panel in EnerVista under Maintenance > Change Front Panel.
The language of the EnerVista software can be changed under View > Language. Languages supported by the operating
system display; that is for Polish or Japanese to display, the software needs to be installed on a Polish or Japanese
operating system.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-23
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLASH MESSAGE TIME — Flash messages are status, warning, error, and information messages displayed in response to
certain key presses during settings programming. These messages override any normal messages. Use this setting to
change the duration of flash messages on the display.
DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT — If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default
message. The inactivity time is modified using this setting to ensure that messages remain on the screen long enough
during programming or reading of actual values. This setting is not supported on the graphical front panel.
DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY — To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be
attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness.
This setting is not supported on the graphical front panel.
SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME — These settings are only visible if the C30 has a liquid crystal display
(LCD) and control its backlighting. When the SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is “Enabled,” the LCD backlighting turns off after the
DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME, provided that no keys have been pressed and no
target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD backlighting turns on. These
settings are not supported on the graphical front panel.
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL — This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the rated value)
are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others prefer the current
to display even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The C30 applies a cut-off value to the
magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This
applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical components. The cut-off
operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications
protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL
setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL — This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measurements
5
(at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed as zero,
while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The C30
applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level,
it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical components. The cut-off
operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by communications
protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.
Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals as valid
measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of “0.02 pu” for CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL and “1.0 V” for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are recommended.
5.3.3 Graphical front panel
The graphical front panel is a hardware option.
Use the EnerVista software to configure the graphical front panel. The settings are not accessible from the graphical front
panel.
The following screens are available:
•
Home page
•
Rolling mode
•
Metering editor
•
Single-line diagram editor
•
Annunciator editor
•
Configurable navigation
The settings menu itself and the event record pages are not configurable.
5-24
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Multiple screens can be opened in the EnerVista software, but the first remains active and the others can be read-only. For
example, the Annunciator Editor and Single Line Diagram Editor can be open and active, then subsequently opened Rolling
Mode and Home Page screens are read-only. Close the windows, then re-open the one required.
5.3.3.1 Home page
This window sets the home page displayed on the graphical front panel and the date and time formats for all pages. Home
page options include display of product information, alarms, actual values, and event records. In addition, the window
allows selection of a FlexLogic operand that enables/disables local control of breakers and switches from the graphical
front panel.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Home Page. The menu does not display when there is no
graphical front panel.
Figure 5-4: Home page with product information
Setting Group
Alarm Target
Relay Date and Time
1
5
859850A1.cdr
Figure 5-5: Home page settings
Home Page Content
Range: Product Information, SLD 1…5, Annunciator, Annunciator 1…8, Phasors 1…6, Tabular 1…5, Event Records, Targets
Default: Product Information
This setting specifies the page to display between the home page header and footer. Pressing the Home button returns
the display to this page. The home page displays for the rolling mode delay specified, then changes to the rolling mode
pages.
The "Annunciator" option without a page number specifies the first annunciator page in the following sequence:
–
The first annunciator page that contains an annunciator window that is in alarm (fast flash)
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-25
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
–
The first annunciator page that contains an annunciator window that is in ringback. Ringback is a "return alert."
Visual and audible signals are given when conditions return to normal, then the sequence returns to normal by
pushing the RESET button.
–
The first annunciator page that contains an annunciator window that is in abnormal state
–
Annunciator page 1
Whenever an annunciator window changes state this list is re-evaluated, which can result in the home page displaying
a different annunciator page.
The Tabular option displays a configured actual values/metering page.
The Targets option displays error messages, such as wrong transceiver, similar to event record entries.
Date Format
Range: yyyy-mm-dd, dd-mmm-yy, yyyy/mm/dd, m/d/yyyy, m/d/yy, mm/dd/yy, mm/dd/yyyy, yy/mm/dd
Default: yyyy-mm-dd
This setting specifies the format for dates on the graphical front panel. It applies to the page header, the events records,
the annunciator, and everywhere else a date displays on the panel. If the relay is synchronized to an external time
source via PTP, IRIG-B, SNTP, and so on, the date/time is shown in white, and otherwise in yellow.
yyyy — four-digit year, for example 2017
yy — two-digit year, for example 17 for 2017
mmm — abbreviation of month name, for example Jan for January
mm — two-digit month, for example 01 for January
m — one or two-digit month, for example 1 for January and 10 for October
dd — two-digit day, for example 08
5
d — one or two-digit day, for example 8 and 28
To set the date and time, access Synchronize Devices in the software, synchronize to a time source using Settings >
Product Setup > Real Time Clock, or synchronize to the computer using Commands > Set Date and Time.
Time Format
Range: hh:mm:ss, h:mm:ss tt
Default: hh:mm:ss
This setting specifies the format for time on the graphical front panel. It applies to the page header and everywhere else
a time displays on the panel. When the Date Format and the Time Format use the defaults, the date and time are
separated by the character "T" per the ISO convention, such as "2017-09-24T10:58:31". Otherwise the date and time are
separated by a space. If the relay is synchronized to an external time source via PTP, IRIG-B, SNTP, and so on, the date/
time is shown in white, and otherwise in yellow.
hh — two-digit hour, for example 02 for two o’clock
h — one or two-digit hour, for example 2 for two o’clock
mm — two-digit minute, for example 51 minutes
ss — two-digit second (can have a decimal and further digits appended), for example 16 seconds
tt — AM or PM based on 12 hour clock
If microseconds have to be displayed, for example, in the event records, the 24-hour clock is adopted. The
representation of an accumulated period (for example hh:mm) is not affected by the selected time format.
To set the date and time, access Synchronize Devices in the software or synchronize to a time source using Settings >
Product Setup > Real Time Clock.
Enable Controls From GFP
Range: FlexLogic operand
Default: ON
This setting enables/disables local control of breakers and switches from the graphical front panel.
The FlexLogic operand assigned to this setting applies to controls of all the single-line diagram pages. The assigned
operand status is reflected in the ENABLE CTRL FROM GFP FlexLogic operand.
5-26
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
When the operand assigned to this setting is ON, controls are enabled, as indicated on a single-line diagram with an
Enable Control label. Pressing the side pushbutton next to the label populates the front panel display with control soft
keys.
When the operand assigned to this setting is OFF, controls are disabled, and the Enable Control label does not display.
If already in control mode and the operand status assigned to this setting changes to OFF, at the confirmation prompt
the control command is not issued and the SLD screen goes to the top SLD page instead.
5.3.3.2 Rolling mode
After a user-defined period of inactivity, the graphical front panel changes, or rolls, to user-selected pages. Up to 10 pages
can be specified. Similarly, the display backlight intensity is lowered to a specified level; lower intensity extends the life of
the display.
Each rolling page displays for a few seconds; duration cannot be set.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Rolling Mode.
Figure 5-6: Rolling mode settings
5
Rolling Mode Delay
Range: 0 to 900 s in steps of 1
Default: 300 s
Set this delay to 0 to disable the rolling mode feature.
Otherwise, after no pushbutton has been pressed for the amount of time specified by this setting, the display
automatically enters rolling mode. While in the rolling mode, the Rolling Mode Pages display. Rolling mode can be
interrupted when a setting changes, such as changing the home page, then resumes rolling.
Automatic Annunciator Recall
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
When Enabled, an annunciator window changes state, and the display is in rolling mode, this setting terminates rolling
mode and displays the annunciator page containing the changed state.
The Configurable Navigation feature takes precedence over this setting when the Automatic Annunciator Recall and
Configurable Navigation are activated by the same input.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-27
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Screen Saver Delay
Range: 0 to 900 s in steps of 1
Default: 300 s
The screen saver mode extends the life of the display. After the amount of time set here, the screen saver activates and
the display intensity is reduced to the level set by the Screen Saver Intensity setting. When in rolling mode, rolling
continues while the screen saver is active. The screen saver terminates when rolling mode terminates. To disable the
screen saver, set the delay to 0.
Screen Saver Intensity
Range: 0, 10, 20, or 30 %
Default: 30 %
This setting sets the brightness of the display while the screen saver is active. For example, 0% means that the screen is
dark and nothing displays. Pressing a pushbutton or changing a setting in the software, for example, re-activates the
display.
Number of Rolling Mode Pages
Range: 1 to 10 in steps of 1
Default: 1
This setting specifies the number of rolling pages. During rolling mode, the graphical front panel displays pages from 1
to the selected number.
Rolling Mode Page 1 to 10
Range: Product Information, SLD 1…5, Annunciator, Annunciator 1…8, Phasors 1…6, Tabular 1…5, Event Records, Targets
Default: Product Information
5
These settings specify the pages to display on the graphical front panel while in rolling mode.
The "Annunciator" selection without a page number specifies the first annunciator page in the following sequence:
–
The first annunciator page that contains an annunciator window that is in alarm (fast flash)
–
The first annunciator page that contains an annunciator window that is in ringback. Ringback is a "return alert."
Visual and audible signals are given when conditions return to normal, then the sequence returns to normal by
pushing the RESET button.
–
The first annunciator page that contains an annunciator window that is in abnormal state
–
Annunciator page 1
Whenever an annunciator window changes state the list is re-evaluated, which can result in the display of a different
annunciator page in the rolling sequence.
The Tabular option displays a configured actual values/metering page.
The Targets option displays error messages, such as wrong transceiver, similar to event record entries.
5.3.3.3 Metering editor
This feature creates tables of actual/metered values for the graphical front panel. It configures the content that displays in
the Metering Tab pushbutton. An actual value, status, or text can be displayed. Five tabular metering pages can be
configured. There also can be a phasor page for each configured AC source, and these pages are not configurable.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Metering Editor.
Set the Current Page, Page Name, Layout, configure the top inputs, then the cells. The 16 inputs at the top of the page are
used as inputs for the Status Index fields. Click the Preview button to view the page.
For a phasor diagram, configure the source under Settings > System Setup > Signal Sources. The diagram is then
viewable by pushing the Metering Tab pushbutton on the graphical front panel. The Metering Editor is not used for these
phasor diagrams.
The figures show setup and table preview.
The Cells configured are not retained when using the Convert Device Settings function, for example when converting a
file in the Offline Window from version 7.6 to 7.7.
5-28
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-7: Metering Editor window
5
Figure 5-8: Preview for graphical front panel
To avoid conflict with XML programming, do not enter the following characters on the Annunciator and Metering editor
panels: " (quotation mark), ' (apostrophe), < (less than), > (greater than), & (ampersand). When used, the text following the
character does not display or the Annunciator and Metering panels do not display on the graphical front panel.
STATUS INPUTS 1 to 16
Range: OFF, ON, any FlexLogic operand
Default: OFF
This setting identifies the potential inputs for use in the STATUS INDEX fields, for display of the status of FlexLogic
operands.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-29
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
A maximum of eight Status Inputs can be used per metering page, and 16 in all metering pages.
Select the metering input from the drop-down list. The options reflect the FlexLogic operands applicable to the C30.
They are inputs for all five metering pages, not just the current page.
CURRENT PAGE
Range: Page 1...Page 5
Default: Page 1
Select the metering page to configure from the drop-down list. There are five pages possible, viewable with the Tab
pushbuttons on the graphical front panel.
PAGE NAME
Range: Page 1...Page 5
Default: Page 1
Up to 20 characters can be input here as the name of each metering page. The name displays for the Tab pushbutton on
the graphical front panel.
LAYOUT
Range: 3x4, 4x6, 6x8, 6x4, 8x6, 12x8, 12x4, 16x6, 18x8
Default: 6x4
This setting determines how many rows and columns display on the graphical front panel with the metering information.
The configurable rows in the settings window change dynamically based on this setting.
CONTENT
Range: Actual, Status, Text
Default: Text
5
Select the type of content to display.
–
Actual — an actual value/data. The Configure button becomes active for the actual value to be selected.
–
Status — one of the operands selected from the STATUS INPUTS fields. Select it in the STATUS INDEX field.
–
Text — indicates that text is to display instead of a metered value
STATUS INDEX
Range: 1...16
Default:
This field becomes active when the CONTENT field is set to Status. It selects the input from the STATUS INPUTS to display
the on/off status of the selected operand.
A maximum of eight Status Inputs can be used per metering page, and 16 in all metering pages.
TEXT
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Default:
Enter the text to display on the graphical front panel. This field is active when the CONTENT field is set to Text or Status.
When Status is selected, the text displays when the status input is in the "on" state.
OFF TEXT
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Default:
Enter the text to display on the graphical front panel when the element being monitored is in an off/closed state. This
field is active when the CONTENT field is set to Status. The text displays when the status input is in the "off" state.
FONT
Range: 16, 18, 20
Default: 16
Set the font size to display on the graphical front panel.
5-30
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
TEXT COLOR
Range: 24-bit color selector
Default: Black
Set the text color to display in the specified cell.
BACK COLOR
Range: 24-bit color selector
Default: Grey
Set the background color to display in the specified cell.
ACTUAL (Configure)
Range: Configure
Default: Configure
The Configure button becomes active when the CONTENT field is set to "Actual." The window specifies the metering
data to display.
Figure 5-9: Metering value properties window
5
Parameter
Range: any FlexAnalog parameter
Default:
This setting selects a FlexAnalog parameter that specifies the metered value to display in the metering window. A
FlexAnalog is an analog parameter.
Units
Range: up to eight alphanumeric characters
Default:
This setting specifies the units of measurement for the metered value and is populated based on the Parameter
selected. The field can be left blank when units of measure do not apply.
Scale Factor
Range: G Giga, M Mega, k Kilo, None
Default: None
This setting allows the user to specify the scaling factor for the metering units value. Options depend on the Parameter.
Multiplier
Range: -1000000 to 1000000
Default: 1.0
This setting allows the user to specify a multiplier for the metering parameter value. The multiplier must be in
compliance with the 32-bit floating-point format per IEEE 754, otherwise, the input value is represented as per the IEEE
standard. For example, 1234.56789 is represented as 1234.567871094, and 9876.54321 as 9876.54296875.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-31
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Number of Integers
Range: 1 to 12 in steps of 1
Default: 1
This setting specifies the number of integers in the displayed metered value. It can be used to provide for leading
character spacing of the display value.
For example, setting the number to 2 displays 00.000[V] and setting it to 3 displays 000.000[V].
Number of Decimals
Range: 0 to 10 in steps of 1
Default: 3
This setting specifies the number of decimal places in the displayed metered value. For example, setting the number to 1
displays 0.0 and setting it to 2 displays 0.00.
5.3.3.4 Single-line diagram editor
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Single Line Diagram Editor. Use is explained in the Interfaces
chapter.
5.3.3.5 Annunciator editor
The annunciator editor is used to create annunciator content for the graphical front panel, including alarms and actual
values. Use is explained in the Interfaces chapter.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Annunciator Editor.
5
To add an alarm, access the Annunciator Editor, configure the Layout and Page Name, configure the alarm or actual value,
set the text and color, then save. On the graphical front panel, view the content by pressing the Annunciator Tab
pushbutton at the bottom of the Home page. (Alarms do not display automatically.) Acknowledge the alarm by navigating
to it with the arrow pushbuttons, then pressing the ENTER or RESET pushbutton.
The figure shows alarms for basic functions. The last annunciator page is named Device Alarms. Alarms are set for the
device being offline, Ethernet cable issues, unauthorized access, battery failure, and high ambient temperature. They can
reset themselves when conditions return to normal, except for unauthorized access and temperature monitoring, which
require the alarms to be acknowledged. The self-test error functions, here for Ethernet and battery failures, also have been
enabled under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable Self Tests (not shown). When the alarms are triggered,
they display with a red background. An alarm is acknowledged by using the arrow keys on the graphical front panel then
pressing the ENTER button.
5-32
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-10: Annunciator editor with preview shown
5
To avoid conflict with XML programming, do not enter the following characters on the Annunciator and Metering editor
panels: " (quotation mark), ' (apostrophe), < (less than), > (greater than), & (ampersand). When used, the text following the
character does not display or the Annunciator and Metering panels do not display on the graphical front panel.
Reset
Range: ON, OFF, any FlexLogic operand
Default: OFF
This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that when activated acknowledges/resets all annunciator windows in the
graphical front panel. For example, to have the first user pushbutton resets all alarms, set this to PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and
turn on the pushbutton under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable Pushbuttons. This setting is the same
as the one defined in Settings > Inputs/Outputs > Resetting > Reset Annunciator. See the Resetting section later in this
chapter.
LAYOUT
Range: 3x4, 4x6, 6x8
Default: 3x4
Selects the number of rows and columns to display on the annunciator pages. For example, 3x4 means 12 windows
display per page over eight pages. Up to 96 entries are possible.
To view the layout, click the Preview button.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-33
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PAGE NAMES
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Default: Page 1...Page 8
Up to 20 characters can be input as the name of each annunciator page. The number of pages depends on the Layout.
The name displays for the Tab pushbutton on the graphical front panel.
PARAMETER
Range: Indicator 1...Indicator 96
Default: Indicator 1...Indicator 96
Read-only field. Up to 96 windows are possible.
CONTENT
Range: Actual, Alarm, Mixed
Default: Alarm
Select if the cell is to be an alarm, an actual value, or a combination thereof, for example consists of a single metered
value (set to “Actual”), contains a single alarm indication (set to “Alarm”), or contains both a metered value and an alarm
indication (set to “Mixed”).
ALARM INPUT
Range: OFF, ON, any FlexLogic operand
Default: OFF
5
Select a trigger for the alarm, or the input signal connected to the alarm. For example, when set to "FIRST ETHERNET
FAIL" and the Ethernet cable connected to port 1 is removed, the alarm is triggered. (Note that when the Ethernet cable
is inserted into an SFP connector and the SFP connector is removed, the alarm is not triggered.) The field is read-only for
an actual value.
The selectable options are the FlexLogic operands specific to the product.
ALARM TYPE
Range: Acknowledgeable, Self Reset, Latched
Default: Acknowledgeable
Set the alarm type. The field is read-only for an actual value.
Acknowledgeable — Follow the state transitions, as outlined in the Annunciator section of the Interfaces chapter. The
alarm blinks until acknowledged, then remains on until the condition clears.
Self Reset — Track the state of the input operand. The alarm turns on when the trigger activates and off when the trigger
clears.
Latched — Alarm is on until acknowledged/reset individually or until the RESET button is pressed.
To acknowledge/reset/unlatch an alarm, use the arrow buttons on the graphical front panel and press the ENTER
button.
TEXT (LINE 1 to 3)
Range: up to 10 alphanumeric characters
Default:
The text that displays in the annunciator cell. Three lines can be displayed. Note that a specified metering value replaces
the text for the selected line. This means that a line can display text or be set to show an actual metered value. If the text
does not display it is because an actual metered value is over-riding it; change the line for the text or for the actual value.
TEXT COLOR
Range: 24-bit color selector
Default: White
The color to display for the three text or actual value lines specified.
BACK COLOR
Range: 24-bit color selector
Default: Red
The background color to display for any triggered cell, for example when an alarm is triggered.
5-34
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
ACTUAL (Configure)
Range: Configure
Default: Configure
The Configure button becomes active when the CONTENT field is set to "Actual" or "Mixed." The window specifies the
metering data to display.
Parameter
Range: any FlexAnalog parameter
Default:
This setting selects a FlexAnalog parameter that specifies the metered value to display in the annunciator alarm.
Units
Range: up to eight alphanumeric characters
Default:
This setting specifies the units of measurement for the metered value and is populated based on the Parameter
selected. The field can be left blank when units of measure do not apply.
Scale Factor
Range: G Giga, M Mega, k Kilo, None
Default: None
This setting allows the user to specify the scaling factor for the metering units value. Options depend on the Parameter.
Multiplier
Range: -1000000 to 1000000
Default: 1.0
This setting allows the user to specify a multiplier for the metering parameter value. The multiplier must be in
compliance with the 32-bit floating-point format per IEEE 754, otherwise, the input value is represented as per the IEEE
standard. For example, 1234.56789 is represented as 1234.567871094, and 9876.54321 as 9876.54296875.
Number of Integers
Range: 1 to 12 in steps of 1
Default: 1
This setting specifies the number of integers in the displayed analog value. It can be used to provide for leading
character spacing of the display value.
For example, setting the number to 2 displays 00.000[V] and setting it to 3 displays 000.000[V].
Number of Decimals
Range: 0 to 10 in steps of 1
Default: 3
This setting specifies the number of decimal places in the displayed analog value. For example, setting the number to 1
displays 0.0 and setting it to 2 displays 0.00.
Display in Line
Range: 1, 2, 3
Default: 1
This setting specifies the line in the annunciator alarm window to display the metered value. The actual value replaces
the text for the selected line. For example, 2 means the value displays in line 2 of the text; any text configured to display
in that line does not display.
5.3.3.6 Configurable navigation
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Configurable Navigation.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-35
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
This feature allows FlexLogic operands to trigger page display on the graphical front panel. It consists of 64 setting pairs,
each with a condition and an activation page. The condition selects any FlexLogic operand. The activation page selects
any page available for the graphical front panel. The page opens whenever the selected operand transitions from Off to
On. The page remains open until rolling mode initiates, another trigger initiates from Configurable Navigation, or the Home
button is pressed.
Avoid selecting condition operands that are likely to operate simultaneously but activate different pages, as only one page
can be opened at a time. For example, do not select a single-line diagram page for breaker status open and select an
annunciator page for a trip alarm.
In the example shown, failure of any of the three Ethernet ports triggers the Product Information page to display. With
unauthorized access (such as wrong password), IRIG-B clock failure, or breaker trouble, the Event Records display. When a
breaker opens, a single-line diagram displays. For the Ethernet and IRIG-B failure operation to work, these functions also
have been enabled under Settings > Product Setup > User-Programmable Self Tests.
Figure 5-11: Configurable navigation editor
5
To use the feature, select a CONDITION, select an ACTIVATE PAGE, then save.
CONDITION
Range: OFF, ON, any FlexLogic operand
Default: OFF
Select the FlexLogic operand for the trigger. When it transitions from Off to On, it opens the page specified by the
ACTIVATE PAGE setting. The FlexLogic operands selectable depend on product. Select it from the drop-down list. Or click
or select the field and start typing to auto-fill. For example, typing F displays FIRST ETHERNET FAIL, while typing BR
displays the first breaker option.
ACTIVATE PAGE
Range: Product Information, SLD 1…5, Annunciator, Annunciator 1…8, Actual Values Phasors 1…6, Tabular 1…5, Event
Records, Targets
Default: Product Information
This setting specifies the page to display on the graphical front panel when the FlexLogic operand selected by its
CONDITON setting transitions from Off to On.
The "Annunciator" option without a page number specifies the first annunciator page in the following sequence:
–
The first annunciator page that contains an annunciator window that is in alarm (fast flash)
–
The first annunciator page that contains an annunciator window that is in ringback. Ringback is a "return alert."
Visual and audible signals are given when conditions return to normal, then the sequence returns to normal by
pushing the RESET button.
–
The first annunciator page that contains an annunciator window that is in abnormal state
–
Annunciator page 1
The Tabular option displays a configured actual values/metering page.
5-36
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
The Targets option displays error messages, such as wrong transceiver, similar to event record entries.
5.3.4 Clear relay records
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
 CLEAR RELAY
 RECORDS

CLEAR EVENT RECORDS:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

CLEAR DATA LOGGER:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

RESET UNAUTH ACCESS:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

CLEAR DIR I/O STATS:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Visible only for units with Direct I/O module
RESET UNAUTH ACCESS — Resets the access restriction counter.
Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic operands. Assigning userprogrammable pushbuttons to clear specific records is a typical application for these commands. Since the C30 responds
to rising edges of the configured FlexLogic operands, they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect.
Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, userprogrammable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the userprogrammable pushbuttons can provide extra security if required.
For example, to assign user-programmable pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, apply the following settings.
1.
Assign the clear demand function to pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP
 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu:
2.
Set the properties for user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT
SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
CLEAR DEMAND: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.20 s”
5.3.5 Communications
5.3.5.1 Menu
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS
 COMMUNICATIONS


 SERIAL PORTS

See below

 NETWORK

See page 5-41

 IPv4 ROUTE TABLE

See page 5-44

 MODBUS PROTOCOL

See page 5-47

 PROTOCOL

See page 5-47

 DNP PROTOCOL

See page 5-49
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-37
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

 DNP / IEC104
 POINT LISTS
See page 5-52

 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL

Access in EnerVista
See page 5-53

 WEB SERVER
 HTTP PROTOCOL
See page 5-100

 TFTP PROTOCOL

See page 5-101

 IEC 60870-5-104
 PROTOCOL
See page 5-101

 EGD PROTOCOL

See page 5-103

 IEC103
 PROTOCOL
See page 5-104

 USB 2.0 PORT

See page 5-109
5.3.5.2 Serial ports
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  SERIAL PORTS
 SERIAL PORTS

5

RS232 BAUD
RATE: 115200
Range: 19200, 115200

RS485 COM2 BAUD
RATE: 19200
Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200 bit/s

RS485 COM2 PARITY:
Even
Range: None, Odd, Even

RS485 COM2 RESPONSE
MIN TIME: 0 ms
Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
The front RS232 port applies to enhanced and basic front panels.
RS232 BAUD RATE, RS485 COM2 BAUD RATE, and PARITY — The C30 is equipped with two independent serial communication
ports. The front panel RS232 port (USB port with graphical front panel) is intended for local use. The rear COM2 port is
RS485 and has settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the
computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. Any of these ports can be connected to a computer
running the EnerVista software, for example to download and upload setting files, view measured parameters, and
upgrade the relay firmware. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC, or computer
using the RS485 ports. If IEC 60870-103 is chosen as the protocol, valid baud rates are 9600 and 19200 bit/s, and valid
parity is Even.
RS485 COM2 RESPONSE MIN TIME — This setting specifies the minimum time before the rear RS485 port transmits after
receiving data from a host. This feature allows operation with hosts that hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time
after each transmission.
5.3.5.3 Ethernet network topology
The C30 has three Ethernet ports. Each Ethernet port must belong to a different network or subnetwork. Configure the IP
address and subnet to ensure that each port meets this requirement. Two subnets are different when the bitwise AND
operation performed between their respective IP address and mask produces a different result. Communication becomes
unpredictable when more than one port is configured to the same subnet.
Example 1
IP1/Mask1: 10.1.1.2/255.255.255.0 (where LAN 1 is 10.1.1.x/255.255.255.0)
IP2/Mask2: 10.2.1.2/255.255.255.0 (where LAN2 is 10.2.1.x/255.255.255.0)
5-38
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
IP3/Mask3: 10.3.1.2/255.255.255.0 (where LAN3 is 10.3.1.x/255.255.255.0)
Example 2
IP1/Mask1: 10.1.1.2/255.0.0.0 (where LAN1 is 10.x.x.x/255.0.0.0)
IP2/Mask2: 11.1.1.2/255.0.0.0 (where LAN2 is 11.x.x.x/255.0.0.0)
IP3/Mask3: 12.1.1.2/255.0.0.0 (where LAN3 is 12.x.x.x/255.0.0.0)
Example 3 — Incorrect
IP1/Mask1: 10.1.1.2/255.0.0.0
IP2/Mask2: 10.2.1.2/255.0.0.0
IP3/Mask3: 10.3.1.2/255.0.0.0
This example is incorrect because the mask of 255.0.0.0 used for the three IP addresses makes them belong to the same
network of 10.x.x.x.
Single LAN, no redundancy
The topology shown in the following figure allows communications to SCADA, local configuration/monitoring through
EnerVista, and access to the public network shared on the same LAN. No redundancy is provided.
Figure 5-12: Network configuration for single LAN
Public Network
5
SCADA
EnerVista Software
LAN1
ML3000
P1
IP1/
MAC1
P2
UR
P3
859708A2.vsd
Multiple LANS, with redundancy
The following topology provides local configuration/monitoring through EnerVista software and access to the public
network shared on LAN1, to which port 1 (P1) is connected. There is no redundancy provided on LAN1. Communications to
SCADA is provided through LAN2. P2 and P3 are connected to LAN2, where P2 is the primary channel and P3 is the
redundant channel. In this configuration, P3 uses the IP and MAC addresses of P2.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-39
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-13: Multiple LANs, with redundancy
Public Network
SCADA
EnerVista Software
LAN1
LAN2
LAN2
ML3000
ML3000
ML3000
P1
P2
P3
IP1/
MAC1
IP2/
MAC2
IP2/
MAC2
Redundancy mode
UR
859709A4.vsd
5
Multiple LANS, no redundancy
The following topology provides local configuration/monitoring through EnerVista software on LAN1, to which port 1 (P1) is
connected, access to the public network on LAN2, to which port 2 (P2) is connected, and communications with SCADA on
LAN3, to which port 3 (P3) is connected. There is no redundancy.
Figure 5-14: Multiple LANS, no redundancy
Public Network
SCADA
EnerVista Software
LAN1
LAN2
LAN3
ML3000
ML3000
P1
IP1/
MAC1
ML3000
P2
P3
IP2/
MAC2
IP3/
MAC3
UR
859710A2.vsd
5-40
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
5.3.5.4 Network
As outlined in the previous section, when using more than one Ethernet port, configure each to belong to a different
network or subnet using the IP addresses and mask. Configure the network IP and subnet settings before configuring the
routing settings.
Follow the IP and subnet mask rules outlined in the Set IP Address in UR section of the Installation chapter.
To obtain a list of all port numbers used, for example for audit purposes, contact GE technical support with substantiating
information, such as the serial number and order code of your device.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  NETWORK 1(3)
 NETWORK PORT 1

 NETWORK PORT 2

 NETWORK PORT 3


PRT1 IP ADDRESS:
127.0.0.1
Range: standard IPV4 address format

PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK:
255.0.0.0
Range: standard IPV4 address format

PRT1 FUNCTION:
Enabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

PRT2 IP ADDRESS:
127.0.0.1
Range: standard IPV4 address format

PRT2 SUBNET IP MASK:
255.0.0.0
Range: standard IPV4 address format

PRT2 REDUNDANCY:
None
Range: None, Failover, PRP
Range if no PRP license: None, Failover

PRP MCST ADDR:
01154E000100
Range: 01-15-4E-00-01-00 to 01-15-4E-00-01-FF

PRT2 FUNCTION:
Enabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

PRT3 IP ADDRESS:
127.0.0.1
Range: standard IPV4 address format

PRT3 SUBNET IP MASK:
255.0.0.0
Range: standard IPV4 address format

PRT3 FUNCTION:
Enabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
The IP addresses are used with the DNP, Modbus/TCP, IEC 61580, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, HTTP, and PRP protocols. PRP is
explained in its own section later.
Use the front panel to change these settings. When online, the EnerVista software can be used to enable/disable each port
only. In the Offline Window area, all settings can be changed except port 2 redundancy (depending on firmware version).
When using GOOSE, in failover or PRP mode, port 3 configuration in the CID file is ignored. The Port 3 ConnectedAP
elements has no meaning, as ports 2 and 3 use the port 2 MAC address, IP address, and mask.
PRT1 (2 or 3) IP ADDRESS — This setting sets the port’s IPv4 address in standard IPV4 format. This setting is valid on port 3 if
port 2 REDUNDANCY is set to None.
PRT1 (2 or 3) SUBNET MASK — This setting sets the port’s IPv4 subnet mask in standard IPV4 format. This setting is valid on
port 3 if port 2 REDUNDANCY is set to None.
PRT1 (2 or 3) FUNCTION — This setting enable/disables network communication on the respective port. When the port
function is Disabled, the network traffic on this port is disabled. The PRT2 redundancy setting has no effect on this
functionality. The change takes effect upon relay restart.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-41
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
If you disable a port here that is used to communicate between the relay and the software, this can take down all
communication between the two. For example, an Ethernet connection set to the IP address of the relay can be disabled
and cannot be reached, even when pinging. The port needs to be re-enabled, IP and any gateway addresses need to be
checked, and the relay needs to be set to Programmed.
PRT2 REDUNDANCY — Determines if ports 2 and 3 operate in redundant or independent mode. If a license for PRP was
purchased, the options are None, Failover, and PRP. If a license for PRP was not purchased, the options are None and
Failover. In non-redundant mode (REDUNDANCY set to None), ports 2 and 3 operate independently with their own MAC, IP,
and mask addresses. If REDUNDANCY is set to Failover, the operation of ports 2 and 3 is as follows:
•
Ports 2 and 3 use the port 2 MAC address, IP address, and mask
•
The configuration fields for IP address and mask on port 3 are hidden
•
Port 3 is in standby mode and does not actively communicate on the Ethernet network but monitors its link to the
Multilink switch. If port 2 detects a problem with the link, communications is switched to Port 3. Port 3 is, in effect,
acting as a redundant or backup link to the network for port 2. Once port 2 detects that the link between itself and the
switch is good and that communication is healthy for five minutes, then switching back to port 2 is performed. The
delay in switching back ensures that rebooted switching devices connected to the C30, which signal their ports as
active prior to being completely functional, have time to completely initialize themselves and become active. Once
port 2 is active again, port 3 returns to standby mode.
If REDUNDANCY is set to PRP, the operation of ports 2 and 3 is as follows:
5
•
Ports 2 and 3 use the port 2 MAC address, IP address, and mask
•
The configuration fields for IP address and mask on port 3 are overwritten with those from port 2. This is visible on the
front panel but not displayed in the EnerVista software.
•
Port 2 MCST ADDRESS field is visible
•
The port 2 PTP function still uses only port 2 and the port 3 PTP function still uses only port 3. The relay still
synchronizes to whichever port has the best master. When ports 2 and 3 see the same master, as is typically the case
for PRP networks, the port with the better connectivity is used.
Behavior for GOOSE messages is as follows:
•
If REDUNDANCY is set to Failover or PRP, In order to transmit a GOOSE message on port 2, the CID file must be
configured to have the corresponding GSE element in both ConnectedAPs S2 and S3. In the EnerVista software, the
TxGOOSE CPU PORT ASSIGNMENT needs to be "Ports-1,2,3" to transmit GOOSE on both ports 1 and 2, or "Ports-2,3" to
have GOOSE only on port 2, with failover/ PRP.
•
If REDUNDANCY is set to PRP, the port 2 configured GOOSE message is simultaneously transmitted on ports 2 and 3
•
If REDUNDANCY is set to failover and the port 2 link fails, then only the port 2 configured GOOSE message is
transmitted on port 3
The two ports must be connected to completely independent LANs with no single point of failure, such as common
power supplies that feed switches on both LANs.
When REDUNDANCY is set to PRP or failover and the network path with resolved default gateway is broken, then the
ARP table needs approximately five seconds to rebuild. The layer 2 protocols (GOOSE and PTP) are not affected.
However, the TCP/IP or UDP protocols (MMS connections, DNP3.0, and so on) can require reconnection if their active
connection does not ride through re-transmission frames.
For any changes to this setting to take effect, restart the unit.
PRT2 PRP MCST ADDR — This setting allows the user to change the multicast address used by the PRP supervision frames.
This setting is available if REDUNDANCY is set to PRP. All devices in the same PRP network need to have the same multicast
address. Choose an address that does not conflict with another multicast protocol.
5.3.5.5 Far-End Fault Indication (FEFI)
Since 100BASE-FX does not support Auto-Negotiation, a Far-End Fault Indication (FEFI) feature is included since UR 7 that
allows for detection of link failures.
5-42
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
The purpose of the Far-End Fault feature is to allow the stations on both ends of a pair of fibers to be informed when there
is a problem with one of the fibers. Without the Far-End Fault feature, it is impossible for a fiber interface to detect a
problem that affects only its transmit fiber.
When the Far-End Fault feature is supported, a loss of receive signal (link) causes the transmitter to generate a Far-End
Fault pattern in order to inform the device at the far end of the fiber pair that a fault has occurred.
When the local receiver again detects a signal, the local transmitter automatically returns to normal operation.
If a Far-End Fault pattern is received by a fiber interface that supports the Far-End Fault feature and it is enabled, it reacts
by dropping the link as if there were no signal at all.
If the receiving interface does not support the Far-End Fault feature or has it disabled, an incoming Far-End Fault pattern is
ignored.
It is strongly recommended to have switches used for substation automation that support the Far-End Fault feature,
especially when UR 7 redundancy Failover is selected for redundancy.
5.3.5.6 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
The C30 is provided with optional PRP capability, specified as a software option at the time of ordering.
The Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) defines a redundancy protocol for high availability in substation automation
networks. It applies to networks based on Ethernet technology (ISO/IEC 8802-3) and is based on the second edition (July
2012) of IEC 62439-3, clause 4.
PRP is designed to provide seamless recovery in case of a single failure in the network, by using a combination of LAN
duplication and frame duplication. Identical frames are sent on two completely independent networks that connect
source and destination. Under normal circumstances both frames reach the destination and one of them is sent up the OSI
stack to the destination application, while the second one is discarded. If an error occurs in one of the networks and traffic
is prevented from flowing on that path, connectivity is provided through the other network to ensure continuous
communication. Take care when designing the two LANs, so that no single point of failure (such as a common power
supply) is encountered, as such scenarios can bring down both LANs simultaneously.
Figure 5-15: Example of parallel redundant network
PRP uses specialized nodes called doubly attached nodes (DANPs) for handling the duplicated frames. DANP devices have
an additional module, called a Link Redundancy Entity (LRE). LRE is responsible for duplicating frames and adding the
specific PRP trailer when sending the frames out on the LAN, as well as making decisions on received frames as to which
one is sent up the OSI stack to the application layer and which one is discarded. LRE is responsible for making PRP
transparent to the higher layers of the stack.
In addition, there is a second type of specialized device used in PRP networks, called RedBox, with the role of connecting
Single Attached Nodes (SANs) to a redundant network.
UR relays implement the DANP functionality. The RedBox functionality is not implemented.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-43
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The original standard IEC 62439-3 (2010) was amended to align PRP with the High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR)
protocol. To achieve this, the original PRP was modified at the cost of losing compatibility with the PRP 2010 version. The
revised standard IEC 62439-3 (2012) is commonly referred to as PRP-1, while the original standard is PRP-0. The UR relays
support PRP-1.
The relay implements PRP on two of its Ethernet ports, specifically Ports 2 and 3 of the CPU module. Use the previous
section (network port configuration) to configure PRP.
PRP is purchased as a separate option. If purchased (valid order code), PRP can be enabled in configuration through a
setting available on the network configuration menu, REDUNDANCY, which already has the capability of enabling failover
redundancy. The options on this setting must be changed to accommodate two types of redundancy: failover and PRP.
When REDUNDANCY is set to either failover or PRP, the ports dedicated for PRP (Ports 2 and 3) operate in redundant mode.
In this mode, Port 3 uses the MAC, IP address, and mask of Port 2.
5.3.5.7 IPv4 route table
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IPv4 ROUTE TABLE 1(6)
 IPv4 ROUTE TABLE


 DEFAULT IPv4 ROUTE


 IPv4 NETWORK
 ROUTE 1

 IPv4 NETWORK
 ROUTE 6

5
A default route and up to six static routes can be configured.
The default route is used as the last choice when no other route towards a given destination is found.
 DEFAULT IPv4 ROUTE


GATEWAY ADDRESS:
127.0.0.1
Range: standard IPV4 unicast address format
 IPv4 NETWORK
 ROUTE 1

RT1 DESTINATION:
127.0.0.1
Range: standard IPV4 address format

RT1 NET MASK:
255.0.0.0
Range: standard IPV4 subnet mask format

RT1 GATEWAY:
127.0.0.1
Range: standard IPV4 unicast address format
Configure the network IP and subnet settings before configuring the routing settings.
Add and delete static routes
Host routes are not supported at present.
The routing table configuration is available on the serial port and front panel. This is a deliberate decision, to avoid loss of
connectivity when remotely configuring the C30.
By default, the value of the destination field is 127.0.0.1 for all static routes (1 to 6). This is equivalent to saying that the
static routes are not configured. When the destination address is 127.0.0.1, the mask and gateway also must be kept on
default values.
By default, the value of the route gateway address is 127.0.0.1. This means that the default route is not configured.
To add a route:
1.
Use any of the static network route entries numbered 1 to 6 to configure a static network route. Once a route
destination is configured for any of the entries 1 to 6, that entry becomes a static route and it must meet all the rules
listed in the next section, General Conditions to be Satisfied by Static Routes.
2.
To configure the default route, enter a default gateway address. Once a default gateway address is configured, it
5-44
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
must be validated against condition 2 of the General Conditions to be Satisfied by Static Routes, where the route
gateway must be on a connected network.
To delete a route:
1.
Replace the route destination with the default loopback address of 127.0.0.1. When deleting a route, the mask and
gateway also must be brought back to default values.
2.
Delete the default route by replacing the default gateway with the default value of 127.0.0.1.
General conditions to be satisfied by static routes
The following rules are validated internally:
•
The route mask has IP mask format. In binary this needs to be a set of contiguous bits of 1 from left to right, followed
by one or more contiguous bits of 0.
•
The route destination and mask must match. This can be verified by checking that
RtDestination and RtMask = RtDestination
Example of good configuration: RtDestination = 10.1.1.0; Rt Mask = 255.255.255.0
Example of bad configuration: RtDestination = 10.1.1.1; Rt Mask = 255.255.255.0
The following rules must be observed when you configure static routes:
•
The route destination must not be a connected network
•
The route gateway must be on a connected network. This rule applies to the gateway address of the default route as
well. This can be verified by checking that:
(RtGwy & Prt1Mask) == (Prt1IP & Prt1Mask) || (RtGwy & Prt2Mask) == (Prt2IP & Prt2Mask) || (RtGwy & Prt3Mask) == (Prt3IP
& Prt3Mask)
where
5
& is the bitwise-AND operator
== is the equality operator
|| is the logical OR operator
Routing behavior compared to previous releases
Prior to release 7.10, UR devices did not have an explicit manner of configuring routes. The only available route was the
default route configured as part of the network settings (port gateway IP address). This limited the ability to route to
specific destinations, particularly if these destinations were reachable through a different interface than the one on which
the default gateway was.
Starting with UR 7.10, up to six static network routes can be configured in addition to a default route. The default route
configuration was also moved from the network settings into the routing section.
The figure shows an example of topology that benefits from the addition of static routes.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-45
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-16: Using static routes
Router1
Public network
.1
Router2
10.1.2.0/24
10.1.1.0/24
ML3000
.2
IP1/
MAC1
.1
ML3000
P1
.2
10.1.3.0/24
P2
P3
IP2/
MAC2
IP3/
MAC3
EnerVista Software
UR
859714A1.vsd
In the figure, the UR connects through the following two Ethernet ports:
5
•
Port 1 (IP address 10.1.1.2) connects the UR to LAN 10.1.1.0/24 and to the Internet through Router1. Router1 has an
interface on 10.1.1.0/24 and the IP address of this interface is 10.1.1.1.
•
Port 2 (IP address 10.1.2.2) connects the UR to LAN 10.1.2.0/24 and to the EnerVista software through Router2. Router2
has an interface on 10.1.2.0/24 and the IP address of this interface is 10.1.2.1.
The configuration before release 7.10 was as follows:
•
PRT1 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.1.2
PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK = 255.255.255.0
PRT1 GWY IP ADDRESS = 10.1.1.1
PRT2 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.2.2
PRT2 SUBNET IP MASK = 255.255.255.0
The behavior before release 7.10 was as follows. When sending packets to EnerVista, the UR noticed that the destination
was not on a connected network and it tried to find a route to destination. Since the default route was the only route it
knew, it used it. Yet EnerVista was on a private network, which was not reachable through Router1. Hence a destination
unreachable message was received from the router.
The configuration starting with release 7.10 is as follows:
•
PRT1 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.1.2
PRT1 SUBNET IP MASK = 255.255.255.0
PRT2 IP ADDRESS = 10.1.2.2
PRT2 SUBNET IP MASK = 255.255.255.0
IPV4 DEFAULT ROUTE: GATEWAY ADDRESS = 10.1.1.1
STATIC NETWORK ROUTE 1: RT1 DESTINATION = 10.1.3.0/24; RT1 NET MASK = 255.255.255.0; and RT1 GATEWAY =
10.1.2.1
The behavior since release 7.10 is as follows. There is one added static network route to the destination 10.1.3.0/24, where
a computer running EnerVista is located. This static route uses a different gateway (10.1.2.1) than the default route. This
gateway is the address of Router2, which has knowledge about 10.1.3.0 and is able to route packets coming from the UR
and destined to EnerVista.
Show routes and ARP tables
This feature is available on the web page interface, where the main menu contains an additional Communications menu
and two submenus:
•
Routing Table
•
ARP Table
5-46
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
The tables outline the information displayed when the two submenus are selected.
Table 5-7: Routing table information
Field
Description
Destination
The IP address of the remote network to which this route points
Mask
The network mask for the destination
Gateway
The IP address of the next router to the remote network
Interface
Interface through which the specified network can be reached
Table 5-8: IP ARP information
Field
Description
IP Address
The network address that corresponds to Hardware Address
Age (min)
Age, in minutes, of the cache entry. A hyphen (-) means the address is local.
Hardware Address
LAN hardware address, a MAC address that corresponds to network address
Type
Dynamic or Static
Interface
Interface to which this address mapping has been assigned
5.3.5.8 Modbus protocol
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  MODBUS PROTOCOL
 MODBUS PROTOCOL


MODBUS SLAVE
ADDRESS: 254
Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1

MODBUS TCP PORT
NUMBER(502): 502
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
5
The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless the port is configured for DNP or IEC 60870-5-103
operation. This allows the EnerVista UR Setup software to be used on the port. UR devices operate as Modbus slave
devices only.
For more information on the protocol, including the memory map table, see the UR Family Communications Guide.
MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS — When using the Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the C30 responds regardless of the
MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS programmed. For the RS485 port, each device on the serial bus must have a unique slave address
from 1 to 254. Address 0 and addresses from 248 and up are reserved by the Modbus protocol specification, and so their
use here is not recommended. Address 0 is the broadcast address to which all Modbus slave devices listen. Addresses do
not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors occur. Generally,
starting at 1, set each device added to the link to use the next higher address. When using Modbus TCP/IP, the client must
use the programmed MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS value in the Unit Identifier field.
MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER — Modbus over TCP/IP can also be used on any of the Ethernet ports. The listening TCP port 502
is reserved for Modbus communications, and only in exceptional cases when MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER is set to any other
port. The MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER setting sets the TCP port used by Modbus on Ethernet. A MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER of
0 disables Modbus over TCP/IP, meaning closes the Modbus TCP port. When the port number is changed to 0, the change
takes effect when the C30 is restarted. When it is set to 0, use the front panel or serial port to communicate with the relay.
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
5.3.5.9 Protocol selection
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  PROTOCOL
 PROTOCOL


SCADA PROTOCOL:
DNP 3.0
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Range: DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 60870-5-103
5-47
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

MMS CONNECTION
TIMEOUT: 120 s
Range: 10 to 7200 in steps of 10

IEC61850 EDITION:
Edition2
Range: Edition1, Edition2

SFTP PROTOCOL:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The PROTOCOL menu allows selection of one of the following protocols: DNP 3.0, IEC60870-104, or IEC60870-103.
SCADA PROTOCOL — This setting selects the SCADA protocol on which the unit communicates, among DNP3.0, IEC 60870-
104, and IEC 60870-103, with DNP being the default. Options depend on order code. For any change to take effect, restart
the unit.
MMS CONNECTION TIMEOUT — This setting specifies a time delay for the detection of network TCP connection lost. If there is
no data traffic on the TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting, the connection is terminated. This
frees up the connection to be re-used by a client. A setting of 10 seconds disables this timer. The TCP connection then is
managed by a standard TCP KeepAlive message sequence. These messages are transmitted every 20 seconds when there
is no MMS communication between the relay and the client. If there are no responses to the TCP KeepAlive messages, the
connection is closed. For any change to this setting to take effect, restart the unit. The change takes effect for a new
connection. For any existing open connection when the change is made, close and re-open the connection. Cycling power
to the relay also applies the new setting.
The table shows which of DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 60870-5-103, and IEC 61850 protocols are operational on the
RS232, RS485, and Ethernet ports. It shows all possible combinations of the PROTOCOL and DNP CHANNEL 1(2) PORT settings.
Table 5-9: Port and protocol combinations
5
PROTOCOL
setting
DNP CHANNEL 1(2) PORT
settings
RS232
RS485
Ethernet
DNP
Channel 1: Eth TCP
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Modbus
Modbus
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: Eth TCP
Channel 2: none
Modbus
Modbus
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: none
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Modbus
Modbus
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: Eth UDP
Channel 2: none
Modbus
Modbus
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: Eth TCP
Channel 2: RS485
Modbus
DNP
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: Eth TCP
Channel 2: RS232
DNP
Modbus
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: Eth UDP
Channel 2: RS485
Modbus
DNP
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: Eth UDP
Channel 2: RS232
DNP
Modbus
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: RS485
Channel 2: Eth TCP
Modbus
DNP
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: RS232
Channel 2: Eth TCP
DNP
Modbus
DNP, Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: RS485
Channel 2: RS232
DNP
DNP
Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: RS232
Channel 2: RS485
DNP
DNP
Modbus, IEC 61850
Channel 1: RS485
Channel 2: none
Modbus
DNP
Modbus, IEC 61850
IEC 104
Modbus
Modbus
IEC 104, Modbus, IEC 61850
IEC 103
Modbus
IEC 103
Modbus, IEC 61850
5-48
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
IEC61850 EDITION — Switches between Editions 1 and 2 of the IEC 61850 protocol. For Process Bus GOOSE, the setting is
fixed at Edition 2. When switching, settings default with the change, except GGIO1, GGIO2, GGIO4, and those for the
graphical front panel. A message displays that a reboot is required, which can be done using Maintenance > Reboot
Relay Command.
SFTP PROTOCOL — Enables and disables file transfer to/from the relay by Secure Shell (SSH) and Secure File Transfer
Protocol (SFTP). This setting displays when using IEC 61850 without CyberSentry.
5.3.5.10 DNP protocol
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP PROTOCOL
 DNP PROTOCOL


 DNP CHANNELS

See below

DNP ADDRESS:
1
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 DNP NETWORK
 CLIENT ADDRESSES
See below

DNP TCP/UDP PORT
NUMBER(20000): 20000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
TIMEOUT: 5 s
Range: 0 to 60 s in steps of 1

DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
MAX RETRIES: 10
Range: 1 to 255 in steps of 1

DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
DEST ADDRESS: 1
Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1

DNP CURRENT SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000

DNP VOLTAGE SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000

DNP POWER SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000

DNP ENERGY SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000

DNP PF SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000

DNP OTHER SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.001, 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000, 10000,
100000, 1000000, 10000000, 100000000

DNP CURRENT DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

DNP POWER DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

DNP ENERGY DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

DNP PF DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5
5-49
PRODUCT SETUP
5
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

DNP OTHER DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 100000000 in steps of 1

DNP TIME SYNC IIN
PERIOD: 1440 min
Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1

DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT
SIZE: 240
Range: 30 to 2048 in steps of 1

DNP OBJECT 1
DEFAULT VARIATION: 2
Range: 1, 2

DNP OBJECT 2
DEFAULT VARIATION: 2
Range: 1, 2, 3

DNP OBJECT 20
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6

DNP OBJECT 21
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
Range: 1, 2, 9, 10

DNP OBJECT 22
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6

DNP OBJECT 23
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
Range: 1, 2, 5, 6

DNP OBJECT 30
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

DNP OBJECT 32
DEFAULT VARIATION: 1
Range: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7

DNP NUMBER OF PAIRED
CONTROL POINTS: 0
Range: 0 to 32 in steps of 1

DNP TCP CONNECTION
TIMEOUT: 120 s
Range: 10 to 7200 s in steps of 1

DNP EVENT TIME BASE:
LOCAL
Range: UTC, LOCAL
The Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) allows for the optimization of control and data acquisition between the equipment
in the substation and the central control center. The protocol is scalable; that is, it is designed to be compatible with the
latest high speed LAN technology yet still be implemented over slower speed serial links.
The DNP improves upon many master-slave protocols by improving overall communication performance requirements
and provides time-stamping with millisecond accuracy.
The C30 supports DNP version 3.0.
DNP is enabled when the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  PROTOCOL setting is set to DNP 3.0. The C30
can be used as a DNP slave device connected to multiple DNP masters (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since
the C30 maintains two sets of DNP data change buffers and connection information, two DNP masters can actively
communicate with the C30 at one time.
DNP is not available using the USB port on the graphical front panel.
See the UR Family Communications Guide for more information on DNP.
For any change to DNP settings, restart the relay.
The DNP Channels sub-menu is shown.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP PROTOCOL  DNP CHANNELS
 DNP CHANNELS

5-50

DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT:
NONE
Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT
PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP, NETWORK - UDP
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP

DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT:
NONE
Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT
PANEL - RS232, NETWORK - TCP
The DNP CHANNEL 1 PORT and DNP CHANNEL 2 PORT settings select the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol
for each channel. Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, DNP is the only protocol running on that port; Modbus or IEC
60870-5-103 are disabled. If DNP is assigned to RS485, the protocol must be set to DNP on the serial port configuration as
well, for the change to take effect. When the DNP CHANNEL 1(2) PORT setting is set to “Network - TCP,” the channel 1(2) DNP
protocol can be used over TCP/IP on the Ethernet ports. When this value is set to “Network - UDP,” the DNP protocol can be
used over UDP/IP on channel 1 only. The "Front Panel - RS232" setting does not apply to the graphical front panel; when
selected the DNP client cannot establish a connection on a USB port.
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This number identifies the C30 on a DNP communications link. Assign a
unique address to each DNP slave.
The C30 can specify a maximum of five clients for its DNP connections. These are IP addresses for the controllers to which
the C30 can connect. The settings follow.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP PROTOCOL  DNP NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES
 DNP NETWORK
 CLIENT ADDRESSES

CLIENT ADDRESS 1:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address


CLIENT ADDRESS 5:
0.0.0.0
5
Range: standard IP address
The DNP TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER setting is for normal DNP operation. To close the port, set the port number to 0.
The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION is set to “Disabled” for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance
mechanism. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT sets the time the C30 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited
response. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES setting determines the number of times the C30 retransmits an
unsolicited response without receiving confirmation from the master; a value of “255” allows infinite re-tries. The DNP
UNSOL RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which
solicited responses are sent is determined by the C30 from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message.
The DNP scale factor settings are numbers used to scale analog input point values. These settings group the C30 analog
input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other. Each setting represents the
scale factor for all analog input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to “1000,”
all DNP analog input points that are voltages are returned with values 1000 times smaller (for example, a value of 72000 V
on the C30 is returned as 72). These settings are useful when analog input values must be adjusted to fit within certain
ranges in DNP masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (that is, the value is 10 times larger).
The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing analog input data. These
settings group the C30 analog input data into the following types: current, voltage, power, energy, power factor, and other.
Each setting represents the default deadband value for all analog input points of that type. For example, to trigger
unsolicited responses from the C30 when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting
is set to “15.” Note that these settings are the deadband default values. DNP object 34 points can be used to change
deadband values, from the default, for each individual DNP analog input point.
The C30 relay does not support power metering. As such, the DNP POWER SCALE FACTOR and DNP POWER DEFAULT
DEADBAND settings are not applicable.
The C30 relay does not support energy metering. As such, the DNP ENERGY SCALE FACTOR and DNP ENERGY DEFAULT
DEADBAND settings are not applicable.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-51
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the C30.
Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.
The DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large
fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to
be necessary, which provides more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.
Check the “DNP Points Lists” C30 web page to view the analog inputs and/or binary inputs points lists. This page
can be viewed with a web browser by entering the IP address of the C30 Ethernet port employed to access the C30
Main Menu, then by clicking the Device Information Menu item, then the DNP Points Lists item.
The DNP OBJECT 1 DEFAULT VARIATION to DNP OBJECT 32 DEFAULT VARIATION settings select the DNP default variation
number for object types 1, 2, 20, 21, 22, 23, 30, and 32. The default variation refers to the variation response when variation
0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. See the DNP Implementation section in the UR Family Communications
Guide.
The DNP binary outputs typically map one-to-one to IED data points. That is, each DNP binary output controls a single
physical or virtual control point in an IED. In the C30 relay, DNP binary outputs are mapped to virtual inputs. However,
some legacy DNP implementations use a mapping of one DNP binary output to two physical or virtual control points to
support the concept of trip/close (for circuit breakers) or raise/lower (for tap changers) using a single control point. That is,
the DNP master can operate a single point for both trip and close, or raise and lower, operations. The C30 can be
configured to support paired control points, with each paired control point operating two virtual inputs. The DNP NUMBER
OF PAIRED CONTROL POINTS setting allows configuration of 0 to 32 binary output paired controls. Points not configured as
paired operate on a one-to-one basis.
5
The DNP TCP CONNECTION TIMEOUT setting specifies a time delay for the detection of dead network TCP connections. If
there is no data traffic on a DNP TCP connection for greater than the time specified by this setting, the connection is
aborted by the C30. This frees up the connection to be re-used by a client.
For any change to DNP settings, restart the relay.
5.3.5.11 DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS
 DNP / IEC104
 POINT LISTS

 BINARY INPUT / MSP
 POINTS
See below

 ANALOG INPUT / MME
 POINTS
See below
Up to 256 binary and up to 256 analog input points for the DNP protocol, or the MSP and MME points for IEC 60870-5-104
protocol, can be configured. The value for each point is user-programmable and can be configured by assigning FlexLogic
operands for binary inputs / MSP points or FlexAnalog parameters for analog inputs / MME points.
The menu for the binary input points (DNP) or MSP points (IEC 60870-5-104) follows.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS  BINARY INPUT / MSP POINTS
 BINARY INPUT / MSP
 POINTS

Point: 0
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

Point: 1
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand


5-52
Point: 255
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Up to 256 binary input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The points are configured by
assigning an appropriate FlexLogic operand. See the Introduction to FlexLogic section in this chapter for the range of
assignable operands.
Changes to the DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists take effect when the C30 is restarted.
The menu for the analog input points (DNP) or MME points (IEC 60870-5-104) follows.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  DNP / IEC104 POINT LISTS  ANALOG INPUT / MME
POINTS
 ANALOG INPUT / MME
 POINTS

Point: 0
Off
Range: any FlexAnalog parameter

Point: 1
Off
Range: any FlexAnalog parameter

Point: 255
Off

Range: any FlexAnalog parameter
Up to 256 analog input points can be configured for the DNP or IEC 60870-5-104 protocols. The analog point list is
configured by assigning an appropriate FlexAnalog parameter to each point. See the FlexAnalog Parameters section in
Appendix A for the range of assignable parameters.
Changes to the DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists take effect when the C30 is restarted.
The DNP / IEC 60870-5-104 point lists always begin with point 0 and end at the first “Off” value. Since DNP / IEC
60870-5-104 point lists must be in one continuous block, any points assigned after the first “Off” point are ignored.
5
5.3.5.12 IEC 61850 protocol
The C30 is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications, specified as a software option at the time of
ordering.
The IEC 61850 settings are accessible in EnerVista software or a substation configuration language (SCL) generating tool.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 or Settings > IEC 61850. The settings are not
accessible from the front panel of the device.
IEC 61850 messaging can form part of protection schemes. Consider IEC 61850 settings with the same criticality as
protection element settings. To ensure reliable performance of protection schemes utilizing IEC 61850 messaging,
route IEC 61850 traffic on a separate port from SCADA communications, or use redundant, independent ports, and
a high-speed network recovery method, such as PRP.
Overview
IEC 61850 is a series of international standards and technical reports applicable to power utility automation systems. It
includes semantics, abstract communication services, specific communication services, performance specifications,
network engineering guidelines, configuration description methodologies, and engineering processes. The standard
enables interoperability among intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) from different suppliers and interoperability among
software configuration tools from different suppliers. Interoperability in this case is the ability for IEDs to operate on the
same network or communication path sharing information and commands, and for configuration tools to understand
each other's configuration files.
The UR family supports a large subset of IEC 61850 features. These are detailed in the UR Family Communications Guide
and include the information model, GOOSE publish, GOOSE subscribe, buffered report server, unbuffered report server, and
Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) query, read, write, and control services. In addition, the URs and their
EnerVista UR Setup software support IEC 61850 Substation Configuration Language (SCL) file import/export and merging.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-53
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Many settings of UR protection, control, and monitoring elements, that is to say elements that are not concerned with the
IEC 61850 protocol, can nevertheless be accessed via IEC 61850. These settings are documented elsewhere in this Settings
chapter. This section of the Settings chapter deals solely with the settings that configure the IEC 61850 protocol itself.
The maximum number of simultaneous clients supported by the UR family is five.
IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2
This release supports IEC 61850 Edition 1 and Edition 2. The default is Edition 2.
Select IEC 61850 Edition 1 or Edition 2 under Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Protocol. When a nonHardFiber Process Bus Module is present, only Edition 2 is used. Switching defaults the IEC 61850 settings, except GGIO1,
GGIO2, GGIO4, and those for the graphical front panel. When a message displays that a reboot is required, use
Maintenance > Reboot Relay Command.
Edition 2.0 is used with certain modifications according to IEC/TR 61850-90-5. Only edition 2.0 61850 configuration tools
can interoperate with Edition 2.0 devices, such as the UR 7.3x, 7.4x, or 7.6x release. When using Edition 2, the UR release
uses Edition 2.0 SCL, which differs from Edition 1.0 SCL.
Fixed GOOSE, GSSE, and Edition 1 report services are not supported beyond version 7.2x. Configure UR devices using these
features to use configurable GOOSE to communicate with a 7.3x or later device.
When set to Edition 1
5
•
The test flag in the Tx GOOSE message header is set to TRUE when the TEST MODE FUNCTION is set to Test or TestBlocked
•
The test flag in the received GOOSE message header is not validated
•
Routable GOOSE is not supported
•
The FlexLogic category does not display in the IEC 61850 panels in the EnerVista UR Setup software
•
With SCL file import, for Edition 1 the IP address in the ConnectedAP element must match one IP address of the device,
while for Edition 2 one of the three IP addresses in the ConnectedAP element must match
The fields that display in the software depend on the Edition selected and the C30. Differences are noted in the sections
that follow. If required, consult the Model Implementation Conformance Statement (MICS) section of the UR Family
Communications Guide to understand what applies to your setup.
EnerVista setup for IEC 61850
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides the interface to configure C30 for the IEC 61850 protocol. This section describes
the interface. The software also supports import/export and merging of IEC 61850 Substation Configuration Language
(SCL) files as documented in the UR Family Communications Guide.
The IEC 61850 settings cannot be accessed through the UR front panel and are instead accessible with the UR EnerVista
Setup software, via MMS query, read, and write services, or via 61850 SCL file transfer. Accordingly, whereas other settings
are presented in this manual as they appear on the front panel, IEC 61850 settings are presented as they appear in the
software. See the UR Family Communications Guide for MMS and SCL access. Note that if you update the IEC 61850
settings in the EnerVista software by writing to them by MMS while the corresponding IEC 61850 panel is open in EnerVista,
you need to close then open the panel in EnerVista for the correct readings to display.
The IEC 61850 protocol settings are accessed through software panels that are selected either in the Online Window area
(see figure) or the Offline Window area in the EnerVista software.
The EnerVista software also includes an interface that is compatible with firmware versions 5.0 to 7.2 to configure
subscribers. Use the Simplified GOOSE Configurator in the Offline Window area.
5-54
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-17: IEC 61850 panel example in EnerVista software (Edition 2)
The IEC 61850 window is divided into a navigation pane on the left and a settings panel on the right. You expand and click
an option on the left to display its panel on the right. The following figure shows an example for Server Configuration. The
SETTING column contains the names of the settings, and the PARAMETER column is used to enter the settings. Hovering
the mouse over a setting name displays a tool-tip showing the 61850 information model name of the setting or its location
in SCL files.
The content displayed varies with UR firmware version. For example the version 7.4 fields shown differ from the version 7.9
fields.
Figure 5-18: IEC 61850 panel (Edition 2)
Opening the IEC 61850 window while online causes the EnerVista UR Setup software to retrieve and import an SCL file from
the C30. This System Configuration Description (SCD) file contains all the settings in the UR at the time of the file request,
both those that are mapped into the IEC 61850 information model (that is, the "public" sections) and those that are not in
the model (that is, the "private" section). The software imports all of these settings into the current session, not just those in
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-55
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
the IEC 61850 window. To avoid loss of any unsaved setting changes made in other panels during the current session, all
other panels for the C30 must be closed before the IEC 61850 panel opens, and the software prompts for this when
required. Panels for other devices can be open concurrently to facilitate parameter coordination.
When CyberSentry security is enabled, editable settings depend on the user role logged in. For example, an Administrator
and Engineer can change settings. If prompted for a "Settings password," it means the Administrator or Engineer
password.
The Restore button restores settings in the window to their last saved values. The Default button reverts settings in the
window to factory default values or Oscillography, Data Logger, or FlexLogic Equation Editor pre-configured values. The
Reset button reverts all IEC 61850 settings to the factory default values, not just the current window. (In other settings
windows, the button reverts settings in the window to factory default values.)
When a setting is enabled, its panel continues to read Disabled until relaunched. There is no polling capability to update
automatically the IEC 61850 readings, so the panel needs to be closed then opened for the correct status to display. Good
practice is to close any panel not in use because changes being made by other users are reflected only upon relaunch of
the panel.
Some of the IEC 61850 settings use floating point data, which guarantees accurate representation of real numbers up to
seven digits. Numbers with more than seven digits are approximated within a certain precision. This can result in
differences between what is entered and what is saved, and can result in differences shown on a settings comparison
report.
Create CID and settings files
A configured IED description (CID) file is created when settings are sent to the device, for example from the Offline Window
area. A CID file can be created by right-clicking a device in the Offline Window area and selecting the Save As option.
5
When the Save button is clicked in the online IEC 61850 window, the software prepares a CID file containing all the settings
of the device and sends the CID file to the device. Upon receipt, the C30 checks the CID file for correctness, going out of
service, then back into service when the CID file is accepted. The software displays a message when the C30 is running the
new settings, confirming successful transfer. This process can take a minute or so due to the amount of processing
required by the software and the C30.
When the Save button is clicked in the offline IEC 61850 window, the software saves to local storage, for example the hard
drive, a .urs file containing all settings of the device.
View IID/CID files
The file types are described as follows:
•
IID — Instantiated IED capability description file — Actual settings on UR
•
CID — Configured IED description file — Settings sent to the UR (may or may not contain the present settings)
The IID file type applies to IEC 61850 Edition 2 only.
IID and CID files are viewable. For example, after modifying settings in the IEC 61850 panels and clicking Developer IID/
CID Viewer in the software, a CID file generates and an SCL Viewer shows the updated CID file content. There are no edit
or save functions; use instead the Back Up and Restore Settings instructions later in this document to save the files.
Searches are case insensitive.
5-56
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-19: View CID settings file (Edition 2)
Server configuration
The Server Configuration panel contains IEC 61850 settings relevant to the server functions of the IED implementation.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Server Configuration.
The following settings are available, where <iedName> is a syntactic variable representing the present value of the IED
NAME setting. The settings vary with firmware version, IEC 61850 edition, and device capability.
IED NAME
Range: 1 to 58 VisibleString characters
Default: TEMPLATE
The value entered sets the name used by IEC 61850 for the C30. An IED name unique within the network must be
entered for proper operation. Valid characters are upper and lowercase letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character.
The first character must be a letter.
The IED NAME and the Product LD inst name comprise the <LDName> for a product. The longest LD inst are "Master"
and "System" at six characters, with Master being fixed and the others configurable with the configurable Logical device
feature. So the IED NAME is restricted to 58 characters to meet a 64 character limit.
SUBNETWORK1(5) NAME
Range: 0 to 255 ASCII characters
Default: W1, W2, W3, W4, W5
Subnetworks 1 to 3 display for Editions 1 and 2. Subnetworks 4 and 5 display for Edition 2 with Process Bus Module.
When importing an SCL file:
–
Subnetwork 1 to 3 names are identified by the contained ConnectedAP element of the target IED
–
If a ConnectedAP element is missing, the respective subnetwork name uses the default value
–
When the IEC 61850 server Edition is set to 1 (under Product Setup > Communications > Protocol), one
ConnectedAP is available in the SCL file. Only the respective subnetwork name is populated and editable. The rest
of the subnetwork names are read-only with default values. After importing an Edition 1 SCL file, you can select
the Access Point that needs to be populated from the Edition 1 SCL file and you can edit the subnetwork name in
the EnerVista UR Setup software.
–
Subnetwork 1 to 3 names need to be unique
When exporting an SCL file:
–
Subnetwork 1 to 3 names are preserved
–
When the IEC 61850 server Edition is set to 1, the selected Access Point and respective subnetwork names are
populated
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-57
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Access Point
Range: S1, S2, S3
Default: S1
This setting applies to IEC 61850 Edition 1. It is the subnetwork.
Location
Range: 0 to 255 ASCII characters
Default: Location
The value entered sets the value of the data attribute <LDName>/LPHD1.PhyNam.location. This data attribute is
provided by the protocol to allow the user to declare where the equipment is installed.
Latitude
Range: -90.000 to 90.000 degrees in steps of 0.001 degree
Default: 0.000 deg
The value entered sets the value of the data attribute <LDName>/LPHD1.PhyNam.latitude. This data attribute is provided
by the protocol to declare the geographical position of the device in WGS84 coordinates -latitude. Negative values
indicate a southern latitude. WGS refers to the world geodetic system, which is used in global positioning systems (GPS),
and 84 is the current version of the standard.
Longitude
Range: -180.000 to 180.000 degrees in steps of 0.001 degree
Default: 0.000 deg
5
The value entered sets the value of the data attribute <LDName>/LPHD1.PhyNam.longitude. This data attribute is
provided by the protocol to declare the geographical position of the device in WGS84 coordinates -longitude. Negative
values indicate a western longitude.
Altitude
Range: 0 to 10,0000 m in steps of 1 m
Default: 0.000 m
The value entered sets the value of the data attribute <LDName>/LPHD1.PhyNam.altitude. This data attribute is provided
by the protocol to declare the geographical position of the device in WGS84 coordinates - altitude.
Prefix for GGIO1
Range for Edition 2: 0 to 11 VisibleString characters
Range for Edition 1: 0 to 6 VisibleString characters
Default:
This setting sets the LN Prefix of the FlexLogic operand interface logical node GGIO1 that is described in the GGIO1
section later. Valid characters are upper and lowercase letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character. The first
character must be a letter. The software does not allow entry of a prefix that duplicates any other GGIO1 prefix that is
used by the product, such as ConIn and ConOut.
Prefix for GGIO2
Range for Edition 2: 0 to 11 VisibleString characters
Range for Edition 1: 0 to 6 VisibleString characters
Default:
This setting sets the LN Prefix of the Virtual Inputs Interface logical node GGIO2 that is described in the GGIO2 section
later. Valid characters are upper and lowercase letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character. The first character must
be a letter. The software does not allow entry of a prefix that duplicates any other GGIO2 prefix that is used by the
product.
5-58
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Prefix for GGIO4
Range for Edition 2: 0 to 11 VisibleString characters
Range for Edition 1: 0 to 6 VisibleString characters
Default:
This setting sets the LN Prefix of the FlexAnalog operand interface logical node GGIO4 that is described in the GGIO4
section later. Valid characters are upper and lowercase letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character. The first
character must be a letter. The software does not allow entry of a prefix that duplicates any other GGIO4 prefix that is
used by the product.
LLN0.Mod.ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: sbo-with-normal-security
This setting specifies the control service that clients must use to control the TEST MODE FUNCTION / IED MODE of the C30.
An "on" control to <LDName>/LLN0.Mod changes TEST MODE FUNCTION to Disabled, a test control changes it to Test, and
a test/blocked control changes it to Test-Blocked.
Configuration Type
Range: G2, E3-2.0
Default: G2
This setting is read only. It specifies the method used to describe GOOSE subscription configuration in SCL. See the UR
Family Communications Guide for details. In the G2 mode, the CID file contains IED elements for IEDs subscribed to by
this IED containing GOOSE subscription information. In the E3 2.0 mode, the CID file has only one IED element and
GOOSE subscription information is coded in data objects in the standard LGOS logical node used to monitor reception of
the subscribed GOOSE. UR 7.30 or later accepts either mode. The set value is for the entire EnerVista installation and is
preserved between sessions. To change this global field, click File > Preferences and access the IEC 61850 panel; the
device does not need to be connected.
Logical devices
The Edit Data Model panel contains IEC 61850 settings relevant to the configurable logical devices feature, wherein logical
device naming can be reconfigured and logical nodes re-assigned.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Edit Data Model.
Figure 5-20: Default panel with devices middle and nodes right (Edition 2)
To configure logical devices and nodes:
1.
Right-click one or more entries and edit an existing device, add a new one, or move a logical node. Depending on
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-59
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
selection, the prefix and instance number of a node are editable, for example prefix CBArc0 and instance 30 can be
edited in CBArc0SCBR30. Nodes that are not editable are greyed-out.
The rest of this section explains the functions.
The default logical device categories are as follows:
•
Master — Communications, including GOOSE, reports, Remote I/O, Virtual Inputs, Modbus, DNP, and setting group
control
•
System — Power system devices: breakers, switches, CTs, VTs, and so on, including interfaces to these, such as AC
inputs, contact I/O, transducer I/O, HardFiber I/O
•
Prot — Protection and protection-related functions
•
Ctrl — Control and monitoring functions
•
Meter — Metering and measurement functions
•
Gen — FlexLogic, Virtual Outputs, non-volatile latches, FlexElements, recording (for example oscillography), security,
front panel, clock
For the Master logical device, the following logical nodes are read-only:
5
•
The LLN0 in the Master logical device, which includes setting group, GOOSE and report control blocks, and datasets
•
LPHD1 — Models common issues for physical devices
•
GGIO1 — For unmapped FlexLogic operands
•
GGIO2 — For Virtual Input control
•
GGIO3 — For RxGOOSE Inputs
•
GGIO4 — For unmapped FlexAnalog operands
•
LGOS logical nodes — For GOOSE subscription
The Edit Data Model panel has middle and right panes. The middle pane has a list of the instantiated logical devices in the
sequence that they appear in SCL, with one device selected. The right pane has a list of the logical nodes presently
assigned to the selected logical device in lexicographic order by logical node name.
In the middle pane logical devices are shown with their product-related name, followed in brackets by their functionrelated ldName, and followed by the value of their confRev. In the following example, by right-clicking and editing, the
Protection logical device has been set to instance name "Prot," the function-related name "Feeder1Prot" and the
configuration revision "2016-03-07 08:46." The text is clipped on the right if the line is longer than the available width. The
next paragraphs explain how to do this setup.
5-60
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-21: Protection logical node selected
Right-clicking a logical device displays the menu that allows insertion of a new logical device immediately below the
selected one, deletion of the selected logical device, or editing the selected logical device's parameters. The insert option is
disabled and greyed-out if there are already 16 logical devices instantiated. The delete option is disabled and greyed-out if
the selected logical device is Master or it contains any logical nodes other than LLN0.
5
Figure 5-22: Menu for logical node
The Default LN Name(s) in this LD option resets logical names to default values. When the logical node name is edited, the
logical nodes pane displays the edited name followed by the default logical node name in brackets. The right-click menu
at the IED, logical device, and logical node level provides an option to default the logical node name(s) within the scope of
selection. That means that the defaulting logical node names at the IED level defaults all the logical node names in that IED
and defaulting logical node names at the logical device level defaults the logical node names in that logical device.If the
insert option is selected, or the edit option is selected for other than the Master logical device, a logical device parameters
edit dialog opens.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-61
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-23: Insert new logical node (Edition 2)
If the edit option is selected for the Master logical device, the Product LD inst name setting is not editable.
Figure 5-24: Edit logical node
5
When the Ok button is clicked, the entered values for Product LD inst name and Functional ldName are checked for
uniqueness within the UR, and they are updated in the pane.
The settings are explained as follows, where <iedName> is a syntactic variable representing the present value of the IED
NAME setting. When adding or editing a logical device entry, these are the fields that need to be completed.
Customized logical nodes are not saved in the URS file.
Product LD inst name
Range: 1 to 64 VisibleString characters
Default: as per the following table
Each logical device has this setting. The value is fixed at "Master" in the first logical device and configurable in all others.
Valid characters are upper and lowercase letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character. The first character must be a
letter. The entered value sets the logical device inst name. Each logical device inst name is required to be unique within
the device, and it cannot be blank. Also, if the corresponding functional ldName setting is blank, the concatenation of the
5-62
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
IED name and the logical device inst name must form an LDName that is unique within the network for proper operation.
It is recommended that the length of the IED NAME plus the length of this setting be not greater than 64 to respect the
requirements of IEC 61850 7 2:2010 22.2 for LDName.
The factory default configuration is for six logical devices with Product LD inst name settings and logical node
assignments as per the following table.
Table 5-10: Factory default logical nodes
Default logical
device inst name
Contains logical nodes modeling...
communications, including GOOSE, reports, Remote I/O, Virtual Inputs, Modbus, DNP, and so on.
Master
(root logical device; Setting group control.
This is the root logical device.
name is fixed)
To comply with IEC 61850 7 1 Ed2 clause 6.4.5.1, all group L logical nodes (logical nodes with class names
begin with "L"), except LLN0, belonging to this IED are in this logical device.
Protection (Prot)
protection functions
Control (Ctrl)
control and monitoring functions
System
power system devices: breakers, switches, CTs, VTs, and so on, including interface to these such as AC inputs,
contact I/O, transducer I/O, HardFiber I/O
Metering (Meter)
metering and measurement, including Signal Sources
General (Gen)
FlexLogic, virtual outputs, non-volatile latches, FlexElements, FlexMath, recording (for example oscillography),
security, front panel, clock
Process Bus (PBus) non-HardFiber Process Bus Module when present
Functional ldName
Range: 0 to 64 VisibleString characters
Default: empty string
Each logical device has this setting. The value is configurable in all logical devices. Valid characters are upper and
lowercase letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character. If the number of characters entered is greater than zero, the
setting sets the value of the function-related name used in communications. If an ldName is entered, it must form an
LDName that is unique within the network for proper operation. The standard recommends choosing this name
according to IEC 81346-1. If the number of characters entered is zero, no function-related name is defined.
Throughout the remainder of this IEC 61850 section, <LDName> is a syntactic variable representing the present
LDName of the master logical device. In other contexts LDName can refer to some other logical device. Depending
on its context, <LDName> can be a product-related name or a function-related name.
configRev
Range: 0 to 255 ASCII characters
Default:
This data attribute is provided by the protocol to declare changes to the semantic of the data model of the UR. The intent
is that the user changes Master configRev each time that the semantic or data model changes, so that clients can
readily detect the change. A semantic change is a logical node getting a new semantic use; for example, an instance of
logical node CSWI is now serving a different physical switch, or an instance of a logical node PDIS is now used for
another zone. A data model change is a change in the presence of logical nodes, data objects, data attributes, or
instance names.
The scope of Maser configRev is the entire relay configuration, as the Master logical device is the root logical device.
Similar settings are provided for the other logical nodes; the scope of these other configRev settings is limited to the
corresponding logical device configuration.
paramRev
Range: -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647
Default: 0
The configurable data attribute paramRev has a scope that includes the entire device, and thus is modified whenever
any setting in the device changes. The UR increments the value of paramRev by one whenever one or multiple setting
changes occurs in one Modbus write request by any means (front panel, Modbus, or MMS) other than by SCL file
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-63
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
download. Incrementing occurs whether or not the setting is represented in the information model. When a UR device or
EnerVista UR Setup accepts an SCL file, paramRev is set to the value in that SCL file. When EnerVista UR Setup changes
one or more settings, and prepares an SCL file, it increments paramRev to the next higher multiple of 10 000.
Each logical device has a name: LDName. (Note the upper case LD.) LDName has both a product-related form and
a function-related form as per IEC 61850 6:2009 8.5.3.
SCL files invariably use the product-related form of LDName. The product-related form is the concatenation of the
IED name of the device and the individual logical device's inst name. The IED name is the value of the "IED NAME"
setting on the Server Configuration panel, and the logical device inst names are each the value of the
corresponding "Product LD inst name" setting here. The "Product LD inst name" of the first logical device is fixed at
"Master."
Communications use the function-related form of LDName if a function-related name is defined, otherwise
communications use the product-related name. The function-related name is the value of the corresponding
"Functional ldName" setting if this setting is not empty, if empty the function-related name is not defined.
In SCL, the function-related name is specified by the LDevice element attribute ldName (note the lower case ld).
Absence of this attribute indicates the function-related name is not defined. In SCL the product-related name is
specified by the name attribute of the IED element and the inst attribute of the LDevice element.
In the right pane, logical nodes assigned permanently to the Master logical device and LLN0 in all logical devices are
greyed-out as shown earlier. These are not movable. Any other logical node can be dragged to any of the logical devices in
the middle pane, which causes that logical device to be re-assigned to that logical device. Right-clicking a logical node
device displays a menu that lists the logical devices that this logical node can be moved to. Clicking one of these reassigns the logical node. Other common keyboard and/or mouse action can be used to select one or more logical nodes
and move the selected nodes together.
5
Figure 5-25: Move logical node (Edition 2)
GOOSE
GOOSE, Routable GOOSE, and Process Bus GOOSE are supported, depending on hardware and software options.
The path is Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE.
5-64
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Support for Routable GOOSE
Routable GOOSE (R-GOOSE) is supported in firmware release 7.4 and later for IEC 61850 Edition 2. Routable GOOSE allows
UR and other devices to be located in separate networks. Encryption/decryption of messages is performed by a separate
gateway device. Messages are routed using a separate router, using IP addresses.
Note the following behavior, using version 7.4 as an example:
•
A v7.4 device can send an R-GOOSE message to another v7.4 device when both have R-GOOSE active as the protocol
•
A v7.4 device can send a GOOSE message to another v7.4 device when both have GOOSE active as the protocol
•
A v7.4 device cannot send an R-GOOSE message to non-R-GOOSE devices, such as a v7.3 or v5.9 UR device
•
UR devices with firmware below v7.3 can send a GOOSE message to a v7.4 device that has GOOSE as the active
protocol
R-GOOSE is available through the IEC 61850 software option. If R-GOOSE security is required, the CyberSentry
software option also is required.
TxGOOSE
IEC 61850 GOOSE is an efficient method for simultaneous high-speed delivery of generic substation event information by a
publishing device to more than one subscribing device. A TxGOOSE is a UR element implementing a single IEC 61850
GOOSE message publishing service. The subscribing function in URs is performed by RxGOOSE elements, as described in
the next section. Each UR with an IEC 61850 order code option has 16 TxGOOSE elements. Each TxGOOSE can either use
the original format specified in IEC 61850 8 1:2011 or the routable GOOSE (R-GOOSE; IEC 61850 Edition 2) format specified
in IEC TR 61850-90-5:2012. Each TxGOOSE element can publish the values of up to 64 attributes of the IEC 61850 nodes in
the UR.
Published TxGOOSE messages configured in the EnerVista UR Setup software can be subscribed by and the published
operand values understood by other UR devices. Furthermore, they can be subscribed to and understood by any device of
any manufacturer that implements the IEC 61850 Edition 1.0 or 2.0 GOOSE subscription mechanism. The messages are
published with a multicast address so that the network sends the messages to all devices; any number of devices that
want to subscribe can.
For wide-area protection, control, and monitoring schemes, R-GOOSE wraps the original format GOOSE in IP/UDP to
multicast (or unicast) the data over a Wide Area Network (WAN). Sample applications are Wide area Remedial Action
Scheme (RAS) and Under Voltage / Frequency Load Shedding Schemes (UVLS/UFLS). R GOOSE uses IGMPv3 (Internet Group
Management Protocol version-3, RFC 3376) for multicasting.
The entity, device, or operand values that are published in GOOSE messages are known as members. The members are
itemized in an ordered list known as a data set. Each TxGOOSE can use any one of the configured data sets. (See the
DataSets section later for details.) The performance of a TxGOOSE is determined by its dataset. Booleans in fast GOOSE
datasets are designed for the TT6 transfer time class (3 ms), while Booleans in the Normal datasets are designed for the
TT3 class (100 ms). Due to the significant amount of CPU time required to compose a TT6 TxGOOSE message and the
limited amount of time allowed by the TT6 class, at most four of these can be configured in a given UR. So only four fast
GOOSE are allowed to be configured, and the UR software has a check to disallow the use of more than four fast datasets
in GOOSE. If six fast datasets are configured outside of UR software and the file sent directly to the relay, the relay rejects
the file. The design does allow six fast datasets to be used in report control blocks, which allows fast scanned data in
reports.
Each enabled TxGOOSE transmits its message whenever a value change is detected in one or more of its members. If the
changed value is a Boolean in a fast dataset, then the change detection occurs in the TT6 detection time of 3 ms or less. If
the member is an analog value in a fast dataset, the change detection occurs in the TT3 time of 100 ms. In Normal GOOSE
Datasets, change detection for all dataset members occurs in the TT3 time of 100 ms. To guard against the possibility that
such a message is lost in the network before it reaches all subscribers, the message is retransmitted quickly several times.
To allow subscribers to verify that their link to the publisher and the publisher itself are healthy, each message is also
retransmitted periodically even while the values are unchanging. These latter messages are known as heartbeat
messages, while the former are known as event messages. Heartbeat messages also enable a subscriber newly online to
receive the published values in the absence of an event.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-65
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The details of TxGOOSE message construction are contained in the UR Family Communications Guide. Knowledge of these
details is not required to configure GOOSE.
The UR does not implement the fixed-length encoded GOOSE messages option specified in IEC 61850-8-1:2011 clause A.3;
the UR always uses the ASN.1 Basic Encoding Rules (specified in ISO/IEC 8825-1) as specified in IEC 61850 Edition 1.0 and
optional in IEC 61850 Edition 2.0.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > TxGOOSE > TxGOOSE1 to access the
settings for the first TxGOOSE. The settings and functionality for the other entries are similar.
Figure 5-26: IEC 61850 TxGOOSE panel (Edition 2 and with Process Bus Module)
5
A data set needs to be set up and selected in the TxGOOSEx DatSet field for all content to display.
When saving changes, when a "dataset member is empty" message displays, you need to set the member in the bottom
right of the window.
TxGOOSE1 MODE
Range for Edition 2: Disabled, GOOSE, R-GOOSE
Range for Edition 1: Disabled, GOOSE
Default: Disabled
When set to Disabled, TxGOOSE1 messages are not published. When set to GOOSE, TxGOOSE1 messages are published
in IEC 61850 8 1:2011 GOOSE format. When set to R-GOOSE, TxGOOSE1 messages are published in Routable GOOSE
format according to IEC 61850 90-5, and the TxGOOSE1 DST MAC address is set to 00 00 00 00 00 00 and cannot be
changed.
TxGOOSE1 GoCB name
Range: 0 up to 32 VisibleString characters
Default: GoCB01
The entered value sets the GOOSE control block (GoCB) name value for TxGOOSE1.
5-66
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
An ObjectReference to the control block, which consists of the concatenation of the string "<LDName>/LLN0." and the
control block name, is published in the gocbRef field of TxGOOSE1 messages and is used by subscribers to discriminate
TxGOOSE1 messages from other GOOSE messages. <LDName> is a syntactic variable that is set to the value of setting
Master functional ldName if one or more characters have been entered to that setting, otherwise the value of setting IED
NAME suffixed with "Master".
TxGOOSE1 GoID
Range for Edition 2: 0 to 129 VisibleString characters
Range for Edition 1: 0 to 65 VisibleString characters
Default: TxGOOSE1
The entered value sets the goID value published in TxGOOSE1 messages, and can be used by subscribers to discriminate
the TxGOOSE1 messages from other GOOSE messages. Special characters are not allowed, such as <, >, &, ’, and ".
TxGOOSE1 DatSet
Range: None, TT6DataSet1,TT6 DataSet2, … TT3DataSet01,TT3 DataSet02, …
Default: None
This setting selects the published data set using the UR Setup software designator for the data set. If None is selected, no
TxGOOSE1 messages are sent.
The IEC 61850 name of the data sets are configured in the Datasets panel, as described later.
Some datasets are designed for the TT6 transfer time class (3 ms), while others are designed for the TT3 class (100 ms).
The performance of a TxGOOSE is determined by its dataset. Use TT6 datasets for trips and blocking applications, TT3
datasets for slow automatic interactions. The 61850 name of the datasets are configured in the Datasets panel.
An ObjectReference to the data set, which consists of the concatenation of the string "<LDName>/LLN0." and the data
set name, is published in the datSet field of TxGOOSE1 messages and can be used by subscribers to discriminate
TxGOOSE1 messages from other GOOSE messages. <LDName> is a syntactic variable that is set to the value of setting
Master functional ldName if one or more characters have been entered to that setting, otherwise the value of setting IED
NAME suffixed with "Master".
To configure a DataSet, select it at the top of the window from the drop-down list. In the lower part of the window, drag
and drop configuration items to the right side. Dataset members configured here affect other Report or TxGOOSE control
blocks that use the same DataSet.
The performance of the TxGOOSE is determined by the performance of the selected dataset. When the selection is
TT3DataSet01, TT3DataSet02, … it is possible that transient events can be missed.
TxGOOSE1 DST MAC
Range: any 12 digit hexadecimal number
Default: 01-0C-CD-01-00-00 when TxGOOSE1 MODE is set to GOOSE, 00-00-00-00-00-00 when TxGOOSE1 MODE is set to
R-GOOSE
When the TxGOOSE1 MODE is set to R-GOOSE, the value of this setting is not used. If R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP is set to
multicast, the destination MAC address is derived from the configured multicast IP address. If R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP is set
to unicast IP, the UR resolves the destination MAC address using the ARP protocol. If R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP is in the range
of any of the configured static routes (first usable static route), the UR uses the gateway IP of that static route for
resolving the destination MAC. Otherwise, the UR uses the default gateway. The same is repeated on all the configured
ports of the TxGOOSE1 CPU PORT ASSIGNMENT setting.
When the TxGOOSE1 MODE setting is GOOSE, the value entered here sets the Ethernet destination MAC address in
published TxGOOSE1 messages. As the standard requires that the address have the multicast bit set TRUE, that is to say
the second digit is set to an odd number, messages transmitted have the multicast bit set TRUE no matter its value in this
setting.
The destination MAC address can be used by the network to restrict message delivery to selected devices that need to
receive them, reducing network load. This address also can be used by hardware in receiving devices to filter out
messages that are of no interest to them, reducing processor burden. Different filtering algorithms are implemented by
different devices. The standard recommends that the algorithm used by hardware of the receiving device be considered
when assigning destination multicast addresses.
Subscribers can use this address to discriminate TxGOOSE1 messages from other GOOSE messages.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-67
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
After relay startup, ARP requests are sent to the gateway address (approximately within 30 seconds after relay startup).
When the ARP response is received, the ARP table is updated, and the unicast R-GOOSE messages are published with the
resolved MAC address. Every 20 minutes, the UR flushes the ARP table and rebuilds the ARP table by sending the ARP
requests.
•
If the gateway router is offline, the UR retransmits the ARP requests at one second intervals for 10 seconds, and the
same sequence is repeated at approximately six minutes until the ARP response is received
•
When the network link is disconnected, at the connection, the UR transmits the ARP messages to rebuild the ARP table
and when the ARP table is updated, the UR publishes the unicast messages. The recovery time could be up to five
minutes for publishing the unicast messages.
•
Whenever a change in static route configuration, the UR transmits the ARP requests to the new gateway address
approximately after 70 seconds of static route configuration change
The resolved MAC addresses are displayed in the UR web page.
TxGOOSE1 VLAN PRIORITY
Range: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 5-4, 6-4, 6-5, 7-4, 7-5, 7-6
Default: 4
When the value entered is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7, the User Priority value in the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag included in published
TxGOOSE1 messages is set to that value. When one of the two-digit values is entered, the dynamic priority feature is
selected: the first event message has the User Priority value of the first digit, and User Priority is decremented in each
following message until reaching the value of the second digit. For instance, if the selected value is 7-5, then the User
Priority values in successive messages beginning with the message triggered by an event is 7, 6, 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, and so on.
Do not make a dynamic priority selection when standard behavior is required.
5
Network devices can forward a message with a higher priority value before a message with a lower priority value, which
speeds delivery of high-priority messages in heavily loaded networks. The standard recommends that higher-priority
messages, such as GOOSE, have priority values in the range of 4 to 7.
TxGOOSE1 VLAN ID
Range: 0 to 4095 in steps of 1
Default: 0
The value entered sets the VID value in the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tag included in published TxGOOSE1 messages. VID can be
used by network devices to direct messages to only selected devices, reducing network burden. VID values of 0 and 1
are assigned by IEEE 802.1Q to other functions and are not to be used for GOOSE.
TxGOOSE1 ETYPE APPID
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Default: 0
The value entered sets the APPID value in published GOOSE messages and can be used by subscribers to discriminate
TxGOOSE1 messages from other GOOSE messages.
The standard reserves the value range 0 to 16383 for GOOSE Type 1 (Fast messages), and reserves the value range
32768 to 41151 for GOOSE Type 1A (Trip messages). Some subscribers can process messages in the Type 1A range
faster than messages in the Type 1 range. The standard reserves the default value (0) to indicate lack of configuration.
The standard strongly recommends unique, source-orientated APPIDs within a given system.
TxGOOSE1 CONFREV
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
Default: 1
The entered value sets the confRev value in published GOOSE messages and can be used by subscribers to discriminate
TxGOOSE messages of the expected configuration revision from messages of a different revision. The standard requires
that CONFREV be incremented each time the members or the order of the members published is changed. The standard
states that the value of 0 is reserved.
5-68
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
TxGOOSE1 MIN TIME
Range: 0 to 100 ms in steps of 1 ms
Default: 4 ms
If the entered time is non-zero, when a member value change is detected, four event transmissions are sent, then
heartbeat transmissions resume. The interval between the first and second event transmissions, and between the
second and third, is the time set here. The interval between the third and the fourth event transmission is double the set
time. If the entered time is zero, only a single event transmission occurs, then heartbeat transmissions resume.
TxGOOSE1 MAX TIME
Range: 1 to 59 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 10 s
This setting specifies the time interval between heartbeat messages, meaning messages that are sent periodically while
no events are detected.
TxGOOSE1 TIME ALLOWED TO LIVE
Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 20 s
The value entered sets the timeAllowedtoLive value in published TxGOOSE1 messages. The standard requires
subscribers to assume a failure has occurred when another TxGOOSE1 message is not received within the published
timeAllowedtoLive time.
Base this setting on the TxGOOSE MAX TIME and the tolerable number of contiguous message delivery misses. For
example, if the heartbeat time is 10 s, and missing up to three successive messages is tolerable, make the setting
10 * 3 + 1 = 31 s. The extra second is to ensure that arrival of the third heartbeat transmission beats the
timeAllowedtoLive timer.
In the imported CID file, if the TxGOOSE1 TIME ALLOWED TO LIVE is greater than 60 seconds, clamp the setting value to
60 seconds and an information log is provided in SCL log.
TxGOOSE1 CPU PORT ASSIGNMENT
Range: Disabled, Port-1; Port-2; Port-3; Ports-1,2; Ports-2,3; Ports-1,3; Ports-1,2,3
Default: Ports-1,2,3
This setting applies to IEC 61850 Edition 2.
This setting specifies the Ethernet ports for transmission of TxGOOSE1. When set to disabled, TxGOOSE1 messages are
not transmitted on any port no matter the state of GoEna. When set to Port-1, TxGOOSE1 is published over Ethernet
Port-1 only; while selecting Ports-1, 3 option, the same TxGOOSE1 is published to both Ports 1 and 3; and similarly if set
to Ports-1, 2, 3, all ports publish TxGOOSE1.
When setting PRT2 REDUNDANCY to Failover or to PRP, the TxGOOSE 1 CPU PORT ASSIGNMENT needs to be set to
ports 2 and 3 (Ports-2,3).
Also, Port 3 configuration in the CID file is ignored. The Port 3 ConnectedAP elements has no meaning, as ports 2
and 3 use the port 2 MAC address, IP address, and mask.
R-TxGOOSE1 IP CLASS
Range: 0 to 256 in steps of 1
Default: 46
This setting applies to IEC 61850 Edition 2.
When the TxGOOSE1 MODE setting is other than R-GOOSE, the value of this setting is not used. Otherwise this setting
selects the IPv4 Differentiated Services Code Point-DSCP (formerly called TypeOfService-TOS) value. This value provides
priority routing, when supported in the routers. The default value is for Expedited Forwarding (101110B, 46 or 2EH).
R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP
Range: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255 in steps of 1
Default: 224.0.0.0
This setting applies to IEC 61850 Edition 2.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-69
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
When the TxGOOSE1 MODE setting is other than R-GOOSE, the value of this setting is not used. Otherwise this setting
specifies destination IP address for the R-TXGOOSE1 that is entered in Standard IPV4 address format. The destination IP
address needs to be a valid multicast or unicast IP address. The value specified in this setting is mapped to IPv4 header
32 bit field for Destination IP Address while publishing R-GOOSE1.
The default IP address 224.0.0.0 is reserved, and hence not a valid multicast IP address.
The source IP address is that of the UR port from which the R-GOOSE messages are transmitted.
R-TxGOOSE1 SECURITY
Range: None, Signature, SignatureAndEncryption
Default: None
This setting applies to IEC 61850 Edition 2.
This setting specifies level of security (authentication/encryption) used for TxGOOSE1. None specifies no security
mechanisms are to be used. Signature specifies only signature (no encryption) is to be used. SignatureAndEncryption
specifies that both signature and encryption are to be used.
RxGOOSE
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > RxGOOSE > RxGOOSE Messages.
GOOSE is an efficient method for simultaneous high-speed delivery of generic substation event information by a
publishing device to more than one subscribing device. An RxGOOSE is a UR element implementing a single IEC 61850
GOOSE message subscribing service. The publishing function in URs is performed by TxGOOSE elements, as described in
the previous section.
5
Each UR with an IEC 61850 order code option has 64 RxGOOSE elements. Each RxGOOSE element can subscribe to GOOSE
messages from a specified publisher. Each RxGOOSE can either use the original format specified in IEC 61850 8 1:2011 or
the routable GOOSE (R-GOOSE; IEC 61850 Edition 2) format specified in IEC TR 61850-90-5:2012. Subscribed message
members can be DataObjects, SubDataObjects, DataAttributes, or SubAttributes. In E2-2.0 mode, members are restricted
to basic types BOOLEAN, FLOAT32, INT32, Dbpos, TimeStamp, or Quality. Each subscribed message can contain up to 64
values. A member can be a structure containing several values; note that it is the number of values rather than the number
of members that are limited to 64.
GOOSE messages from any device of any manufacturer that implements the IEC 61850 Edition 1.0 or 2.0 GOOSE publish
service or the 61850-90-5 R-GOOSE service (IEC 61850 Edition 2) can be subscribed to. The UR accepts both the variablelength encoded GOOSE messages specified in IEC 61850 8 1:2004 and the fixed-length encoded GOOSE messages as
specified in IEC 61850 8 1:2011 clause A.3.
Each enabled RxGOOSE monitors for interruption of the GOOSE messages it subscribes to based on the value in the
timeAllowedtoLive field of the last message received. If a new message is not received within that time interval, the
RxGOOSE assumes that connectivity is lost. FlexLogic operands (for example RxGOOSE1 On, RxGOOSE1 Off) reflect the
status of each RxGOOSE connectivity. An RxGOOSE connection is also considered lost after the UR finishes restart until a
message is received. While any RxGOOSE connectivity is lost, a common RxGOOSE Fail self-test is activated.
Messages that contain the value true in the ndsCom field are never accepted. Messages that contain the value true in the
simulation field (test field in Edition 1.0 messages) are accepted only when the UR Test Mode Function setting is set to Test
or Test-Blocked.
RxGOOSE messages can be received through a UR CPU module Ethernet port
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > RxGOOSE > RxGOOSE Messages >
RxGOOSE1 to access the settings that specify the messages to be accepted by the first RxGOOSE element. The settings
and functionality for the other RxGOOSE are similar. The following settings are available. They allow RxGOOSE1 to
recognize the GOOSE messages to accept. Most of these settings are configured automatically by the EnerVista UR Setup
software when an association to an RxGOOSE Boolean Input, RxGOOSE DPS Input, and/or RxGOOSE Analog Input is made
as described in the following sections. For IEC 61850 Edition 2, settings R-RxGOOSE1 RECEPTION MODE, R-RxGOOSE1
SECURITY, and R-RxGOOSE SRC IP need to be completed manually as the information is not contained in publisher SCL.
Read-only settings are grey.
5-70
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-27: IEC 61850 RxGOOSE Messages panel (Edition 2)
RxGOOSE1 MODE
For Ed2: Main CPU GOOSE, Main CPU R-GOOSE
For Ed1: GOOSE
Default: Main CPU GOOSE
5
When set to "Main CPU GOOSE," the relay subscribes to RxGOOSE1 messages if received on any of the three main CPU
ports and if they comply with IEC 61850-8-1:2011 GOOSE format.
When set to "Main CPU R-GOOSE," the relay subscribes to RxGOOSE1 messages if received on any of the three main CPU
ports and if they comply with the R-GOOSE format according to IEC 61850-90-5.
RxGOOSE1 goID
Range: 0 to 129 VisibleString characters
Default: empty string
If the entered value has one or more characters, the goID field of incoming GOOSE messages must exactly match this
value for the message to be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. If the entered value is the empty string, RxGOOSE1
does not check the value received in the goID field. Special characters are not allowed, such as <, >, &, ’, and ".
If the publisher is a UR 7.3x series device, this setting needs match the value of the publisher's TxGOOSE GoID setting.
RxGOOSE1 Dst MAC
Range: any 12 digit hexadecimal number
Default: 01-0C-CD-01-00-00
When the RxGOOSE1 MODE setting is R-GOOSE, the value of this setting is not used, the destination Media Access
Control (MAC) address for RxGOOSE1 messages is calculated based on the RxGOOSE DST IP address. Otherwise, set this
setting to the MAC address of the publisher. Only received GOOSE messages having a MAC address equal to this value
are accepted as valid RxGOOSE1 messages. An entered address of zero disables RxGOOSE1.
If the publisher is a UR series 7.3x device, the setting needs to match the value of the publisher’s TxGOOSE DST MAC
setting.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-71
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
RxGOOSE1 ETYPE APPID
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Default: 0
If the value entered is non-zero, the APPID field of incoming GOOSE messages must exactly match this value for the
message to be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. If the value entered is zero, RxGOOSE1 does not check the value
received in the APPID field.
If the publisher is a UR series 7.3x device, the setting needs to match the value of the publisher’s TxGOOSE ETYPE APPID
setting.
RxGOOSE1 GoCBRef
Range: 0 to 129 alphanumeric, underscore, slash and period characters, beginning with an alpha character
The gocbRef field of incoming GOOSE messages must match this value for the message to be accepted as a valid
RxGOOSE1 message. If the entered value is the empty string, RxGOOSE1 is disabled. If not the empty string, the entry
needs to be an ACSI ObjectReference to the publishing control block in the format:
<LDName>/LLN0.<GoCBName>
where <LDName> is the function-related name if the logical device containing the publishing control block has "ldName"
configured, otherwise the product-related name of that logical device, and <GoCBName> is the name of the publishing
control block.
The C30 translates the ACSI format required for this setting to the MMS format used in GOOSE messages:
<LDName>/LLN0$GO$<GoCBName>
5
If the publisher is a UR 7.3x or 7.40 series device, <LDName> is the value of the publisher's Master functional ldName
setting if that setting is not empty, otherwise it is the value of the publisher's IED NAME suffixed with "Master". If the
publisher is a UR 7.3x series device, <GoCBName> is "GoCB" suffixed with the two digit TxGOOSE instance number, for
example "GoCB01". If the publisher is a UR 7.40 series device, <GoCBName> is as specified earlier in the TxGOOSE
section of this chapter.
RxGOOSE1 datSet
Range: 0 to 32 alphanumeric and underscore characters, beginning with an alpha character
Default: empty string
If the entered value has one or more characters, the datSet field of incoming GOOSE messages must exactly match this
value prefixed by <LDName>/LLN0$ for the message to be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. <LDName> is as
specified in the RxGOOSE GoCBRef setting above. If the entered value is the empty string, RxGOOSE1 does not check the
value received in the datSet field.
If the publisher is a UR 7.3x series device, set this setting to the value of the publisher's DataSetxx name setting, where xx
is the instance number of the data set selected by the publisher's TxGOOSE datSet setting. If the publisher is a UR 7.40
series device, datSet is as specified in the DataSets section of this chapter.
RxGOOSE1 ConfRev
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
Default: 1
If the value entered is non-zero, the confRev field of incoming GOOSE messages must exactly match this value for the
message to be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. If the entered value is zero, RxGOOSE1 does not check the value
received in the confRev field.
If the publisher is a UR 7.3x series device, set this setting to match the value of the publisher's TxGOOSE ConfRev setting.
R-RxGOOSE1 RECEPTION MODE
Range: SSM, ASM, Unicast
Default: SSM
This setting applies to IEC 61850 Edition 2.
When the RxGOOSE1 MODE setting is other than R-GOOSE the value of this setting is not used. Otherwise it selects the
R-GOOSE reception mode.
5-72
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
R-RxGOOSE RECEPTION MODE specifies the R-RxGOOSE DST IP range. When set to SSM, R-RxGOOSE DST IP must be in
the range of 232.0.0.1 to 232.255.255.255. When set to ASM, R-RxGOOSE DST IP must be in the range of 224.0.0.1 to
239.255.255.255, excluding the SSM range. Note that the SSM range is inside the ASM range and therefore the ASM use
excludes the SSM range. The default destination IP address 224.0.0.0 is reserved, and hence not a valid multicast IP
address.
The reception modes are related to Layer-3 R-GOOSE reception from routers/WAN. The subscription to multicasting of RGOOSE is supported using IGMP Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM). It is made available in either Source Specific
Multicast (SSM) mode or Any Source Multicast (ASM) mode. Unicast (over UDP) mode can also be used. In case of
multicasting (IGMPv3 based SSM or ASM), the R-GOOSE subscriber device requests the Last Hop Router (LHR) to
subscribe to a specific multicasting group.
If the publisher is using a unicast destination IP address for this R-GOOSE, then set R-RxGOOSE1 RECEPTION MODE to
Unicast. Otherwise set R-RxGOOSE1 RECEPTION MODE to the SSM or ASM mode used by the local routers/firewalls.
When the R-RxGOOSE1 RECEPTION MODE is set to SSM or ASM, the C30 sends the IGMP join group report (source
specific in case of SSM) every 60 seconds and responds to IGMP general queries issued by the router.
R-RxGOOSE1 SRC IP
Range: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255 in steps of 1
Default: 127.0.0.1
This setting applies to IEC 61850 Edition 2.
When the RxGOOSE1 MODE setting is other than R-GOOSE, the value of this setting is not used. When the RxGOOSE1
MODE setting is R-GOOSE and the R-RxGOOSE RECEPTION MODE setting is ASM, the value of this setting is not used.
Otherwise the Source IP Address field of incoming R-GOOSE messages must exactly match this value for the message to
be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. Set this setting to the value of the source IP address used by the publisher.
For UR publishers, this value is in setting PRT# IP ADDRESS.
The UR does not validate the address entered. The default IP address 127.0.0.1 is a reserved, not a valid IP address. Enter
a valid IP source address.
R-RxGOOSE1 DST IP
Range: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255 in steps of 1
Default: 224.0.0.0
This setting applies to IEC 61850 Edition 2.
When the RxGOOSE1 MODE setting is other than R-GOOSE, the value of this setting is not used. Otherwise the
Destination IP Address field of incoming R GOOSE messages must exactly match this value for the message to be
accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. Set this setting to the same value as the R-GOOSE publisher's Destination IP
Address. For UR publishers, this value is in setting R-TxGOOSE# DST IP.
The destination IP address needs to be a valid multicast or unicast IP address. The UR does not validate the address
entered. The default IP address 224.0.0.0 is reserved, and hence not a valid multicast IP address.
R-RxGOOSE1 SECURITY
Range: None, Signature, SignatureAndEncryption
Default: None
This setting applies to IEC 61850 Edition 2.
This setting specifies the level of security (authentication/encryption) used for RxGOOSE1. None indicates no security
mechanisms are in use. Signature indicates only signature (no encryption) is in use. SignatureAndEncryption indicates
that both signature and encryption are in use. Normally this setting is set to match the GOOSE publisher's security
method.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-73
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
RxGOOSE1 Member 1
Range: End of List, BOOLEAN, INT8U, INT16U, INT32U, FLOAT32, INT32, Dbpos (DPS), Quality, TimeStamp, ENUM, STRUCT
Default: End of List
This setting specifies the type that the first member of incoming GOOSE messages must be for the message to be
accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message. There are similar settings for each of the up to 64 members that the UR is able
to subscribe to in a given GOOSE message. The member before the first member setting set to "End of List" must be the
last member of the message for the message to be accepted as a valid RxGOOSE1 message.
If the publisher is a UR 7.3x or 7.40 series device, set these settings to match the basic type of the members of the
publisher's data set selected by the publisher's TxGOOSE datSet setting.
If the publisher dataset includes members with structured data, that is, data attributes, sub-data objects, and/or data
attributes with sub-data attributes, configuration must use one of the new 7.40 UR Setup RxGOOSE Inputs pages. In this
case the Member setting displays as the product-related name used by the publishing IED of the data object or data
attribute, in standard SCSM format (e.g. Publisher1LD1/LLN0$ST$Off$stVal).
Note that a dataset can hold at most 64 basic data attribute values, and that a single structured data object or attribute
can contain multiple basic data attribute values. UR Setup software does not allow more that 64 basic data attribute
values to be entered, in which case the last several members settings cannot be changed from End of List.
Note that the publisher's name alone does not contain all the information required for subscription, additional publisher
information model information is stored elsewhere. For this reason, manual entry of the name is not supported.
When this setting is configured manually, "Struct" and "Enum" are not allowed for selection. However, those two
values are placeholders in the software, when the RxGOOSE1 Members are configured using the ADD IED (via
publisher SCL file) option in the RxGOOSE Boolean/DPS/Analog Inputs screen.
5
RxGOOSE inputs
The values received by RxGOOSE elements need to be converted to FlexLogic or FlexAnalog operands so that they can be
used by other UR elements. This conversion is done by RxGOOSE Boolean, RxGOOSE DPS, and RxGOOSE Analog elements.
Each RxGOOSE Boolean can convert the value of a specified Boolean value received by a specified RxGOOSE to a FlexLogic
operand. Each RxGOOSE DPS can convert the value of a specified Dbpos (Double bit position) value to four FlexLogic
operands, one for each of the four possible Dbpos states. Each RxGOOSE Analog can convert the value of a specified
FLOAT32, INT8U, INT16U, INT32U, INT32 and ENUM value to a FlexAnalog operand. Each of these operands reverts to its
default state when the RxGOOSE connectivity is lost. Other types of values can be present in subscribed GOOSE messages
but cannot be converted to operands.
When an RxGOOSE Input is mapped to a value in the GOOSE message, the associated q value is validated, if the q value is
included in that GOOSE message as part of the data object or if it is part of the same dataset. For such automatic mapping,
the index of associated quality value can be seen in the RxGOOSE Member field as read-only.
RxGOOSE Boolean, RxGOOSE DPS, and RxGOOSE Analog elements are mapped to various data objects in
<iedName>Master/GGIO3. This allows reading of their values via MMS and allows references to them in SCL files. GGIO3
has no settings, nor is it visible in the EnerVista UR Setup software. See the UR Family Communications Guide for more
information on GGIO3.
For each configured RxGOOSE Input, the UR monitors the associated quality attribute if available. An RxGOOSE Input
reverts to its configured default value as follows:
•
If the validity bits of the quality attribute (q.validity) are invalid
•
If the validity bits of the quality attribute are questionable
•
If the test bit of the quality attribute is set and IED Mode is other than Test or Test-Blocked
When the IED Mode setting is Test or Test-Blocked, the q.test bit is not validated. That is, when the relay is in test or testblocked mode, the q.test = False is treated same as q.test = True.
When an RxGOOSE Boolean/DPS/Analog Input is mapped to a remote GOOSE message input using the publisher SCL file,
the UR automatically maps and monitors the associated quality member as follows:
•
5-74
If the publisher dataset includes members with structured data
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
•
PRODUCT SETUP
If the publisher dataset includes data attributes and associated quality attribute is available in the same dataset (in
any sequence)
If the publisher dataset member that is mapped to RxGOOSE input is structured data, the quality attribute is embedded in
the same structure.
If the publisher dataset member that is mapped to RxGOOSE input is a data attribute, the UR scans the rest of the
attributes in that publisher dataset for a matching quality attribute.
Set up subscriptions
Subscriptions are configured in the RxGOOSE Boolean Inputs, DPS Inputs, and Analog Inputs panels.
There are Add IED and Remove IED buttons. The Add IED button allows SCL files to be used, including ICD, CID, and SCD
(supported in version 7.40 and later). With SCL file import, for Edition 1 the IP address in the ConnectedAP element must
match one IP address of the device, while for Edition 2 one of the three IP addresses in the ConnectedAP element must
match. When the file format is SCD, the system lists all IEDs inside the SCD file and lets the user select the ones to add. The
figure shows a selection being made by importing a CID file using the Add IED function.
The "Do NOT default Remote Input ID..." check box applies when configuring GOOSE subscription. It determines if the ID
field is retained or defaulted. When enabled, the ID is retained. When disabled, the ID is defaulted. For example, you
change the ID field from "RxG Bool1" to RxG Bool1west," and the change is retained when the check box is enabled. The
check box applies on drag-and-drop, manual configuration, manual deletion, deletion using the Remove IED button, and
when clicking the Default button in the RxGOOSE message panel. The Default and Reset buttons in the RxGOOSE Boolean
Inputs, DPS Inputs, and Analog Inputs panels default all settings in the panel, including the ID, regardless of the check box.
The check box is available for to UR version 7.4x and later devices.
To subscribe:
1.
Click the Add IED button and import a file.
2.
Expand the entries by clicking the + box.
3.
Drag-and-drop an entry into a Subscribed to field. The software checks for duplicates.
5
Most of the settings are configured by drag-and-drop. Enter manually the ID, DEFAULT STATE, and EVENTS settings when
the factory default values are not acceptable.
In the example shown, all of the entries at the bottom of the screen have been added to the subscription column.
Figure 5-28: RxGOOSE subscription
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-75
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
RxGOOSE Boolean inputs
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > RxGOOSE > RxGOOSE Boolean Inputs.
The number of RxGOOSE Boolean (remote inputs) is 256.
Figure 5-29: RxGOOSE Boolean Input panel (Edition 2)
5
As outlined earlier, most of the settings are configured by drag-and-drop. Enter manually the ID, DEFAULT STATE, and
EVENTS settings when the factory default values are not acceptable.
RxGOOSE Boolean1 ID
Range: 0 to 20 characters
Default: RxG Bool1
This setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to the name of the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand. The full
operand name is the value of this setting appended with " On". The basic and enhanced front panels display the first 17
characters of this setting plus " On" to fit the 20 character display.
The setting value is auto-populated and read-only for quality mapped to a configured remote input.
RxGOOSE Boolean1 RxGOOSE
Range: None, RxGOOSE1, RxGOOSE2, and so on
Default: None
This setting selects the RxGOOSE containing the value that drives the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand. If set to
None, the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand assumes its default state.
The setting value is auto-populated and read-only for quality mapped to a configured remote input.
RxGOOSE Boolean1 Member
Range: 1 to 64 in steps of 1
Default: 1
This setting selects the GOOSE message member that drives the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand. A setting of 1
selects the first member, 2 selects the second member, and so on. Entering a number greater than the number of
members in the message and entering the number of a member which does not contain a BOOLEAN results in the
RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand assuming its default state. The Subscribed to column identifies the particular
Boolean subscribed to even if the member is a structure containing more than one Boolean.
5-76
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
The setting value is auto-populated and read-only for quality mapped to a configured remote input.
RxGOOSE Boolean1 DEFAULT STATE
Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
Default: Off
This setting selects the logic state for the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand if the UR has just completed startup and
the selected RxGOOSE has not yet received a message, or the selected RxGOOSE has lost its connectivity with the
publisher. The following choices are available:
–
"On" value defaults the input to logic 1
–
"Off" value defaults the input to logic 0
–
"Latest/On" freezes the input in case of lost connectivity. If the latest state is unknown, such as after UR power-up
but before the first communication, the input defaults to logic 1. When communication resumes, the input
becomes fully operational.
–
"Latest/Off" freezes the input in case of lost connectivity. If the latest state is unknown, such as after UR power-up
but before the first communication, the input defaults to logic 0. When communication resumes, the input
becomes fully operational.
RxGOOSE Boolean1 EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting selects whether Off to On transitions of the RxGOOSE Boolean1 FlexLogic operand are recorded by the event
recorder. If set to Enabled, Off to On transitions are recorded. On to Off transitions are never recorded, even if events are
enabled.
5
RxGOOSE DPS inputs
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 618560 > GOOSE > RxGOOSE > RxGOOSE DPS Inputs.
Figure 5-30: RxGOOSE DPS Inputs panel (Edition 2)
As outlined earlier, most of the settings are configured by drag-and-drop. Enter manually the ID, DEFAULT STATE, and
EVENTS settings when the factory default values are not acceptable.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-77
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
RxGOOSE DPS1 ID
Range: 0 to 20 characters
Default: RxG DPS1
This setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to the names of the four RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operands. The
full operand name is the value of this setting appended with "Interm," "On," "Off," or "Bad." The basic and enhanced front
panels display the first 13 characters of this setting plus the state suffix to fit the 20 character display.
RxGOOSE DPS1 RxGOOSE
Range: None, RxGOOSE1, RxGOOSE2, and so on
Default: None
This setting selects the GOOSE message containing the value that drives the RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operand. If set to
None, the RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operand assumes its default state.
RxGOOSE DPS1 Member
Range: 1 to 64 in steps of 1
Default: 1
This setting selects the GOOSE message member that drives the RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operand. A setting of 1 selects
the first member, 2 selects the second member, and so on. Entering a number greater than the number of members in
the message and entering the number of a member that is not a Dbpos results in the RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operand
assuming its default state. In the case that the member is a structure containing more than one Dbpos, the Subscribed
to column identifies the particular Dbpos subscribed to.
RxGOOSE DPS1 DEFAULT STATE
Range: Intermediate-state, Off, On, Bad-state, Latest
Default: Latest
5
This setting selects the logic state for the data attribute @Master/GGIO3.IndPos01.stVal and the DPS FlexLogic operands
when the UR has just completed start-up and the selected RxGOOSE has not yet received a message, and when the
RxGOOSE has lost its connection with the publisher. When this setting is selected to Latest, the value of @Master/
GGIO3.IndPosψψ.stVal is Intermediate-state when the UR has just completed start-up and the selected RxGOOSE has
not yet received a message, and the latest received value when the RxGOOSE loses its connectivity with the publisher.
RxGOOSE DPS1 EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting selects whether Off to On transitions of the RxGOOSE DPS1 FlexLogic operands are recorded by the event
recorder. If set to Enabled, Off to On transitions are recorded. On to Off transitions are never recorded, even if events are
enabled.
RxGOOSE analog inputs
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GOOSE > RxGOOSE > RxGOOSE Analog Inputs.
There are 32 RxGOOSE analog inputs.
5-78
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-31: RxGOOSE Analog Inputs panel (Edition 2)
As outlined earlier, most of the settings are configured by drag-and-drop. Enter manually the ID, DEFAULT STATE, and
EVENTS settings when the factory default values are not acceptable.
RxGOOSE Analog1 ID
Range: 0 to 20 characters
Default: RxG Analog1
5
This setting allows the user to assign descriptive text to RxGOOSE Analog1. Unlike RxGOOSE Booleans and RxGOOSE DPS,
the RxGOOSE Analog operands have fixed names, for example RxGOOSE Analog1.
RxGOOSE Analog1 RxGOOSE
Range: None, RxGOOSE1, RxGOOSE2, and so on
Default: None
This setting selects the GOOSE message that drives the RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexAnalog operand. If set to None, the
RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexAnalog operand assumes its default state.
RxGOOSE Analog1 Member
Range: 1 to 64 in steps of 1
Default: 1
This setting selects the GOOSE message member that drives the RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexAnalog operand. A setting of 1
selects the first member, 2 selects the second member, and so on. Entering a number greater than the number of
members in the message and entering the number of a member that does not contain a FLOAT32, INT8U, INT16U,
INT32U, INT32, or ENUM results in the RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexAnalog operand assuming its default state. The Subscribed
to column identifies the particular FLOAT32 subscribed to even if the member is a structure containing more than one
FLOAT32.
RxGOOSE Analog1 DEFAULT
Range: -1000000.000 to 1000000.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 1000.000
This setting specifies the value of the GOOSE analog input when the selected RxGOOSE has lost its connectivity with the
publisher and the RxGOOSE Analog1 DEFAULT MODE is set to "Default Value." Otherwise this setting has no effect. This
setting is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point number. Because of the large range of this setting, not all
possible values can be stored. Some values can be rounded to the closest possible floating point number.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-79
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
RxGOOSE Analog1 DEFAULT MODE
Range: Default Value, Last Known
Default: Default Value
When the selected RxGOOSE has lost its connectivity with the publisher and this setting is "Last Known," the value of the
RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexLogic operand remains at the last received value. When the selected RxGOOSE has lost its
connectivity with the publisher and this setting value is "Default Value," then the RxGOOSE Analog1 FlexLogic operand is
defined by the RxGOOSE Analog1 DEFAULT setting. After restart, until a message is received, the operand value is the
default value.
RxGOOSE Analog1 UNITS
Range: up to 4 characters
Default: empty string
This setting specifies a four-character string that is used in the actual values display of RxGOOSE Analog1.
RxGOOSE Analogs are floating-point values, with no units. The RxGOOSE UNIT and PU base settings allow the user to
configure RxGOOSE Analog, so that it can be used in a FlexElement.
RxGOOSE Analogs that represent current, voltage, power, frequency, angles, or power factor can be used in a
FlexElement. The following text must be used in the UNITS setting, to represent these types of analogs: A, V, W, var, VA,
Hz, deg, and no text (blank setting) for power factor.
RxGOOSE Analogs can be compared to other RxGOOSE Analogs with any character string or no string.
RxGOOSE Analog1 PU Base in kilo
Range: 0.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 1.000
5
This setting specifies the per-unit base value for other C30 features to use with the RxGOOSE Analog 1 FlexAnalog
operand. A FlexElement for instance subtracts two quantities after converting their values to integers rescaled to a
common base, the common base being the largest of the base values of the two quantities. If one of quantities is
RxGOOSE Analog1 and its per-unit base value is not appropriate, the rescaling operation can result in unnecessary loss
of precision or overflow in the integer result. The FlexElement Base Units table in the Settings > FlexLogic > FlexElements
section later, which tabulates the per-unit base value used by its pickup setting and implies the per-unit base used by
other FlexAnalogs, can be of use in selecting a value for the RxGOOSE Analog1 PU setting.
Some UR elements have requirements for the type of input operands, for instance current type or voltage type. These
elements assume that RxGOOSE Analog operands are of whatever type is necessary to meet these requirements.
The per-unit base setting represents thousands, not single units. For example, a PU base of 1.000 is actually 1000 and a
PU base of 0.001 is 1.
When using RxGOOSE Analogs and PU base in FlexElements, the largest value that can be displayed in the FlexElement
actual values is 2,140,000.000.
RxGOOSE Analog1 Expression
Range: None, Equal to, Not Equal to, Greater than, Less than
Default: None
This setting specifies the expression type to be used with the RxGOOSE Analog In1 FlexAnalog operand. The result of the
expression is converted into Boolean status and assigned to the RxGOOSE Analog1 Expn St operand. When the expression
result is true, RxGOOSE Analog1 Expn St operand is set. When the expression set to None, no expression is assigned and
RxGOOSE Analog1 Expn St is always in reset state.
When the expression is set to other than "None", RxGOOSE Analog In1 is compared with the configured Expression value
based on the selected Expression type.
When the remote signal type is "Float," the "Equal to" and "Not Equal to" expressions may not give accurate results
due to precision errors in decimals.
5-80
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
RxGOOSE Analog1 Expression Value
Range: -1000000.000 to 1000000 in steps of 1
Default: 1
This setting specifies the Expression value for comparison.
Reports
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Reports.
Report settings
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Reports > Report Settings.
ReportSettings rptID
Range: Dyn, Conf
Default: Dyn
When set to Dyn, the RptID attribute in any buffered and unbuffered report control block can be modified by an MMS
client while the control block's RptEna attribute is false. The RptID is the name of the report.
ReportSettings optFields
Range: Dyn, Conf
Default: Dyn
When set to Dyn, the OptFlds attribute in any buffered and unbuffered report control block can be modified by an MMS
client while the control block's RptEna attribute is false.
ReportSettings bufTime
Range: Dyn, Conf
Default: Dyn
5
When set to Dyn, the BufTm attribute in any buffered and unbuffered report control block can be modified by an MMS
client while the control block's RptEna attribute is false.
ReportSettings trgOps
Range: Dyn, Conf
Default: Dyn
When set to Dyn, the TrgOps attribute in any buffered and unbuffered report control block can be modified by an MMS
client while the control block's RptEna attribute is false.
ReportSettings intgPd
Range: Dyn, Conf
Default: Dyn
When set to Dyn, the IntgPd attribute in any buffered and unbuffered report control block can be modified by an MMS
client while the control block's RptEna attribute is false.
Buffered and unbuffered reports
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Reports > Buffered Reports or Unbuffered
Reports.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-81
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-32: IEC 61850 buffered report panel
5
An IEC 61850 Report server is an efficient method to deliver generic substation event information from a single server to a
single client, such as a supervisory control IED. A Configurable Report is a UR element implementing an IEC 61850 Report
server, either of the buffered or unbuffered kind. The following table lists the number of Configurable Report elements. Each
Configurable Report element can report the values of up to 64 FlexLogic or FlexAnalog operands. Buffered report elements
queue value changes that occur while the client is offline and delivered when the client re-connects. Up to 512 events can
be queued. Unbuffered control blocks purge all value change events when the connection to the client is lost; any events
that occur while the client is not connected are lost.
Table 5-11: Number of report elements
Number
Buffered reports
30
Unbuffered reports
18
When using IEC 61850 Edition 2, configurable Reports interoperate with any client device of any manufacturer that
conforms to the IEC 61850 edition 1.0 or 2.0 report client requirements.
When using IEC 61850 Edition 1, configurable Reports interoperate with any client device of any manufacturer that
conforms to the IEC 61850 edition 1.0 report client requirements.
The entities whose values are reported by a Configurable Report are known as members. The members are itemized in an
ordered list known as a data set. Each Configurable Report can use any one of the data sets provided.
Each enabled Configurable Report transmits an update to its client whenever a value change is detected in one or more of
its members. Also, the control block can be configured to send integrity reports containing the present value of all
members either on demand from the client or periodically. A TCP handshaking mechanism causes messages that are not
read and acknowledged by the client to be retransmitted.
5-82
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
For a Configurable Report to operate, its members must be selected (that is, its data set configured) and a client must open
a connection to, configure, and enable its report control block. Control blocks and data sets can be pre-configured by
sending the C30 a CID file. See the UR Family Communications Guide for details. EnerVista UR Setup also can be used to
select the data set members and to pre-configure the control blocks.
Each buffered report has the following settings.
Buffered Report1 RptID
Range for Edition 2: 0 to 129 VisibleString characters
Range for Edition 1: 0 to 65 VisibleString characters
Default: empty string
The name of the report. The entered value sets the RptID value in Buffered Report1 messages, and it can be used by the
client to discriminate Buffered Report1 messages from other messages. If the number of characters entered is zero, the
value used for RptID in messages is an ObjectReference to the report's control block, that is, "<LDName>/
LLN0$BR$"BRCB01".
Buffered Report1 Name
Range: 0 to 32 VisibleString characters
Default: BRCB01
The entered value sets the report control block name value for Buffered Report1.
Buffered Report1 DatSet
Range: None, TT6DataSet1, TT6 DataSet2, …, TT3DataSet01, TT3DataSet02, …
Default: None
This setting selects the data set whose members' status is reported in Buffered Report1 messages using the UR Setup
software designator for the data set. The IEC 61850 name of the data sets are configured in the Datasets panel, as
described later.
An ObjectReference to the data set, which consists of the concatenation of the string "<LDName>/LLN0$" and the data
set name, is used in the datSet field of report messages, and it can be used by the client to discriminate Buffered
Report1 messages from other messages.
The performance of the report is determined by the performance of the selected dataset. When the selection is
TT3DataSet01, TT3DataSet02, … it is possible that transient events can be missed.
To configure a DataSet, select it at the top of the window from the drop-down list, for example DataSet02 shown in the
previous figure. In the lower part of the window, drag and drop configuration items to the right side. For example select
the ST Ind001 stVal item and drag it to DataSet Member 1. Dataset members configured here affect other Report or
TxGOOSE control blocks that use the same DataSet.
Buffered Report1 ConfRev
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
Default: 1
The entered value sets the confRev value in Buffered Report1 messages, and it can be used by clients to discriminate
report messages of the expected configuration revision from messages of a different revision. The standard requires
that confRev be incremented each time the members or the order of the members is changed, and each time the data
set name is changed. The standard states that the value of 0 is reserved.
Buffered Report1 OptFlds
Range: The check box for each individual bit can be enabled or not (see figure)
Default: All bits enabled/ true
The OptFlds setting is bitstring that controls which of the optional fields are included in report messages. The figure
shows the available option bits. To reduce message size, uncheck any fields that are not needed.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-83
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-33: Options for buffered report messages (Edition 2)
Buffered Report1 BufTm
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
Default: 0 ms
The entered value sets the time interval in milliseconds for the buffering of events for inclusion in a single report.
Buffered Report1 TrgOps
Range: The check box for an individual bit can be enabled or not
Default: All bits enabled / true
The TrgOps setting is bitstring that controls which trigger conditions are monitored in this report. The options are as
follows. Uncheck any trigger conditions that are not needed.
5
–
data-change
–
quality-change
–
integrity
–
general interrogation (IEC 61850 Edition 2)
Buffered Report1 IntgPd
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
Default: 0 ms
The entered value sets the period in milliseconds for generating Buffered Report1 integrity reports. An integrity report
includes the values of all members of the referenced data set, whether a change has occurred or not.
Each unbuffered report has the following settings.
Unbuffered Report1 RptID
Range for Edition 2: 0 to 129 VisibleString characters
Range for Edition 1: 0 to 65 VisibleString characters
Default: empty string
The name of the report. The entered value sets the RptID value in Unbuffered Report1 messages, and it can be used by
the client to discriminate Unbuffered Report1 messages from other messages. If the number of characters entered is
zero, the value used for RptID in messages is an ObjectReference to the report's control block, that is, "<LDName>/
LLN0$RP$"URCB01".
Unbuffered Report1 Name
Range: 0 up to 32 VisibleString characters
Default: URCB01
The entered value sets the report control block name value for Unbuffered Report1.
Unbuffered Report1 DatSet
Range: None, TT6DataSet1, TT6 DataSet2, …, TT3DataSet01, TT3DataSet02, …
Default: None
This setting selects the data set whose members' status is reported in Unbuffered Report1 messages using the UR Setup
software designator for the data set. The IEC 61850 name of the data sets are configured in the Datasets panel, as
described later.
5-84
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
An ObjectReference to the data set, which consists of the concatenation of the string "<LDName>/LLN0$" and the data
set name, is used in the datSet field of report messages, and it can be used by the client to discriminate Unbuffered
Report1 messages from other messages.
The performance of the report is determined by the performance of the selected dataset. When the selection is
TT3DataSet01, TT3DataSet02, … it is possible that transient events can be missed.
Unbuffered Report1 ConfRev
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
Default: 1
The entered value sets the confRev value in Unbuffered Report1 messages, and it can be used by clients to discriminate
report messages of the expected configuration revision from messages of a different revision. The standard requires
that confRev be incremented each time the members or the order of the members is changed, and each time the data
set name is changed. The standard states that the value of 0 is reserved.
Unbuffered Report1 OptFlds
Range: The check box for an individual bit can be enabled or not
Default: All bits enabled / true
The OptFlds setting is bitstring that controls which of the optional fields are included in report messages. The options are
as follows. To reduce message size, uncheck any fields that are not needed.
–
sequence-number
–
report-time-stamp
–
reason-for-inclusion
–
data-set-name
–
data-reference
–
conf-revision
5
For IEC 61850 Edition 2, the OptFlds bits buffer-overflow and entryID also listed are not applicable to unbuffered reports
even though the bits exist in the protocol. They are unchecked by default.
For IEC 61850 Edition 1, the entryID also listed is not applicable to unbuffered reports even though the bits exist in the
protocol. It is unchecked by default.
Unbuffered Report1 BufTm
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
Default: 0 ms
The entered value sets the time interval in milliseconds for the buffering of events for inclusion into a single report.
Unbuffered Report1 TrgOps
Range: The check box for an individual bit can be enabled or not
Default: All bits enabled / true
The TrgOps setting is bitstring that controls which trigger conditions are monitored in this report. The options are as
follows. Uncheck any trigger conditions that are not needed.
–
data-change
–
quality-change
–
integrity
–
general interrogation (IEC 61850 Edition 2)
Unbuffered Report1 IntgPd
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
Default: 0 ms
The entered value sets the period in milliseconds for generating Unbuffered Report1 integrity reports. An integrity report
includes the values of all members of the referenced data set, whether a change has occurred or not.
DataSets
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > DataSets.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-85
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
As outlined, the members whose values are communicated by these services are itemized in an ordered list known as a
data set. Each UR with the IEC 61850 option has 18 data sets (six fast and 12 slow). Each data set can contain as many as
64 members. Any data set can be used simultaneously by any number of TxGOOSE elements and/or by any number of
Configurable Report elements. The UR software can configure any FlexLogic operands and any FlexAnalog operands as
members.
Figure 5-34: IEC 61850 DataSets (Edition 2)
5
UR Setup software requires data set members to be IEC 61850 data objects or data attributes with Functional Constraint
ST or MX. Certain FlexLogic and FlexAnalog operands have factory-assigned data attributes as tabulated in the UR Family
Communications Guide. All FlexLogic and FlexAnalog operands can be user-assigned to GGIO1 or GGIO4 data attributes,
so that operands without factory-assigned data attributes can still have their values published. See the GGIO1 and GGIO4
sections later for details.
Datasets used by TxGOOSE1, TxGOOSE2, and/or by reports also provide a chatter suppression service for their Boolean
members. Oscillation in a value, also known as chatter, can be caused by errors in logic programming, inadequate
hysteresis (deadband) on a threshold, or a failed station component. Chatter can flood a communications network with
GOOSE messages, degrading response time for all users. If chatter is detected in a Boolean member, TxGOOSE suspends
GOOSE event message triggering and report message triggering from that member for as long as the condition exists, and
for a minimum period of one second. While sending is suspended, a self-test message identifying the specific data item
detected as oscillating is activated.
For a summary of the panels in which the data sets are used, the path is Settings > Product Setup > Communications >
IEC 61850 > DataSets > Summary.
For the settings, navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > DataSets > TT6DataSet1 for the
first data set.
Copy and paste functions are available when right-clicking a DataSet. They allow the target dataset to be configured
based on its order code. If some dataset items are not supported, they are not pasted, and a warning message shows a list
of dataset items that were not supported and not pasted. The DataSet name is not copied or pasted. In short, use this
feature to copy a DataSet Member setting and paste it into another Member setting, a text file, or Word, as examples.
5-86
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-35: Member right-click
5
DataSet01 name
Range: 0 to 32 VisibleString characters
Default: DataSet01
The value entered sets the name of the data set, which is required to be unique within the UR for proper operation. The
value entered sets the name of the data set, which is required to be unique within the UR for proper operation. Fast
datasets start with TT6, and slow datasets start with TT3. Up to six fast datasets are allowed. Up to four fast GOOSE
datasets are allowed.
An ObjectReference to the data set consists of a string that is the concatenation of "<LDName>/LLN0$" and the
DataSet01 name setting value. An ObjectReference to the data set is published in the datSet field of TxGOOSE messages,
and it can be used by subscribers to discriminate the messages of that TxGOOSE from other GOOSE messages. An
ObjectReference to the data set is optionally published in the DatSet field of Report messages. Valid characters are
upper and lowercase letters, digits, and the underscore (_) character. The first character must be a letter.
DataSet01 shared by
Range: 0 to 32 VisibleString characters
Default:
Names of all control blocks that use this DataSet. Read-only field.
DataSet01 Member1
Range: End of List or any instantiated 61850 data object or data attribute with Functional Constraint ST or MX
Default: End of List
This setting specifies the first member in TxGOOSE1 messages. There is a similar setting for each of the up to 64
members that the UR allows in a Dataset. Only values of members before the first set to End of List are published.
Select the member from the drop-down list. Or right-click an entry to copy, paste, delete, or insert.
Product setup
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Product Setup.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-87
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Security
This setting applies to IEC 61850 Edition 2.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Product Setup > Security.
Figure 5-36: IEC 61850 Security
5
SecGSAL1.SecDataClr.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model that clients must use to clear security data via commands to
SecGSAL1.SecDataClr. "sbo" here is select-before-operate.
SecGSAL1.OpCntRs ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model that clients must use to clear security data via commands to SecGSAL1.OpCntRs.
"sbo" here is select-before-operate.
Demand
Deadband parameters of measured values related to the Demand metering are configured here.
Energy
Deadband parameters of measured values related to the Energy metering are configured here.
Real Time Clock
This setting applies to IEC 61850 Edition 2.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Product Setup > Real Time Clock.
5-88
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-37: IEC 61850 Real Time Clock
TmClkLTMS1.TmnsDelta.db
Range: 0.000 to 100.000 %
Default: 0.000 %
This setting is a deadband setting and is used by the relay to determine when to update the "mag" and "cVal" values
from the associated "instMag" and "instCVal" values. The value shall represent the percentage of difference between
maximum and minimum in units of 0.001%. The minimum and maximum values for TmnsDelta data object are
-500000000 ns and 500000000 ns respectively and for example, a setting value of 0.002% results in the dead banded
value of (500000000 - (-500000000)) * 0.002 / 100 = 20000 ns. The default setting value of 0.000% does not update the
"mag" and "cVal" values.
Deadband settings
A deadband is a range in which no action occurs, usually expressed as a percentage.
The IEC 61850 panels contain hundreds of deadband settings, such as in the following panels: Product Setup > Real Time
Clock, FlexLogic, Control Elements, and GGIO4. Each panel is not outlined here. The FlexLogic category applies to IEC 61850
Edition 2.
Deadband setting names all end either with "DB" or .db. As they all work the same way, but each on a different analog
value, a single description applicable to all deadband settings is given here. The analog value that each deadband setting
applies is usually obvious from the name of the setting. However, a tabulation of the analog values and their associated
deadband setting can be found in the UR Family Communications Guide.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-89
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-38: Deadband settings with .db suffix (Edition 2)
GOOSE, buffered report, and unbuffered report messages are for the most part transmitted only when there is a value
change in one or more of their members. Most analog values continuously dither by an amount that is not significant.
Were a report to be sent each time an insignificant analog value change occurred, then the communications network
floods with GOOSE and report messages, degrading response time for all users.
5
To control this, a deadband setting is provided for each analog value. Also, in addition to the present actual value of each
analog ("instMag" in the following figure), there is a deadbanded value ("mag" in the figure), which is updated with the
present value only when the difference between the two exceeds the deadband setting (db in the figure). Changes to this
deadbanded value trigger transmissions when included in GOOSE and report data sets.
Figure 5-39: Deadband settings
Deadband settings are entered in UR Setup software in units of percent of the difference between the "max." and "min." of
the associated analog value. A zero deadband setting suppresses transmission triggering. The range of deadband settings
is 0.000 to 100.000% in steps of 0.001. The default value is 0.000%.
GGIO4 elements have individual settings for "min." and "max." The min. and max. for FlxEIGAPC#.OpSig.db (FLEXELEMENT #
OpSig) are -50 pu and +50 pu respectively. The min. value for all other quantities is 0. The max. values are as follows:
•
Phase current — 46 x phase CT primary setting
•
Neutral current — 46 x ground CT primary setting
•
Ground current (sensitive ground CT) — 4.6 x sensitive ground CT primary setting
•
Phase, phase-to-phase, and sequence voltage — 275 x phase VT ratio setting
•
Auxiliary voltage — 275 x auxiliary VT ration setting
•
Power (real, reactive, apparent, 3-phase, and 1-phase) — 4 × phase CT primary setting × 1.5 × VT Secondary setting ×
VT ratio setting
5-90
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
•
Energy (real or imaginary) — 4 × phase CT primary setting × 1.5 × VT Secondary setting × VT ratio setting x 1 hour
•
Frequency — 90 Hz
•
Frequency rate of change — 90 Hz/s
•
Power factor — 2
•
Angle — 360 degrees
Select the deadband settings from knowledge of the characteristics of the power system quantity measured and
knowledge of the demands of the applications receiving the measurement via GOOSE or report such that changes of
significance to the application are promptly reported, yet the network is not overly burdened with event messages.
Signal sources
Deadband parameters of measured values related to the signal sources are configured here.
Breakers
The UR breaker control and status monitoring elements have certain settings that configure how the IEC 61850 protocol
interacts with these elements. These settings are described in this section. See the Breakers section in the System Setup
section of this chapter for details on the operation of breaker control elements.
Navigate to Settings > Communications > IEC 61850 > System Setup > Breakers > Breaker 1 to access the settings that
configure the IEC 61850 protocol interface with the first breaker control and status monitoring element. The settings and
functionality for the others are similar.
Figure 5-40: IEC 61850 Breaker panel (Edition 2)
5
XCBR1 TagOn ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security, direct-with-enhanced-security, sbo-withenhanced-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting determines the initial IEC 61850 control model (ctlModel) values for the TagOn data object in the XCBR logical
node. The IEC 61850 client must issue the control request on TagOn data object as per the selected control mode, in
order to tag/remove the tag on respective breaker element.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-91
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
XCBR1 Pos ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security, direct-with-enhanced-security, sbo-withenhanced-security
Default: sbo-with-enhanced-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the breaker 1 signals marked
Bkr0XCBR1.PosOpn.ctlVal and Bkr0XCBR1.PosCls.ctlVal on the Breaker Control Logic (Sheet 1 of 2) diagram in the
Settings > System Setup section later in this chapter. These signals force a breaker 1 three-phase trip or close control
while the operand selected by setting XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND is not active.
"sbo" here is select-before-operate. Enhanced security means that the UR reports to the client the breaker 1 position at
the end of the command sequence.
XCBR1 Pos sboTimeout
Range: 2 to 60 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 30 s
This setting specifies the maximum time between a select and an operate command to breaker 1 signals marked
Bkr0XCBR1.PosOpn.ctlVal and Bkr0XCBR1.PosCls.ctlVal in order for the operand to be successful. This setting is only
relevant when XCBR1 Pos ctlModel is sbo-with-normal-security or sbo-with-enhanced-security.
XCBR1 BlkOpn ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
5
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the breaker 1 signal marked
Bkr0XCBR1.BlkOpn.ctlVal signal on the Breaker Control Logic (Sheet 1 of 2) diagram in the Settings > System Setup
section later. This signal when true blocks breaker 1 trip control while the operand selected by setting XCBR1 ST.LOC
OPERAND is not active.
XCBR1 BlkCls ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the breaker 1 signal marked
Bkr0XCBR1.BlkCls.ctlVal signal on the Breaker Control Logic (Sheet 1 of 2) diagram in the Settings > System Setup section
later. This signal when true blocks breaker 1 close control while the operand selected by setting XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND
is not active.
CSWI1 CmdBlk ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting determines the initial IEC 61850 control model (ctlModel) values for CmdBlk DataObjects in the CSWI logical
node.
CSWI1 Pos ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security, direct-with-enhanced-security, sbo-withenhanced-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the breaker 1 signals marked
BkrCSWI1.PosOpn.ctlVal and BkrCSWI1.PosCls.ctlVal on the Breaker Control Logic (Sheet 1 of 2) diagram in the Settings >
System Setup section earlier. These signals force a breaker 1 three-phase trip or close control while the operand selected
by setting XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND is not active.
CSWI1 Pos sboTimeout
Range: 2 to 60 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 30 s
This setting specifies the maximum time between a select and an operate command to breaker 1 via BkrCSWI1.Pos in
order for the operand to be successful. This setting is only relevant when CSWI1 Pos ctlModel is sbo-with-normalsecurity or sbo-with-enhanced-security.
5-92
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
CSWI1 Pos operTimeout
Range: 0.000 to 2.000 s in steps of 0.001s
Default: 0.100 s
This setting applies to IEC 61850 Edition 2.
This setting specifies the maximum time between an operate command to breaker 1 via BkrCSWI1.Pos until
BkrCSWI1.Pos.stVal enters the commanded state. The command terminates if the commanded state is not reached in
the set time.
CSWI1 BlkOpn ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting determines the initial IEC 61850 control model (ctlModel) values for BlkOpn DataObjects in the CSWI logical
node.
CSWI1 BlkCls ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting determines the initial IEC 61850 control model (ctlModel) values for BlkCls DataObjects in the CSWI logical
node.
CSWI1 Pos ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security, direct-with-enhanced-security, sbo-withenhanced-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the breaker 1 signals marked
BkrCSWI1.PosOpn.ctlVal and BkrCSWI1.PosCls.ctlVal on the Breaker Control Logic (Sheet 1 of 2) diagram in the Settings >
System Setup section earlier. These signals force a breaker 1 three-phase trip or close control while the operand selected
by setting XCBR1 ST.LOC OPERAND is not active.
CSWI1 TagOn ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security, direct-with-enhanced-security, sbo-withenhanced-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting determines the initial IEC 61850 control model (ctlModel) values for the TagOn data object in the CSWI logical
node. The IEC 61850 client must issue the control request on TagOn data object as per the selected control mode, in
order to tag/remove the tag on respective breaker element.
Switches
The UR disconnect switch control and status monitoring elements have certain settings that configure how the IEC 61850
protocol interacts with these elements. These settings are described in this section. See the Settings > System Setup >
Disconnect Switches section later in this chapter for details on the operation of the disconnect switch control elements.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > System Setup > Switches > Switch 1 to access
the settings that configure the IEC 61850 protocol interface with the first disconnect switch control and status monitoring
element. The settings and functionality for the others are similar.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-93
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-41: Switch panel
5
Disc0XSWI1 TagOn ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security, direct-with-enhanced-security, sbo-withenhanced-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting determines the initial IEC 61850 control model (ctlModel) values for the TagOn data object in the XSWI logical
node. The IEC 61850 client must issue the control request on TagOn data object as per the selected control mode, in
order to tag/remove the tag on respective switch element.
XSWI1 Pos ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security, direct-with-enhanced-security, sbo-withenhanced-security
Default: sbo-with-enhanced-security
This setting selects the control model that clients must use to successfully control the disconnect switch 1 signals
marked Disc0XCBR1.PosOpn.ctlVal and Disc0XCBR1.PosCls.ctlVal on the Disconnect Switch Logic diagram in the Settings
> System Setup section later. These signals force a disconnect switch trip or close control while the operand selected by
setting XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND is not active.
"sbo" here is select-before-operate. Enhanced security means that the C30 reports to the client the disconnect switch 1
position the end of the command sequence.
XSWI1 Pos sboTimeout
Range: 2 to 60 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 30 s
This setting specifies the maximum time between a select and an operate command to disconnect switch 1 signals
marked Disc0XCBR1.PosOpn.ctlVal and Disc0XCBR1.PosCls.ctlVal in order for the operand to be successful. This setting is
only relevant when XSWI1 Pos ctlModel is sbo-with-normal-security or sbo-with-enhanced-security.
Disc0XSWI1 BlkOpn ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the disconnect switch 1 signal marked
DiscCSWI1.BlkOpn.ctlVal signal on the Disconnect Switch Logic diagram in the Settings > System Setup section later. This
signal when true blocks disconnect switch 1 trip control while the operand selected by setting XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND is
not active.
5-94
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Disc0XSWI1 BlkCls ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the disconnect switch 1 signal marked
DiscCSWI1.BlkCls.ctlVal signal on the Disconnect Switch Logic diagram in the Settings > System Setup section later. This
signal when true blocks disconnect switch 1 close control while the operand selected by setting XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND
is not active.
Disc0CSWI1 Pos ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security, direct-with-enhanced-security, sbo-withenhanced-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the disconnect switch 1 signals marked
DiscCSWI1.PosOpn.ctlVal and DiscCSWI1.PosCls.ctlVal on the Disconnect Switch Logic diagram in the Settings > System
Setup section later. These signals force a disconnect switch trip or close control while the operand selected by setting
XSWI1 ST.LOC OPERAND is not active.
Disc0CSWI1 Pos sboTimeout
Range: 2 to 60 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 30 s
This setting specifies the maximum time between a select and an operate command to disconnect switch 1 via
BkrCSWI1.Pos in order for the operand to be successful. This setting is only relevant when CSWI1 Pos ctlModel is sbowith-normal-security or sbo-with-enhanced-security.
Disc0CSWI1 Pos operTimeout
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001s
Default: 5.000 s
5
This setting specifies the maximum time between an operate command to disconnect switch 1 via BkrCSWI1.Pos until
BkrCSWI1.Pos.stVal enters the commanded state. The command terminates if the commanded state is not reached in
the set time.
Disc0CSWI1 TagOn ctlModel
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security, direct-with-enhanced-security, sbo-withenhanced-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting determines the initial IEC 61850 control model (ctlModel) values for the TagOn data object in the CSWI logical
node. The IEC 61850 client must issue the control request on TagOn data object as per the selected control mode, in
order to tag/remove the tag on respective switch element.
Commands
The UR implements a number of clear records commands as detailed in the Commands and Targets chapter of this
manual. Several of these commands also can be issued via IEC 61850. The settings related to these IEC 61850 commands
are described here.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > Settings for Commands to access the settings
that configure the IEC 61850 protocol interface for record clear commands. The content varies with relay capability.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-95
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-42: Commands panel (Edition 2)
UFltRptRFLO1.RsStat.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
5
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR FAULT REPORTS. "sbo"
here is select-before-operate. Enhanced security means that the C30 reports to the client the breaker 1 position at the
end of the command sequence.
LLN0.EvtRcdClr.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR EVENT RECORDS.
LPHD1.RsStat.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR ALL RELAY RECORDS.
LPHD1.Sim.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This is a command that can be issued via MMS client to enable simulation mode in the relay.
Enabling the SIM CTRL VIA MMS setting allows this MMS command to be accepted by the relay.
LPHD1.TxGoSim.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This MMS command enables TxGOOSE sim Mode.
The sim attribute is set to TRUE in the published GOOSE frames from the relay so that the UR plays the simulator role
during the testing and commissioning phases.
OscRDRE1.RcdTrg.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command FORCE TRIGGER.
5-96
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
OscRDRE1.MemClr.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY.
DatLogRDRE1.MemClr.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR DATA LOGGER.
CBArc0SCBR1.MemClr.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR ARC AMPS 1.
DmdMtrMMTR1.RsStat.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR DEMAND.
EnrMtrMMTR1.RsStat.ctlModel
Range: direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control the command CLEAR ENERGY.
GGIO1
GGIO1 is a UR feature that allows up to 128 UR FlexLogic operands to be user-mapped to IEC 61850 information model
data attributes.
For the value of a FlexLogic operand to be read via MMS, included in TxGOOSE messages, or included in buffered/
unbuffered reports, the value must be assigned to a data attribute. GGIO1 allows those FlexLogic operands that have not
yet been factory-assigned to a data attribute to be user-assigned to a generic data attribute, and thus have their values
included in IEC 61850 communications.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO > GGIO1 to access the settings for GGIO1.
Figure 5-43: IEC 61850 GGIO1 panel (Edition 2)
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-97
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
GGIO1 INDICATION 1
Range: any FlexLogic operand
Default: OFF
This setting selects the FlexLogic operand whose value is mapped into the IEC 61850 data attribute
<LDName>/GGIO1.Ind001.stVal. See the FlexLogic section in this chapter for a list of FlexLogic operands.
GGIO1 INDICATION 2
Range: any FlexLogic operand
Default: OFF
Selects the FlexLogic operand mapped to <LDName>/GGIO1.Ind002.stVal, and so on.
GGIO2
Virtual Inputs are controllable FlexLogic operands that can be controlled via IEC 61850 commands to GGIO2, by DNP, by
Modbus, and by the UR front panel. The settings related to these IEC 61850 commands are described here.
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO > GGIO2 to access the settings that
configure the IEC 61850 protocol interface for Virtual Input commands.
Figure 5-44: GGIO2 panel (Edition 2)
5
GGIO2 CF SPCSO 1 CTLMODEL
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
This setting selects the control model clients must use to successfully control Virtual Input 1. "sbo" here is select-beforeoperate.
GGIO2 CF SPCSO 2 CTLMODEL
Range: status-only, direct-with-normal-security, sbo-with-normal-security
Default: direct-with-normal-security
Selects the control model for Virtual Input 2, and so on.
GGIO4
GGIO4 is a UR feature that allows up to 32 UR FlexAnalog operands to be user-mapped to an IEC 61850 information model
data attribute.
For the value of a FlexAnalog operand to be read via MMS, included in TxGOOSE messages, or included in buffered/
unbuffered reports, the value must be assigned to a data attribute. GGIO4 allows those FlexAnalog operands that have not
yet been factory-assigned to a data attribute to be user-assigned to a generic data attribute, and thus have their values
included in IEC 61850 communications.
5-98
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Navigate to Settings > Product Setup > Communications > IEC 61850 > GGIO > GGIO4 > GGIO4.AnIn1 to access the
settings for the first GGIO4 value. The settings and functionality for the others are similar.
Figure 5-45: GGIO4 panel (Edition 2)
ANALOG IN 1 VALUE
Range: any FlexAnalog operand
Default: OFF
This setting selects the FlexAnalog operand whose value is mapped into the IEC 61850 data attribute
<LDName>/GGIO4.AnIn01.instMag.f. The value of the FlexAnalog operand is converted automatically to the format and
scaling required by the standard, that is to say primary amperes, primary volts, and so on. See Appendix A for a list of
FlexAnalog operands.
ANALOG IN 1 DB
Range: 0.000 to 100.000% in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.000%
This setting specifies the deadband for the ANALOG IN 1 VALUE. The deadband is used to determine when to update the
deadbanded magnitude from the instantaneous magnitude. The deadband is a percentage of the difference between
the "max." and "min." values. Here, the "max." and "min." are as specified by the settings ANALOG IN 1 MAX and ANALOG IN
1 MIN.
See the Deadband Settings section earlier for a description of deadbanded values.
ANALOG IN 1 MIN
Range: -1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 0.000
This setting specifies the "min." value used in deadband calculations. The scaling of this setting is the same as used by
<LDName>/GGIO4.AnIn01.instMag.f. This setting is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point number. Because of
the large range of this setting, not all possible values can be stored. Some values are rounded to the closest possible
floating point number.
ANALOG IN 1 MAX
Range: -1000000000.000 to 1000000000.000 in steps of 0.001
Default: 1000000.000
This setting specifies the "max." value used in deadband calculations. The scaling of this setting is the same as used by
<LDName>/GGIO4.AnIn01.instMag.f. This setting is stored as an IEEE 754 / IEC 60559 floating point number. Because of
the large range of this setting, not all possible values can be stored. Some values are rounded to the closest possible
floating point number.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-99
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
File transfer by IEC 61850
The C30 supports file transfer by IEC 61850. The approach is as follows, using the SISCO AX-S4 61850 client software as an
example.
1.
In the AX-S4 61850 Explorer window, click the Tools menu and access the SISCO File Transfer Utility.
2.
Select the Remote AR Name from the drop-down list. Available files appear in the File Specification area on the right
side of the window.
3.
With the Copy option active, select a file to transfer and click the Go button. The file is copied and displays in the Local
list on the left side of the window.
4.
Repeat the process to transfer any other files.
Figure 5-46: File transfer by IEC 61850
5
5.3.5.13 Web server HTTP protocol
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
 WEB SERVER
 HTTP PROTOCOL

HTTP TCP PORT
NUMBER(80): 80
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
The C30 contains an embedded web server and can display pages in a web browser. The web pages are organized as a
series of menus that can be accessed starting at the C30 “Main Menu.” Web pages are read-only and are available
showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, event records, fault reports, and so on. First connect the
C30 and a computer to an Ethernet network, then enter the IP address of the C30 Ethernet port in a web browser.
To close the port, set the port number to 0.
Any change takes effect when the C30 is restarted.
5-100
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-47: Example of UR web page showing event records
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
5
5.3.5.14 TFTP protocol
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  TFTP PROTOCOL
 TFTP PROTOCOL


TFTP MAIN UDP PORT
NUMBER(69): 69
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1
NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2
NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the C30 over a network. The C30 operates as a
TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file obtained
from the C30 contains a list and description of all available files, for example event records and oscillography.
The "put" function is not for security reasons. You can enter a "get" command but not a "put" command.
TFTP MAIN UDP PORT NUMBER — To close the port, set the port number to 0. Any change takes effect when the C30 is
restarted.
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
5.3.5.15 IEC 60870-5-104 protocol
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
 IEC 60870-5-104
 PROTOCOL

IEC TCP PORT
NUMBER(2404): 2404
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

 IEC NETWORK
 CLIENT ADDRESSES
See below
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-101
PRODUCT SETUP
5
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

IEC COMMON ADDRESS
OF ASDU: 0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

IEC CYCLIC DATA
PERIOD: 60 s
Range: 1 to 65535 s in steps of 1

IEC CURRENT DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

IEC POWER DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

IEC ENERGY DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

IEC PF DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 1.00
Range: 0.00 to 1.00

IEC OTHER DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

IEC REDUNDANCY
ENABLED: No
Range: No, Yes

IEC EVENT TIME BASE:
LOCAL
Range: Local, UTC
IEC 60870-5-104 is a transmission protocol for network access, specifically for communication between a control station
and substation over a TCP/IP network.
The C30 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. This protocol is enabled when the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP 
COMMUNICATIONS  PROTOCOL setting is set to IEC 60870-5-104. The C30 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device
connected to a maximum of two masters (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the C30 maintains two
sets of IEC 60870-5-104 data change buffers, ideally no more than two masters actively communicate with the C30 at one
time.
The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are used to determine when to trigger spontaneous responses containing
M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the C30 analog data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other.
Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that type. For example, to trigger
spontaneous responses from the C30 when any current values change by 15 A, the IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD
setting is set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. P_ME_NC_1 (parameter of measured
value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the default, for each individual
M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the C30, the default thresholds are in effect.
The IEC REDUNDANCY setting decides whether multiple client connections are accepted or not. If redundancy is set to Yes,
two simultaneous connections can be active at any given time.
IEC TCP PORT NUMBER — To close the port, set the port number to 0. Any change takes effect when the C30 is restarted.
IEC COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU — The change takes effect when the C30 is restarted.
IEC CYCLIC DATA PERIOD — The change takes effect when the C30 is restarted.
The C30 relay does not support power metering. As such, the IEC POWER DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting is not
applicable.
The C30 relay does not support energy metering. As such, the IEC ENERGY DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting is not
applicable.
5-102
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL  IEC NETWORK CLIENT
ADDRESSES
 IEC NETWORK
 CLIENT ADDRESSES

CLIENT ADDRESS 1:
0.0.0.0

CLIENT ADDRESS 5:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IPV4 address format

Range: standard IPV4 address format
The C30 can specify a maximum of five clients for its IEC 104 connections. These are IP addresses for the controllers to
which the C30 can connect. A maximum of two simultaneous connections are supported at any given time.
5.3.5.16 EGD protocol
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  EGD PROTOCOL
 EGD PROTOCOL


 FAST PROD EXCH 1
 CONFIGURATION
See below

 SLOW PROD EXCH 1
 CONFIGURATION
See below

 SLOW PROD EXCH 2
 CONFIGURATION
See below
5
The C30 is provided with optional Ethernet Global Data (EGD) communications capability, specified as a
software option at the time of ordering.
Ethernet Global Data (EGD) is a suite of protocols used for the real-time transfer of data for display and control purposes.
The relay can be configured to ‘produce’ EGD data exchanges, and other devices can be configured to ‘consume’ EGD data
exchanges. The number of produced exchanges (up to three), the data items in each exchange (up to 50), and the
exchange production rate can be configured.
The relay supports one fast EGD exchange and two slow EGD exchanges. There are 20 data items in the fast-produced
EGD exchange and 50 data items in each slow-produced exchange.
EGD cannot be used to transfer data between UR series relays. The relay supports EGD production only. An EGD exchange
is not be transmitted unless the destination address is non-zero, and at least the first data item address is set to a valid
Modbus register address. The default setting value of “0” is considered invalid.
Fast exchanges (50 to 1000 ms) are generally used in control schemes. The C30 has one fast exchange (exchange 1) and
two slow exchanges (exchange 2 and 3).
The settings menu for the fast EGD exchange follows.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  EGD PROTOCOL FAST PROD EXCH 1 CONFIGURATION
 FAST PROD EXCH 1
 CONFIGURATION

EXCH 1 FUNCTION:
Disable
Range: Disable, Enable

EXCH 1 DESTINATION:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address

EXCH 1 DATA RATE:
1000 ms
Range: 50 to 1000 ms in steps of 1

EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1:
0
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1 (Modbus
register address range)

C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-103
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 20:
0
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1 (Modbus
register address range)
The settings menu for the slow EGD exchanges follows.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  EGD PROTOCOL SLOW PROD EXCH 1(2) CONFIGURATION
 SLOW PROD EXCH 1
 CONFIGURATION

EXCH 1 FUNCTION:
Disable
Range: Disable, Enable

EXCH 1 DESTINATION:
0.0.0.0
Range: standard IP address

EXCH 1 DATA RATE:
1000 ms
Range: 50 to 1000 ms in steps of 1

EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1:
0
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1 (Modbus
register address range)


EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 50:
0
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1 (Modbus
register address range)
Slow EGD exchanges (500 to 1000 ms) are generally used for the transfer and display of data items. The settings for the
fast and slow exchanges are as follows.
EXCH 1 DESTINATION — This setting specifies the destination IP address of the produced EGD exchange. This is usually
unicast or broadcast.
EXCH 1 DATA RATE — This setting specifies the rate at which this EGD exchange is transmitted. If the setting is 50 ms, the
5
exchange data is updated and sent once every 50 ms. If the setting is 1000 ms, the exchange data is updated and sent
once per second. EGD exchange 1 has a setting range of 50 to 1000 ms. Exchanges 2 and 3 have a setting range of 500 to
1000 ms.
EXCH 1 DATA ITEM 1 to 20/50 — These settings specify the data items that are part of this EGD exchange. Almost any data
from the C30 memory map can be configured to be included in an EGD exchange. The settings are the starting Modbus
register address for the data item in decimal format. See the Modbus memory map in the UR Series Communications
Guide for the addresses. To convert a hexadecimal address to decimal, add a 3 before it for an actual values address and a
4 before a settings address. For example, hexadecimal actual value 82A0 becomes 382A0, which converts to 230048
decimal.
To select a data item to be part of an exchange, it is only necessary to choose the starting Modbus address of the item.
That is, for items occupying more than one Modbus register (for example, 32 bit integers and floating point values), only the
first Modbus address is required. The EGD exchange configured with these settings contains the data items up to the first
setting that contains a Modbus address with no data, or 0. That is, if the first three settings contain valid Modbus addresses
and the fourth is 0, the produced EGD exchange contains three data items.
5.3.5.17 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-103
 IEC103
 PROTOCOL
5-104

IEC103 COMMON
ADDRESS OF ASDU: 0
Range: 0 to 254 in steps of 1

IEC103 SYNC TIMEOUT:
1
Range: 1 to 1440 min in steps of 1

 IEC103 INPUTS
 BINARY
See below

 IEC103 INPUTS
 MEASURANDS
See below

 IEC103 COMMANDS

See below
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
The C30 is provided with optional IEC 60870-5-103 communications capability, specified as a software option
at the time of ordering.
IEC 60870-5-103 is a companion standard to the IEC 60870-5 suite of standards for transmission protocols. It defines
messages and procedures for interoperability between protection equipment and devices of a control system in a
substation for communicating on a serial line.
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is enabled when the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  PROTOCOL setting
is set to IEC 60870-5-103.
The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication, exchanging
information with a control system. In the context of this protocol, the protection equipment is the slave and the control
system is the master. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must be able to interpret the
IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
The UR implementation of IEC 60870-5-103 consists of the following functions:
•
Report binary inputs
•
Report analog values (measurands)
•
Commands
•
Time synchronization
The RS485 port supports IEC 60870-5-103.
The UR Family Communications Guide contains more information on the protocol.
IEC103 COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU — This setting uniquely defines this C30 on the serial line. Select an ID between 0 and
254. This ID does not need to be in sequential order for all stations that communicate with a controller, but it is
recommended. Note that RS485 only allows a maximum of 32 slave stations on a communication line, so the entire range
of 254 addresses is never exhausted.
IEC103 SYNC TIMEOUT — This setting defines the time that the C30 waits for a synchronization message. The C30
synchronizes its clock using all available sources, with the source synching more frequently overwriting the time of the
other sources. Since the synchronization message received from the IEC 60870-5-103 master is less frequent than IRIG-B,
PTP, or SNTP, its time is overwritten by these three sources, if any of them is active. If the synchronization timeout occurs
and none of IRIG-B, PTP, or SNTP is active, the C30 sets the invalid bit in the time stamp of a time-tagged message.
The settings for the remaining menus are outlined as follows.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-103  IEC103 INPUTS BINARY
 IEC103 INPUTS
 BINARY

 POINT 0

See below

 POINT 1

See below

 POINT 95

See below

POINT 0 FUN
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

POINT 0 INF
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

POINT 0 Input
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

 POINT 0


C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-105
5
PRODUCT SETUP
 POINT 95

CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

POINT 95 FUN
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

POINT 95 INF
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

POINT 95 Input
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
The binary input points are mapped using elements from a list of possible FlexLogic operands. A maximum of 96 binary
inputs (points) can be mapped this way.
The IEC 60870-5-103 point list always starts with point 0 and ends at the first "Off" value. Since the IEC 60870-5-103 point
list must be in a continuous block, any points assigned after the first "Off" point are ignored.
For each defined point, set appropriate values for the Function Type (FUN) and Information Number (INF), which form the
Information Object Identifier field of the ASDU, as defined in IEC 60870-5-103.
The binary input points are sent as Class 1 data. They are sent either as a response to a general interrogation received
from the controller or reported spontaneously. Spontaneous transmission occurs as a response to cyclic Class 2 requests.
If the C30 wants to transmit Class 1 data at that time, it demands access for Class 1 data transmission (ACD=1 in the
control field of the response).
For any change to take effect, restart the relay.
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-103  IEC103 INPUTS MEASURANDS
 IEC103 INPUTS
 MEASURANDS
5

 ASDU 1

See below

 ASDU 1


 ASDU 4


ASDU 1 TYP:
9
Range: 3 or 9

ASDU 1 FUN:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

ASDU 1 INF:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

ASDU 1 SCAN TOUT:
0
Range: 0 to 1000 s in steps of 1

ASDU 1 ANALOG 1
Off
Range: FlexAnalog parameter

ASDU 1 ANALOG 1
FACTOR: 1.000
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 in steps of 0.001

ASDU 1 ANALOG 1
OFFSET: 0
Range: -32768 to 32767 in steps of 1


ASDU 1 ANALOG 9
Off
Range: FlexAnalog parameter

ASDU 1 ANALOG 9
FACTOR: 1.000
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 in steps of 0.001

ASDU 1 ANALOG 9
OFFSET: 0
Range: -32768 to 32767 in steps of 1

5-106
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
 ASDU 4

PRODUCT SETUP

ASDU 4 TYP:
9
Range: 3 or 9

ASDU 4 FUN:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

ASDU 4 INF:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

ASDU 4 SCAN TOUT:
0
Range: 0 to 1000 s in steps of 1

ASDU 4 ANALOG 1
Off
Range: FlexAnalog parameter

ASDU 4 ANALOG 1
FACTOR: 1.000
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 in steps of 0.001

ASDU 4 ANALOG 1
OFFSET: 0
Range: -32768 to 32767 in steps of 1

ASDU 4 ANALOG 9
Off
Range: FlexAnalog parameter

ASDU 4 ANALOG 9
FACTOR: 1.000
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 in steps of 0.001

ASDU 4 ANALOG 9
OFFSET: 0
Range: -32768 to 32767 in steps of 1

The configuration menu allows a maximum of four ASDUs containing measurands.
5
Measurands are sent as a response to Class 2 requests, which are cyclic requests coming from the master.
TYPE IDENTIFICATION (TYP) — The configuration field TYP indicates how many measurands are present in the corresponding
ASDU. Each ASDU can take either 4 or 9 measurands maximum, depending on the type identification (3 respectively 9). For
any change to take effect, restart the relay.
FUNCTION TYPE (FUN) and INFORMATION NUMBER (INF) — These two fields form the Information Object Identifier of the ASDU
as defined in IEC 60870-103. For any change to take effect, restart the relay.
SCAN TIMEOUT (SCAN TOUT) — This is the cyclic period used by the C30 to decide when a measurand ASDU is included in a
response. The measurand is sent as response to a Class 2 request when the corresponding timeout expires. The default
value 0 means 500 ms.
ANALOG # — This field contains the actual measurand to be sent in the response to the master. The measurands can be
mapped using elements from a list of FlexAnalog operands. The measurands sent are voltage, current, power, power
factor, and frequency. If any other FlexAnalog is chosen, the C30 sends 0 instead of its value. Note that the power is
transmitted in KW, not W. Measurands are transmitted as ASDU 3 or ASDU 9 (type identification value set to measurands I,
respectively measurands II).
Each IEC 60870-5-103 measurands list ends at the first unconfigured ("Off") value. Any measurand assigned after the first
"Off" value is ignored.
At least one measurand per ASDU must be configured in order to configure the following ASDU. For example, the user can
configure only one measurand for each ASDU, but the user is not allowed to skip ASDU 2 and configure measurands in
ASDU 3.
For any change to take effect, restart the relay.
ANALOG # FACTOR and OFFSET — For each measurand included in the ASDU, a factor and offset also can be configured. The
factor and offset allow for scaling to be performed on measurands. The final measurement sent to the IEC 60870-103
master is then "a*x + b," where x is the measurand, a is the multiplying factor and b is the offset. The master has to perform
the reversed operation in order to retrieve the actual value if such scaling is done. By default a = 1 and b = 0, so no scaling
is done if these values are left at their defaults. Examples of when scaling is appropriate are as follows:
•
If the measured value contains decimals and it is important to preserve the resolution. Since the format for
transmitting the measurand does not permit decimals, a factor a>1 can be applied before transmission. For example,
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-107
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
a frequency F=59.9Hz can be transmitted as Ft = 10 * F = 10 * 59.9 = 599. In this case a = 10, b = 0. The master receives
599 and has to divide by 10 to retrieve the real value 59.9.
•
If the measured value is larger than what fits in the format defined in IEC 103. The format defined in the standard
allows for signed integers up to 4095. By offsetting, unsigned integers up to 4096 + 4095 = 8191 are supported.
Scaling using factors <1 can be required in such cases. The calculation is outlined in the IEC 60870-5-103 chapter of
the UR Family Communications Guide. Two examples follow, where you decide factors a and b.
Example 1: Nominal power Pn = 100 MW = 100000 KW (power is transmitted in KW)
Since P can be both positive and negative:
Transmitted power Pt = (4095/(Pn*2.4)) * P = (4095/(100000 * 2.4) ) * P
= 0.017 * P
a = 0.017
b=0
Pt = 0.017 * P
For a max power 100000 KW * 2.4 = 240000 KW, we transmit
Pt = 0.017 * 240000 = 4080
A value above 240 MW is indicated by overflow.
Example 2: Nominal voltage Vn = 500000 V
Since RMS voltage V can be only positive:
Transmitted voltage Vt = (8191/(Vn*2.4)) * V - 4096 =
5
= (8191/(500000 * 2.4) ) * V - 4096 = 0.0068 * V - 4096
a = 0.0068
Since the step is in increments of 0.001, we round it at:
a = 0.006
b = -4096
Vt = 0.006 * V - 4096
For max voltage 500000 V * 2.4 = 1200000 V, we transmit
Vt = 0.006 * 1200000 - 4096 = 7200 - 4096 = 3104
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  IEC 60870-5-103  IEC103 COMMANDS
 IEC103 COMMANDS


 COMMAND 0

See below

 COMMAND 1


 COMMAND 31


COMMAND 0 FUN:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

COMMAND 0 INF:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

COMMAND 0 ON:
Off
Range: Virtual input

 COMMAND 0

5-108
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP

COMMAND 0 OFF:
Off
Range: Virtual input

 COMMAND 31


COMMAND 31 FUN:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

COMMAND 31 INF:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1

COMMAND 31 ON:
Off
Range: Virtual input

COMMAND 31 OFF:
Off
Range: Virtual input
Commands are received as General Command (Type Identification 20). The user can configure the action to perform when
an ASDU command comes.
A list of available mappings is provided on the C30. This includes 128 virtual inputs (see the following table). The ON and
OFF for the same ASDU command can be mapped to different virtual inputs.
Each command is identified by the unique combination made by the function type (FUN) and information number (INF). If
the master sends an ASDU command that does not have the FUN and INF of any configured command, the relay rejects it.
Table 5-12: Commands mapping table
Description
Value
Off
0
Virtual Input 1
1
Virtual Input 2
2
...
...
Virtual Input 128
128
5
For any change to take effect, restart the relay.
5.3.5.18 USB port
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  COMMUNICATIONS  USB 2.0
 USB 2.0


USB DEVICE PORT
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
This setting applies to the USB port on the graphical front panel.
This setting enables/disables the USB port on the graphical front panel. When the port function is "Enabled," a standard
USB serial cable allows a computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software to retrieve, display, and write settings either
individually or collectively, to display status and actual values, to initiate controls, and to retrieve and display event records,
oscillography records, data logger records, and disturbance records. Installation of the EnerVista software automatically
installs the drivers required to use this USB port.
DNP is not available using the USB port on the graphical front panel.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-109
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.3.6 Modbus user map
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  MODBUS USER MAP
 MODBUS USER MAP


ADDR 1:
VALUE:
0
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1


ADDR 256:
VALUE:
0
The Modbus user map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. The memory map can be read from the front
panel, the UR Family Communications Guide, or in a web browser. For the web browser, enter the IP address of the C30 and
click a Modbus Memory Map option.
On the front panel, the address to read a specific Modbus register depends on whether the requested value is a setting or
an actual value.
Up to firmware version 7.8x, the settings and actual values are in the same Modbus table. To obtain a memory map value,
enter its address on the front panel.
Starting in firmware version 7.90, the settings have their own Modbus memory table and the actual values are in their own
table. To obtain a memory map value, use the following sequence:
1.
Obtain the hexadecimal Modbus address of the data item. It must have four digits, such as 024A.
2.
Prefix the address by 3 for settings or by 4 for actual values.
3.
Convert the resulting hexadecimal number to decimal.
4.
Enter the resulting number in the first column of the Modbus user map. The corresponding value (if programmed)
displays in second column (VALUE). A value of "0" in subsequent register lines automatically returns values of Modbus
registers having the address of the previous line incremented by 1. These subsequent addresses are all in the same
Modbus table (settings or actual values) as the address that was entered.
5
An address value of "0" in the initial register means "none" and values of "0" display for all registers.
Different address values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.
Here are two examples of how to add a setting or actual value to the front panel Modbus user map.
To add the setting "Phase TOC 1 Pickup" to the Modbus user map:
1.
Find the address of the setting "Phase TOC 1 Pickup," which is 334Eh (334E in hexadecimal format).
2.
Prefix this address by 3 to obtain 3334Eh.
3.
Convert this value to decimal to obtain 209742 and enter it on the front panel.
To add the actual value "SRC 1 Frequency" to the Modbus user map:
1.
Find the address of the actual value "SRC 1 Frequency," which is 1D80h.
2.
Prefix this address by 4 to obtain 41D80h.
3.
Convert this value to decimal to obtain 269696 and enter it on the front panel.
5.3.7 Real-time clock
5.3.7.1 Menu
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK
 REAL TIME
 CLOCK
5-110

SYNCRONIZING SOURCE:
None
Range: None, PP/IRIG-B/PTP/Other, IRIG-B/PP/PTP/
Other, PP/PTP/IRIG-B/Other, PBM Clock

REAL TIME CLOCK
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE:
None
Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP

 PRECISION TIME
 PROTOCOL (1588)
See below

 SNTP PROTOCOL

See below

 LOCAL TIME

See below
The relay contains a real time clock (RTC) to create time stamps for communications protocols as well as for historical data,
such as event records and oscillography. When the relay restarts, the RTC initializes from an onboard battery-backed
clock, which has the same accuracy as an electronic watch, approximately ±1 minute per month (~23 ppm). Once the RTC
is synchronized with the Precision Time Protocol (PTP), IRIG-B, or SNTP, its accuracy approaches that of the synchronizing
time delivered to the relay. While the RTC is not synchronized via PTP or IRIG-B, or the relay determines that it has an offset
possibly greater than 10 µs from the international time standard, the CLOCK UNSYNCHRONIZED FlexLogic operand is
activated.
The SYNCHRONIZING SOURCE setting displays in the software when the relay includes the IEEE 1588 software option. The
setting configures the priority sequence of the time synchronization source, to determine which of the available external
time sources to use for time synchronization. A setting of None causes the RTC and the synchrophasor clock to free-run,
and the clock can be changed from the front panel or from communications protocols. A setting of PP/IRIG-B/PTP/Other,
IRIG-B/PP/PTP/Other, or PP/PTP/IRIG-B/Other causes the relay to track the first source named that is enabled and
operational, or free-run if none of these are available. Here, PP means a time source that is strictly compliant with PP, PTP
means a time source that is not strictly compliant with PP, and Other means any less precise source (SNTP, IEC 103, IEC
104, Modbus, or DNP). When a time source fails or recovers, the relay automatically transfers synchronization as required
by this setting.
The PBM Clock setting causes the relay to use the time source from any non-HardFiber Process Bus Module clock. If the
Process Bus Module PTP FUNCTION setting is enabled and PTP grandmaster is available in the process bus network, the
Process Bus Module clock is synchronized to the PTP grandmaster, else the Process Bus Module clock free-runs. A UR can
use a synchronizing source either from the real-time clock (main CPU) or a Process Bus Module, as outlined in Settings >
Process Bus Module > PBM PTP.
Note that a UR does not need to be time synchronized to accept the sampled values. All the elements (protection, control,
monitoring, logic, and so on) in the UR (except Line Current Differential element) remain fully functional without requiring
any external synchronizing source for the UR, as long as all the sampled values subscribed by the relay are synchronized
according to the Settings > Process Bus Module > General > SmpSynch Check setting and pass the other acceptance
criteria as defined in Settings > Process Bus Module > SV Stream Config > Logic.
Some UR applications like oscillography, event recorder, and datalogger use the real-time clock for time-stamping.
When the relay does not have the IEEE 1588 software option and this setting does not display, it uses IRIG-B when enabled
and operational, then failing that SNTP when configured and operational, and otherwise it free-runs unless the clock is
changed from the front panel or from communications protocols.
Setup for IRIG-B is illustrated in the Installation chapter.
For the Other protocols, whenever a time synchronization message is received through any of the active protocols, the
C30 clock updates. However, given that IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, Modbus, and DNP are low-accuracy time
synchronization methods, avoid their use for synchronization when better accuracy time protocols, such as IRIG-B and
PTP, are active in the system. If IRIG-B or PTP is used to update the relay clock, the other protocols (such as SNTP) are not
allowed to update, even if active.
See the COMMANDS  SET DATE AND TIME menu section of this manual to manually set the RTC.
When 1 ms accuracy is required for events, oscillography, time stamping, synchrophasors, and 87L asymmetry
with respect to the master clock, the PTP clock needs to be connected to the CPU of a relay. The 1 ms accuracy
cannot be maintained if the CPU of the relay is synchronized through the Process Bus Module due to a delay up to
2 ms in transmitting a time stamp from the Process Bus Module to a CPU.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-111
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The REAL TIME CLOCK EVENTS setting allows changes to the date and/or time to be captured in the event record. The event
records the RTC time before the adjustment. A Date/Time Changed event is generated when:
•
The real time clock changed from SNTP/PTP/IRIG-B and the time difference is more than one second
•
The real time clock changed from the front panel or via Modbus register. The relay always generates this event
regardless of the time difference.
•
The Daylight Saving Time (DST) setting gets enabled and the current relay time is already in the DST zone
•
The real time clock enters or leaves DST
To enable IRIG-B synchronization, the input IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE must be set to DC Shift or Amplitude Modulated. IRIG-B
synchronization can be disabled by making this setting None. When IRIG-B is enabled and active, clock synchronization by
communication protocols. (DNP, IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104) is blocked, and clock synchronization from the front
panel and over Modbus is always enabled.
Clocks can be synchronized locally among several relays using the computer time. When using a time source, such as
IRIG-B, the time is overwritten eventually by the time source. To synchronize clocks among UR devices:
1.
In the EnerVista software, expand the main menu in the Online Window area and select the Synchronize Devices
entry. The window opens. The software prompts to acknowledge any offline devices.
2.
Click the Synchronize Devices button at the top of the window, and confirm the action at the prompt. The devices
assume the time of the computer being used.
To configure and enable PTP and/or SNTP, or to set local time parameters (for example time zone, daylight savings), use
the following sections.
5.3.7.2 Precision time protocol (1588)
5
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (1588)
 PRECISION TIME
 PROTOCOL (1588)

STRICT POWER
PROFILE: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

PTP DOMAIN NUMBER:
0
Range: 0 to 255

PTP VLAN PRIORITY:
4
Range: 0 to 7

PTP VLAN ID:
0
Range: 0 to 4095

 PTP PORT 1

See below


 PTP PORT 3

SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  PRECISION TIME PROTOCOL (1588)  PTP PORT 1(3)
 PTP PORT 1


PORT 1 PTP FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

PORT 1 PATH DELAY
ADDER: 0 ns
Range: 0 to 60000 ns in steps of 1

PORT 1 PATH DELAY
ASYMMETRY: 0 ns
Range: –1000 to +1000 ns in steps of 1
The C30 is provided with optional Precision Time Protocol capability. This feature is specified as the IEEE 1588
software option at the time of ordering.
5-112
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
The C30 supports the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) specified in IEEE Std 1588 2008 using the Power Profile (PP) specified in
IEEE Std C37.238 2017. This enables the relay to synchronize to the international time standard over an Ethernet network
that implements PP.
The relay can be configured to operate on some PTP networks that are not strictly PP. Time accuracy can be less than
specified for a PP network. Tolerated deviations from strict PP include 1) missing declaration of PP compliance in the
messages, 2) connection to a network device that does not support the PTP peer delay mechanism, 3) jitter substantially
greater than 1 µs in received event messages, and 4) certain non-compliant announce and sync message update rates.
The relay implements PTP according to IEEE Std 1588 2008 and the equivalent IEC 61588:2009(E), sometimes referred to as
version 2 PTP. It does not support the previous version of the standard (version 1).
PTP is a protocol that allows multiple clocks in a network to synchronize with one another. It permits synchronization
accuracies better than 1 ns, but this requires that each and every component in the network achieve very high levels of
accuracy and a very high baud rate, faster than normally used for relay communications. When operating over a generic
Ethernet network, time error can amount to 1 ms or more. PP is a profile of PTP which specifies a limited subset of PTP
suitable for use in power system protection, control, automation, and data communication applications, and thereby
facilitates interoperability between different vendor’s clocks and switches. PP specifies a worst-case delivered time error of
less than 1 µs over a 16-hop network.
In a PTP system and in a PP system, the clocks automatically organize themselves into a master-slave synchronization
hierarchy with the “best” clock available making itself the "grandmaster" at the top of the hierarchy; all others make
themselves “slaves” and track the grandmaster. Typically the grandmaster clock receives its time from GPS satellites or
some other link to the international time standard. If the grandmaster fails, the next “best” clock available in the domain
assumes the grandmaster role. When a clock on start-up discovers that it is “better” than the present grandmaster, it
assumes the grandmaster role and the previous grandmaster reverts to slave. The C30 qualification mechanism accepts a
potential master clock as a new grandmaster, when in a four-second interval it has received three announce messages
from it, all better than the present grandmaster clock and better than any other announce in this interval.
Time messages issued by the grandmaster are delayed as they pass through the network both due to the finite speed of
the signal in the interconnecting fiber or wire, and due to processing delays in the Ethernet switches. Each clock and switch
implementing PP measures the propagation delay to each of its PP neighbors, and compensates for these delays in the
time received. Each network device implementing PP measures the processing delay it introduces in each time message
and compensates for this delay in the time it transmits. As a result, the time delivered to end-devices such as the UR are
virtually identical to the grandmaster time. If one of the network devices in the hierarchy does not fully implement PP, the
associated propagation delay and/or latency may not be compensated for, and the time received at the end-device can be
in error by more than 100 µs.
See the preceding Real Time Clock section for a description of when time values received via PTP are used to update the
relay’s real time clock.
The following settings are available for configuring the relay for PTP. The PTP menu displays only when the option was
purchased.
STRICT POWER PROFILE — Power profile (IEEE Std C37.238 2017) requires that the relay only select a power profile compliant
clock as a grandmaster, that the delivered time have worst-case error of ±1 µs, and that the peer delay mechanism be
implemented. With the strict power profile setting enabled, the relay only selects as master the clocks displaying the
IEEE_C37_238 identification codes. It uses a port only when the peer delay mechanism is operational. With the strict power
profile setting disabled, the relay uses clocks without the power profile identification when no power profile clocks are
present, and uses ports even if the peer delay mechanism is non-operational. This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP
capable ports.
PTP DOMAIN NUMBER — Set this setting to the domain number of the grandmaster-capable clock(s) to be synchronized to. A
network can support multiple time distribution domains, each distinguished with a unique domain number. More
commonly, there is a single domain using the default domain number zero.
This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP capable ports.
PTP VLAN PRIORITY — This setting selects the value of the priority field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued
by the relay’s peer delay mechanism. In compliance with PP the default VLAN priority is 4, but it is recommended that it be
set to 7 in accordance with PTP. Depending on the characteristics of the device to which the relay is linked directly, VLAN
Priority can have no effect.
This setting applies to all of the relay’s PTP capable ports.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-113
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PTP VLAN ID — This setting selects the value of the ID field in the 802.1Q VLAN tag in request messages issued by the relay’s
peer delay mechanism. It is provided in compliance with PP. As these messages have a destination address that indicates
they are not to be bridged, their VLAN ID serves no function, and so can be left at its default value. Depending on the
characteristics of the device to which the relay is linked directly, VLAN ID can have no effect. This setting applies to all of
the relay’s PTP capable ports.
PORT 1 ... 3 FUNCTION — While this port setting is selected to disabled, PTP is disabled on this port. The relay does not
generate or listen to PTP messages on this port.
PORT 1 ... 3 PATH DELAY ADDER — The time delivered by PTP is advanced by the time value in this setting prior to the time
being used to synchronize the relay’s real time clock. This is to compensate to the extent practical for time delivery delays
not compensated for in the network. In a fully compliant PP network, the peer delay and the processing delay mechanisms
compensate for all the delays between the grandmaster and the relay. In such networks, make this setting zero.
In networks containing one or more switches and/or clocks that do not implement both of these mechanisms, not all
delays are compensated, so the time of message arrival at the relay is later than the time indicated in the message. This
setting can be used to approximately compensate for this delay. However, as the relay is not aware of network switching
that dynamically changes the amount of uncompensated delay, there is no setting that always and completely corrects
for uncompensated delay. A setting can be chosen that reduces the worst-case error to half of the range between
minimum and maximum uncompensated delay, if these values are known.
PORT 1 ... 3 PATH DELAY ASSYMMETRY — This setting corresponds to “delayAsymmetry” in PTP, which is used by the peer delay
mechanism to compensate for any difference in the propagation delay between the two directions of a link. Except in
unusual cases, the two fibers are of essentially identical length and composition, so make this setting zero.
5
In unusual cases where the length of the link is different in different directions, set this setting to the number of
nanoseconds the Ethernet propagation delay to the relay is longer than the mean of path propagation delays to and from
the relay. For instance, if it is known say from the physical length of the fibers and the propagation speed in the fibers that
the delay from the relay to the Ethernet switch it is connected to is 9000 ns and that the delay from the switch to the relay
is 11000 ns, then the mean delay is 10000 ns, and the path delay asymmetry is 11000 - 10000 = +1000 ns.
5.3.7.3 SNTP protocol
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  SNTP PROTOCOL
 SNTP PROTOCOL


SNTP FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

SNTP SERVER1 IP
ADDR: 127.0.0.1
Range: standard IP address format

SNTP SERVER2 IP
ADDR: 127.0.0.1
Range: standard IP address format

SNTP SERVER1 UDP
PORT: 123
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1

SNTP SERVER2 UDP
PORT: 123
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
The C30 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the C30 can obtain clock time over
an Ethernet network. The C30 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from redundant SNTP/NTP servers, usually a
dedicated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. One or two SNTP servers can be used; use of both
servers for redundancy is recommended but not required.
To use SNTP, enable the function and set SNTP SERVER1 IP ADDR and/or SNTP SERVER2 IP ADDR to the SNTP/NTP server IP
addresses. The C30 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP SERVER1 SNTP/NTP server. If SERVER1 is not available/
reachable, the C30 switches to the SNTP SERVER2 to get the time value and vice versa.
Since many time values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the C30 clock is closely
synchronized with the SNTP/NTP server. It can take up to 20 minutes for the C30 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the
server is offline, depending on the number and SNTP server modes. Broadcast mode timeout is 10 minutes and unicast
timeout is 80 seconds (corresponds to three unicast request retries).
SNTP FUNCTION — Enables or disables the SNTP feature on the C30.
5-114
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
SNTP SERVER1 IP ADDR — The C30 uses the SERVER1 address to contact an SNTP/NTP server to obtain time values. When the
SNTP FUNCTION setting is set to enabled or on startup if the setting is enabled, the C30 SNTP client requests SERVER1 for the
time value. If the SERVER1 channel fails or is not reachable, the C30 switches to SERVER2 SNTP/NTP server.
If SERVER1 SNTP server is set to 127.0.0.1, the C30 considers the SERVER1 SNTP server to be unconfigured.
To use SERVER1 SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER1 IP ADDR setting to "0.0.0.0" and SNTP FUNCTION to "Enabled."
The C30 SNTP client then listens to SNTP messages sent to the "all ones" broadcast address for the subnet. The C30 waits
up to 18 minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before switching to the alternate
channel.
SNTP SERVER2 IP ADDR — The C30 uses this address to contact an SNTP/NTP server if SERVER1 channel fails or is not
reachable. If SERVER2 SNTP server is set to 127.0.0.1, the C30 considers the SERVER2 SNTP server to be unconfigured.
To use SERVER2 SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER2 IP ADDR setting to "0.0.0.0" and SNTP FUNCTION to "Enabled."
The C30 SNTP client then listens to SNTP messages sent to the "all ones" broadcast address for the subnet. The C30 waits
up to 18 minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before switching to the alternate
channel.
SNTP SERVER1 UDP PORT — This setting is 123 for normal SNTP operation. If SERVER1 SNTP is not required, close the port by
changing this setting to zero.
SNTP SERVER2 UDP PORT — This setting is 123 for normal SNTP operation. If SERVER2 SNTP is not required, close the port by
changing this setting to zero.
Do not set more than one protocol to the same TCP/UDP port number, as this results in unreliable operation of
those protocols.
If SERVER1 IP ADDR and UDP PORT settings match the SERVER2 IP ADDR and UDP PORT settings, the C30 considers only
the SERVER1 SNTP server as being configured and an SNTP Failure error message generates. The failure message
also displays when both servers are unavailable.
5.3.7.4 Local time
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  REAL TIME CLOCK  LOCAL TIME
 LOCAL TIME


LOCAL TIME OFFSET
FROM UTC: 0.0 hr
Range: –24.0 to 24.0 hr in steps of 0.5

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
TIME: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

DST START MONTH:
January
Range: January to December (all months)

DST START DAY:
Sunday
Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)

DST START DAY
INSTANCE: First
Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last

DST START HOUR:
2:00
Range: 0:00 to 23:00 in steps of one hour

DST STOP MONTH:
January
Range: January to December (all months)

DST STOP DAY:
Sunday
Range: Sunday to Saturday (all days of the week)

DST STOP DAY
INSTANCE: First
Range: First, Second, Third, Fourth, Last

DST STOP HOUR:
2:00
Range: 0:00 to 23:00 in steps of one hour
The C30 maintains two times: local time and Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). Local time can be provided by IRIG-B
signals. UTC time is provided by SNTP servers.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-115
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The real-time clock (RTC) and time stamps reported in historical records and communication protocols can be incorrect if
the Local Time settings are not configured properly.
See the IRIG-B section in the Installation chapter for guidance on these settings when using an IRIG-B source that sets the
IRIG-B control bits according to IEEE Std 1344-1995.
LOCAL TIME OFFSET FROM UTC — Used to specify the local time zone offset from UTC (Greenwich Mean Time) in hours. Time
zones in the eastern hemisphere have positive values; time zones in the western hemisphere have negative values. A value
of zero causes the relay to use UTC for local time. This setting has two uses. When the system RTC is synchronized with a
communications protocol providing only local time or it is free-running, the offset setting is used to calculate UTC from the
local time these provide. When the RTC is synchronized with a communications protocol providing only UTC (such as PTP or
SNTP), the time offset setting is used to determine local time from the UTC provided. PTP
ALTERNATE_TIME_OFFSET_INDICATOR TLVs are not used to calculate local time.
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS TIME and DST — Can be used to allow the relay to follow the DST rules of the local time zone. Note that
when IRIG-B time synchronization is active, the local time in the IRIG-B signal contains any daylight savings time offset and
so the DST settings are ignored. Note that the following items do not include the DST: Time of Day Timer Start Time; Time of
Day Timer Stop Time; Event Recorder Last Cleared Date; Source x Demand VAR Maximum Date; Source x Demand WATT
Maximum Date; Source x Demand VA Maximum Date; Source x Demand Ia Maximum Date; Source x Demand Ib Maximum
Date; Source x Demand Ic Maximum Date; PMU x Last Cleared Date; PMU One-Shot Time; Data Logger Newest Time; Data
Logger Oldest Time; Oscillography Last Cleared Date; Last Settings Change Date; User Programmable Fault Report Cleared
Date; Digital Counter x Frozen Time Stamp; HIZ RMS Capture x Time; and HIZ Capture x Time.
5.3.8 Oscillography
5
5.3.8.1 Menu
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  OSCILLOGRAPHY
 OSCILLOGRAPHY


NUMBER OF RECORDS:
15
Range: 3 to 64 in steps of 1

TRIGGER MODE:
Automatic Overwrite
Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected

TRIGGER POSITION:
50%
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1

TRIGGER SOURCE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

AC INPUT WAVEFORMS:
64 samples/cycle
Range: Off, 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle

 DIGITAL CHANNELS

See below

 ANALOG CHANNELS

See below
Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.
Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic operand. Multiple oscillography records can be
captured simultaneously.
To retrieve an Oscillography record from a relay:
1.
If not yet set up for oscillography, configure settings under Settings > Product Setup > Oscillography in the EnerVista
software.
2.
Access Actual Values > Records > Oscillography in the EnerVista software.
3.
In the window that opens, select the record number. The highest number is the most recent record (Newest Record
Number).
4.
Click the Read button to get the waveform. When available, waveforms are displayed graphically, and otherwise error
messages display.
5-116
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.
PRODUCT SETUP
In the waveform window that opens, you can save the file, for example with the CFG extension.
The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on
other factors, such as sample rate and the number of operational modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage for
oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES 
RECORDS  OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides sample
configurations with corresponding cycles/record. The minimum number of oscillographic records is three.
Table 5-13: Oscillography cycles/record example
Records
CT/VTs
Sample rate
Digital
channels
Analog
channels
Cycles per
record
3
1
32
32
16
2399
3
1
64
32
16
1450
16
1
32
32
16
666
16
1
64
32
16
402
32
1
32
32
16
352
32
1
64
32
16
213
3
2
32
32
16
1516
3
2
64
32
16
851
16
2
32
32
16
421
TRIGGER MODE — A new record automatically overwrites an older record when TRIGGER MODE is set to “Automatic
Overwrite.”
TRIGGER POSITION — Set this to a percentage of the total buffer size (for example, 10%, 50%, 75%, and so on). A trigger
position of 25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data.
TRIGGER SOURCE — Always captured in oscillography and can be any FlexLogic parameter (element state, contact input,
virtual output, and so on). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle.
AC INPUT WAVEFORMS — Determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (that is, current and voltage) are stored.
Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling rate of
the relay, which is always 64 samples per cycle. That is, it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.
When changes are made to the oscillography settings, all existing oscillography records are cleared.
5.3.8.2 Digital channels
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  OSCILLOGRAPHY  DIGITAL CHANNELS
 DIGITAL CHANNELS


DIGITAL CHANNEL 1
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand


DIGITAL CHANNEL 127
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
DIGITAL 1(127) CHANNEL — This setting selects the FlexLogic operand state recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of
each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to “Off” are ignored.
There are 127 channels and one trigger, for a total of 128.
To populate quickly the rows in the Offline Window, use Ctrl C/V to copy/paste, or click then double-click a row to display a
quick selection window.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-117
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-48: Quick selection window
5.3.8.3 Analog channels
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  OSCILLOGRAPHY  ANALOG CHANNELS
 ANALOG CHANNELS


ANALOG CHANNEL 1:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog/actual value parameter
See Appendix A for list


ANALOG CHANNEL 32:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog/actual value parameter
See Appendix A for list
These settings select the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace
depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to “Off” are ignored. The parameters available
in a given relay depend on
5
•
the type of relay,
•
the type and number of CT/VT hardware modules installed, and
•
the type and number of analog input hardware modules installed
A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is presented in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters.
All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows:
<slot_letter><terminal_number>—<I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input>
The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB
designates the IB signal on terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F.
If there are no CT/VT modules and analog input modules, no analog traces appear in the file; only the digital traces appear.
5.3.9 Data logger
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DATA LOGGER
 DATA LOGGER


DATA LOGGER MODE:
Continuous
Range:
Continuous, Trigger

DATA LOGGER TRIGGER:
Off
Range:
FlexLogic operand

DATA LOGGER RATE:
60000 msec
Range:
15 to 3600000 ms in steps of 1

DATA LOGGER CHNL 1:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog/actual value parameter
See Appendix A for list

DATA LOGGER CHNL 16:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog/actual value parameter
See Appendix A for list

DATA LOGGER CONFIG:
0 CHNL x 0.0 DAYS
Range:

5-118
Not applicable - shows computed data only
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a user-defined sampling rate. This recorded data can
be downloaded to EnerVista UR Setup and displayed with parameters on the vertical axis and time on the horizontal axis.
All data is stored in non-volatile memory, so the information is retained when power to the relay is lost.
For a fixed sampling rate, the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger number of
channels for a shorter period. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use. The
following table outlines examples of storage capacities for a system frequency of 60 Hz.
Table 5-14: Data logger storage capacity example
Sampling rate
15 ms
1000 ms
60000 ms
3600000 ms
Channels
Days
Storage capacity
1
0.1
482 s
8
0.1
60 s
9
0.1
54 s
16
0.1
30 s
1
0.3
32729 s
8
0.1
4091 s
9
0.1
3637 s
16
0.1
2046 s
1
22.7
1963710 s
8
2.8
245460 s
9
2.5
218190 s
16
1.4
127230 s
1
1362.1
117822600 s
8
170.2
14727600 s
9
151.3
13091400 s
5
Changing any setting affecting data logger operation clears data in the log.
DATA LOGGER MODE — This setting configures the mode in which the data logger operates. When set to “Continuous,” the
data logger actively records any configured channels at the rate as defined by the DATA LOGGER RATE. The data logger is
idle in this mode when no channels are configured. When set to “Trigger,” the data logger records any configured channels
at the instance of the rising edge of the DATA LOGGER TRIGGER source FlexLogic operand. The data logger ignores all
subsequent triggers and continues to record data until the active record is full. Once the data logger is full, a CLEAR DATA
LOGGER command is required to clear the data logger record before a new record can be started. Performing the CLEAR
DATA LOGGER command also stops the current record and resets the data logger to be ready for the next trigger.
DATA LOGGER TRIGGER — This setting selects the signal used to trigger the start of a new data logger record. Any FlexLogic
operand can be used as the trigger source. This setting only applies when the mode is set to “Trigger.”
DATA LOGGER RATE — This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data is recorded.
DATA LOGGER CHNL 1(16) — This setting selects the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of the data
log. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/VT hardware
modules installed, and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay
automatically prepares the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is shown in
Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters.
DATA LOGGER CONFIG — This display presents the total amount of time that the Data Logger can record the channels not
selected to “Off” without overwriting old data.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-119
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.3.10 User-programmable LEDs
5.3.10.1 Menu - Enhanced and basic front panels
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 LEDS

 LED TEST

See below

 TRIP & ALARM LEDS

See page 5-123

 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 LED 1
See page 5-123

 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 LED 48

5.3.10.2 Menu - Graphical front panel
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 LEDS
5

 LED TEST

See below

 TRIP & ALARM LEDS

See page 5-123

 EVENT CAUSE LED 1

See page 5-124


 EVENT CAUSE LED 9

The LEDs can be customized to illuminate when a selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state. The trip and alarm
LEDs can also be customized in a similar manner. To ensure correct functionality of all LEDs, an LED test feature is also
provided.
5.3.10.3 LED test
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  LED TEST
 LED TEST


LED TEST FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

LED TEST CONTROL:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
When enabled, the LED test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition, such as a userprogrammable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The test covers all
LEDs, including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons.
For the enhanced and basic front panels, the test consists of the following three stages:
1.
All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is “burned.” This stage lasts as
long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of one minute. After one minute, the test ends.
2.
All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for one second, then back off. The test routine starts at
the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures that lead
to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
3.
All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for one second, then back on. The test routine starts at the top
left panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to
more than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
5-120
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
For the graphical front panel, the test consists of the following stages:
1.
All 22 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is "burned." This stage lasts as
long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of one minute. After one minute, the test ends.
2.
All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on with the orange color for one second, then back off.
The test routine starts at the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom for all 14 LEDs. Then the eight pushbutton
LEDs are tested in the same manner. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being
turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
3.
All the LEDs are turned on with the orange color. One LED at a time turns off for one second, then back on. The test
routine starts at the top left panel moving from top to bottom for all 14 LEDs. Then the eight pushbutton LEDs are
tested in the same manner. This test checks for hardware failures that lead to more than one LED being turned off
from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
4.
Additionally, stages 2 and 3 are repeated twice for the five device status LEDs and nine event cause LEDs, one time
with green color on and the other with red color on.
When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and
monitoring features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay
and stores the actual LED states (on or off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting
from relay response during testing. The reset pushbutton does not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress.
A dedicated FlexLogic operand, LED TEST IN PROGRESS, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is initiated,
the LED TEST INITIATED event is stored in the event recorder.
The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and stages 2 and 3 can be
interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the LED TEST CONTROL
setting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is
executed.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-121
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-49: LED test sequence
READY TO TEST
rising edge of the
control input
Start the software image of
the LEDs
Reset the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
operand
Restore the LED states
from the software image
Set the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
operand
control input is on
STAGE 1
(all LEDs on)
time-out
(1 minute)
dropping edge of the
control input
Wait 1 second
STAGE 2
(one LED on at a time)
5
Wait 1 second
STAGE 3
(one LED off at a time)
rising edge of the
control input
rising edge of the
control input
rising edge of the
control input
rising edge
of the control
input
842011A1.CDR
Application example 1
Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is “burned” through user-programmable pushbutton 1. Apply the following
settings.
Configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USERPROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu. (The option does not display when not purchased.)
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.10 s”
Configure the LED test to recognize user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS 
PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  LED TEST menu:
LED TEST FUNCTION: “Enabled”
LED TEST CONTROL: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
The test is initiated when the user-programmable pushbutton 1 is pressed. Keep the pushbutton pressed for as long as the
LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, release the pushbutton. The relay then automatically starts stage 2. At
this point, test can be cancelled by pressing the pushbutton.
Application example 2
Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are “burned” as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This
is to be performed via user-programmable pushbutton 1.
After applying the settings in application example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. When
finished, release the pushbutton so that the relay then automatically starts stage 2. When stage 2 is completed, stage 3
starts automatically. The test can be cancelled at any time by pressing the pushbutton.
5-122
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
5.3.10.4 Trip and alarm LEDs
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  TRIP & ALARMS LEDS
 TRIP & ALARM LEDS


TRIP LED INPUT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

ALARM LED INPUT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
The trip and alarm LEDs are in the first LED column (enhanced and graphical front panels) and on LED panel 1 (basic front
panel). Each LED can be programmed to turn on when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state.
5.3.10.5 User-programmable LED 1(48)
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 LED 1

LED 1 OPERAND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

LED 1 TYPE:
Self-Reset
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
For the enhanced and basic front panels, there are 48 amber LEDs across the relay LED panels. Each of these indicators
can be programmed to illuminate when the selected FlexLogic operand is in the logic 1 state.
For the basic front panel, the LEDs are located as follows:
•
LED Panel 2 — User-programmable LEDs 1 through 24
•
LED Panel 3 — User programmable LEDs 25 through 48
5
For the enhanced front panel, the LEDs are located as follows:
•
LED column 2 — User-programmable LEDs 1 through 12
•
LED column 3 — User-programmable LEDs 13 through 24
•
LED column 4 — User-programmable LEDs 25 through 36
•
LED column 5 — User-programmable LEDs 37 through 48
See the LED Indicators section in chapter 4 for information on the location of these indexed LEDs.
The user-programmable LED settings select the FlexLogic operands that control the LEDs. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is “SelfReset” (the default setting), the LED illumination tracks the state of the selected LED operand. If the LED 1 TYPE setting is
“Latched,” the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the front panel RESET button, from a remote device via a
communications channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.
Table 5-15: Recommended settings for user-programmable LEDs
Setting
Parameter
Setting
Parameter
LED 1 operand
Off
LED 13 operand
Off
LED 2 operand
Off
LED 14 operand
Off
LED 3 operand
Off
LED 15 operand
Off
LED 4 operand
Off
LED 16 operand
Off
LED 5 operand
Off
LED 17 operand
Off
LED 6 operand
Off
LED 18 operand
Off
LED 7 operand
Off
LED 19 operand
Off
LED 8 operand
Off
LED 20 operand
Off
LED 9 operand
Off
LED 21 operand
Off
LED 10 operand
Off
LED 22 operand
Off
LED 11 operand
Off
LED 23 operand
Off
LED 12 operand
Off
LED 24 operand
Off
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-123
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.3.10.6 Event cause LED 1(9)
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS  EVENT CAUSE LED 1(9)
 EVENT CAUSE
 LED 1

LED 1 OPERAND:
LED PICKUP
Range: FlexLogic operand

LED 1 COLOR:
Green
Range: Red, Green, Orange

LED 1 TYPE:
Self-Reset
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
For the graphical front panel, the event cause LED settings select the FlexLogic operands that control the LEDs.
LED 1 TYPE — If set to "Self-Reset," the LED illumination tracks the state of the selected LED operand. If set to "Latched," the
LED, once lit, remains so even the LED operand state already de-asserts, until reset by the front panel RESET button, from a
remote device via a communications channel, or from any programmed operand.
The table outlines default input operand and output operands for each event cause LED.
Table 5-16: Default input and output operand for event cause LEDs
LED
5
Default input operand
Output operand
Default color
Event Cause LED 1
LED PICKUP
EVENT CAUSE LED 1
Green
Event Cause LED 2
LED VOLTAGE
EVENT CAUSE LED 2
Orange
Event Cause LED 3
LED CURRENT
EVENT CAUSE LED 3
Orange
Event Cause LED 4
LED FREQUENCY
EVENT CAUSE LED 4
Orange
Event Cause LED 5
LED OTHER
EVENT CAUSE LED 5
Orange
Event Cause LED 6
LED PHASE A
EVENT CAUSE LED 6
Orange
Event Cause LED 7
LED PHASE B
EVENT CAUSE LED 7
Orange
Event Cause LED 8
LED PHASE C
EVENT CAUSE LED 8
Orange
Event Cause LED 9
LED NEUTRAL/GROUND
EVENT CAUSE LED 9
Orange
5.3.11 User-programmable self-tests
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
 USER-PROGRAMMABLE
 SELF TESTS
5-124

DIRECT RING BREAK
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped
with Direct Input/Output module.

DIRECT DEVICE OFF
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled. Valid for units equipped
with Direct Input/Output module.

RxGOOSE OFF
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

FIRST ETHERNET FAIL
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SEC. ETHERNET FAIL
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

THIRD ETHERNET FAIL
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SFP MODULE FAIL
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

BATTERY FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SNTP FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP

IRIG-B FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

PTP FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic operands, events, and targets.
This settings menu allows enabling and disabling of most minor self-test alarms.
When in the Disabled mode, minor alarms do not assert a FlexLogic operand, write to the event recorder, or display target
messages. Moreover, they do not trigger the ANY MINOR ALARM or ANY SELF-TEST messages. When in Enabled mode,
minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. See the Relay Self-tests section in chapter 7
for information on major and minor self-test alarms.
When using the graphical front panel and setting annunciator alarms, the function needs to be enabled here too, else the
alarm is not triggered.
5.3.12 Control pushbuttons
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS  CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(7)
 CONTROL
 PUSHBUTTON 1

CNTRL PUSHBUTTN 1 ID
CTRL PB 1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
5
This feature is supported with enhanced and basic front panels.
There are three standard control pushbuttons, labeled USER 1, USER 2, and USER 3, on the basic and enhanced front
panels. These are user-programmable and can be used for various applications such as performing an LED test, switching
setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-programmable displays.
The locations of the control pushbuttons are shown in the following figures.
Figure 5-50: Control pushbuttons (enhanced front panel)
Control pushbuttons
842813A1.CDR
An additional four control pushbuttons are included on the basic front panel when the C30 is ordered with the 12 userprogrammable pushbutton option.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-125
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-51: Control pushbuttons (basic front panel)
67$786
(9(17&$86(
,16(59,&(
92/7$*(
7528%/(
&855(17
7(6702'(
)5(48(1&<
75,3
27+(5
$/$50
3+$6($
3,&.83
5(6(7
7+5((
67$1'$5'
&21752/
386+%877216
86(5
3+$6(%
86(5
3+$6(&
1(875$/*5281'
86(5
86(5
)285(;75$
237,21$/
&21752/
386+%877216
86(5
86(5
86(5
($"'##1"34B
Control pushbuttons are not typically used for critical operations and are not protected by the control password. However,
by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable control pushbuttons for security
reasons.
Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic operand. Each operand need to be configured appropriately to perform
the required function. Each operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is pressed and resets when the
pushbutton is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton manipulation is recognized
by various features that can use control pushbuttons as inputs.
An event is logged in the event record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed. No event is logged when
the pushbutton is released. The front panel keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously—a given key
must be released before the next one can be pressed.
Figure 5-52: Control pushbutton logic
6(77,1*
&21752/386+%87721
)81&7,21
(QDEOHG :KHQDSSOLFDEOH
5
^
6(77,1*6
6<67(06(783
!%5($.(56
!%5($.(5
!%5($.(53%&21752/
$1'
581
2II 6<67(06(783
!%5($.(56
!%5($.(5
!%5($.(53%&21752/
2))
7,0(5
21
2II )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
PVHF
&21752/386+%7121
$&'5
5.3.13 User-programmable pushbuttons
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1(48)
 USER PUSHBUTTON 1

5-126

PUSHBUTTON 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled

PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT:
USER PB 1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT:
PUSHBTN 1 ON
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP

PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT:
PUSHBTN 1 OFF
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

PUSHBTN 1 HOLD:
0.1 s
Range: 0.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1

PUSHBTN 1 SET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PUSHBTN 1 RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST
DELAY: 1.0 s
Range: 0.2 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1

PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT
TIME: 0.00 s
Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.05

PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Normal, High Priority

PUSHBUTTON 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
5
This feature is optional, specified at the time of ordering.
a
User-programmable pushbuttons provide an easy and error-free method of entering digital state (on, off) information. The
number depends on the front panel ordered.
•
Enhanced horizontal front panel — 16 user-programmable pushbuttons
•
Enhanced vertical front panel — 6 user-programmable pushbuttons
•
Basic horizontal front panel — 12 user-programmable pushbuttons
•
Graphical front panel — 48 user-programmable pushbuttons (eight physical pushbuttons, 40 graphical interface
pushbuttons)
User-programmable pushbuttons require a front panel with that option. If the front panel was ordered separately,
update the EnerVista software under Maintenance > Change Front Panel.
The digital state can be entered locally (by directly pressing the front panel pushbutton or optional graphical front panel
interface) or remotely (via FlexLogic operands) into FlexLogic equations, protection elements, and control elements. Typical
applications include breaker control, autorecloser blocking, and setting groups changes. For example, set pushbuttons 1 to
5 to select settings groups 1 to 5, or set pushbutton 1 to clear event records. The user-programmable pushbuttons are
under the control level of password protection.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-127
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Example
To clear event records using pushbutton 1, set Settings > Product Setup > Clear Relay Records > Clear Event Records to
FlexLogic operand PUSHBUTTON 1 ON. Then program the pushbutton by setting Settings > Product Setup > UserProgrammable Pushbuttons > Pushbutton 1 Function to "Self-reset." For a graphical front panel, to use a side
pushbutton to clear the event records, it also needs to be programmed in a single-line diagram.
The figures show user-configurable pushbuttons for the front panels.
Figure 5-53: User-programmable pushbuttons (enhanced front panel)
USER
LABEL 1
USER
LABEL 2
USER
LABEL 3
USER
LABEL 4
USER
LABEL 5
USER
LABEL 6
USER
LABEL 7
USER
LABEL 8
USER
LABEL 9
USER
LABEL 10
USER
LABEL 11
USER
LABEL 12
USER
LABEL 13
USER
LABEL 14
USER
LABEL 15
USER
LABEL 16
842814A1.CDR
Figure 5-54: User-programmable pushbuttons (basic front panel)
1
3
5
7
9
11
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
2
4
6
8
10
12
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
5
842779A1.cdr
Figure 5-55: User-programmable pushbuttons (graphical front panel)
3URJUDPDQ\EXWWRQVIRUSXVKEXWWRQVWR
5(6(7
3XVKEXWWRQVWR
(6&
(17(5
=e\dY\Y^>& >Udg_b[CdQRY\YdiQ^TCi^SXb_`XQc_b=UQcebU]U^dCicdU]
$&'5
Front panel pushbuttons and LEDs can be custom labeled as outlined in the Front Panel Labeling section in the previous
chapter.
Each pushbutton asserts its own “On” and “Off” FlexLogic operands (for example, PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF).
These operands are available for each pushbutton and are used to program specific actions. If any pushbutton is active,
the ANY PB ON operand is asserted.
Each pushbutton has an associated LED indicator. By default, this indicator displays the present status of the
corresponding pushbutton (on or off). However, each LED indicator can be assigned to any FlexLogic operand through the
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL setting.
5-128
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
The activation and deactivation of user-programmable pushbuttons depends on whether latched or self-reset mode is
programmed.
•
Latched mode — In latched mode, a pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting the operand assigned to the
PUSHBTN 1 SET setting, by directly pressing the associated front panel pushbutton, or with the graphical front panel
interface. The state of each pushbutton is stored in non-volatile memory and maintained through a loss of control
power.
The pushbutton is reset (deactivated) in latched mode by asserting the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 RESET
setting, by directly pressing the active front panel pushbutton, or with the graphical front panel interface.
It can also be programmed to reset automatically through the PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST and PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY
settings. These settings enable the autoreset timer and specify the associated time delay. The autoreset timer can be
used in select-before-operate (SBO) breaker control applications, where the command type (close/open) or breaker
location (feeder number) must be selected prior to command execution. The selection must reset automatically if
control is not executed within a specified time period.
•
Self-reset mode — In self-reset mode, a user-programmable pushbutton can be set (activated) by asserting the
operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET setting, by pressing the front panel pushbutton, or by the graphical front panel
interface. A pushbutton remains active for the time it is pressed physically or pressed in the graphical front panel
interface, plus the dropout time specified in the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME setting. If the pushbutton is activated via
FlexLogic, the pulse duration is specified by the PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME only. The time the operand assigned to the
PUSHBTN 1 SET setting remains On has no effect on the pulse duration.
The pulse duration of the remote set or local front panel pushbutton must be at least 56 ms for a 60 Hz system or
60 ms for a 50 Hz system to operate the pushbutton. This allows the user-programmable pushbuttons to properly
operate during power cycling events and various system disturbances that can cause transient assertion of the
operating signals.
The local and remote operation of each user-programmable pushbutton can be inhibited through the PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL
and PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE settings. If local inhibit is applied, the pushbutton ignores set and reset commands executed
through the front panel pushbuttons. If remote inhibit is applied, the pushbutton ignores set and reset commands
executed through FlexLogic operands.
The inhibit functions are not applied to the autoreset feature. The inhibit function can be used in SBO control operations to
prevent user-programmable pushbutton activation and ensuring “one-at-a-time” select operation.
The inhibit functions can also be used to prevent pushbutton activation from the accidental pressing of the front panel
pushbuttons. The separate inhibit of the local and remote operation simplifies the implementation of local/remote control
supervision.
Pushbutton states can be logged by the event recorder. User-defined messages can also be associated with each
pushbutton and displayed on basic and enhanced front panels when the user-programmable pushbutton is activated, and
when in the latched mode when the user-programmable pushbutton is deactivated. With the graphical front panel
interface, instead of messages, the status of user-programmable pushbuttons can display on a single-line diagram and
can also display in annunciator page windows and in actual values page cells.
For the graphical front panel, the pushbuttons 1 to 8 are linked to the eight physical pushbuttons, and pushbuttons 9 and
above are mapped to the graphical interface pushbuttons. To set the buttons for pushbuttons 9 and above, access
Settings > Product Setup > Graphical Panel > Single Line Diagram Editor, click the PB symbol in the toolbox, then
configure pushbuttons 9 and above.
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION — This setting selects the mode of the pushbutton (Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled). If set to
“Disabled,” the pushbutton is not active and the corresponding FlexLogic operands (both “On” and “Off”) are de-asserted. If
set to "Latched," the pushbutton remains on until reset.
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT — This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable pushbutton message and is
intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. For example, the text displays in the Event Record. See the Userdefinable Displays section in this chapter for instructions on how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad. On a
graphical front panel, this setting instead controls the label of the user-programmable pushbutton component on singleline diagrams.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-129
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT — This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable pushbutton message
and is displayed when the pushbutton is in the “on” position. See the User-definable Displays section for instructions on
entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad. On a graphical front panel, this setting instead controls the on status
text of the user-programmable pushbutton component on single-line diagrams. This setting is not applied to the physical
pushbuttons on the graphical front panel.
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT — This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable pushbutton message
and displays when the pushbutton is deactivated and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is “Latched.” A message does not
display when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is “Self-reset” as the pushbutton operand status is implied to be “Off” upon its
release. The length of the “Off” message is configured with the PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES  FLASH MESSAGE
TIME setting. On a graphical front panel, this setting instead controls the off status text of the user-programmable
pushbutton component on single-line diagrams. This setting is not applied to the physical pushbuttons on the graphical
front panel.
PUSHBTN 1 HOLD — This setting specifies the time required for a front panel pushbutton to be pressed before it is deemed
active. This timer is reset upon release of the pushbutton. Note that user-programmable pushbutton operation requires the
front panel pushbutton to be pressed a minimum of 56 ms for a 60 Hz system or 60 ms for a 50 Hz system. This minimum
time is required prior to activating the user-programmable pushbutton hold timer.
PUSHBTN 1 SET — This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to activate the user-programmable pushbutton
element. The duration of the incoming set signal must be at least 56 ms for a 60 Hz system or 60 ms for a 50 Hz system.
PUSHBTN 1 RESET — This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to deactivate the user-programmable pushbutton
element. This setting is applicable only if the user-programmable pushbutton is in "Latched" mode.
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST — This setting enables the user-programmable pushbutton autoreset feature. This setting is applicable
only if the pushbutton is in “Latched” mode.
5
PUSHBTN 1 AUTORST DELAY — This setting specifies the time delay for automatic reset of the pushbutton when in "Latched"
mode.
PUSHBTN 1 REMOTE — This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit user-programmable pushbutton
operation from the operand assigned to the PUSHBTN 1 SET or PUSHBTN 1 RESET settings.
PUSHBTN 1 LOCAL — This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to inhibit user-programmable pushbutton operation
from the front panel pushbuttons. This inhibit functionality is not applicable to pushbutton autoreset.
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME — This setting applies only to “Self-Reset” mode and specifies the duration of the userprogrammable pushbutton active status after the front panel pushbutton or graphical front panel interface pushbutton
has been released. When activated remotely, this setting specifies the entire activation time of the pushbutton; the length
of time the operand selected by PUSHBTN 1 SET remains on has no effect on the pulse duration.
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL — This setting assigns the FlexLogic operand serving to drive the front panel pushbutton LED. If this
setting is “Off,” then LED operation is directly linked to the PUSHBUTTON 1 ON operand. This setting is not applied to
Pushbuttons 9 and above on the graphical front panel, where the label background shows the orange glow color for the
"on" state.
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE — This setting controls the behavior of the user-programmable pushbutton on message that is
programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT settings, and the behavior of the user-programmable pushbutton
off message that is programmed in the PUSHBTN 1 ID and PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT settings. This settings has no effect on the
graphical front panel.
When set to "Disabled," user-programmable pushbutton messages do not display. Otherwise the on message displays
when the user-programmable pushbutton becomes activated, and if in the "Latched" mode the off message displays
when the user-programmable pushbutton becomes deactivated.
When set to "Normal," the duration the message displays is as specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.
When set to "High Priority," the duration of the off message is as specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting, but the on
message is displayed as long as the user-programmable pushbutton is activated. While activated, target and other
messages are suppressed. To allow front panel keypad operation, when a keypad button is pressed the message is
suppressed for 10 seconds.
PUSHBUTTON 1 EVENTS — If this setting is enabled, each user-programmable pushbutton state change is logged as an event
into the event recorder.
5-130
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
The figures show the user-programmable pushbutton logic.
Figure 5-56: User-programmable pushbutton logic (Sheet 1 of 2)
6(77,1*
386+%87721)81&7,21
(QDEOHG
/DWFKHG
/$7&+('
6HOI5HVHW
)URPIURQWSDQHO
25
6(77,1*
386+%71/2&$/
7RXVHUSURJUDPPDEOH
SXVKEXWWRQVORJLF
VKHHW
6(77,1*
386+%71+2/'
2II 73.3
)URPIURQWSDQHO
$1'
25
$1'
7,0(5
PV
)URPJUDSKLFDOIURQWSDQHO
6(77,1*
386+%716(7
25
PV +]
7,0(5
PV
2II 6(77,1*
386+%715(027(
1RQYRODWLOHODWFK
6
$1'
$1'
2II /DWFK
PV +]
7,0(5
PV
6(77,1*
386+%877212))
5
6(77,1*
386+%715(6(7
$1'
2II 25
6(77,1*
386+%71$872567
(QDEOHG
'LVDEOHG
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
386+%8772121
25
6(77,1*
386+%71$872567'(/$<
386+%8772121
7RXVHUSURJUDPPDEOH
SXVKEXWWRQVORJLF
VKHHW
73.3
$1'
$1'
7,0(5
PV
25
6(77,1*
386+%71'5232877,0(
$1'
25
$1'
7567
$&'5
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-131
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-57: User-programmable pushbutton logic (Sheet 2 of 2)
OFF MESSAGE
ENGAGE MESSAGE
SETTING
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
LATCHED
SETTINGS
PUSHBTN ID TEXT
= XXXXXXXXXX
PUSHBTN OFF TEXT
= XXXXXXXXXX
0
AND
OR
TRST
Instantaneous
reset *
From user-programmable
pushbuttons logic sheet 1
LATCHED/SELF-RESET
Enhanced and standard front panels
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON ON
ON MESSAGE
SETTING
PUSHBTN 1 MESSAGE
= Disabled
= High Priority
ENGAGE MESSAGE
AND
SETTINGS
PUSHBTN ID TEXT
= XXXXXXXXXX
PUSHBTN ON TEXT
= XXXXXXXXXX
= Normal
OR
SETTING
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
0
Enhanced and standard front panels
AND
5
TRST
Instantaneous
reset *
Instantaneous reset is executed if any
front panel button is pressed or any new
target or message becomes active.
The message is temporarily removed if
any keypad button is pressed. Ten
seconds of keypad inactivity restores
the message.
PUSHBUTTON 1 LED LOGIC
1. If pushbutton 1 LED control is set to off.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON 2 ON
PUSHBUTTON 3 ON
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
ANY PB ON
2. If pushbutton 1 LED control is not set to off.
SETTING
PUSHBTN 1 LED CTL
= any FlexLogic operand
PUSHBUTTON 16 ON
Pushbutton 1
LED
Pushbutton 1
LED
The enhanced front panel has 16 operands;
the standard front panel has 12
842239A1.CDR
5.3.14 Flex state parameters
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
 FLEX STATE
 PARAMETERS

PARAMETER 1:
Off

PARAMETER 256:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

Range: FlexLogic operand
This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic operand states can be used for efficient
monitoring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic operand states in the relay. The state bits are
packed so that 16 states are readable in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all states of
interest are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.
The state bits can be read out in the “Flex States” register array beginning at Modbus address 0900h. Sixteen states are
packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. Sixteen registers accommodate the 256
state bits.
5-132
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
5.3.15 User-definable displays
5.3.15.1 Menu
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
 USER-DEFINABLE
 DISPLAYS

INVOKE AND SCROLL:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

 USER DISPLAY 1

See below


 USER DISPLAY 16

This feature is supported with enhanced and basic front panels.
This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient
viewing sequence in the USER DISPLAY menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus). The sub-menus
facilitate text entry and Modbus register data pointer options for defining the user display content.
This feature is not supported with the optional graphical front panel.
Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways.
•
Keypad — Use the MENU key to select the USER DISPLAY menu item to access the first user-definable display (note that
only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the up and down arrow keys. The
display disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP  DISPLAY PROPERTIES
 DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting.
•
User-programmable control input — The user-definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL setting. Any
FlexLogic operand (in particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navigate the
programmed displays.
On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by
showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand
acts exactly as the down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the
first one. The INVOKE AND SCROLL input and the down arrow key operate concurrently.
When the default timer expires (set by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting), the relay starts to cycle through the user
displays. The next activity of the INVOKE AND SCROLL input stops the cycling at the currently displayed user display, not
at the first user-defined display. The INVOKE AND SCROLL pulses must last for at least 250 ms to take effect.
5.3.15.2 User display 1(16)
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS  USER DISPLAY 1(16)
 USER DISPLAY 1


DISP 1 TOP LINE:
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

DISP 1 ITEM 1:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1


DISP 1 ITEM 5:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available user display by selecting the existing display
and pressing the ENTER key. The display then prompts with ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST? After selecting “Yes,” a message
indicates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus
are automatically configured with the proper content—this content can be edited subsequently.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-133
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
This menu is used to enter user-defined text and user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular user
display. Each user display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The tilde (~) character is used to mark the
start of a data field – the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to five separate data fields can be entered
in a user display – the nth tilde (~) refers to the nth item.
A user display can be entered from the front panel keypad or the EnerVista interface (preferred for convenience). The
following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the front panel keypad. Press the
HELP key at any time for context sensitive help information.
1.
Select the line to be edited.
2.
Press the decimal key to enter text edit mode.
3.
Use either VALUE key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character.
4.
Press the decimal key to advance the cursor to the next position.
5.
Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed.
6.
Press the ENTER key to store the new settings.
To enter a numerical value for any of the five items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the front panel
keypad, use the number keypad. Use the value of “0” for any items not being used. Use the HELP key at any selected
system display (setting, actual value, or command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the
Modbus address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (EnerVista usage conveniently facilitates this
conversion). See the Modbus Memory Map section earlier in this chapter for information on how to calculate the decimal
value to enter on the front panel.
Use the MENU key to go to the user displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays show in
sequence, changing every four seconds. While viewing a user display, press the ENTER key and then select the ‘Yes” option
to remove the display from the user display list. Use the MENU key again to exit the user displays menu.
5
An example of user display setup and result is shown as follows.
 USER DISPLAY 1

USER DISPLAYS

DISP 1 TOP LINE:
Current X ~ A
Shows user-defined text with first tilde marker

DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:
Current Y ~ A
Shows user-defined text with second tilde marker

DISP 1 ITEM 1:
6016
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus register
address, corresponding to first tilde marker

DISP 1 ITEM 2:
6357
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus register
address, corresponding to second tilde marker

DISP 1 ITEM 3:
0
This item is not being used. There is no corresponding
tilde marker in top or bottom lines.

DISP 1 ITEM 4:
0
This item is not being used. There is no corresponding
tilde marker in top or bottom lines.

DISP 1 ITEM 5:
0
This item is not being used. There is no corresponding
tilde marker in top or bottom lines.

Current X 0.850
Current Y 0.327 A
Shows the resultant display content
If the parameters for the top line and the bottom line items have the same units, then the unit is displayed on the bottom
line only. The units are only displayed on both lines if the units specified both the top and bottom line items are different.
5-134
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
5.3.16 Direct inputs and outputs
5.3.16.1 Menu
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O
 DIRECT I/O


DIRECT OUTPUTS
DEVICE ID: 1
Range: 1 to 16 in steps of 1

DIRECT I/O CH1 RING
CONFIGURATION: Yes
Range: Yes, No

DIRECT I/O CH2 RING
CONFIGURATION: Yes
Range: Yes, No

DIRECT I/O DATA
RATE: 64 kbps
Range: 64 kbps, 128 kbps

DIRECT I/O CHANNEL
CROSSOVER: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

 CRC ALARM CH1

See page 5-140

 CRC ALARM CH2


 UNRETURNED
 MESSAGES ALARM CH1

 UNRETURNED
 MESSAGES ALARM CH2
See page 5-141
5
This option is available when an Inter-Relay Communications card is specified at the time of ordering. With the
option, direct inputs/outputs display by default. When you enable the teleprotection feature, direct I/O is not
visible.
Direct inputs and outputs exchange status information (inputs and outputs) between UR-series relays connected directly
via type 7 digital communications cards. The mechanism is very similar to IEC 61850 GOOSE, except that communications
takes place over a non-switchable isolated network and is optimized for speed. On type 7 cards that support two channels,
direct output messages are sent from both channels simultaneously. This effectively sends direct output messages both
ways around a ring configuration. On type 7 cards that support one channel, direct output messages are sent only in one
direction. Messages are resent (forwarded) when it is determined that the message did not originate at the receiver.
Direct Inputs and Outputs are initiated automatically and start running once at least one Direct Output in the given UR is
set to anything but Off.
For the direct I/Os to function properly, all UR devices sending I/Os using an Inter-Relay Communications card must have
identical firmware revisions.
Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive. As such, they cannot be used
simultaneously. Once teleprotection inputs and outputs are enabled, direct inputs and outputs are disabled, and
vice versa.
Direct output message timing is similar to GOOSE message timing. Integrity messages (with no state changes) are sent at
least every 1000 ms. Messages with state changes are sent within the main pass scanning the inputs and asserting the
outputs unless the communication channel bandwidth has been exceeded. Two self-tests are performed and signaled by
the following FlexLogic operands:
•
DIRECT RING BREAK (direct input/output ring break) — Indicates that direct output messages sent from a UR-series relay
are not being received back by the relay
•
DIRECT DEVICE 1 OFF to DIRECT DEVICE 16 OFF (direct device offline) — Indicate that direct output messages from at least
one direct device are not being received
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-135
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Direct input and output settings are similar to remote input and output settings. The equivalent of the remote device name
strings for direct inputs and outputs is the DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID setting, which identifies the relay in all direct output
messages. All UR-series IEDs in a ring need to have unique numbers assigned. The IED ID is used to identify the sender of
the direct input and output message.
If the direct input and output scheme is configured to operate in a ring (DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION or DIRECT I/O
CH2 RING CONFIGURATION is “Yes”), all direct output messages are received back. If not, the direct input/output ring break
self-test is triggered. The self-test error is signaled by the DIRECT RING BREAK FlexLogic operand.
Select the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE to match the data capabilities of the communications channel. All IEDs communicating
over direct inputs and outputs must be set to the same data rate. UR-series IEDs equipped with dual-channel
communications cards apply the same data rate to both channels. Delivery time for direct input and output messages is
approximately 0.2 of a power system cycle at 128 kbps and 0.4 of a power system cycle at 64 kbps, per each "bridge."
Table 5-17: Direct input and output data rates
5
Module
Supported data rates
2A, 2B
64 kbps
2E, 2F (legacy modules)
64 kbps
2G, 2H
128 kbps
2I, 2J
64 kbps, 128 kbps
72, 73
64 kbps, 128 kbps
74, 75
64 kbps
76, 77
64 kbps
7A, 7B, 7C, 7D
64 kbps, 128 kbps
7E, 7F, 7G
64 kbps
7H, 7I, 7J, 7K
64 kbps, 128 kbps
7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, 7Q
64 kbps
7R, 7S
64 kbps
7T, 7W
64 kbps
The G.703 modules are fixed at 64 kbps. The DIRECT I/O DATA RATE setting is not applicable to these modules.
The DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting applies to a C30 with dual-channel communication cards and allows crossing
over messages from channel 1 to channel 2. This places all UR-series IEDs into one direct input and output network
regardless of the physical media of the two communication channels.
The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for direct input and output configuration. See the Inputs
and Outputs section in this chapter for information on configuring FlexLogic operands (flags, bits) to be exchanged.
Example 1: Extending the input/output capabilities of a UR-series relay
Consider an application that requires additional quantities of contact inputs or output contacts or lines of programmable
logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED,
such as the C30, to satisfy the additional input and output and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are
connected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure.
5-136
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-58: Input and output extension via direct inputs and outputs
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
842711A1.CDR
In this application, apply the following settings. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: “128 kbps”
For UR-series IED 2:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: “128 kbps”
The message delivery time is about 0.2 of power cycle in both ways (at 128 kbps); that is, from device 1 to device 2, and
from device 2 to device 1. Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back-to-back connection
(for example: fiber, G.703, or RS422).
Example 2: Interlocking busbar protection
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme could be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3, and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown.
Figure 5-59: Sample interlocking busbar protection scheme
85,('
85,('
%/2&.
85,('
85,('
($"'!"1!34B
For increased reliability, a dual-ring configuration (shown as follows) is recommended for this application.
Figure 5-60: Interlocking bus protection scheme via direct inputs/outputs
7;
5;
85,('
5;
5;
7;
7;
5;
85,('
7;
7;
85,('
5;
7;
7;
5;
5;
85,('
5;
7;
($"'!&1!34B
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-137
5
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
In this application, apply the following settings. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series IED 2:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “3”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series IED 4:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “4”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
Message delivery time is approximately 0.2 of power system cycle (at 128 kbps) times number of ‘bridges’ between the
origin and destination. Dual-ring configuration effectively reduces the maximum ‘communications distance’ by a factor of
two.
5
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both rings are healthy:
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle
IED 1 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle
IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle
If one ring is broken (say TX2-RX2) the delivery times are as follows:
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle
IED 1 to IED 4: 0.6 of power system cycle
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle
IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle
A coordinating timer for this bus protection scheme could be selected to cover the worst case scenario (0.4 of a power
system cycle). Upon detecting a broken ring, the coordination time is adaptively increased to 0.6 of a power system cycle.
The complete application requires addressing a number of issues, such as failure of both the communications rings, failure
or out-of-service conditions of one of the relays, and so on. Self-monitoring flags of the direct inputs and outputs feature
primarily are used to address these concerns.
Example 3: Pilot-aided schemes
Consider the three-terminal line protection application shown.
5-138
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Figure 5-61: Three-terminal line application
85,('
85,('
85,('
($"'!#1!34B
A permissive pilot-aided scheme can be implemented in a two-ring configuration, shown as follows (IEDs 1 and 2
constitute a first ring, while IEDs 2 and 3 constitute a second ring).
Figure 5-62: Single-channel open loop configuration
7;
5;
85,('
5;
85,('
5;
7;
7;
5
5;
85,('
7;
($"'!$1!34B
In this application, apply the following settings. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series IED 2:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “3”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps):
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 1 to IED 3: 0.5 of power system cycle
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
In this scheme, IEDs 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. IED 2 must be configured to forward the messages as explained
in the Inputs and Outputs section. Implement a blocking pilot-aided scheme with more security and, ideally, faster
message delivery time. This is accomplished using a dual-ring configuration as shown here.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-139
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-63: Dual-channel closed loop (dual-ring) configuration
7;
7;
5;
85,('
5;
5;
85,('
5;
7;
7;
7;
5;
85,('
5;
7;
($"'!%1!34B
In this application, apply the following settings. For UR-series IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
For UR-series IED 2:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
5
For UR-series IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “3”
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING CONFIGURATION: “Yes”
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both the rings are healthy:
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 1 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
The two communications configurations can be applied to both permissive and blocking schemes. Take speed, reliability,
and cost into account when selecting the required architecture.
5.3.16.2 CRC alarm CH1(2)
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O  CRC ALARM CH1(2)
 CRC ALARM CH1


CRC ALARM CH1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

CRC ALARM CH1
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1

CRC ALARM CH1
THRESHOLD: 10
Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1

CRC ALARM CH1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
The C30 checks integrity of the incoming direct input and output messages using a 32-bit CRC. The CRC alarm function is
available for monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check. The
monitoring function counts all incoming messages, including messages that failed the CRC check. A separate counter
adds up messages that failed the CRC check. When the failed CRC counter reaches the user-defined level specified by the
CRC ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting within the user-defined message count CRC ALARM 1 CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 CRC
ALARM FlexLogic operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT
setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
5-140
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Configure the operand to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based output.
Latching and acknowledging conditions—if required—are programmed accordingly.
The CRC alarm function is available on a per-channel basis. The total number of direct input and output messages that
failed the CRC check is available as the ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT INPUTS  CRC FAIL COUNT CH1 actual value.
•
Message count and length of the monitoring window — To monitor communications integrity, the relay sends 1
message per second (at 64 kbps) or 2 messages per second (at 128 kbps) even if there is no change in the direct
outputs. For example, setting the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT to “10000,” corresponds a time window of about 160
minutes at 64 kbps and 80 minutes at 128 kbps. If the messages are sent faster as a result of direct outputs activity,
the monitoring time interval shortens. Take this into account when determining the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT
setting. For example, if the requirement is a maximum monitoring time interval of 10 minutes at 64 kbps, then the CRC
ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT is set to 10  60  1 = 600.
•
Correlation of failed CRC and bit error rate (BER) — The CRC check can fail if one or more bits in a packet are
corrupted. Therefore, an exact correlation between the CRC fail rate and the BER is not possible. Under certain
assumptions an approximation can be made as follows. A direct input and output packet containing 20 bytes results
in 160 bits of data being sent and therefore, a transmission of 63 packets is equivalent to 10,000 bits. A BER of 10–4
implies 1 bit error for every 10000 bits sent or received. Assuming the best case of only 1 bit error in a failed packet,
having 1 failed packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 10–4.
5.3.16.3 Unreturned messages alarm CH1(2)
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  DIRECT I/O  UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)
 UNRETURNED
 MESSAGES ALARM CH1

UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1

UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
THRESHOLD: 10
Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1

UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
5
The C30 checks integrity of the direct input and output communication ring by counting unreturned messages. In the ring
configuration, all messages originating at a given device should return within a pre-defined period of time. The unreturned
messages alarm function is available for monitoring the integrity of the communication ring by tracking the rate of
unreturned messages. This function counts all the outgoing messages and a separate counter adds the messages have
failed to return. When the unreturned messages counter reaches the user-definable level specified by the UNRET MSGS
ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting and within the user-defined message count UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1
UNRET ALM FlexLogic operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE
COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
Configure the operand to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based output.
Latching and acknowledging conditions, if required, are programmed accordingly.
The unreturned messages alarm function is available on a per-channel basis and is active only in the ring configuration.
The total number of unreturned input and output messages is available as the ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT INPUTS
 UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1 actual value.
5.3.17 Teleprotection
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  TELEPROTECTION
 TELEPROTECTION


TELEPROTECTION
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

NUMBER OF TERMINALS:
2
Range: 2, 3
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-141
PRODUCT SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

NUMBER OF COMM
CHANNELS: 1
Range: 1, 2

LOCAL RELAY ID
NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to 63 in steps of 1

TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID
NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to 63 in steps of 1

TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID
NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to 63 in steps of 1
This option is available when an Inter-Relay Communications card is specified at the time of ordering. With the
option, direct inputs/outputs display by default. When you enable the teleprotection feature, direct I/O is not
visible.
Digital teleprotection transfers protection commands between two or three relays in a secure, fast, dependable, and
deterministic way. Possible applications are permissive or blocking pilot schemes and direct transfer trip (DTT).
Teleprotection can be applied over any analog or digital channels and any communications media, such as direct fiber,
copper wires, optical networks, or microwave radio links. A mixture of communication media is possible.
Once teleprotection is enabled and the teleprotection input/outputs are configured, data packets are transmitted
continuously every 1/4 cycle (3/8 cycle if using C37.94 modules) from peer-to-peer. Security of communication channel
data is achieved by using CRC-32 on the data packet.
5
Teleprotection inputs/outputs and direct inputs/outputs are mutually exclusive. As such, they cannot be used
simultaneously. Once teleprotection inputs and outputs are enabled, direct inputs and outputs are blocked, and
vice versa.
NUMBER OF TERMINALS — Specifies whether the teleprotection system operates between two peers or three peers.
NUMBER OF CHANNELS — Specifies how many channels are used. If the NUMBER OF TERMINALS is “3” (three-terminal system),
set the NUMBER OF CHANNELS to “2.” For a two-terminal system, the NUMBER OF CHANNELS can set to “1” or “2” (redundant
channels).
LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER, TERMINAL 1 RELAY ID NUMBER, and TERMINAL 2 RELAY ID NUMBER — In installations that use
multiplexers or modems, it is desirable to ensure that the data used by the relays protecting a given line is from the correct
relays. The teleprotection function performs this check by reading the message ID sent by transmitting relays and
comparing it to the programmed ID in the receiving relay. This check is also used to block inputs if inadvertently set to
loopback mode or data is being received from a wrong relay by checking the ID on a received channel. If an incorrect ID is
found on a channel during normal operation, the TELEPROT CH1 ID FAIL or TELEPROT CH2 ID FAIL FlexLogic operand is set,
driving the event with the same name and blocking the teleprotection inputs. For commissioning purposes, the result of
channel identification is also shown in the STATUS  CHANNEL TESTS  VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION actual
value. The default value of “0” for the LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER indicates that relay ID is not to be checked. On two- terminals
two-channel systems, the same LOCAL RELAY ID NUMBER is transmitted over both channels; as such, only the TERMINAL 1 ID
NUMBER has to be programmed on the receiving end.
5.3.18 Installation
SETTINGS  PRODUCT SETUP  INSTALLATION
 INSTALLATION


RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
Range: Not Programmed, Programmed

RELAY NAME:
Relay-1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
RELAY SETTINGS — To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit does not allow
signaling of any output relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed." This setting is "Not Programmed" by default. The
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message displays until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state.
RELAY NAME — This setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name appears on generated reports.
5-142
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
REMOTE RESOURCES
5.4 Remote resources
5.4.1 Remote resources configuration
When the C30 is ordered with a process card module as a part of HardFiber system, an additional Remote Resources
menu tree is available in the EnerVista software to allow configuration of the HardFiber system.
Figure 5-64: Remote Resources configuration menu
5
The remote resources settings configure a C30 with a Process Bus Module to work with HardFiber Bricks. Remote
resources configuration is only available through the EnerVista software, and is not available through the C30 front panel.
A Brick provides eight AC measurements, along with contact inputs, DC analog inputs, and contact outputs, to be the
remote interface to field equipment such as circuit breakers and transformers. The C30 with a Process Bus Module has
access to all of the capabilities of up to eight Bricks. Remote resources settings configure the point-to-point connection
between specific fiber optic ports on the C30 process card and specific Brick. The relay is then configured to measure
specific currents, voltages and contact inputs from those Bricks, and to control specific outputs.
The configuration process for remote resources is straightforward and consists of the following steps.
•
Configure the field units. This establishes the point-to-point connection between a specific port on the relay Process
Bus Module, and a specific digital core on a specific Brick. This is a necessary first step in configuring a process bus
relay.
•
Configure the AC banks. This sets the primary and secondary quantities and connections for currents and voltages. AC
bank configuration also provides a provision for redundant measurements for currents and voltages, a powerful
reliability improvement possible with process bus.
•
Configure signal sources. This functionality of the C30 has not changed other than the requirement to use currents
and voltages established by AC bank configuration under the remote resources menu.
•
Configure field contact inputs, field contact outputs, RTDs, and transducers as required for the application's
functionality. These inputs and outputs are the physical interface to circuit breakers, transformers, and other
equipment. They replace the traditional contact inputs and outputs located at the relay to virtually eliminate copper
wiring.
•
Configure shared inputs and outputs as required for the application's functionality. Shared inputs and outputs are
distinct binary channels that provide high-speed protection quality signaling between relays through a Brick.
For additional information on how to configure a relay with a Process Bus Module, see the HardFiber Process Bus System
Instruction Manual.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-143
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.5 System setup
5.5.1 Breakers
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  COMMON SETTINGS
 COMMON SETTINGS


BKR INTERM & BAD ST
TIMERS: Common
Range: Common, Distinct
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  BREAKERS  BREAKER 1(6)
 BREAKER 1

5
5-144

BREAKER 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

BREAKER 1 NAME:
Bkr 1
Range: up to six alphanumeric characters

BREAKER 1 MODE:
3-Pole
Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole

BREAKER1 A/3P OPND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER1 A/3P CLSD:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 B OPENED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 B CLOSED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 C OPENED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 C CLOSED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 ALARM
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 RACKED-IN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 OPEN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 CLOSE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER1 PB CONTROL:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER1 TOPERATE:
70 ms
Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1

BREAKER 1 BAD ST
TSUPPRESS: 0 ms
Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1

MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1
TIME: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP

BREAKER 1 OPEN
SEAL-IN: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

BREAKER 1 BYPASS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

BREAKER 1 TAGGING:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enable No Override, Enable with
Override

BREAKER 1:
SUBSTITUTN: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

BREAKER 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

BREAKER 1 LOCAL:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Access in EnerVista

BREAKER 1 INTERLOCK
OPEN: Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Access in EnerVista

BREAKER 1 INTERLOCK
CLOSE: Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Access in EnerVista

BREAKER 1 SYNCCHECK
CLOSE: Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Access in EnerVista

BREAKER 1 POS-REACHED
CHECK: Enabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Access in EnerVista
5
The breaker control element contains the auxiliary logic for status and serves as the interface for opening and closing of a
circuit breaker from protection, autoreclose, SCADA, or through the front panel interface. The breaker control element can
be used to create interlocking functionality. For greater security in determination of the breaker position, both the 52/a
and 52/b auxiliary contacts are used with reporting of the discrepancy between them.
To use this element, configure the contact outputs that trip and close the breaker to use FlexLogic operands BREAKER 1 OFF
CMD (or BREAKER 1 TRIP A/B/C in the case of single-pole tripping) and BREAKER 1 ON CMD, and configure the breaker control
element inputs as described here.
A description of the operation of the breaker control and status monitoring features from the front panel is provided in
chapter 4.
BKR INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS — When set to "Common," the breaker element considers both "00" and "11" states of 52a and
52b as an intermediate state and when the Toperate timer expires, declares the breaker as bad status. When set to
"Distinct," the breaker element considers "00" state of 52a and 52b as an intermediate state and "11" as bad status. When
the breaker status detected is 00, the breaker element waits for the Toperate timer to expire before declaring the
intermediate state. When the breaker status detected is 11, the breaker element waits for the Bad ST Tsuppress timer to
expire before declaring the bad state. See breaker logic diagrams 2 and 4.
The following settings are available for each breaker control element.
BREAKER 1 FUNCTION — This setting enables and disables the operation of the breaker 1 control feature.
BREAKER 1 NAME — Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the breaker. This name is used in flash messages
related to breaker 1.
BREAKER 1 MODE — Selects “3-Pole” mode, where all breaker poles are operated simultaneously, or selects “1-Pole” mode
where all breaker poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.
BREAKER1 A/3P OPND — Selects an operand, usually a contact input, that is for a normally-closed 52/b status input that
creates a logic 1 when the breaker is open. If a separate 52/b contact input is not available, then the inverted 52/a status
signal or the inverted BREAKER 1 CLOSED status signal can be used.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-145
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
BREAKER1 A/3P CLSD — Selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a breaker auxiliary position tracking
mechanism. This input is for a normally-open 52/a status input that creates a logic 1 when the breaker is closed. If the
BREAKER 1 MODE setting is selected as "3-Pole," this setting selects a single 52/a input as the operand used to track the
breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as "1-Pole," the input mentioned is used to track phase A and the
BREAKER 1 B and BREAKER 1 C settings select operands to track phases B and C, respectively.
BREAKER1 B OPENED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as singlepole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B opened position as outlined for phase A.
BREAKER1 B CLOSED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase B closed position as outlined for phase A.
BREAKER1 C OPENED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C opened position as outlined for phase A.
BREAKER1 C CLOSED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as singlepole, this input is used to track the breaker phase C closed position as outlined for phase A.
BREAKER 1 ALARM DELAY — This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the pole
position tracking operands does not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the poles.
If single-pole tripping and reclosing is used, the breaker can trip unsymmetrically for faults. In this case, the minimum
alarm delay setting must exceed the maximum time required for fault clearing and reclosing by a suitable margin.
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM — This setting selects an operand, usually an external contact input connected to a breaker alarm
reporting contact. While the selected operand is active, the BREAKER 1 TROUBLE operand is activated.
BREAKER 1 RACKED-IN — This setting selects a contact input to show whether the breaker is racked-in or racked-out. The
racked-in or racked-out status is used to indicate dynamically the status of breaker symbol, only applied in the single-line
diagram on the graphical front panel. If this setting is set to Off, the racked status is not considered.
5
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV — Selects an operand indicating that breaker 1 is out-of-service.
BREAKER 1 OPEN — Selects an operand that when activated, and unless blocked, initiates the Breaker 1 open and individual
phase trip commands.
BREAKER 1 CLOSE — Selects an operand that when activated, and unless blocked, initiates the Breaker 1 close commands.
BREAKER 1 PB CONTROL — Local breaker control operations (that is, open/close) are allowed from front panel pushbuttons
when the selected operand value is high.
BREAKER 1 TOPERATE — This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the 52/a
and 52/b auxiliary contacts during breaker operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has expired, the
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted for alarm or blocking purposes.
BREAKER 1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS — When the BKR INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS setting is set to "Distinct," this setting specifies the
required interval to overcome the transient state of 11 during the breaker operation. If the 11 state still exists after this
time, the BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted. When the BKR INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS setting is set to
"Common," this setting is not used.
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME — This setting specifies the seal-in time of the close commands due to an operator-initiated
manual close command to the circuit breaker.
BREAKER 1 OPEN SEAL-IN — This setting specifies the seal-in time of the three-pole open command initiated by either the
Trip Out element or a manual open command to the circuit breaker.
BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN — Selects an operand that prevents initiation of Breaker 1 open and individual phase trip commands.
This setting can be used for blocking circuit breaker tripping for instance when breaker monitoring detects conditions such
as low SF6 gas density during which breaker opening can cause damage.
BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE — Selects an operand that prevents initiation of Breaker 1 close commands. This setting can be used
for blocking circuit breaker closing, for instance to prevent closing into a closed ground switch.
BREAKER 1 BYPASS — Set to "Enable" to allow the graphical front panel to bypass breaker 1 interlocking. When asserted,
BREAKER 1 BLK OPEN and BREAKER 1 BLK CLOSE settings are bypassed.
BREAKER 1 TAGGING — Breaker tagging is used to block certain operation when it is tagged for safety purposes. No other
action is needed after enabling the function; it is handled internally where certain functions are blocked.
5-146
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Set to "Enable No Override" to allow the graphical front panel or IEC 61850 MMS control to tag breaker 1. When tagged
from the graphical front panel, tagging can be removed only from the graphical front panel, and an attempt to remove
tagging using IEC 61850 MMS control results in a negative response (-Rsp). When tagged from IEC 61850 MMS control,
tagging can be removed only by MMS control.
Set to "Enable With Override" to allow the graphical front panel or IEC 61850 MMS control to tag breaker 1. When tagged
from the graphical front panel, tagging can be removed only from the graphical front panel, and an attempt to remove
tagging using IEC 61850 MMS control results in a negative response (-Rsp). When tagged from IEC 61850 MMS control,
tagging can be removed by MMS control or from the graphical front panel. That is, the graphical front panel has an
override function.
When tagged, the following operations are disabled: pushbutton open/close, IEC 61850 open/close, and close command
initiated by BREAKER 1 CLOSE setting. The trip command issued by the Trip Out element or BREAKER 1 OPEN setting is not
affected.
BREAKER1 SUBSTITUTN — Set to "Enable" to allow the graphical front panel/IEC 61850 to substitute breaker 1 status. When
substituted, breaker 1 control open/close status is forced to the substituted value.
BREAKER 1 LOCAL — Set in the EnerVista software or via SCL file. It selects an operand that indicates the Breaker control
behavior from an IEC 61850 client. When the operand value is set, it indicates the Breaker in Local mode and the remote
commands from IEC 61850 client are blocked.
BREAKER 1 INTERLOCK OPEN — Set in the EnerVista software or via SCL file. It selects an operand that indicates the Breaker
interlock status for "Open/off" command from an IEC 61850 client. When the operand value is set (BkrCILO1.EnaOpn.stVal
is set to false), the "Open/off" command from the IEC 61850 client is rejected, if the client set the interlock-check bit in the
"Check" parameter of the control command.
BREAKER 1 INTERLOCK CLOSE — Set in the EnerVista software or via SCL file. It selects an operand that indicates the Breaker
interlock status for "Close/on" command from an IEC 61850 client. When the operand value is set (BkrCILO1.EnaCls.stVal is
set to false), the "Close/on" command from IEC 61850 client is rejected, if the client set the interlock-check bit in the "Check"
parameter of the control command.
BREAKER 1 SYNCCHECK CLS - Set in the EnerVista software or via SCL file. It selects an operand that indicates the status of
the synchrocheck function of the Breaker. When the operand value is set, the remote commands from IEC 61850 client are
rejected, if the IEC61850 client set the synchrocheck bit in the "Check" parameter of the control command.
BREAKER 1 POS-REACHED CHECK — Set in the EnerVista software. When Enabled, the IEC 61850 control value is checked for
current Breaker status and is rejected if the command value (Open/Close) from IEC 61850 client match with the present
Breaker status. When Disabled, the current Breaker status is not verified to accept the control.
IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the C30 device is in "Programmed" mode and not in local control mode.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-147
5
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-65: Dual breaker control logic (Sheet 1 of 4)
SE TTING
BRE AKER 1 FU NCTION
= E nabled
FLE XLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 TAG ON
SE TTING
BRE AKER 1 PUSHBU TTON
CONTROL
=Off
AND
US ER 3 OFF/ON
To ope n BKR1-(name)
BkrCS WI1.OpOpn.general
OR
Breaker 1 Open
From graphical front panel
SE TTING (on 61850 page )
BKR1 S T.LOC OPE RAND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 M NL OPEN
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 OFF CMD
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 TRIP A
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 TRIP B
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 TRIP C
OR
= Off
AND
BkroXCBR1.Pos.ctlVal = off
OR
BkrCS WI1.Pos.ctlVal = off
From IEC 61850 protocol
OR
AND
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 OPEN SEAL-IN
SE TTING
BRE AKER 1 OPEN
T P KP
= Off
0
AND
FLE XLOGIC OPERANDS
TRIP 3-POLE
TRIP PHASE A
TRIP PHASE B
TRIP PHASE C
On D60, L60, L90, from Trip
Output, only on breaker 1
5
From IEC 61850 protocol
Bkr0XCBR1.BlkOpn.ctlVal = on
AND
OR
BkrCS WI1.BlkOpn.ctlVal = on
AND
SE TTING
BRE AKER 1 BLK OPE N
Bkr0XCBR1.BlkOpn.stVal
OR
= Off
BkrCS WI1.BlkOpn.stVal
FLE XLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 BYPAS S ON
AND
From IEC 61850 protocol
BkrCS WI1.CmdBlk.ctlVal = on
To 61850 protocol
AND
BkrCS WI1.CmdBlk.stVal
To 61850 protocol
AND
US ER 2 OFF/ON
To close BKR1-(name)
AND
BkrCS WI1.Blk.stVal
To 61850 protocol
OR
Breaker 1 Close
From graphical front panel
AND
From IEC 61850 protocol
OR
AND
Bkr0XCBR1.Pos.ctlVal = on
OR
BkrCS WI1.Pos.ctlVal = on
AND
OR
SE TTI NG
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME
SE TTING
BRE AKER 1 CLOS E
AND
= Off
AND
AND
T P KP
BkrCS WI1.OpCls.ge neral
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ENA RCLS
OR
AND
FLE XLOGIC OPERAND
AR CLOSE BKR1
On C60, D 60, L60, L90 breaker 1
and 2, from Autore close
AND
OR
From IEC 61850 protocol
BkrCS WI1.BlkCls.ctlVal = on
AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ON CMD
0
20 ms
OR
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 M NL CLS
BkrCS WI1.BlkCls.stVal
OR
Bkr0XCBR1.BlkCls.ctlVal = on
Bkr0XCBR1.BlkCls.stVal
SE TTING
BRE AKER 1 BLK CLOSE
To 61850 protocol
AND
= Off
CSWI cmd
Blk to
shee t 3
Enable
to shee t 2
BKR 1
LOCAL to
shee t 3
859826A1.vsdx
5-148
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Figure 5-66: Dual breaker control logic (Sheet 2 of 4)
from sheet 1
Enable
SETTING
BKR INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS
= COM MON
= DIS TINCT
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 M ODE
to shee t 4
= 1-Pole
= 3-Pole
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
BRE AKER 1 SU BD CLSD
BRE AKER 1 SU BD OPEN
BKR1 A CLOS ED
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦA CLS D
BKR1 A OPENED
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦA OPEN
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦA INTERM
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦA BAD S T
BKR1 B CLOS ED
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦB CLS D
BKR1 B OPENED
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦB OPEN
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦB INTERM
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦB BAD S T
BKR1 C CLOS ED
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦC CLS D
BKR1 C OPENED
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦC OPEN
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦC INTERM
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦC BAD ST
AND
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 ΦA/3P CLSD
= Off
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 ΦA/3P OPND
= Off
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 TOPERATE
T P KP
AND
OR
0
AND
AND
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 ΦB CLS D
= Off
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 ΦB OPENE D
= Off
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 TOPERATE
T P KP
OR
AND
0
AND
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 ΦC CLS D
= Off
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 ΦC OPENE D
= Off
OR
AND
OR
AND
5
AND
AND
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 TOPERATE
T P KP
OR
AND
0
FLE XLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 BAD STATUS
OR
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 EXT ALARM
= Off
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 TROU BLE
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 CLOS ED
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 D ISCREP
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 OPEN
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ANY P OPEN
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 1P OPEN
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 OOS
AND
BKR1 A CLOS ED
When the BKR INTERM & BAD
ST TIMERS setting is
“Common,” breaker element
uses the logic highlighted in
dashed box for Breaker 1 ΦA/
ΦB/ΦC INTERM and BAD ST
FlexLogic operands
BKR1 B CLOS ED
BKR1 C CLOS ED
OR
AND
AND
BKR1 A OPENED
BKR1 B OPENED
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 ALARM DELAY
T P KP
0
AND
OR
BKR1 C OPENED
AND
BKR1 A CLOS ED
BKR1 B CLOS ED
AND
BKR1 C CLOS ED
XOR
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 OUT OF S V
= Off
Enable
to shee t 3
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
859814A1.vsdx
5-149
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-67: Dual breaker / graphical front panel control logic (Sheet 3 of 4)
from sheet 1
CSWI cmd
Blk
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 TAGG ING
from sheet 1
BKR 1
LOCAL
= Enable No Override
= Enable with Override
BkrCS WI1.TagOn.ctlVal=On
OR
AND
from sheet 2
Enable
AND
OR
Bkr0XCBR1.TagOn.ctlVal=On
Non-volatile,
Reset-dominant
OR
S
Breaker 1 Tag
From graphical front panel
Latch
AND
OR
OR
R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 TAG ON
BRE AKER 1 TAG OFF
AND
Breaker 1 Remove Tag
OR
BkrCS WI1.TagOn.ctlVal=Off
Bkr0XCBR1.TagOn.ctlVal=Off
AND
OR
AND
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 SU BSTITUTN
= Enabled
Non-volatile,
Reset-dominant
S
Breaker 1 Substitute Open
Breaker 1 Remove Substitution
OR
Latch
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 SU BD OPEN
Latch
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 SU BD CLSD
R
From graphical front panel
S
Breaker 1 Substitute Closed
OR
R
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 BYPAS S
5
= E nabled
Non-volatile,
Reset-dominant
S
Breaker 1 Bypass
Breaker 1 Remove Bypass
From graphical front panel
Latch
OR
R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 BYPAS S ON
BRE AKER 1 BYPAS S OFF
For relays with AR eleme nt
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 AR BLOCK
= E nabled
Non-volatile,
Reset-dominant
S
Breaker 1 Block Autoreclose
Latch
Breaker 1 Unblock Autore close
From graphical front panel
OR
R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 BLK RCLS
BRE AKER 1 ENA RCLS
859827A1.vsdx
The breaker element has direct hard-coded connections to the IEC 61850 model as shown in the logic diagram. This allows
remote open/close operation of each breaker, using either CSWI or XCBR IEC 61850 logical nodes. IEC 61850 select-beforeoperate functionality, local/remote switch functionality, along with blocking of open/close commands are provided. Note
that the dwell time for the IEC 61850 trip and close commands shown is one protection pass only. To maintain the close/
open command for a certain time, do so by setting the seal-in timers BREAKER 1 OPEN SEAL-IN and MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1
TIME, on the contact outputs using the "Seal-in" setting, in the Trip Output element, and/or in FlexLogic.
5-150
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Figure 5-68: Dual breaker control logic (Sheet 4 of 4)
BKR INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS = D istinct
from sheet 2
1-Pole
AND
SETTING
BRE AKER1 BAD ST
TSU PPRESS
T P KP
AND
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 TOPERATE
T P KP
0
SETTING
BRE AKER1 BAD ST
TSU PPRESS
AND
T P KP
AND
SETTING
BRE AKER 1 TOPERATE
T P KP
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦA BAD ST
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦA INTERM
0
1-Pole
When the BKR INTERM & BAD ST
TIMERS setting is "Distinct," breaker
element replaces the sheet 2
highlighted logic in dashed box with
logic shown here for Breaker 1 ΦA/
ΦB/ ΦC INTERM and BAD ST
FlexLogic operands
Enable
Enable
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BRE AKER 1 Φ Θ BAD ST
0
0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BRE AKER 1 ΦΘINTERM
Where Θ is B and C
859815A1.vsdx
5.5.2 Switches
5
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SWITCHES  COMMON SETTINGS
 COMMON SETTINGS


SW INTERM & BAD ST
TIMERS: Common
Range: Common, Distinct
SETTINGS  SYSTEM SETUP  SWITCHES  SWITCH 1(24)
 SWITCH 1


SWITCH 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SWITCH 1 NAME:
SW 1
Range: up to six alphanumeric characters

SWITCH 1 MODE:
3-Pole
Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole

SWTCH 1 A/3P OPND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWTCH 1 A/3P CLSD:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 B OPENED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 B CLOSED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 C OPENED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 C CLOSED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 ALARM
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-151
SYSTEM SETUP
5
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

SWITCH 1 OPEN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 CLOSE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 PB CONTROL:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 TOPERATE:
70 ms
Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1

SWITCH 1 BAD ST
TSUPPRESS: 0 ms
Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1

SWITCH 1 OPEN
SEAL-IN: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

SWITCH 1 CLOSE
SEAL IN: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SWITCH 1 BYPASS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SWITCH 1 TAGGING:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enable No Override, Enable with
Override

SWITCH 1 SUBSTITUTN:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SWITCH 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SWITCH 1 LOCAL:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Access in EnerVista

SWITCH 1 INTERLOCK
OPEN: Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Access in EnerVista

SWITCH 1 INTERLOCK
CLOSE: Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Access in EnerVista

SWITCH 1 POS-REACHED
CHECK: Enabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
Access in EnerVista
The disconnect switch control element contains the auxiliary logic for status and serves as the interface for opening and
closing of disconnect switches from SCADA or through the front panel interface. The disconnect switch control element
can be used to create interlocking functionality. For greater security in determination of the switch pole position, both the
89/a and 89/b auxiliary contacts are used with reporting of the discrepancy between them.
To use this element, configure the contact outputs that open and close the disconnect switch to use FlexLogic operands
SWITCH 1 OFF CMD and SWITCH 1 ON CMD, and configure the disconnect switch control element's inputs as outlined here.
SW INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS — When set to "Common," the switch element considers both "00" and "11" states of 89/a and
89/b as intermediate state and when the Topearte timer expires, declares the switch as bad status. When set to "Distinct,"
the switch element considers "00" state of 89/a and 89/b as intermediate state and "11" as bad status. When the switch
status detected is 00, the switch element waits for Toperate timer to expire before declaring the intermediate state. When
the switch status detected is 11, the switch element waits for Bad ST Tsuppress timer to expire before declaring the bad
state. See the switch logic diagrams 2 and 4.
SWITCH 1 FUNCTION — This setting enables and disables operation of the disconnect switch element.
SWITCH 1 NAME — Assign a user-defined name (up to six characters) to the disconnect switch. This name is used in flash
messages related to disconnect switch 1.
5-152
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
SWITCH 1 MODE — This setting selects “3-Pole” mode, where disconnect switch poles have a single common auxiliary
switch, or “1-Pole” mode where each disconnect switch pole has its own auxiliary switch.
SWTCH 1 A/3P OPND — This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input, that is for a normally-closed 89/b status
input that creates a logic 1 when the disconnect switch is open. If a separate 89/b contact input is not available, then an
inverted 89/a status signal can be used.
SWTCH 1A/3P CLSD — This setting selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a disconnect switch auxiliary
position tracking mechanism. This input is for a normally-open 89/a status input that creates a logic 1 when the
disconnect switch is closed. If the SWITCH 1 MODE setting is selected as “3-Pole,” this setting selects a single 89/a input as
the operand used to track the disconnect switch open or closed position. If the mode is selected as “1-Pole,” the input
mentioned is used to track phase A and the SWITCH 1 B and SWITCH 1 C settings select operands to track phases B and
C, respectively.
SWITCH 1 B OPENED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B opened position as outlined for phase A.
SWITCH 1 B CLOSED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase B closed position as outlined for phase A.
SWITCH 1 C OPENED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as single-
pole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C opened position as outlined for phase A.
SWITCH 1 C CLOSED — If the mode is selected as three-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as singlepole, this input is used to track the disconnect switch phase C closed position as outlined for phase A.
SWITCH 1 ALARM DELAY — This setting specifies the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the pole
position tracking operands do not declare a pole disagreement. This allows for non-simultaneous operation of the poles.
SWITCH 1 OPEN — This setting selects an operand that when activated, and unless blocked, initiates the disconnect switch 1
open command.
SWITCH 1 CLOSE — This setting selects an operand that when activated, and unless blocked, initiates the disconnect switch
1 close command.
SWITCH 1 PB CONTROL — Local disconnect switch control operations (for example, open/close) are allowed from front panel
pushbuttons when the selected FlexLogic operand value is high.
SWITCH 1 TOPERATE — This setting specifies the required interval to overcome transient disagreement between the 89/a
and 89/b auxiliary contacts during disconnect switch operation. If transient disagreement still exists after this time has
expired, the SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted for alarm or blocking purposes.
SWITCH 1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS — When the SW INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS setting is set to "Distinct," this setting specifies the
required interval to overcome the transient state of 11 during the switch operation. If the 11 state still exists after this time,
the SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS FlexLogic operand is asserted. When the SW INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS setting is set to "Common,"
this setting is not used.
SWITCH 1 OPEN SEAL-IN — This setting specifies the seal-in time of the open command due to an operator-initiated manual
open command to the disconnect switch.
SWITCH 1 CLOSE SEAL IN — This setting specifies the seal-in time of the close command due to an operator-initiated manual
close command to the disconnect switch.
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN — This setting selects an operand that prevents initiation of the disconnect switch 1 command. This
setting can be used to block the disconnect switch from opening, for instance when switchyard monitoring indicates that
current exceeding the switch's interrupting rating can be flowing through the switch.
SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE — This setting selects an operand that prevents initiation of disconnect switch 1 close commands. This
setting can be used to block the disconnect switch from closing, for instance to prevent closing into a closed ground
switch.
SWITCH 1 BYPASS —Set to "Enable" to allow the graphical front panel to bypass switch 1 interlocking. When asserted,
SWITCH 1 BLK OPEN and SWITCH 1 BLK CLOSE settings are bypassed.
SWITCH 1 TAGGING — Switch tagging is used to block certain operation when it is tagged for safety purposes. No other
action is needed after enabling the function; it is handled internally where certain functions are blocked.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-153
5
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Set to "Enable No Override" to allow the graphical front panel or IEC 61850 MMS control to tag switch 1. When tagged from
the graphical front panel, tagging can be removed only from the graphical front panel, and an attempt to remove tagging
using IEC 61850 MMS control results in a negative response (-Rsp). When tagged using IEC 61850 MMS control, tagging can
be removed only by MMS control.
Set to "Enable With Override" to allow the graphical front panel or IEC 61850 MMS control to tag switch 1. When tagged
from the graphical front panel, tagging can be removed only from the graphical front panel, and an attempt to remove
tagging using IEC 61850 MMS control results in a negative response (-Rsp). When tagged from IEC 61850 MMS control,
tagging can be removed by MMS control or from the graphical front panel. That is, the graphical front panel has an
override function.
When tagged, the following operations are disabled:
•
Pushbutton open/close
•
IEC 61850 open/close
•
Open command initiated by SWITCH 1 OPEN setting
•
Close command initiated by SWITCH 1 CLOSE setting
SWITCH 1 SUBSTITUTN — Set to "Enable" to allow the graphical front panel to substitute switch 1 status. When substituted,
switch 1 control open/close status is forced to the substituted value.
SWITCH 1 LOCAL — Set in the EnerVista software or via SCL file. It selects an operand that indicates the Switch control
behavior from an IEC 61850 client. When the operand value is set, it indicates the Switch in Local mode and the remote
commands from IEC 61850 client are blocked.
5
SWITCH 1 INTERLOCK OPEN — Set in the EnerVista software or via SCL file. It selects an operand that indicates the Switch
interlock status for "Open/off" command from an IEC 61850 client. When the operand value is set (DiscCILO1.EnaOpn.stVal
is set to false), the "Open/off" command from the IEC 61850 client is rejected, if the client set the interlock-check bit in the
"Check" parameter of the control command.
SWITCH 1 INTERLOCK CLOSE — Set in the EnerVista software or via SCL file. It selects an operand that indicates the Switch
interlock status for "Close/on" command from an IEC 61850 client. When the operand value is set (DiscCILO1.EnaCls.stVal is
set to false), the "Close/on" command from IEC 61850 client is rejected, if the client set the interlock-check bit in the "Check"
parameter of the control command.
SWITCH 1 POS-REACHED CHECK — Set in the EnerVista software. When Enabled, the IEC 61850 control value is checked for
current Switch status and is rejected if the command value (Open/Close) from IEC 61850 client match with the present
Switch status. When Disabled, the current Switch status is not verified to accept the control.
IEC 61850 functionality is permitted when the C30 is in “Programmed” mode and not in local control mode.
The switch element has direct hard-coded connections to the IEC 61850 model as shown in the logic diagrams. This allows
remote open/close operation of each switch, using either CSWI or XSWI IEC 61850 logical nodes. IEC 61850 select-beforeoperate functionality, local/remote switch functionality, along with blocking open/close commands are provided. Note
that the dwell time for the IEC 61850 trip and close commands shown is one protection pass only. To maintain close/open
command for a certain time, do so using the seal-in timers SWITCH 1 OPEN SEAL-IN and SWITCH 1 CLOSE SEAL IN, on the
contact outputs using the "Seal-in" setting, or in FlexLogic.
5-154
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Figure 5-69: Disconnect switch control logic (sheet 1 of 4)
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 FU NCTION
= E nabled
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 TAG ON
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 PB CONTROL
=Off
AND
SW ITCH 1 Ope n
From graphical front panel
SETTING (on 61850 page )
SW ITCH1 LOCAL
DiscCSWI1.OpOpn.general
To IEC 61850 protocol
= Off
AND
OR
Disc0XSWI1.Pos.ctlVal = off
OR
DiscCSWI1.Pos.ctlVal = off
From IEC 61850 protocol
SE TTI NG
SW ITCH 1 OPEN SEAL-IN
T P KP
AND
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 OPEN
OR
0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 OFF CMD
AND
AND
= Off
AND
DiscCSW I1.BlkOpn.ctlVal = on
OR
To IEC 61850 protocol
DiscCSWI1.BlkOpn.stVal
AND
Disc0XS WI1.BlkOpn.ctlVal = on
From IEC 61850 protocol
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 BLOCK OPEN
= Off
OR
Disc0XSWI1.BlkOpn.stVal
To IEC 61850 protocol
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 BYPAS S ON
To IEC 61850 protocol
DiscCSWI1.CmdBlk.stVal
AND
DiscCSWI1.CmdBlk.ctlVal = on
AND
SW ITCH 1 Close
From graphical front panel
To IEC 61850 protocol
DiscCSWI1.Blk.stVal
AND
5
AND
OR
Disc0XSWI1.Pos.ctlVal = on
OR
DiscCSWI1.Pos.ctlVal = on
From IEC 61850 protocol
SE TTI NG
SW ITCH 1 CLOS E SEAL-IN
T P KP
AND
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 CLOS E
OR
0
= Off
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 ON CMD
AND
DiscCSWI1.OpCls.gene ral
To IEC 61850 protocol
AND
DiscCSWI1.BlkCls.stVal
From IEC 61850 protocol
AND
DiscCSWI1.BlkCls.ctlVal = on
OR
Disc0XS WI1.BlkCls.ctlVal = on
Disc0XSWI1.BlkCls.stVal
To 61850 protocol
OR
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 BLK CLOSE
AND
= Off
CSWI cmd
Blk to
Sheet 3
Switch 1
Local
to Sheet 3
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Enable
to shee t 2
859828A1.vsdx
5-155
SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-70: Disconnect switch control status logic (sheet 2 of 4)
from sheet 1
Enable
SETTING
SW INTERM & BAD ST TIM ERS
= COM MON
= DIS TINCT
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 M ODE
to shee t 4
= 1-Pole
= 3-Pole
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SW ITCH 1 SU BD CLSD
SW ITCH 1 SU BD OPEN
SW 1 A CLOSED
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 ΦA CLS D
SW 1 A OPENE D
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 ΦA OPEN
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 ΦA INTERM
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 ΦA BAD S T
AND
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 ΦA/3P CLSD
= Off
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 ΦA/3P OPND
= Off
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 TOPERATE
AND
OR
T P KP
0
AND
SW 1 B CLOSED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 ΦB CLS D
AND
AND
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 ΦB CLS D
= Off
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 ΦB OP ENE D
= Off
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 ΦB OPEN
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 ΦB INTERM
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 ΦB BAD S T
SW 1 C CLOSED
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 ΦC CLS D
SW 1 C OPENE D
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 ΦC OPEN
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 ΦC INTERM
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 ΦC BAD ST
SW 1 B OPENED
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 TOPERATE
OR
AND
T P KP
0
5
AND
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 ΦC CLS D
= Off
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 ΦC OPENE D
= Off
OR
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 TOPERATE
OR
AND
T P KP
0
When the SW INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS setting is
“Common,” switch element uses the logic
highlighted in dashed boxes for SWITCH1 ΦA/ΦB/
ΦC INTERM and BAD ST FlexLogic operands.
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 BAD STATUS
OR
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 TROU BLE
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 CLOS ED
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 D ISCREP
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 OPEN
AND
SW 1 A CLOSED
SW 1 B CLOSED
OR
AND
SE TTING
SW ITCH 1 ALARM DELAY
SW 1 C CLOSED
AND
SW 1 A OPENE D
0
AND
SW 1 B OPENED
OR
SW 1 C OPENE D
AND
5-156
T P KP
Enable
to shee t 3
859812A1.vsdx
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Figure 5-71: Disconnect switch control graphical front panel logic (sheet 3 of 4)
from sheet 1
CSWI cmd
Blk
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 TAGG ING
from sheet 1
Switch 1
LOCAL
= Enable No Override
= Enable with Override
DiscCSWI1.TagOn.ctlVal=On
OR
AND
from sheet 2
Enable
AND
OR
Disc0XS WI1.TagOn.ctlVal=On
Non-volatile,
Reset-dominant
OR
S
SW ITCH 1 Tag
From graphical front panel
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 TAG ON
SW ITCH 1 TAG OFF
Latch
AND
OR
R
OR
AND
SW ITCH 1 Remove Tag
OR
DiscCSWI1.TagOn.ctlVal=Off
Disc0XS WI1.TagOn.ctlVal=Off
AND
OR
AND
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 SU BSTITUTN
= E nabled
Non-volatile,
Reset-dominant
S
SW ITCH 1 Substitute Open
SW ITCH 1 Remove Substitution
OR
Latch
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 SU BD OPEN
Latch
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 SU BD CLSD
R
S
SW ITCH 1 Substitute Closed
From graphical front panel
OR
R
SETTING
SW ITCH 1 BYPAS S
= E nabled
5
Non-volatile,
Reset-dominant
S
SW ITCH 1 Bypass
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH 1 BYPAS S ON
SW ITCH 1 BYPAS S OFF
Latch
SW ITCH 1 Remove Bypass
From graphical front panel
OR
R
859829A1.vsdx
Figure 5-72: Disconnect switch control status logic (sheet 4 of 4)
SW INTERM & BAD ST TIM ERS = DIS TI NCT
from sheet 2
AND
AND
1-Pole
SETTING
SW ITCH1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS
T P KP
0
SETTING
SW ITCH1 TOPERATE
T P KP
0
1-Pole
When the SW INTERM & BAD ST TIMERS
setting is “Distinct,” switch element
replaces the sheet 2 highlighted logic in
dashed box with sheet 4 logic for
SWITCH1 ΦA/ΦB/ΦC INTERM and BAD
ST FlexLogic operands
AND
AND
Enable
SETTING
SW ITCH1 BAD ST TSUPPRESS
T P KP
0
SETTING
SW ITCH1 TOPERATE
T P KP
0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH1 ΦA BAD ST
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH1 ΦA INTERM
Enable
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
AND
SW ITCH1 Φ Θ BAD ST
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SW ITCH1 ΦΘINTERM
Where Θ is B and C
859813A1.vsdx
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-157
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.6 FlexLogic
5.6.1 FlexLogic operands
For flexibility, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed parameters. Logic upon
which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from contact input signals through elements or
combinations of elements to contact outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic through
FlexLogic. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs that it uses to produce analog and digital outputs. The
figure shows major subsystems of a generic UR-series relay involved in this process.
Figure 5-73: UR architecture overview
CTs
VTs
DCmA
or
RTD
inputs
DSP
(A/D)
Calculate
parameters
Measuring
and
decision
elements
Analog
input
(A/D)
FlexLogic™
equations
Virtual
outputs
Digital
elements
Flags
V
Contact
inputs
5
Block
operation
(each
element)
Keypad
Virtual
inputs
OR
Remote
inputs
(GOOSE)
fiber
G.703
RS422
FlexLogic™
counters
Contact
outputs
Remote
outputs
(FlexLogic operands)
Display
and LEDs
Display
Control
and
monitoring
features
Analog
output (D/A)
(dcmA)
Direct
inputs
(Status)
(Actual values)
I
Form-A and
SCR only
Fiber
G.703
RS422
Direct
outputs
(Status)
EnerVista UR Setup and LAN communications
827022A7.cdr
The states of all digital signals used in the C30 are represented by flags (or FlexLogic operands, which are described later in
this section). A digital “1” is represented by a set flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an
element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic equation, or to operate a contact output. The state
of the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple
scheme where a contact input is used to block an element is wanted, this selection is made when programming the
element. This capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes,
and human operators.
If more complex logic than shown in the figure is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic. For example, to have the closed
state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of the phase
time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic equation. This equation ANDs the
two control inputs to produce a virtual output that is then selected when programming the phase time overcurrent to be
used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic equations.
5-158
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or
supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic minimizes the requirement for
auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes, and outputs is field-programmable through the use
of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is
available internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic).
FlexLogic allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The
operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes, and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers, and latches (with
set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of operands to be assigned as inputs to
specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual output.
Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a
seal-in or other type of feedback.
A FlexLogic equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0.
Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of
parameters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, or flag set) or 0
(=OFF, or flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least four times every power system cycle.
Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances, for example contact and remote inputs. These types
of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the front panel display. The table lists characteristics
of the different types of operands.
Table 5-18: C30 FlexLogic operand types
Operand type
State
Example of format
Characteristics
[Input Is ‘1’ (= ON) if...]
Contact Input
On
Cont Ip On
Voltage is applied presently to the input (external contact
closed)
Off
Cont Ip Off
Voltage is not applied presently to the input (external
contact open)
Contact Output
(type Form-A contact
only)
Contact Closed
Cont Op 1 Closed
Contact output is closed
Current On
Cont Op 1 Ion
Current is flowing through the contact
Voltage On
Cont Op 1 VOn
Voltage exists across the contact
Voltage Off
Cont Op 1 VOff
Voltage does not exist across the contact
Direct Input
On
DIRECT INPUT 1 On
The direct input is presently in the ON state
Element
(Digital)
Pickup
Dig Element 1 PKP
The input operand is at logic 1
Dropout
Dig Element 1 DPO
This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand
Operate
Dig Element 1 OP
The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed
pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and
is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing
Higher than
Counter 1 HI
The number of pulses counted is above the set number
Element
(Digital Counter)
Equal to
Counter 1 EQL
The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number
Lower than
Counter 1 LO
The number of pulses counted is below the set number
Fixed
On
On
Logic 1
Off
Off
Logic 0
RxGOOSE Boolean
On
RxGOOSE Boolean 1 On
The RxGOOSE Boolean is presently in the ON state
Virtual Input
On
Virt Ip 1 On
The virtual input is presently in the ON state
Virtual Output
On
Virt Op 1 On
The virtual output is presently in the set state (that is,
evaluation of the equation that produces this virtual output
results in a "1")
The following table lists the operands available for the relay. The operands can be viewed online by entering the IP address
of the relay in a web browser and accessing the Device Information Menu.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-159
5
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Table 5-19: C30 FlexLogic operands
Operand type
Operand syntax
ANNUNCIATOR
ANY ANCTR ABNORMAL
Graphical front panel
ANY ANCTR ALARMED
5
Operand description
On for one second when any annunciator window state changes from
normal to abnormal
On while any annunciator window state is abnormal
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
Enhanced and basic
front panels
CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 2 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 3 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 4 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 5 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 6 ON
CONTROL PUSHBTN 7 ON
Control pushbutton 1 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 2 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 3 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 4 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 5 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 6 is being pressed
Control pushbutton 7 is being pressed
CYBERSENTRY
ROLE ADMIN ACT
ROLE SUPERVISOR ACT
ROLE ENGINEER ACT
ROLE OPERATOR ACT
ROLE OBSERVER ACT
AUTHENTICATION FAIL
UNAUTH FW ATTEMPT
UNAUTH SETTING WRITE
FACTORY MODE ACTIVE
Administrator role is active and is set to true when that is the case
Supervisor role is active and is set to true when that is the case
Engineer role is active and is set to true when that is the case
Operator role is active and is set to true when that is the case
Observer role is active and is set to true when that is the case
Operand set for Failed Authentication self-test and alarm
Operand set for firmware lock self-test and alarm
Operand set for settings lock self-test and alarm
Factory mode is enabled and set to true
DIRECT DEVICES
DIRECT DEVICE 1On

DIRECT DEVICE 16On
DIRECT DEVICE 1Off

DIRECT DEVICE 16Off
Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1
DIRECT INPUT/
OUTPUT CHANNEL
MONITORING
DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM
The rate of direct input messages received on channel 1 and failing the CRC
exceeded the user-specified level
The rate of direct input messages received on channel 2 and failing the CRC
exceeded the user-specified level
The rate of returned direct input/output messages on channel 1 exceeded
the user-specified level (ring configurations only)
The rate of returned direct input/output messages on channel 2 exceeded
the user-specified level (ring configurations only)
DIR IO CH2 CRC ALARM
DIR IO CH1 UNRET ALM
DIR IO CH2 UNRET ALM
ELEMENT:
Eight-bit switch
5-160
8BIT SWITCH 1 BIT 0
8BIT SWITCH 1 BIT 1
8BIT SWITCH 1 BIT 2
8BIT SWITCH 1 BIT 3
8BIT SWITCH 1 BIT 4
8BIT SWITCH 1 BIT 5
8BIT SWITCH 1 BIT 6
8BIT SWITCH 1 BIT 7
Bit 0 of eight-bit switch 1 asserted (the least significant bit)
Bit 1 of eight-bit switch 1 asserted
Bit 2 of eight-bit switch 1 asserted
Bit 3 of eight-bit switch 1 asserted
Bit 4 of eight-bit switch 1 asserted
Bit 5 of eight-bit switch 1 asserted
Bit 6 of eight-bit switch 1 asserted
Bit 7 of eight-bit switch 1 asserted (the most significant bit)
8BIT SWITCH 2 to 6
Same set of operands as shown for 8 BIT SWITCH 1
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
Operand type
Operand syntax
Operand description
ELEMENT:
Breaker control
BREAKER 1 OFF CMD
BREAKER 1 ON CMD
BREAKER 1 A BAD ST
BREAKER 1 C CLSD
BREAKER 1 C OPEN
BREAKER 1 BAD STATUS
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
BREAKER 1 OPEN
BREAKER 1 DISCREP
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
BREAKER 1 MNL OPEN
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
BREAKER 1 TRIP A
BREAKER 1 TRIP B
BREAKER 1 TRIP C
BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN
BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN
BREAKER 1 OOS
BREAKER 1 TAG ON
BREAKER 1 TAG OFF
BREAKER 1 SUBD CLSD
BREAKER 1 SUBD OPEN
BREAKER 1 BYPASS ON
BREAKER 1 BYPASS OFF
BREAKER 1 BLK RCLS
BREAKER 1 ENA RCLS
Breaker 1 3-pole open command/trip initiated
Breaker 1 close command initiated
Breaker 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
Breaker 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from one
position to another)
Breaker 1 phase A is closed
Breaker 1 phase A is open
Breaker 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
Breaker 1 phase B intermediate status is detected (transition from one
position to another)
Breaker 1 phase B is closed
Breaker 1 phase B is open
Breaker 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between the 52/a and
52/b contacts)
Breaker 1 phase C intermediate status is detected (transition from one
position to another)
Breaker 1 phase C is closed
Breaker 1 phase C is open
Breaker 1 bad status is detected on any pole
Breaker 1 is closed
Breaker 1 is open
Breaker 1 has discrepancy
Breaker 1 trouble alarm
Breaker 1 manual open
Breaker 1 manual close
Breaker 1 trip phase A command
Breaker 1 trip phase B command
Breaker 1 trip phase C command
At least one pole of breaker 1 is open
Only one pole of breaker 1 is open
Breaker 1 is out of service
Breaker 1 tagged so manual trip and close and autoreclose are blocked
Breaker 1 not tagged
Breaker 1 status manually substituted to closed
Breaker 1 status manually substituted to open
Breaker 1 control interlocking is manually bypassed
Breaker 1 control interlocking is not manually bypassed
Breaker 1 command to manually block autoreclose
Breaker 1 command to manually enable autoreclose
BREAKER 2 to 6
Same set of operands as shown for BREAKER 1
Counter 1 HI
Counter 1 EQL
Counter 1 LO
Digital counter 1 output is ‘more than’ comparison value
Digital counter 1 output is ‘equal to’ comparison value
Digital counter 1 output is ‘less than’ comparison value
BREAKER 1 A INTERM
BREAKER 1 A CLSD
BREAKER 1 A OPEN
BREAKER 1 B BAD ST
BREAKER 1 B INTERM
BREAKER 1 B CLSD
BREAKER 1 B OPEN
BREAKER 1 C BAD ST
BREAKER 1 C INTERM
ELEMENT:
Digital counters
ELEMENT:
Digital elements
Counter 2 to 8
Same set of operands as shown for Counter 1
Dig Element 1 PKP
Dig Element 1 OP
Dig Element 1 DPO
Digital Element 1 is picked up
Digital Element 1 is operated
Digital Element 1 is dropped out
Dig Element 2 to 96
Same set of operands as shown for Dig Element 1
FxE 1 PKP
FxE 1 OP
FxE 1 DPO
FlexElement 1 has picked up
FlexElement 1 has operated
FlexElement 1 has dropped out
FxE 2 to 16
Same set of operands as shown for FxE 1
ELEMENT:
IED mode
IED BEH TEST
IED BEH TEST-BLOCKED
IED BEH ON
Relay in Test mode
Relay in Test-Blocked mode
Relay mode is On
ELEMENT:
Non-volatile latches
LATCH 1 ON
LATCH 1 OFF
Non-volatile latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1)
Non-volatile latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0)
LATCH 2 to 16
Same set of operands as shown for LATCH 1
ELEMENT:
FlexElements
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-161
5
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Operand type
Operand syntax
ELEMENT:
PID regulator
PID 1 RAISE
PID 1 LOWER
PID 2 RAISE
PID 2 LOWER
PID 3 RAISE
PID 3 LOWER
PID 4 RAISE
PID 4 LOWER
ELEMENT:
Selector switch
SELECTOR 1 POS Y
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM
SELECTOR 1 ALARM
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM
Operand description
Selector switch 1 is in Position Y (mutually exclusive operands)
First bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
Second bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
Third bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of selector 1
Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the stepping up control
input but not acknowledged
Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected with the 3-bit control input but
not acknowledged
Position of selector 1 has been pre-selected but not acknowledged
Position of selector switch 1 is undetermined or restored from memory when
the relay powers up and synchronizes to the three-bit input
SELECTOR 2
Same set of operands as shown for SELECTOR 1
SWITCH 1 OFF CMD
SWITCH 1 ON CMD
SWITCH 1 CLOSED
SWITCH 1 OPEN
SWITCH 1 DISCREP
SWITCH 1 TROUBLE
SWITCH 1 A CLSD
SWITCH 1 A OPEN
SWITCH 1 A BAD ST
SWITCH 1 BAD STATUS
SWITCH 1 TAG ON
SWITCH 1 TAG OFF
SWITCH 1 SUBD CLSD
SWITCH 1 SUBD OPEN
SWITCH 1 BYPASS ON
SWITCH 1 BYPASS OFF
Disconnect switch 1 open command initiated
Disconnect switch 1 close command initiated
Disconnect switch 1 is closed
Disconnect switch 1 is open
Disconnect switch 1 has discrepancy
Disconnect switch 1 trouble alarm
Disconnect switch 1 phase A is closed
Disconnect switch 1 phase A is open
Disconnect switch 1 phase A bad status is detected (discrepancy between
the 89/a and 89/b contacts)
Disconnect switch 1 phase A intermediate status is detected (transition from
one position to another)
Disconnect switch 1 phase B is closed
Disconnect switch 1 phase B is open
Disconnect switch 1 phase B bad status is detected (discrepancy between
the 89/a and 89/b contacts)
Disconnect switch 1 phase B intermediate status is detected (transition from
one position to another)
Disconnect switch 1 phase C is closed
Disconnect switch 1 phase C is open
Disconnect switch 1 phase C bad status is detected (discrepancy between
the 89/a and 89/b contacts)
Disconnect switch 1 phase C intermediate status is detected (transition from
one position to another)
Disconnect switch 1 bad status is detected on any pole
Switch 1 tagged so manual trip and close is blocked
Switch 1 not tagged
Switch 1 status manually substituted to closed
Switch 1 status manually substituted to open
Switch 1 control interlocking is bypassed manually
Switch 1 control interlocking is not bypassed manually
SWITCH 2 to 24
Same set of operands as shown for SWITCH 1
ELEMENT:
Teleprotection
channel tests
TELEPRO CH1 FAIL
TELEPRO CH2 FAIL
TELEPRO CH1 ID FAIL
TELEPRO CH2 ID FAIL
TELEPRO CH1 CRC FAIL
TELEPRO CH2 CRC FAIL
TELEPRO CH1 PKT LOST
TELEPRO CH2 PKT LOST
Channel 1 failed
Channel 2 failed
The ID check for a peer relay on channel 1 has failed
The ID check for a peer relay on channel 2 has failed
CRC detected packet corruption on channel 1
CRC detected packet corruption on channel 2
CRC detected lost packet on channel 1
CRC detected lost packet on channel 2
ELEMENT:
Teleprotection
inputs/outputs
TELEPRO INPUT 1-1 On

TELEPRO INPUT 1-16 On
TELEPRO INPUT 2-1 On

TELEPRO INPUT 2-16 On
Flag is set, Logic =1

Flag is set, Logic =1
Flag is set, Logic =1

Flag is set, Logic =1
ELEMENT:
Disconnect switch
5
SWITCH 1 A INTERM
SWITCH 1 B CLSD
SWITCH 1 B OPEN
SWITCH 1 B BAD ST
SWITCH 1 B INTERM
SWITCH 1 C CLSD
SWITCH 1 C OPEN
SWITCH 1 C BAD ST
SWITCH 1 C INTERM
5-162
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
Operand type
Operand syntax
Operand description
ELEMENT:
Trip bus
TRIP BUS 1 PKP
TRIP BUS 1 OP
Asserted when the trip bus 1 element picks up
Asserted when the trip bus 1 element operates
TRIP BUS 2 to 6
Same set of operands as shown for TRIP BUS 1
FIXED OPERANDS
Off
Logic = 0. Does nothing and can be used as a delimiter in an equation list;
used as ‘Disable’ by other features.
On
Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact inputs
Cont Ip 1 On
Cont Ip 2 On

Cont Ip 1 Off
Cont Ip 2 Off

Cont Ip 120 On
Cont Ip 120 Off
(does not appear unless ordered)
(does not appear unless ordered)

(does not appear unless ordered)
(does not appear unless ordered)

(does not appear unless ordered)
(does not appear unless ordered)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact outputs,
current
(from detector on
form-A output only)
Cont Op 1 IOn
Cont Op 2 IOn

Cont Op 72 IOn
(does not appear unless ordered)
(does not appear unless ordered)

(does not appear unless ordered)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact outputs,
voltage
(from detector on
form-A output only)
Cont Op 1 VOn
Cont Op 2 VOn

Cont Op 72 VOn
(does not appear unless ordered)
(does not appear unless ordered)

(does not appear unless ordered)
Cont Op 1 VOff
Cont Op 2 VOff

Cont Op 72 VOff
(does not appear unless ordered)
(does not appear unless ordered)

(does not appear unless ordered)
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Direct inputs
DIRECT INPUT 1 On

DIRECT INPUT 64 On
Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
RxGOOSE DPS
RxG DPS 1 BAD
RxG DPS 1 INTERM
Asserted while the RxGOOSE double-point status input is in the bad state
Asserted while the RxGOOSE double-point status input is in the intermediate
state
Asserted while the RxGOOSE double-point status input is off
Asserted while the RxGOOSE double-point status input is on
RxG DPS 1 OFF
RxG DPS 1 ON
RxG DPS 2 to 5
Same set of operands as per RxG DPS 1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
RxGOOSE Booleans
RxG Bool 1 On
RxG Bool 2 On
RxG Bool 3 On

RxG Bool 256 On
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Virtual inputs
Virt Ip 1 On
Virt Ip 2 On
Virt Ip 3 On

Virt Ip 128 On
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Virtual outputs
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Op 3 On

Virt Op 256 On
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5
5-163
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Operand type
Operand syntax
Operand description
LED INDICATORS:
Enhanced and basic
front panels
LED IN SERVICE
LED TROUBLE
LED TEST MODE
LED TRIP
LED ALARM
LED PICKUP
LED VOLTAGE
LED CURRENT
LED FREQUENCY
LED OTHER
LED PHASE A
LED PHASE B
LED PHASE C
LED NEUTRAL/GROUND
Asserted when the front panel IN SERVICE LED is on
Asserted when the front panel TROUBLE LED is on
Asserted when the front panel TEST MODE LED is on
Asserted when the front panel TRIP LED is on
Asserted when the front panel ALARM LED is on
Asserted when an element picks up and to turn PICKUP LED on
Asserted when a voltage element involved and to turn VOLTAGE LED on
Asserted when a current element involved and to turn CURRENT LED on
Asserted when a frequency element involved and to turn FREQUENCY LED on
Asserted when a composite element involved and to turn OTHER LED on
Asserted when phase A involved and to turn PHASE A LED on
Asserted when phase B involved and to turn PHASE B LED on
Asserted when phase C involved and to turn PHASE C LED on
Asserted when a neutral or ground element involved and to turn NEUTRAL/
GROUND LED on
LED INDICATORS:
LED IN SERVICE
Graphical front panel LED TROUBLE
LED TEST MODE
LED TRIP
LED ALARM
LED PICKUP
LED VOLTAGE
LED CURRENT
LED FREQUENCY
LED OTHER
5
LED PHASE A
LED PHASE B
LED PHASE C
LED NEUTRAL/GROUND
LED INDICATORS:
LED test
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
LED USER 1
LED INDICATORS:
User-programmable
LEDs
Enhanced and basic
front panels
LED USER 2 to 48
EVENT CAUSE LED 1
LED INDICATORS:
User-programmable
EVENT CAUSE LED 2 to 9
LEDs
Graphical front panel
Asserted when the front panel IN SERVICE LED is on
Asserted when the front panel TROUBLE LED is on
Asserted when the front panel TEST MODE LED is on
Asserted when the front panel TRIP LED is on
Asserted when the front panel ALARM LED is on
Asserted when an element picks up and to turn Event Cause LED 1 on by
default
Asserted when a voltage element involved and to turn Event Cause LED 2 on
by default
Asserted when a current element involved and to turn Event Cause LED 3 on
by default
Asserted when a frequency element involved and to turn Event Cause LED 4
on by default
Asserted when a composite element involved and to turn Event Cause LED 5
on by default
Asserted when phase A involved and to turn Event Cause LED 6 on by default
Asserted when phase B involved and to turn Event Cause LED 7 on by default
Asserted when phase C involved and to turn Event Cause LED 8 on by default
Asserted when a neutral or ground element involved and to turn Event Cause
LED 9 on by default
An LED test has been initiated and has not finished
Asserted when user-programmable LED 1 is on
The operand above is available for user-programmable LEDs 2 through 48
Asserted when event cause LED 1 is on
Same operand as EVENT CAUSE LED 1
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LOC SETG OFF
ACCESS LOC SETG ON
ACCESS LOC CMND OFF
ACCESS LOC CMND ON
ACCESS REM SETG OFF
ACCESS REM SETG ON
ACCESS REM CMND OFF
ACCESS REM CMND ON
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
UNAUTH FW ATTEMPT
Asserted when local setting access is disabled
Asserted when local setting access is enabled
Asserted when local command access is disabled
Asserted when local command access is enabled
Asserted when remote setting access is disabled
Asserted when remote setting access is enabled
Asserted when remote command access is disabled
Asserted when remote command access is enabled
Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password protected
level of the C30
Firmware upgrade attempted when LOCK FIRMWARE setting is Enabled
RxGOOSE
RxGOOSE 1 On

RxGOOSE 64 On
Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1
RxGOOSE 1 Off

RxGOOSE 64 Off
Flag is set, logic=1

Flag is set, logic=1
5-164
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Operand type
RESETTING
FLEXLOGIC
Operand syntax
Operand description
<RxGOOSE Boolean1 ID> On
<RxGOOSE DPS1 ID> Bad
<RxGOOSE DPS1 ID> Interm
<RxGOOSE DPS1 ID> Off
<RxGOOSE DPS1 ID> On
RxGOOSE Analog1 Expn St
RxGOOSE INVLD ON
RxGOOSE QUES ON
Replace bracketed text with RxGOOSE Boolean1 status of "true"
Replace bracketed text with RxGOOSE DPS1 status of "bad-state"
Replace bracketed text with RxGOOSE DPS1 status is "intermediate-state"
Replace bracketed text with RxGOOSE DPS1 status is "off"
Replace bracketed text with RxGOOSE DPS1 status is "on"
RxGOOSE Analog In1 Expression status
One or more Rx GOOSE Inputs are received with Invalid quality
One or more Rx GOOSE Inputs are received with questionable quality
RESET OP
RESET OP (COMMS)
RESET OP (OPERAND)
Reset command is operated (set by all three operands below)
Communications source of the reset command
Operand (assigned in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS  RESETTING menu) source of
the reset command
Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command
Reset annunciator command is operated (set by any operands below)
Reset operand (assigned in INPUTS/OUTPUTS  RESETTING
ANNUNCIATOR menu) source of the reset annunciator command
Reset manual (pushbutton or EnerVista software) source of the reset
annunciator command
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON)
RESET ANCTR OP
RESET ANCTR OP(OPRD)
RESET ANCTR OP(MNUL)
GRAPHICAL FRONT
PANEL
ENABLE CTRL FROM GFP
Controls enabled when operand assigned to Enable Controls From GFP
setting is ON. An Enable Control side pushbutton displays, which displays
other side pushbuttons.
Disabled otherwise, and Enable Control side pushbutton does not display.
SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
(See Relay Self-tests
descriptions in
Chapter 7:
Commands and
Targets)
ANY MAJOR ERROR
ANY MINOR ERROR
ANY SELF-TESTS
BATTERY FAIL
Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error)
Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error)
Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error)
The battery is weak or not functioning. Replace as outlined in the
Maintenance chapter.
Relay is not synchronized to the international time standard
A direct device is configured but not connected
The Direct I/O settings is for a connection that is not in a ring
The configuration of modules does not match the stored order code
A FlexLogic equation is incorrect
"Bad IRIG-B Signal" self-test. See Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
A difference is detected between the desired and actual latch contact state
A subset of the minor self-test errors generated, see Chapter 7
Link failure detected. See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets
"Bad PTP Signal" self-test as described in Chapter 7
One or more GOOSE messages are not being received
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets
SNTP server is not responding
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets
Monitors ambient temperature and maximum operating temperature
The product SETUP > INSTALLATION > RELAYS SETTINGS setting is not
programmed
Any device settings changed over any available interface; operand is
asserted for at least one second and then self-reset
CLOCK UNSYNCHRONIZED
DIRECT DEVICE OFF
DIRECT RING BREAK
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN
IRIG-B FAILURE
LATCHING OUT ERROR
MAINTENANCE ALERT
FIRST ETHERNET FAIL
PROCESS BUS FAILURE
PTP FAILURE
RxGOOSE OFF
RRTD COMM FAIL
SECOND ETHERNET FAIL
THIRD ETHERNET FAIL
SNTP FAILURE
SYSTEM EXCEPTION
TEMP MONITOR
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
SETTING CHANGED
SIMULATION
TxGOOSE SIM ON
IED IN SIM MODE
Sim bit enabled in all Tx GOOSE
Relay is in simulation mode and accepts simulated GOOSE and SV values
TEMPERATURE
MONITOR
TEMP MONITOR
Asserted while the ambient temperature is greater than the maximum
operating temperature (80°C)
USERPROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS
PUSHBUTTON 1 ON
PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF
ANY PB ON
Pushbutton number 1 is in the “On” position
Pushbutton number 1 is in the “Off” position
Any of 12 pushbuttons is in the “On” position
PUSHBUTTON 2 to 6, 12, 16, or 48 Same set of operands as PUSHBUTTON 1
depending on front panel
Some operands can be re-named. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID (identification)
of contact inputs and outputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name or
ID of any of these operands, the assigned name appears in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in the
FlexLogic operands table.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-165
5
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated in the following table, and the operators available in FlexLogic are listed
in the FlexLogic operators table.
Table 5-20: FlexLogic gate characteristics
Gates
Number of inputs
Output is ‘1’ (= ON) if...
NOT
1
input is ‘0’
OR
2 to 16
any input is ‘1’
AND
2 to 16
all inputs are ‘1’
NOR
2 to 16
all inputs are ‘0’
NAND
2 to 16
any input is ‘0’
XOR
2
only one input is ‘1’
Table 5-21: FlexLogic operators
5
Type
Syntax
Description
Editor
INSERT
Insert a parameter in an equation list
DELETE
Delete a parameter from an equation list
End
END
The first END encountered signifies the last entry in
the list of processed FlexLogic parameters
One-shot
POSITIVE ONE SHOT
One shot that responds to a positive going edge
NEGATIVE ONE SHOT
One shot that responds to a negative going edge
DUAL ONE SHOT
One shot that responds to both the positive and
negative going edges
NOT
Logical NOT
Operates on the previous parameter
OR(2)

OR(16)
2 input OR gate

16 input OR gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters

Operates on the 16 previous parameters
AND(2)

AND(16)
2 input AND gate

16 input AND gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters

Operates on the 16 previous parameters
NOR(2)

NOR(16)
2 input NOR gate

16 input NOR gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters

Operates on the 16 previous parameters
NAND(2)

NAND(16)
2 input NAND gate

16 input NAND gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters

Operates on the 16 previous parameters
XOR(2)
2 input Exclusive OR gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters
LATCH (S,R)
Latch (set, reset): reset-dominant
The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is the
reset input. The parameter preceding the
reset input is the set input.
Timer
TIMER 1

TIMER 32
Timer set with FlexLogic timer 1 settings

Timer set with FlexLogic timer 32 settings
The timer is started by the preceding
parameter. The output of the timer is
TIMER #.
Assign
virtual
output
= Virt Op 1

= Virt Op 256
Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual
output 1

Assigns previous FlexLogic operand to virtual
output 256
The virtual output is set by the preceding
parameter
Logic
gate
Notes
A ‘one shot’ refers to a single input gate that
generates a pulse in response to an edge on
the input. The output from a ‘one shot’ is
True (positive) for only one pass through the
FlexLogic equation. There is a maximum of
64 ‘one shots.’
5.6.2 FlexLogic rules
When forming a FlexLogic equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:
1.
Operands must precede the operator that uses the operands as inputs.
2.
Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as
an input to two or more operators.
5-166
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
3.
Assigning the output of an operator to a virtual output terminates the equation.
4.
A timer operator (for example, "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (for example, " = Virt Op 1") can be used once
only. If this rule is broken, a syntax error is declared.
5.6.3 FlexLogic evaluation
Each equation is evaluated in the ascending order in which the parameters have been entered.
FlexLogic provides built-in latches that by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the set
input has been asserted. These built-in latches are reset dominant, meaning that if logical "1" is applied to both set
and reset entries simultaneously, then the output of the latch is logical "0." However, they are volatile, meaning that
they reset upon removal of control power.
When making changes to FlexLogic entries in the settings, all FlexLogic equations are re-compiled whenever any
new FlexLogic entry value is entered, and as a result of the re-compile all latches are reset automatically.
To implement FlexLogic using a graphical user interface, see the FlexLogic Design and Monitoring using Engineer
section in the previous chapter.
5.6.4 FlexLogic example
This section provides an example of logic implementation for a typical application. The sequence of steps is important to
minimize the work to develop the relay settings. Note that the example in the following figure demonstrates the procedure,
not to solve a specific application situation.
Note that there is also a graphical interface with which to draw logic and populate FlexLogic equation entries. See the
Engineer content at the end of the previous chapter.
In the example, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce virtual outputs 1 and 2, and is only a
part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic, it is important to make a note of each virtual output used; a
virtual output designation (1 to 256) can be assigned only once.
Figure 5-74: Logic example
Virtual output 1
state = On
Virtual output 2
state = On
Set
Latch
OR #1
Virtual input 1
state = On
Reset
XOR
Timer 2
Digital element 1
state = Pickup
OR #2
Timer 1
Digital element 2
state = Operated
AND
Time Delay
on dropout
Operate output
relay H1
(200 ms)
Time delay
on pickup
(800 ms)
Contact input H1c
state = Closed
1.
827025A2.CDR
Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic
operators. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once done, count the inputs
to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic limits, which is unlikely but possible. If
the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25
inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16), 17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs
from these two gates to AND(2).
Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the
operator is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a
virtual output.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-167
5
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
For the example shown, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must therefore
be made a virtual output and assigned the next available number (that is, Virtual Output 3). The final output must also
be assigned to a virtual output as virtual output 4, which is programmed in the contact output section to operate relay
H1 (that is, contact output H1).
Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic equations with outputs of virtual output 3 and
virtual output 4, shown as follows.
Figure 5-75: Logic example with virtual outputs
Virtual output 1
state = On
Virtual output 2
state = On
Set
Latch
OR #1
Virtual input 1
state = On
Reset
Timer 2
XOR
Time delay
on dropout
OR #2
Digital element 1
state = Pickup
Virtual output 4
(200 ms)
Timer 1
Digital element 1
state = Operated
AND
Time delay
on pickup
(800 ms)
Contact input H1c
state = Closed
Virtual output 3
827026A2.CDR
5
2.
Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce virtual output 3, as this output is used as an operand in the virtual
output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that is used as an operand first, so that when these operands
are required they already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific virtual output). The logic for virtual output 3
is shown as follows with the final output assigned.
Figure 5-76: Logic for virtual output 3
Digital element 2
state= Operated
AND(2)
Virtual output 3
Contact input H1c
state = Closed
827027A2.CDR
3.
Prepare a logic diagram for virtual output 4, replacing the logic ahead of virtual output 3 with a symbol identified as
virtual output 3, shown as follows.
5-168
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
Figure 5-77: Logic for virtual output 4
Virtual output 1
state = On
Virtual output 2
state = On
Set
Latch
OR #1
Virtual input 1
state = On
Reset
Timer 2
XOR
OR #2
Digital element 1
state = Pickup
Time delay
on dropout
Virtual output 4
(200 ms)
Timer 1
Time delay
on pickup
Virtual output 3
state = On
(800 ms)
Contact input H1c
state = Closed
4.
827028A2.CDR
Program the FlexLogic equation for virtual output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic parameters. The
equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the
output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended
to list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final outputs are arbitrarily identified as parameter
99, and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic, it is suggested
that a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared shown as follows.
Figure 5-78: FlexLogic worksheet
5
01
02
03
04
05
.....
97
98
99
827029A1.VSD
5.
Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows:
–
99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This
parameter is therefore "= Virt Op 3".
–
98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a
2-input AND so the parameter is “AND(2)”. Note that FlexLogic rules require that the number of inputs to most
types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND operates on the
two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower.
–
97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next
parameter is “NOT”. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter
input next.
–
96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to
be set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example that the state is to be ON for a closed
contact. The operand is therefore “Cont Ip H1c On”.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-169
FLEXLOGIC
–
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital
element 2. This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP".
Writing the parameters in numerical order forms the equation for virtual output 3:
[95] DIG ELEM 2 OP
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
[97] NOT
[98] AND(2)
[99] = Virt Op 3
It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters produces the required logic by converting the set of
parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown in the figure, which is compared to the logic for
virtual output 3 diagram as a check.
Figure 5-79: FlexLogic equation for virtual output 3
95
96
97
98
99
6.
5
FlexLogic entry:
Dig Element 2 (DE2) OP
FlexLogic entry:
Cont Ip 2 On (H1c)
FlexLogic entry:
NOT
FlexLogic entry:
AND (2)
FlexLogic entry:
= Virt Op 3 (VO3)
AND
Virtual output 3
827030A2.CDR
Repeating the process described for virtual output 3, select the FlexLogic parameters for Virtual Output 4.
–
99: The final output of the equation is virtual output 4, which is parameter “= Virt Op 4".
–
98: The operator preceding the output is timer 2, which is operand “TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for
the timer are established in the timer programming section.
–
97: The operator preceding timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter “OR(3)”.
–
96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand “Cont Ip H1c On”.
–
95: The center input to OR #2 is operand “TIMER 1".
–
94: The input to timer 1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
–
93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand “LATCH (S,R)”.
–
92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR,
which is parameter “OR(4)”.
–
91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
–
90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand “XOR(2)”.
–
89: The lower input to the XOR is operand “DIG ELEM 1 PKP”.
–
88: The upper input to the XOR is operand “Virt Ip 1 On".
–
87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 2 On".
–
86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 1 On".
–
85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand “Virt Op 4 On".
The equation for virtual output 4 is:
[85] Virt Op 4 On
[86] Virt Op 1 On
[87] Virt Op 2 On
[88] Virt Ip 1 On
[89] DIG ELEM 1 PKP
[90] XOR(2)
[91] Virt Op 3 On
[92] OR(4)
[93] LATCH (S,R)
[94] Virt Op 3 On
[95] TIMER 1
[96] Cont Ip H1c On
5-170
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
[97] OR(3)
[98] TIMER 2
[99] = Virt Op 4
Now check that the selection of parameters produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a
logic diagram. The result is shown in the figure, which is compared to the logic for virtual output 4 diagram as a check.
Figure 5-80: FlexLogic equation for virtual output 4
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
7.
FlexLogic entry:
Virt Op 4 On (VO4)
FlexLogic entry:
Virt Op 1 On (VO1)
FlexLogic entry:
Virt Op 2 On (VO2)
FlexLogic entry:
Virt Ip 1 On (VI1)
FlexLogic entry:
Dig Element 1 (DE1) PKP
FlexLogic entry:
XOR (2 Input)
FlexLogic entry:
Virt Op 3 On (VO3)
FlexLogic entry:
OR (4 Input)
FlexLogic entry:
Latch (Set, Reset)
FlexLogic entry:
Virt Op 3 On (VO3)
FlexLogic entry:
Timer 1
FlexLogic entry:
Cont Ip 2 On (H1c)
FlexLogic entry:
OR (3 Input)
FlexLogic entry:
Timer 2
FlexLogic entry:
=Virt Op 4 (VO4)
Set
XOR
Latch
Reset
OR
OR
T2
Virtual output 4
T1
5
827031A2.CDR
Now write the complete FlexLogic expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble the
equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that are used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases
where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this can be difficult to achieve, but in most cases does not cause
problems as all logic is calculated at least four times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused
by sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic before it is placed in service.
In the following equation, virtual output 3 is used as an input to both latch 1 and timer 1 as arranged in the following
order:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
Cont Ip H1c On
NOT
AND(2)
= Virt Op 3
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Ip 1 On
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
Virt Op 3 On
OR(4)
LATCH (S,R)
Virt Op 3 On
TIMER 1
Cont Ip H1c On
OR(3)
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-171
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
TIMER 2
= Virt Op 4
END
In this expression, the virtual output 4 input to the four-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a form of
feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct.
8.
Always test the logic after it is loaded into the relay, in the same way as has been used in the past. Testing can be
simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic equations. The equations are evaluated up
to the first "END" operator.
The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and
the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.
5.6.5 FlexLogic equation editor
SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
 FLEXLOGIC
 EQUATION EDITOR

FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 1
END
Range: FlexLogic operands


FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 1024
END
Range: FlexLogic operands
There are 1,024 FlexLogic entries available, numbered from 1 to 1024, with default END entry settings. If a "Disabled"
element is selected as a FlexLogic entry, the associated state flag is never set to ‘1’. Press the +/– key when editing
FlexLogic equations to quickly scan through the major parameter types.
5
5.6.6 FlexLogic timers
SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  FLEXLOGIC TIMERS  FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(64)
 FLEXLOGIC
 TIMER 1

TIMER 1
TYPE: millisecond
Range: millisecond, second, minute

TIMER 1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0
Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1

TIMER 1 DROPOUT
DELAY: 0
Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
There are 64 identical FlexLogic timers available. These timers are used as operators for FlexLogic equations.
TIMER 1 TYPE — Selects the time measurement unit.
TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY — Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0."
TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY — Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0."
5.6.7 FlexElements
SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  FLEXELEMENTS  FLEXELEMENT 1(16)
 FLEXELEMENT 1

5-172

FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME:
FxE 1
Range: up to six alphanumeric characters

FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN:
Off
Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter

FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN:
Off
Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC

FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
MODE: SIGNED
Range: SIGNED, ABSOLUTE

FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
MODE: LEVEL
Range: LEVEL, DELTA

FLEXELEMENT 1
DIRECTION: OVER
Range: OVER, UNDER

FLEXELEMENT 1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001

FLEXELEMENT 1
HYSTERESIS: 3.0%
Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1

FLEXELEMENT 1 dt
UNIT: Milliseconds
Range: Milliseconds, Seconds, Minutes

FLEXELEMENT 1 dt:
20
Range: 20 to 86400 in steps of 1

FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001

FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

FLEXELEMENT 1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Disabled, Latched

FLEXELEMENT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
5
A FlexElement is a universal comparator used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a net
difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal can be treated as a signed
number or its absolute value can be used.
FlexElements run every half power cycle (every four protection passes).
The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period
of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold, as
per your choice.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-173
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-81: FlexElement logic
6(77,1*
6(77,1*
)/(;(/(0(17
)81&7,21
)/(;(/(0(17,1387
02'(
)/(;(/(0(17&203
02'(
)/(;(/(0(17
',5(&7,21
(QDEOHG 6(77,1*
)/(;(/(0(173,&.83
)/(;(/(0(17%/.
$1'
2II )/(;(/(0(17,1387
+<67(5(6,6
)/(;(/(0(17GW81,7
6(77,1*
)/(;(/(0(17GW
)/(;(/(0(17,1
$FWXDO9DOXH
)/(;(/(0(17,1
$FWXDO9DOXH
581
6(77,1*
)/(;(/(0(173.3
'(/$<
)/(;(/(0(17567
'(/$<
W3.3
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
)[(23
W567
)[('32
)[(3.3
$&78$/9$/8(
)OH[(OHPHQW2S6LJ
$&'5
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN — This setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if
5
this setting is set to “Off.” For proper operation of the element, at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
does not assert its output operands.
FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN — Specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement. Zero is assumed as the input if this setting is
set to “Off.” For proper operation of the element, at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element does not
assert its output operands. This input is used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the element
respond to a differential signal, such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element does not operate
if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build the
effective operating signal.
The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to “Signed” The
element responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to “Absolute.” Sample applications for
the “Absolute” setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in
both directions, monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend.
The element responds directly to its operating signal—as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN and
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings—if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to “Level.” The element responds to the
rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to “Delta.” In this case, the FLEXELEMENT
1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of change is derived.
FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION — Enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The following
figure explains the application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP, and FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS
settings.
5-174
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
Figure 5-82: FlexElement direction, pickup, and hysteresis
)/(;(/(0(173.3
)/(;(/(0(17
',5(&7,21 2YHU
3,&.83
+<67(5(6,6 RI3,&.83
)OH[(OHPHQW 6LJ2S
)/(;(/(0(173.3
)/(;(/(0(17
',5(&7,21 2YHU
3,&.83
+<67(5(6,6 RI3,&.83
)OH[(OHPHQW 6LJ2S
$&'5
In conjunction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting, the element can be programmed to provide two extra
characteristics, as shown in the following figure.
5
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-175
FLEXLOGIC
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-83: FlexElement input mode setting
)/(;(/(0(173.3
)/(;(/(0(17
',5(&7,21 2YHU
)/(;(/(0(17,1387
02'( 6LJQHG
)OH[(OHPHQW2S6LJ
)/(;(/(0(173.3
)/(;(/(0(17
',5(&7,21 2YHU
)/(;(/(0(17,1387
02'( $EVROXWH
)OH[(OHPHQW2S6LJ
)/(;(/(0(173.3
)/(;(/(0(17
',5(&7,21 8QGHU
)/(;(/(0(17,1387
02'( 6LJQHG
5
)OH[(OHPHQW2S6LJ
)/(;(/(0(173.3
)/(;(/(0(17
',5(&7,21 8QGHU
)/(;(/(0(17,1387
02'( $EVROXWH
)OH[(OHPHQW2S6LJ
$&'5
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP — This setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If
set to “Over,” the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. If set to “Under,” the
element picks up when the operating signal falls below the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value.
When using FlexElements for Voltage Elements, 1 pu is always equal to phase to ground voltage nominal secondary
voltage, even if you select a phase to phase voltage as an operating quantity.
FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS — This setting controls the element dropout. Notice that both the operating signal and the
pickup threshold can be negative, facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexElement can be
programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting is entered in
per-unit values using the following definitions of the base units.
Table 5-22: FlexElement base units
Unit
Description
DCmA
BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and –IN inputs
DELTA TIME
BASE = 1 µs
5-176
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
Unit
Description
FREQUENCY
fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE
BASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR
PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs
BASE = 100°C
SOURCE CURRENT
IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE POWER
PBASE = maximum value of VBASE  IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE
VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS — This setting defines the pickup–dropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the
hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FlexElement Direction, Pickup, and Hysteresis diagram.
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT — Specifies the time unit for the setting FLEXELEMENT 1 dt. This setting is applicable only if
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to “Delta.”
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt — Specifies duration of the time interval for the rate of change mode of operation. This setting is
applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to “Delta.”
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY — Specifies the pickup delay of the element.
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY — Specifies the reset delay of the element.
5.6.8 Non-volatile latches
SETTINGS  FLEXLOGIC  NON-VOLATILE LATCHES  LATCH 1(16)
 LATCH 1


LATCH 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

LATCH 1 ID:
NV Latch 1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

LATCH 1 TYPE:
Reset Dominant
Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant

LATCH 1 SET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

LATCH 1 RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

LATCH 1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

LATCH 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
5
The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and do not reset upon restart after the relay
is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently blocking relay functions,
such as Autorecloser, until a deliberate interface action resets the latch.
LATCH 1 TYPE — This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant.
LATCH 1 SET — If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operands 'sets' Latch 1.
LATCH 1 RESET — If asserted, the specified FlexLogic operand 'resets' Latch 1.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-177
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-84: Non-volatile latch operation table (N = 1 to 16) and logic
6(77,1*
6(77,1*
/$7&+)81&7,21
/$7&+7<3(
(QDEOHG 581
6(77,1*
/$7&+6(7
)/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
6(7
2II /$7&+21
/$7&+2))
6(77,1*
/$7&+5(6(7
2II 5(6(7
$&'5
Latch n type Latch n
set
Latch n
reset
Latch n
on
Latch n
off
Reset
Dominant
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Previous
State
Previous
State
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Previous
State
Previous
State
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Set
Dominant
5
5.7 Control elements
5.7.1 Overview
Control elements are used for control rather than protection. See the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of
this chapter for information.
5.7.2 Trip bus
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  TRIP BUS  TRIP BUS 1(6)
 TRIP BUS 1


TRIP BUS 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

TRIP BUS 1 RESET
DELAY: 0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

5-178
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS

TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

TRIP BUS 1 RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

TRIP BUS 1:
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

TRIP BUS 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
The trip bus element allows aggregating outputs of protection and control elements without using FlexLogic and assigning
them a simple and effective manner. Each trip bus can be assigned for either trip or alarm actions. Simple trip conditioning
such as latch, delay, and seal-in delay are available.
The easiest way to assign element outputs to a trip bus is through the EnerVista software under Settings > Protection
Summary. Navigate to a specific protection or control protection element and check the bus box by hovering over the
blank check box and selecting an option that displays. Once the required element is selected for a specific bus, a list of
element operate-type operands are displayed and can be assigned to a trip bus. If more than one operate-type operand is
required, it can be assigned directly from the trip bus menu.
Figure 5-85: Trip bus fields in the protection summary
5
The following settings are available.
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK — The trip bus output is blocked when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted.
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP DELAY — This setting specifies a time delay to produce an output depending on how output is used.
TRIP BUS 1 RESET DELAY — This setting specifies a time delay to reset an output command. Set the time delay long enough
to allow the breaker or contactor to perform a required action.
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1 to TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16 — These settings select a FlexLogic operand to be assigned as an input to the trip
bus.
TRIP BUS 1 LATCHING — This setting enables or disables latching of the trip bus output. This is typically used when lockout is
required or user acknowledgement of the relay response is required.
TRIP BUS 1 RESET — The trip bus output is reset when the operand assigned to this setting is asserted. Note that the RESET OP
operand is pre-wired to the reset gate of the latch, As such, a reset command from the front panel interface or via
communications resets the trip bus output.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-179
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-86: Trip bus logic
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 1
SETTINGS
= Off
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 2
= Off
Non-volatile,
set-dominant
***
OR
AND
S
TRIP BUS 1 INPUT 16
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 OP
TPKP
Latch
= Off
TRIP BUS 1 PICKUP
DELAY
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
DELAY
R
TRST
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
FUNCTION
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 BLOCK
= Off
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
TRIP BUS 1 PKP
AND
SETTINGS
TRIP BUS 1
LATCHING
= Enabled
TRIP BUS 1 RESET
= Off
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESET OP
5
842023A1.CDR
5.7.3 Selector switch
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SELECTOR SWITCH  SELECTOR SWITCH 1(2)
 SELECTOR SWITCH 1

5-180

SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SELECTOR 1 FULL
RANGE: 7
Range: 1 to 7 in steps of 1

SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT:
5.0 s
Range: 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1

SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP
MODE: Time-out
Range: Time-out, Acknowledge

SELECTOR 1 ACK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SELECTOR 1 3BIT
MODE: Time-out
Range: Time-out, Acknowledge

SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP
MODE: Restore
Range: Restore, Synchronize, Sync/Restore
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS

SELECTOR 1 TARGETS:
Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

SELECTOR 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The selector switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group
control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic.
The element provides for two control inputs. The step-up control allows stepping through selector position one step at a
time with each pulse of the control input, such as a user-programmable pushbutton. The three-bit control input allows
setting the selector to the position defined by a three-bit word.
The element allows pre-selecting a new position without applying it. The pre-selected position gets applied either after
time-out or upon acknowledgement via separate inputs (user setting). The selector position is stored in non-volatile
memory. Upon power-up, either the previous position is restored or the relay synchronizes to the current three-bit word
(user setting). Basic alarm functionality alerts the user under abnormal conditions; for example, the three-bit control input
being out of range.
A selector switch runs every two power cycles.
SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE — This setting defines the upper position of the selector. When stepping up through available
positions of the selector, the upper position wraps up to the lower position (position 1). When using a direct three-bit control
word for programming the selector to a desired position, the change would take place only if the control word is within the
range of 1 to the SELECTOR FULL RANGE. If the control word is outside the range, an alarm is established by setting the
SELECTOR ALARM FlexLogic operand for three seconds.
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT — This setting defines the time-out period for the selector. This value is used by the relay in the
following two ways. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is “Time-out,” the setting specifies the required period of inactivity
of the control input after which the pre-selected position is automatically applied. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is
“Acknowledge,” the setting specifies the period of time for the acknowledging input to appear. The timer is re-started by
any activity of the control input. The acknowledging input must come before the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT timer expires;
otherwise, the change does not take place and an alarm is set.
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP — This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch. The switch is shifted to a new position at
each rising edge of this signal. The position changes incrementally, wrapping up from the last (SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE) to
the first (position 1). Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every 50 ms. After each rising
edge of the assigned operand, the time-out timer is restarted and the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POS Z CHNG INITIATED target
message is displayed, where Z the pre-selected position. The message is displayed for the time specified by the FLASH
MESSAGE TIME setting. The pre-selected position is applied after the selector times out (“Time-out” mode), or when the
acknowledging signal appears before the element times out (“Acknowledge” mode). When the new position is applied, the
relay displays the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POSITION Z IN USE message. Typically, a user-programmable pushbutton is
configured as the stepping up control input.
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE — This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out,” the selector
changes its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not
require any explicit confirmation of the intent to change the selector's position. When set to “Acknowledge,” the selector
changes its position only after the intent is confirmed through a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging
signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector does not accept the change and an alarm is
established by setting the SELECTOR STP ALARM output FlexLogic operand for three seconds.
SELECTOR 1 ACK — This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned operand. This setting is active only under “Acknowledge” mode of
operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT setting after the last
activity of the control input. A user-programmable pushbutton is typically configured as the acknowledging input.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-181
5
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0, A1, and A2 — These settings specify a three-bit control input of the selector. The three-bit control word
pre-selects the position using the following encoding convention:
A2
A1
A0
Position
0
0
0
rest
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
2
0
1
1
3
1
0
0
4
1
0
1
5
1
1
0
6
1
1
1
7
The “rest” position (0, 0, 0) does not generate an action and is intended for situations when the device generating the threebit control word is having a problem. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is “Time-out,” the pre-selected position is applied in
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT seconds after the last activity of the three-bit input. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is “Acknowledge,”
the pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK acknowledging input.
The stepping up control input (SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP) and the three-bit control inputs (SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 through A2) lock-out
mutually: once the stepping up sequence is initiated, the three-bit control input is inactive; once the three-bit control
sequence is initiated, the stepping up input is inactive.
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE — This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out,” the selector changes
5
its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not require
explicit confirmation to change the selector position. When set to “Acknowledge,” the selector changes its position only
after confirmation via a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined
period of time, the selector rejects the change and an alarm established by invoking the SELECTOR BIT ALARM FlexLogic
operand for three seconds.
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK — This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the three-bit control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned FlexLogic operand. This setting is active only under the
“Acknowledge” mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR TIMEOUT setting after the last activity of the three-bit control inputs. Note that the stepping up control input and three-bit
control input have independent acknowledging signals (SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK, accordingly).
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE — This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay.
When set to “Restore,” the last position of the selector (stored in the non-volatile memory) is restored after powering up the
relay. If the position restored from memory is out of range, position 0 (no output operand selected) is applied and an alarm
is set (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).
When set to “Synchronize,” the selector switch acts as follows. For two power cycles, the selector applies position 0 to the
switch and activates SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM. After two power cycles expire, the selector synchronizes to the position
dictated by the three-bit control input. This operation does not wait for time-out or the acknowledging input. When the
synchronization attempt is unsuccessful (that is, the three-bit input is not available (0,0,0) or out of range), then the selector
switch output is set to position 0 (no output operand selected) and an alarm is established (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).
The operation of “Synch/Restore” mode is similar to the “Synchronize” mode. The only difference is that after an
unsuccessful synchronization attempt, the switch attempts to restore the position stored in the relay memory. The “Synch/
Restore” mode is useful for applications where the selector switch is employed to change the setting group in redundant
(two relay) protection schemes.
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS — If enabled, the following events are logged:
Event name
Description
SELECTOR 1 POS Z
Selector 1 changed its position to Z
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
The selector position pre-selected via the stepping up control input has not been confirmed before the
time out
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM
The selector position pre-selected via the three-bit control input has not been confirmed before the time
out
5-182
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
The following figures illustrate the operation of the selector switch. In these diagrams, “T” represents a time-out setting.
Figure 5-87: Time-out mode
TIME OUT MODE OF OPERATION
pre-existing
position 2
changed to 4 with
a pushbutton
changed to 1 with
a 3-bit input
changed to 2 with a
pushbutton
changed to 7 with
a 3-bit input
STEP-UP
T
T
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
T
T
POS 1
5
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842737A1.CDR
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-183
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-88: Acknowledge mode
ACKNOWLEDGE MODE OF OPERATION
pre-existing
position 2
changed to 4 with
a pushbutton
changed to 1 with
a 3-bit input
changed to 2 with
a pushbutton
STEP-UP
ACK
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
3BIT ACK
POS 1
POS 2
5
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842736A1.CDR
Application example
Consider an application where the selector switch is used to control setting groups 1 through 4 in the relay. The setting
groups are to be controlled from both user-programmable pushbutton 1 and from an external device via contact inputs 1
through 3. The active setting group is to be available as an encoded three-bit word to the external device and SCADA via
output contacts 1 through 3. The pre-selected setting group is to be applied automatically after five seconds of inactivity
of the control inputs. When the relay powers up, it is to synchronize the setting group to the three-bit control input.
5-184
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Make the following changes to setting group control in the SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SETTING GROUPS menu:
FUNCTION: “Enabled”
Block: “Off”
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 2"
GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 3"
GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS 4"
GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON: “Off”
GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON: “Off”
Make the following changes to selector switch element in the SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  SELECTOR SWITCH 
SELECTOR SWITCH 1 menu to assign control to user programmable pushbutton 1 and contact inputs 1 through 3:
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: “Enabled”
SELECTOR 1 FULL-RANGE: “4”
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: “Time-out”
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: “5.0 s”
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
SELECTOR 1 ACK: “Off”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: “CONT IP 1 ON”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: “CONT IP 2 ON”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: “CONT IP 3 ON”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: “Time-out”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: “Off”
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: “Synchronize”
Now, assign the contact output operation (assume the H6E module) to the selector switch element by making the following
changes in the SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUTS menu:
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: “SELECTOR 1 BIT 0"
OUTPUT H2 OPERATE: “SELECTOR 1 BIT 1"
OUTPUT H3 OPERATE: “SELECTOR 1 BIT 2"
Finally, assign configure user-programmable pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  PRODUCT
SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS  USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.10 s”
The figure shows the logic for the selector switch.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-185
5
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-89: Selector switch logic
6(77,1*6
6(/(&725)8//5$1*(
6(/(&72567(38302'(
6(/(&725%,702'(
$&78$/9$/8(
6(/(&7257,0(287
6(77,1*6
6(/(&725)81&7,21
6(/(&72532:(58302'(
(QDEOHG 581
6(/(&725326,7,21
6(/(&72567(383
)/(;/2*,&Œ23(5$1'6
2II VWHSXS
2II 6(/(&725326
6(/(&725$&.
6(/(&725326
DFNQRZOHGJH
6(/(&725326
WKUHHELWFRQWUROLQSXW
6(/(&725%,7$
2II 6(/(&725%,7$
2II 6(/(&725%,7$
2II 21
6(/(&725326
6(/(&725326
6(/(&725326
6(/(&725326
)/(;/2*,&Œ23(5$1'6
6(/(&725%,7$&.
6(/(&725673$/$50
2II ELWDFNQRZOHGJH
25
6(/(&725%,7$/$50
ELWSRVLWLRQRXW
6(/(&725$/$50
6(/(&7253:5$/$50
6(/(&725%,7
6(/(&725%,7
5
6(/(&725%,7
$&'5
5.7.4 Digital elements
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  DIGITAL ELEMENTS  DIGITAL ELEMENT 1(96)
 DIGITAL ELEMENT 1

5-186

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

DIG ELEM 1 NAME:
Dig Element 1
Range: up to 16 alphanumeric characters

DIG ELEM 1 INPUT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

DIG ELEM 1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001

DIG ELEM 1 RESET
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
PICKUP LED: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Digital elements run once per power system cycle.
As such they can easily fail to react to an input signal or a block signal with a duration less than one power system
cycle. This also means that digital element output can react up to one power system cycle later than the pickup
and reset delay settings indicate.
Do not use digital elements with transient signals, such as communications commands. Do not use digital elements
where random delays of up to one cycle cannot be tolerated, such as in high speed protection.
There are 96 identical digital elements available, numbered 1 to 96. A digital element can monitor any FlexLogic operand
and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital element
settings include a name to be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected FlexLogic operand,
and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT — Selects a FlexLogic operand to be monitored by the digital element.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY — Sets the required time delay from element pickup to element operation. If a pickup
delay is not required, set to "0," To avoid nuisance alarms, set the delay greater than the operating time of the breaker.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY — Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to “0.”
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP LED — This setting enables or disabled the digital element pickup LED. When set to “Disabled,” the
operation of the pickup LED is blocked.
Figure 5-90: Digital element logic
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
INPUT:
Off = 0
AND
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
NAME:
RUN
INPUT = 1
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
BLOCK:
Off = 0
SETTINGS
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
PICKUP DELAY:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
RESET DELAY:
tPKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DIG ELEM 01 DPO
DIG ELEM 01 PKP
DIG ELEM 01 OP
tRST
827042A2.VSD
Circuit monitoring applications
Some versions of the digital input modules include an active voltage monitor circuit connected across form-A contacts. The
voltage monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see technical specifications for form-A).
As long as the current through the voltage monitor is above a threshold (see technical specifications for form-A), the Cont
Op 1 VOn FlexLogic operand is set (for contact input 1—corresponding operands exist for each contact output). If the output
circuit has a high resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current drops below the threshold and the Cont Op 1
VOff FlexLogic operand is set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators of the integrity of the
circuits in which form-A contacts are inserted.
Example 1: Breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring
In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so that problems can be detected before a trip
operation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the voltage monitor connected across the trip output
contact detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high
resistance, the trickle current falls below the monitor threshold, and an alarm is declared.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact that is open when the
breaker is open (see figure). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must include the
breaker position.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-187
5
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-91: Trip circuit example 1
UR-series device
with form-A contacts
H1a
I
H1b
DC–
DC+
V
H1c
I = current monitor
V = voltage monitor
52a
Trip coil
827073A2.CDR
Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output is given an ID name; for
example, “Cont Op 1." Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H5a to monitor breaker status.
Using the contact input settings, this input is given an ID name, for example, “Cont Ip 1," and is set “On” when the breaker is
closed. The settings to use digital element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit are indicated (EnerVista example shown).
5
5-188
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Example 2: Breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring
If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a method to
maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided (as shown in the
following figure). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see figure) across the auxiliary contact in the trip
circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position – the BLOCK setting is
selected to “Off.” In this case, the settings are as follows (EnerVista example shown).
Figure 5-92: Trip circuit example 2
UR-series device
with form-A contacts
5
Values for resistor “R”
H1a
I
H1b
DC–
DC+
V
H1c
52a
Trip coil
R
Bypass
resistor
I = current monitor
V = voltage monitor
Power supply
Resistance
Power
24 V DC
1000 O
2W
30 V DC
5000 O
2W
48 V DC
10000 O
2W
110 V DC
25000 O
5W
125 V DC
25000 O
5W
250 V DC
50000 O
5W
827074A3.CDR
The wiring connection for two examples above is applicable to both form-A contacts with voltage monitoring and
solid-state contact with voltage monitoring.
5.7.5 Digital counters
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  DIGITAL COUNTERS  COUNTER 1(8)
 COUNTER 1


COUNTER 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

COUNTER 1 NAME:
Counter 1
Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

COUNTER 1 UNITS:
Range: up to six alphanumeric characters

COUNTER 1 PRESET:
0
Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-189
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

COUNTER 1 COMPARE:
0
Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

COUNTER 1 UP:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

COUNTER 1 DOWN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

CNT1 SET TO PRESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

COUNTER 1 RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
There are eight identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state transitions
from Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of
an external contact (for example, breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter.
COUNTER 1 UNITS — Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted. The
units label appears in the corresponding actual values status.
5
COUNTER 1 PRESET — Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case where a
substitute relay is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running.
COUNTER 1 COMPARE — Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic output
operands are provided to indicate if the present value is ‘more than (HI)’, ‘equal to (EQL)’, or ‘less than (LO)’ the set value.
COUNTER 1 UP — Selects the FlexLogic operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received when the
accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter rolls over to –2,147,483,648.
COUNTER 1 DOWN — Selects the FlexLogic operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is received
when the accumulated value is at the limit of –2,147,483,648 counts, the counter rolls over to +2,147,483,647.
COUNTER 1 BLOCK — Selects the FlexLogic operand for blocking the counting operation. All counter operands are blocked.
CNT1 SET TO PRESET — Selects the FlexLogic operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter sets to the
preset value in the following situations:
•
When the counter is enabled and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when the counter is enabled and
CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand is 0, the counter sets to 0)
•
When the counter is running and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand changes the state from 0 to 1 (CNT1 SET TO PRESET
changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count)
•
When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1
(when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 0, the
counter sets to 0)
COUNTER 1 RESET — Selects the FlexLogic operand for setting the count to either “0” or the preset value depending on the
state of the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand.
COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET — Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a
separate register with the date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to “0.”
COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT — Selects the FlexLogic operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value into a
separate register with the date and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated value and
captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is interrupted,
the accumulated and frozen values are saved into non-volatile memory during the power-down operation.
5-190
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
Figure 5-93: Digital counter logic
SETTING
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION:
SETTINGS
COUNTER 1 NAME:
COUNTER 1 UNITS:
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
RUN
Enabled = 1
SETTING
AND
COUNTER 1 UP:
Off = 0
SETTING
SETTING
COUNTER 1 COMPARE:
Count more than Comp.
Count equal to Comp.
Count less than Comp.
CALCULATE
VALUE
COUNTER 1 DOWN:
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC
OPERANDS
COUNTER 1 HI
COUNTER 1 EQL
COUNTER 1 LO
SETTING
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off = 0
SET TO PRESET VALUE
SETTING
SET TO ZERO
CNT 1 SET TO PRESET:
Off = 0
AND
SETTING
AND
ACTUAL VALUE
COUNTER 1 RESET:
Off = 0
ACTUAL VALUE
COUNTER 1 ACCUM:
COUNTER 1 FROZEN:
OR
STORE DATE & TIME
Date & Time
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off = 0
OR
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off = 0
827065A2.VSD
5.7.6 8-bit switches
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  8-BIT SWITCHES  8-BIT SWITCH 1(6)
 8-BIT
 SWITCH 1

8BIT SWITCH 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

8BIT SW 1 ARG A0:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

8BIT SW 1 ARG A1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

8BIT SW 1 ARG A7:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

8BIT SW 1 ARG B0:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

8BIT SW 1 ARG B1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand



8BIT SW 1 ARG B7:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

8BIT SW 1 CONTROL:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
This feature allows switching between two input arguments defined by 8 bits each. The bits are specified by FlexLogic
operands. The feature could be viewed as an integrated two-position switch for 8 logic signals.
Typically this element is applied in conjunction with the Digitizer and 8-bit Comparator features.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-191
5
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
The switch runs every half power cycle (every four protection passes).
8BIT SW 1 ARG A0 to 8BIT SW 1 ARG A7 — These settings specify FlexLogic operands that constitute the first (A) input of the
switch. These operands are routed to the output operands if the control input is in the "Off" position.
BIT SW 1 ARG B0 to 8BIT SW 1 ARG B7 — These settings specify FlexLogic operands that constitute the second (B) input of the
switch. These operands are routed to the output operands if the control input is in the "On" position.
8BIT SW 1 CONTROL — This setting specifies FlexLogic operands to control the routing between the A and B inputs of the
switch. If the control operand is in the "Off" state, the first (A) input is switched to the output. If the control operand is in the
"On" state, the second (B) input is switched to the output. The switching takes place instantaneously.
Figure 5-94: 8-bit switch logic
6(77,1*
%,76:,7&+
)81&7,21
(QDEOHG 581
6(77,1*6
%,76:$5*$
2II )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%,76:$5*%
%,76:,7&+%,7
2II %,76:$5*$
2II )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%,76:$5*%
%,76:,7&+%,7
2II %,76:$5*$
5
2II )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%,76:$5*%
%,76:,7&+%,7
2II %,76:$5*$
2II )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%,76:$5*%
%,76:,7&+%,7
2II %,76:$5*$
2II )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%,76:$5*%
%,76:,7&+%,7
2II %,76:$5*$
2II )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%,76:$5*%
%,76:,7&+%,7
2II %,76:$5*$
2II )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%,76:$5*%
%,76:,7&+%,7
2II %,76:$5*$
2II
2II %,76:$5*%
2Q
2II )/(;/2*,&23(5$1'
%,76:,7&+%,7
6(77,1*
%,76:&21752/
2II $&'5
5.7.7 PID regulator
SETTINGS  CONTROL ELEMENTS  PID REGULATOR  PID 1(4) REGULATOR
 PID 1
 REGULATOR
5-192

PID 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS

PID 1 SAMPLE TIME:
0.05 s
Range: 0.05 to 30.00 s in steps of 0.01

PID 1 PROCESS
SIGNAL: Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter

PID 1 SETPOINT
SIGNAL: 0.00
Range: -99999.99 to 99999.99 in steps of 0.01

PID 1 TRACKING SIGNAL:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter

PID 1 PROPORTIONAL
GAIN: 1.00
Range: 0.01 to 100.00 in steps of 0.01

PID 1 SETPOINT
WEIGHTING: 1.00
Range: 0.01 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01

PID 1 INTEG. TIME
CONST.: 1.00 sec
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PID 1 ANTIWINDUP:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled

PID 1 AW TIME CONST.:
1.00 sec
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PID 1 DERIV. TIME
CONST.: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01

PID 1 DERIVATIVE
LIMIT: 10
Range: 1 to 20 in steps of 1

PID 1 MAX:
10
Range: -10000 to 10000 in steps of 1

PID 1 MIN:
10
Range: -10000 to 10000 in steps of 1

PID 1 Tmin:
500 ms
Range: 100 to 1000 ms in steps of 1

PID 1 DEAD TIME:
1.00 sec
Range: 1 to 20 s in steps of 1

PID 1 BLK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

PID 1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled

PID 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
5
The C30 is provided with this optional feature, specified at the time of ordering.
The figure shows a general form of a PID regulator in the s domain.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-193
CONTROL ELEMENTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-95: PID block diagram
+
b
K
p
+
-1
y
r
+
+
e
sKTd
1+sTd/N
d
1
i
+
K
Ti
s
+
u
+
+
1
Tt
+
w
832031A1.cdr
where
5
y is the process signal
r is the setpoint signal
w is the tracking signal
u is the regulator output
K is the proportional gain
b is the setpoint weighting
Td is the derivative time constant
N is the derivative limit
Ti is the integral time constant
Tt is the anti-windup time constant
s is the domain
In discrete form, the equations for the regulator are
e k = r k –y k
p k = K br k – y k
kT d N
Td
d k = §© -------------------·¹ u d k – 1 – §© -------------------·¹ u y k – y k – 1
T d + NT S
T d + NT S
u k = p k +i k +d k
KT S e k § T S
i k + 1 = i k + -----------------+ © ---- u w k – u k
Tt
Ti
u AW·¹
Eq. 5-1
where
TS is the sampling time
AW is a flag which enables anti-windup
The incremental form of this equation is:
Du k = u k – u k – 1
= Dp k + Di k + Dd k
5-194
Eq. 5-2
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
where
Dp k = p k – p k – 1
= K br k – y k – br k – 1 + y k – 1
Di k = i k – p k – 1
KT
= e k – 1 -------S- + AW § w k – 1
©
Ti
T
– v k – 1 ----S·
Tt ¹
Dd k = d k – d k – 1
Td
= Dd k – 1 ------------------ + y k – 2y k – 1 + y k – 2
T d + NT S
T d KN
-----------------T d + NT S
Eq. 5-3
The figure shows the PID regulator logic.
Figure 5-96: PID regulator logic
SETTING
SETTING
FUNCTION:
DEAD TIME:
Enabled = 1
u > Tmin
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
u>0
Tdead
AND
PID 1 LOWER
AND
PID 1 RAISE
|u| ms
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BLOCKED:
Off = 0
u<0
SETTING
Ts, K, b,
Ti, Tt, Td, N
SETTING
Run
ANTIWINDUP:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
u
PID 1 DELTA OUT
AW
Enabled = 1
5
PID
SETTING
SETTING
PROCESS SIGNAL:
SETPOINT SIGNAL:
u
TRACKING SIGNAL:
max, min
ACTUAL VALUE
Out=MAX(min,MIN(max,u))
PID 1 OUT
ACTUAL VALUE
SETPOINT
832029A1.cdr
5.8 Inputs/outputs
5.8.1 Contact inputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS / OUTPUTS  CONTACT INPUTS
 CONTACT INPUTS


 CONTACT INPUT H5a


CONTACT INPUT H5a ID:
Cont Ip 1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric
characters

CONTACT INPUT H5a
DEBNCE TIME: 6.0 ms
Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5

CONTACT INPUT H5a
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled


 CONTACT INPUT xxx

C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-195
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

 CONTACT INPUT
 THRESHOLDS

Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc

Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc

Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
Contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Wet and dry contacts
are supported.
The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each
group of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules)
which contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs.
An alphanumeric ID can be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The CONTACT
IP X On (Logic 1) FlexLogic operand corresponds to contact input “X” being closed, while CONTACT IP X Off corresponds to
contact input “X” being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME defines the time required for the contact to overcome
‘contact bouncing’ conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maximum
contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If CONTACT INPUT
EVENTS is set to “Enabled,” every change in the contact input state triggers an event.
5
A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the following
figure. The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a
user-settable debounce time in order for the Product to validate the new contact state. In the following figure, the
debounce time is set at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no. 1 in the diagram). Once
validated (de-bounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic operand and logs an event as per user setting.
A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the
contact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the figure).
Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system
cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic operand reflecting
the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the
figure that follows). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions,
as well as FlexLogic equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.
The FlexLogic operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one
protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs
just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration
of the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically
a delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is
below 1 ms.
For example, eight protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a
contact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1
ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time.
Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 ms accuracy using the
time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 shown). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the
DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the
debounce timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the
change.
The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks
no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8) transitions.
5-196
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
,1387
92/7$*(
Figure 5-97: Input contact debouncing mechanism and time stamp sample timing
86(5352*5$00$%/(7+5(6+2/'
7LPHVWDPSRIWKHILUVW
VFDQFRUUHVSRQGLQJWR
WKHQHZYDOLGDWHGVWDWHLV
ORJJHGLQWKH62(UHFRUG
$WWKLVWLPHWKH
QHZ +,*+
FRQWDFWVWDWHLV
YDOLGDWHG
7KH)OH[/RJLF70
RSHUDQGLVJRLQJWR
EHDVVHUWHGDWWKLV
SURWHFWLRQSDVV
7LPHVWDPSRIWKHILUVW
VFDQFRUUHVSRQGLQJWRWKH
QHZYDOLGDWHGVWDWHLV
ORJJHGLQWKH62(UHFRUG
$WWKLVWLPHWKHQHZ
/2: FRQWDFWVWDWHLV
YDOLGDWHG
5$: &217$&7
67$7(
7KH)OH[/RJLF70
RSHUDQGLVJRLQJWREH
GHDVVHUWHGDWWKLV
SURWHFWLRQSDVV
'(%281&(7,0(
XVHUVHWWLQJ
)/(;/2*,&70
23(5$1'
6&$17,0(
PVHF
'(%281&(7,0(
XVHUVHWWLQJ
7KH)OH[/RJLF70RSHUDQG
FKDQJHVUHIOHFWLQJWKH
YDOLGDWHGFRQWDFWVWDWH
7KH)OH[/RJLF70RSHUDQG
FKDQJHVUHIOHFWLQJWKH
YDOLGDWHGFRQWDFWVWDWH
3527(&7,213$66
WLPHVDF\FOHFRQWUROOHGE\WKH
IUHTXHQF\WUDFNLQJPHFKDQLVP
$FGU
Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each
group. The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This
value is selected according to the following criteria: 17 for 24 V sources, 33 for 48 V sources, 84 for 110 to 125 V sources
and 166 for 250 V sources.
For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it
in the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT H5a ID: "Breaker Closed (52b)"
CONTACT INPUT H5a EVENTS: "Enabled"
Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.
5.8.2 Virtual inputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  VIRTUAL INPUTS  VIRTUAL INPUT 1(128)
 VIRTUAL INPUT 1


VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
Virt Ip 1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

VIRTUAL INPUT 1
TYPE: Latched
Range: Self-Reset, Latched

VIRTUAL INPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include
signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to customize the
device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic equations.
The virtual inputs can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (via the COMMANDS menu)
and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to “Off” (logic 0) unless the appropriate input signal
is received.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-197
5
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
If the VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION is to “Disabled,” the input is forced to off (logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter the
input. If set to “Enabled,” the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic operands in
response to received input signals and the applied settings.
There are two types of operation: self-reset and latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x type is “Self-Reset,” when the input signal
transits from off to on, the output operand is set to on for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic equations and then return to
off. If set to “Latched,” the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state as the most recent received
input.
The self-reset operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic equations. If the
operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic equation, it likely needs to be lengthened in time. A
FlexLogic timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.
Figure 5-98: Virtual inputs logic
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
S
AND
Latch
“Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1”
SETTING
“Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0”
R
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
AND
SETTING
OR
(Flexlogic Operand)
Virt Ip 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
TYPE:
Latched
5
AND
Self - Reset
827080A3.CDR
5.8.3 Contact outputs
5.8.3.1 Digital outputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1
 CONTACT OUTPUT H1


CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID
Cont Op 1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

OUTPUT H1 OPERATE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

CONTACT OUTPUT H1
EVENTS: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
A contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Wet and dry contacts
are supported.
Upon startup of the relay, the main processor determines from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis
which contact outputs are available and then presents the settings for only these outputs. Where the contact input is nonlatching, the settings are as shown.
An ID can be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output can be any FlexLogic
operand (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic operand can be used to
SEAL-IN the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so.
For example, the trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-A
contacts (see the trip circuit example in the Digital Elements section). The monitor sets a flag (see the specifications for
Form-A). The name of the FlexLogic operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the
name of the flag; for example, Cont OP 1 IOn.
5-198
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current
flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring
an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect
operation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current
in the trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the
tripping circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called trip seal-in.
This can be realized using the Cont OP 1 IOn FlexLogic operand to seal-in the contact output as follows:
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID: “Cont Op 1"
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: any suitable FlexLogic operand
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: “Cont Op 1 IOn”
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: “Enabled”
Figure 5-99: Contact input/output module type 6A contact 1 logic
SETT ING
CONTACT OUTPU T H1 OPERATE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
= On
Cont Op 1 Closed
OR
Cont Op 1 Ion
Cont Op 1 Von
Cont Op 1 Voff
SETT ING
CONTACT OUTPU T H1 SEAL-IN
H1a
AND
= On
H1b
5
H1c
859743A1.vsd
5.8.3.2 Latching outputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a
 CONTACT OUTPUT H1a


CONTACT OUTPUT H1a ID
L-Cont Op 1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

OUTPUT H1a OPERATE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

OUTPUT H1a RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

OUTPUT H1a SEAL-IN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

OUTPUT H1a TYPE:
Operate-dominant
Range: Operate-dominant, Reset-dominant

CONTACT OUTPUT H1a
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The latching output contacts are mechanically bi-stable and controlled by two separate (open and close) coils. As such
they retain their position even if the relay is not powered up. The relay recognizes all latching output contact cards and
populates the setting menu accordingly. On power up, the relay reads positions of the latching contacts from the
hardware before executing any other functions of the relay (such as protection and control features or FlexLogic).
The latching output modules, either as part of the relay or as individual modules, are shipped from the factory with all
latching contacts open. It is highly recommended to double-check the programming and positions of the latching contacts
when replacing a module.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-199
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Since the relay asserts the output contact and reads back its position, it is possible to incorporate self-monitoring
capabilities for the latching outputs. If any latching outputs exhibits a discrepancy, the LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR self-test
error is declared. The error is signaled by the LATCHING OUT ERROR FlexLogic operand, event, and target message.
Settings shown use H1a as an example. The menu varies; not all fields shown display.
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE — This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the ‘close coil’ of the contact. The relay sealsin this input to safely close the contact. Once the contact is closed and the RESET input is logic 0 (off), any activity of the
OPERATE input, such as subsequent chattering, does not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET inputs active
(logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1a TYPE setting.
OUTPUT H1a RESET or SEAL-IN — This setting specifies a FlexLogic operand to operate the ‘trip coil’ of the contact. The relay
seals-in this input to safely open the contact. Once the contact is opened and the OPERATE input is logic 0 (off), any activity
of the RESET input, such as subsequent chattering, does not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET inputs
active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1a TYPE setting.
OUTPUT H1a TYPE — This setting specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs; that is, when both the
OPERATE and RESET signals are applied. With both control inputs applied simultaneously, the contact closes if set to
“Operate-dominant” and opens if set to “Reset-dominant.”
Figure 5-100: Contact input/output module type 4L contact 1 logic
SETTING
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a OPERATE
= On
SETTING
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a TYPE
= Operate-dominant
= Reset-dominant
5
SETTING
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a RESET
Non-volatile,
Set-dominant
AND
S
OR
Latch
Close
R
On
H1b
Non-volatile,
Set-dominant
OR
AND
H1a
S
= On
Latch
Open
R
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Cont Op 1 Closed
859744A1.vsd
Application example 1
A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user-programmable pushbuttons (buttons number 1 and 2). The
following settings are applied.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT
OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “PUSHBUTTON 2 ON”
Program the pushbuttons by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP  USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
 USER PUSHBUTTON 1 and USER PUSHBUTTON 2 menus:
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.00 s”
PUSHBUTTON 2 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 2 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.00 s”
Application example 2
A relay, having two latching contacts H1a and H1c, is to be programmed. The H1a contact is to be a Type-a contact, while
the H1c contact is to be a Type-b contact (Type-a means closed after exercising the operate input; Type-b means closed
after exercising the reset input). The relay is to be controlled from virtual outputs: VO1 to operate and VO2 to reset.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT
OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
5-200
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO2”
OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: “VO2”
OUTPUT H1c RESET: “VO1”
Since the two physical contacts in this example are mechanically separated and have individual control inputs, they do
not operate at exactly the same time. A discrepancy in the range of a fraction of a maximum operating time can occur.
Therefore, a pair of contacts programmed to be a multi-contact relay do not guarantee any specific sequence of operation
(such as make before break). If required, the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of
the control inputs as shown in the next application example.
Application example 3
A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example. An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement
this functionality.
Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista example shown).
5
Set both timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) to 20 ms pickup and 0 ms dropout.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT
OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO4”
OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: “VO2”
OUTPUT H1c RESET: “VO3”
Application example 4
A latching contact H1a is to be controlled from a single virtual output VO1. The contact is to remain closed as long as VO1
is high, and is to remain opened when VO1 is low. Program the relay as follows.
Write the following FlexLogic equation (EnerVista example shown).
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  CONTACT
OUTPUTS  CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-201
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO2”
5.8.4 Virtual outputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  VIRTUAL OUTPUTS  VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1(256)
 VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1


VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID
Virt Op 1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include
signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic equations used to customize the
device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic equations.
The virtual outputs can be assigned using FlexLogic. If not assigned, the output is forced to ‘OFF’ (Logic 0). An ID also can be
assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the FlexLogic
equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so.
For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings is
programmed as follows:
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID: "Trip"
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: "Disabled"
5
5.8.5 Resetting
5.8.5.1 Enhanced and basic front panels
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  RESETTING
 RESETTING


RESET OPERAND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
5.8.5.2 Graphical front panel
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  RESETTING
 RESETTING


RESET OPERAND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

RESET ANNUNCIATOR:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand
Some events can be programmed to latch the front panel LED event indicators, target messages, and/or graphical front
panel annunciator windows. Once set, the latching mechanism holds the latched indicators, messages, or windows in the
set state after the initiating condition has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including
FlexLogic latches) to the reset state where the initiating condition has cleared. The RESET command can be sent from the
front panel RESET button, a remote device via a communications channel, or any selected operand. The Modbus execute
function 05h with operation code 1 command is also available to perform the same function as the front panel RESET key.
RESET OPERAND — The three sources of RESET commands each activates the RESET OP FlexLogic operand. Each individual
source of a RESET command also activates its individual operand RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS), or RESET OP
(OPERAND) to identify the source of the command. Each of these three operands generates an event in the event record
when activated. The RESET OPERAND setting here selects the operand that activates the RESET OP (OPERAND) operand.
RESET ANNUNCIATOR — Used to select a FlexLogic operand that when activated acknowledges/resets all annunciator
windows on the graphical front panel. The other methods to acknowledge/reset annunciator windows include:
•
On the displayed page, press the RESET pushbutton with none of the annunciator windows selected to acknowledge/
reset all annunciator windows on that page
5-202
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
•
To acknowledge/reset a specific annunciator window, use the Up, Down, Left and Right pushbuttons to select the
window, and press the RESET or ENTER pushbutton
•
All annunciator windows can be reset remotely by programming a Virtual Input (for example Virtual Input 1) as the
input to the RESET ANNUNCIATOR setting. Then the Modbus execute function 05h with operation code 1000h command
(or function 10h with address 400h) is used to set the state of Virtual Input 1.
For the RESET ANNUNCIATOR setting, the RESET ANCTR OP FlexLogic operand is activated by the two sources of RESET
command, operand source and manual source. Each individual source of a RESET ANNUNCIATOR command also activates
its individual operand RESET OP (OPRD) or RESET ANCTR OP (MNUL) to identify the source of the command. Each of these two
operands generates an event in the event record when activated. The setting here selects the operand that activates the
RESET ANCTR OP (OPRD) operand. The RESET pushbutton on the front panel or the reset command from the software
activates the RESET ANCTR OP (MNUL) operand.
5.8.6 Direct inputs and outputs
5.8.6.1 Direct inputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  DIRECT INPUTS  DIRECT INPUT 1(64)
 DIRECT INPUT 1


DIRECT INPUT 1
NAME: Dir Ip 1
Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters

DIRECT INPUT 1
DEVICE ID: 0
Range: 0 to 16

DIRECT INPUT 1
BIT NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to 96

DIRECT INPUT 1
DEFAULT: Off
Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off

DIRECT INPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
5
These settings specify how the direct input information is processed.
DIRECT INPUT 1 NAME — This setting allows the user to assign a descriptive name to the direct input.
DIRECT INPUT 1 DEVICE ID — Represents the source of direct input 1. The specified direct input is driven by the device
identified here.
DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER — The bit number to extract the state for direct input 1. Direct Input 1 is driven by the bit
identified as DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER. This corresponds to the direct output number of the sending device.
DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE — Represents the state of the direct input when the associated direct device is offline. The
following choices are available:
•
On — Defaults the input to Logic 1
•
Off — Defaults the input to Logic 0
•
Latest/On — Freezes the input in case of lost communications. When the latest state is not known, such as after relay
power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input defaults to Logic 1. When communication resumes,
the input becomes fully operational.
•
Latest/Off — Freezes the input in case of lost communications. When the latest state is not known, such as after relay
power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input defaults to Logic 0. When communication resumes,
the input becomes fully operational.
5.8.6.2 Direct outputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  DIRECT OUTPUTS  DIRECT OUTPUT 1(64)
 DIRECT OUTPUT 1


DIRECT OUT 1 NAME:
Dir Out 1
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters
5-203
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS

DIRECT OUT 1 OPERAND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

DIRECT OUTPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
DIRECT OUT 1 NAME — This setting allows the user to assign a descriptive name to the direct output.
DIR OUT 1 OPERAND — This sets the FlexLogic operand that determines the state of this direct output.
5.8.6.3 Application examples
The examples introduced in the earlier Direct Inputs and Outputs section (part of the Product Setup section) are continued
here to illustrate usage of the direct inputs and outputs.
Example 1: Extending input/output capabilities of a UR relay
Consider an application that requires additional quantities of contact inputs or output contacts or lines of programmable
logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series IED,
such as the C30, to satisfy the additional inputs/outputs and programmable logic requirements. The figure shows that two
IEDs are connected via single-channel digital communication cards.
Figure 5-101: Input and output extension via direct inputs and outputs
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
5
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
842711A1.CDR
Assume that contact input 1 from UR IED 2 is to be used by UR IED 1. The following settings are applied (Direct Input 5 and
bit number 12 are used, as an example).
UR IED 1:
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID = “2”
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER = “12”
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUT 12 OPERAND = “Cont Ip 1 On”
The Cont Ip 1 On operand of UR IED 2 is now available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 5 ON.
Example 2: Interlocking busbar protection
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme can be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3 and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown in the figure.
5-204
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 5-102: Sample interlocking busbar protection scheme
85,('
85,('
85,('
%/2&.
85,('
($"'!"1!34B
Assume that Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 is used by Devices 2, 3, and 4 to block Device 1. If not blocked, Device 1
trips the bus upon detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time delay.
The following settings are applied (assume Bit 3 is used by all 3 devices to send the blocking signal and Direct Inputs 7, 8,
and 9 are used by the receiving device to monitor the three blocking signals).
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 4:
5
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 1:
DIRECT INPUT 7 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 7 BIT NUMBER: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 7 DEFAULT STATE: select "On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
DIRECT INPUT 8 DEVICE ID: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 8 BIT NUMBER: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 8 DEFAULT STATE: select "On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
DIRECT INPUT 9 DEVICE ID: "4"
DIRECT INPUT 9 BIT NUMBER: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 9 DEFAULT STATE: select "On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
Now the three blocking signals are available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 7 ON, DIRECT INPUT 8 ON, and DIRECT INPUT 9 ON. Upon
losing communications or a device, the scheme is inclined to block (if any default state is set to “On”), or to trip the bus on
any overcurrent condition (all default states set to “Off”).
Example 3: Pilot-aided schemes
Consider a three-terminal line protection application shown in the following figure.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-205
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-103: Three-terminal line application
85,('
85,('
85,('
($"'!#1!34B
Assume the Hybrid Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (Hybrid POTT) scheme is applied using the architecture shown
as follows. The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission.
Figure 5-104: Single-channel open-loop configuration
7;
5;
85,('
5;
5
5;
85,('
7;
7;
5;
85,('
7;
($"'!$1!34B
In this architecture, Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. Therefore, Device 2 must act as a "bridge." The following
settings are applied:
UR IEC 1:
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "4" (effectively, this is a message from IED 3)
UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "3" (effectively, this is a message from IED 1)
UR IED 2:
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "2"
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 5" (forward a message from 1 to 3)
DIRECT OUT 4 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 6" (forward a message from 3 to 1)
The figure shows the signal flow among the three IEDs.
5-206
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 5-105: Signal flow for direct input and output
85,('
85,('
',5(&7287 +<%32777;
',5(&7,1387
',5(&7,1387
',5(&7287 +<%32777;
',5(&7,1387
',5(&7287 ',5(&7,1387
',5(&7287 ',5(&7,1387
',5(&7,1387
85,('
',5(&7,1387
',5(&7,1387
',5(&7287 +<%32777;
($"'!'1!34B
In three-terminal applications, both the remote terminals must grant permission to trip. Therefore, at each terminal, direct
inputs 5 and 6 are ANDed in FlexLogic and the resulting operand configured as the permission to trip (HYB POTT RX1
setting).
5.8.7 Teleprotection
5.8.7.1 Overview
The relay provides 16 teleprotection inputs on communications channel 1 (numbered 1-1 through 1-16) and 16
teleprotection inputs on communications channel 2 (on two-terminals two-channel and three-terminal systems only,
numbered 2-1 through 2-16). The remote relay connected to channels 1 and 2 of the local relay is programmed by
assigning FlexLogic operands to be sent via the selected communications channel. This allows the user to create
distributed protection and control schemes via dedicated communications channels. Some examples are directional
comparison pilot schemes and direct transfer tripping. Note that failures of communications channels affect
teleprotection functionality. The teleprotection function must be enabled to utilize the inputs.
5.8.7.2 Teleprotection inputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  TELEPROTECTION  TELEPROT INPUTS
 TELEPROT INPUTS


TELEPROT INPUT 1-1
DEFAULT: Off
Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On


TELEPROT INPUT 1-16
DEFAULT: Off
Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On

TELEPROT INPUT 2-1
DEFAULT: Off
Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On

TELEPROT INPUT 2-16
DEFAULT: Off

Range: Off, On, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Setting the TELEPROT INPUT ~~ DEFAULT setting to “On” defaults the input to logic 1 when the channel fails. A value of “Off”
defaults the input to logic 0 when the channel fails.
The “Latest/On” and “Latest/Off” values freeze the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is not known,
such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, then the input defaults to logic 1 for “Latest/
On” and logic 0 for “Latest/Off.”
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-207
5
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.8.7.3 Teleprotection outputs
SETTINGS  INPUTS/OUTPUTS  TELEPROTECTION  TELEPROT OUTPUTS
 TELEPROT OUTPUTS


TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand


TELEPROT OUTPUT 1-16:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

TELEPROT OUTPUT 2-16:
Off

Range: FlexLogic operand
As the following figure demonstrates, processing of the teleprotection inputs/outputs is dependent on the number of
communication channels and terminals. On two-terminal two-channel systems, they are processed continuously on each
channel and mapped separately per channel. Therefore, to achieve redundancy, the user must assign the same operand
on both channels (teleprotection outputs at the sending end or corresponding teleprotection inputs at the receiving end).
On three-terminal two-channel systems, redundancy is achieved by programming signal re-transmittal in the case of
channel failure between any pair of relays.
Figure 5-106: Teleprotection input/output processing
EB!
5
EB"
13DE1<F1<E5C
C5DD9>7
381>>5<!CD1DEC*
D5<5@B?D9>@ED!!
4561E<D*
cQ]UV_b!"!!&
C5DD9>7
D5<5@B?D?ED@ED!!*
cQ]UV_b!"!!&
6<5H<?793?@5B1>4
cQ]UV_b!"!!&
?^
?B
?VV
381>>5<!CD1DEC*
DU\U`b_dUSdY_^9?5^QR\UT
C5DD9>7
6QY\
cQ]UV_b!"!!&
?;
?VV6\Uh\_WYS?`UbQ^T
cQ]UV_b!"!!&
C5DD9>7
D5<5@B?D9>@ED"!
4561E<D*
cQ]UV_b"""!&
?;
?B
?VV
EB"_bEB#
13DE1<F1<E5C
381>>5<"CD1DEC*
6QY\
?^
cQ]UV_b!"!!&
D5<5@B?D?ED@ED!!*
?VV6\Uh\_WYS?`UbQ^T
6<5H<?793?@5B1>4
D5<5@B?9>@ED!!?^
3_]]e^YSQdY_^SXQ^^U\!
C5DD9>7
C5DD9>7
D5<5@B?D9>@ED"!
4561E<D*
cQ]UV_b!"!!&
6<5H<?793?@5B1>4
?B
13DE1<F1<E5C
D5<5@B?D?ED@ED"!*
cQ]UV_b!"!!&
D5<5@B?9>@ED"!?^
?VV
?;
C5DD9>7
D5<5@B?D9>@ED!!
4561E<D*
cQ]UV_b!"!!&
D5<5@B?9>@ED!!?^
?^
6QY\
?VV6\Uh\_WYS?`UbQ^T
?^
?VV
6<5H<?793?@5B1>4
?B
D5<5@B?9>@ED"!?^
cQ]UV_b"""!&
13DE1<F1<E5C
381>>5<"CD1DEC*
3_]]e^YSQdY_^SXQ^^U\"
?^#dUb]Y^Q\cicdU]_b"dUb]Y^Q\
gYdXbUTe^TQ^dSXQ^^U\
C5DD9>7
D5<5@B?D?ED@ED"!*
6QY\
cQ]UV_b"""!&
?;
?VV6\Uh\_WYS?`UbQ^T
($"'% 1"34B
5-208
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.9 Transducer inputs/outputs
5.9.1 DCmA inputs
SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  DCMA INPUTS  DCMA INPUT F1(W8)
 DCMA INPUT F1


DCMA INPUT F1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

DCMA INPUT F1 ID:
DCMA Ip 1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

DCMA INPUT F1
UNITS: A
Range: six alphanumeric characters

DCMA INPUT F1
RANGE: 0 to -1 mA
Range: 0 to –1 mA, 0 to +1 mA, –1 to +1 mA, 0 to 5
mA, 0 to 10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 m

DCMA INPUT F1 MIN
VALUE: 0.000
Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001

DCMA INPUT F1 MAX
VALUE: 0.000
Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
The C30 is provided with optional DCmA capability, specified at the time of ordering.
Hardware and software are provided to receive signals from external transducers and to convert these signals into a
digital format for use as required. The relay accepts inputs in the range of –1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with most
common transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range. Hardware details are
contained in chapter 3.
Before the DCmA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the range
and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The relay simplifies
this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual primary parameter.
DCmA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. Configure the individual channels with the
settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8
inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are generated automatically for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel
of a type 5F transducer module installed in slot F.
The function of the channel can be “Enabled” or “Disabled.” If “Disabled,” no actual values are created for the channel. An
alphanumeric “ID” is assigned to each channel; this ID is included in the channel actual value, along with the programmed
units associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as volts, °C, megawatts, and so on. This ID is also
used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. The DCMA
INPUT F1 RANGE setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input channel.
The DCMA INPUT F1 MIN VALUE and DCMA INPUT F1 MAX VALUE settings are used to program the span of the transducer in
primary units. For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250 °C; in this case the DCMA INPUT F1
MIN VALUE value is “0” and the DCMA INPUT F1 MAX VALUE value is “250.” Another example is a watts transducer with a span
from –20 to +180 MW; in this case the DCMA INPUT F1 MIN VALUE value is “–20” and the DCMA INPUT F1 MAX VALUE value is
“180.” Intermediate values between the minimum and maximum values are scaled linearly.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-209
5
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.9.2 RTD inputs
SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  RTD INPUTS  RTD INPUT F1(W8)
 RTD INPUT F1


RTD INPUT F1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

RTD INPUT F1 ID:
RTD Ip 1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

RTD INPUT F1 TYPE:
100Ω Platinum
Range: 100Ω Nickel, 10Ω Copper, 100Ω Platinum,
120Ω Nickel
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external resistance temperature detectors and convert these
signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in
common use. Specific hardware details are contained in chapter 3.
RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with
the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8
inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown above for the first channel
of a type 5C transducer module installed in the first available slot.
5
The function of the channel can be either “Enabled” or “Disabled.” If “Disabled,” there is not an actual value created for the
channel. An alphanumeric ID is assigned to the channel; this ID is included in the channel actual values. It is also used to
reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. Selecting the type
of RTD connected to the channel configures the channel.
Actions based on RTD overtemperature, such as trips or alarms, are done in conjunction with the FlexElements feature. In
FlexElements, the operate level is scaled to a base of 100°C. For example, a trip level of 150°C is achieved by setting the
operate level at 1.5 pu. FlexElement operands are available to FlexLogic for further interlocking or to operate an output
contact directly.
See the following table for reference temperature values for each RTD type.
5-210
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Table 5-23: RTD temperature vs. resistance
Temperature
Resistance (in ohms)
°C
°F
100 Ω Pt
(DIN 43760)
120 Ω Ni
100 Ω Ni
10 Ω Cu
–50
–58
80.31
86.17
71.81
7.10
–40
–40
84.27
92.76
77.30
7.49
–30
–22
88.22
99.41
82.84
7.88
–20
–4
92.16
106.15
88.45
8.26
–10
14
96.09
113.00
94.17
8.65
0
32
100.00
120.00
100.00
9.04
10
50
103.90
127.17
105.97
9.42
20
68
107.79
134.52
112.10
9.81
30
86
111.67
142.06
118.38
10.19
40
104
115.54
149.79
124.82
10.58
50
122
119.39
157.74
131.45
10.97
60
140
123.24
165.90
138.25
11.35
70
158
127.07
174.25
145.20
11.74
80
176
130.89
182.84
152.37
12.12
90
194
134.70
191.64
159.70
12.51
100
212
138.50
200.64
167.20
12.90
110
230
142.29
209.85
174.87
13.28
120
248
146.06
219.29
182.75
13.67
130
266
149.82
228.96
190.80
14.06
140
284
153.58
238.85
199.04
14.44
150
302
157.32
248.95
207.45
14.83
160
320
161.04
259.30
216.08
15.22
170
338
164.76
269.91
224.92
15.61
180
356
168.47
280.77
233.97
16.00
190
374
172.46
291.96
243.30
16.39
200
392
175.84
303.46
252.88
16.78
210
410
179.51
315.31
262.76
17.17
220
428
183.17
327.54
272.94
17.56
230
446
186.82
340.14
283.45
17.95
240
464
190.45
353.14
294.28
18.34
250
482
194.08
366.53
305.44
18.73
5
5.9.3 DCmA outputs
SETTINGS  TRANSDUCER I/O  DCMA OUTPUTS  DCMA OUTPUT F1(W8)
 DCMA OUTPUT F1


DCMA OUTPUT F1
SOURCE: Off
Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter

DCMA OUTPUT F1
RANGE: –1 to 1 mA
Range: –1 to 1 mA, 0 to 1 mA, 4 to 20 mA

DCMA OUTPUT F1
MIN VAL: 0.000 pu
Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001

DCMA OUTPUT F1
MAX VAL: 1.000 pu
Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-211
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Hardware and software is provided to generate DCmA signals that allow interfacing with external equipment. Hardware
details are contained in chapter 3. The DCmA output channels are arranged in a manner similar to transducer input or CT
and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with the settings as follows.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up, the
relay automatically generates configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same manner
used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is
used as the channel number.
Both the output range and a signal driving a given output are user-programmable via the following settings menu (an
example for channel M5 is shown).
The relay checks the driving signal (x in equations below) for the minimum and maximum limits, and subsequently rescales so the limits defined as MIN VAL and MAX VAL match the output range of the hardware defined as RANGE. The
following equation is applied:
­ I min if x < MIN VAL
°
I out = ® I max if x > MAX VAL
°
¯ k x – MIN VAL + I min otherwise
Eq. 5-4
where
x is a driving signal specified by the SOURCE setting
Imin and Imax are defined by the RANGE setting
k is a scaling constant calculated as:
Eq. 5-5
The feature is intentionally inhibited if the MAX VAL and MIN VAL settings are entered incorrectly, for example when MAX VAL
– MIN VAL < 0.1 pu. The resulting characteristic is illustrated in the following figure.
Figure 5-107: DCmA output characteristic
9]Qh
?ED@ED3EBB5>D
5
I max – I min
k = ------------------------------------------MAX VAL – MIN VAL
9]Y^
4B9F9>7C97>1<
($"'#)1!34B
=9>F1<
=1HF1<
Settings
DCMA OUTPUT F1 SOURCE — This setting specifies an internal analog value to drive the analog output. Actual values
(FlexAnalog parameters) such as power, current amplitude, voltage amplitude, power factor, etc. can be configured as
sources driving DCmA outputs. See Appendix A for a list of FlexAnalog parameters.
DCMA OUTPUT F1 RANGE — This setting allows selection of the output range. Each DCmA channel can be set independently
to work with different ranges. The three most commonly used output ranges are available.
5-212
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
TESTING
DCMA OUTPUT F1 MIN VAL — This setting allows setting the minimum limit for the signal that drives the output. This setting is
used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered in per-unit
values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units.
DCMA OUTPUT F1 MAX VAL — This setting allows setting the maximum limit for the signal that drives the output. This setting
is used to control the mapping between an internal analog value and the output current. The setting is entered in per-unit
values. The base units are defined in the same manner as the FlexElement base units.
The DCMA OUTPUT F1 MIN VAL and DCMA OUTPUT F1 MAX VAL settings are ignored for power factor base units (that is,
if the DCMA OUTPUT F1 SOURCE is set to FlexAnalog value based on power factor measurement).
5.10 Testing
5.10.1 IED mode config
SETTINGS  TESTING  IED MODE CONFIG
 IED MODE CONFIG


IED MODE:
On
Range: On, Test, Test-Blocked

TEST MODE INPUT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

TEST-BLK MODE INPUT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

MODE CTRL VIA MMS:
On
Range: FlexLogic operand
(displays with IEC 61850)

CONTACT I/O FORCING:
On
Range: FlexLogic operand

IED BEHAVIOR:
On
Range: On, Test, Test-Blocked
5
The C30 provides a test facility to verify the functionality of contact inputs and outputs, some communication functions
and the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU, where applicable), using simulated conditions. It is accessible in the software and
graphical front panel.
IED MODE — Can be in one of three states: On, Test, or Test-Blocked. In UR 7.7 and later, as outlined in the Simulation section
that follows, the UR test mode and GOOSE simulation mode are isolated, and they no longer depend on the mode setting
here.
The On mode is for normal in service operation; the relay protection, control, and communication function is normal. Test
features are disabled, except channel tests and PMU tests remain usable when provided. In On mode, the front panel Test
Mode LED is off.
The Test-Blocked mode allows the relay to be placed quickly in a state where the relay cannot negatively impact the
power system or other parts of the substation automation system. This is to allow changing settings, loading new
firmware, changing hardware modules, and changing communication connections. As far as practical all relay output
signals are blocked. Contact outputs are de-energized, latching outputs are frozen. Commands to HardFiber Bricks are
blocked. The test bit of quality attribute of values that can be output via IEC 61850 services is set to "TRUE." The validity bit
of the quality attribute of the data sent via IEC 61850 services is set to "GOOD" if no major error is active. Direct I/O channel
tests and PMU tests are usable on applicable models. In Test-Blocked mode, the front panel Test Mode LED is on.
The Test mode is for testing involving forcing relay operation by test signal injection and verifying correct relay output. This
mode is also for tests to verify the relay outputs (both contact and communications) have the intended impact on specific
power system devices or on specific other substation automation devices. Contact outputs can be selectively enabled or
forced as described in the Force Contact Inputs and Force Contact Outputs sections that follow. Shared outputs to Bricks
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-213
TESTING
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
have their test mode flag raised, which results in their value only being accepted by relays also in forcible Test mode. The
test bit and validity bit of the quality attribute of data sent via IEC 61850 services are set as "TRUE" and "GOOD"
respectively. In Test mode, the front panel Test Mode LED flashes.
Otherwise, the UR remains fully operational while in the Test mode, allowing for various testing procedures. In particular,
the protection and control elements, and FlexLogic function normally. Other than the IEC 61850 protocol, communications
based inputs and outputs remain fully operational. The test procedure must take this into account. Direct I/O channel tests
and PMU tests are usable on applicable models.
When set to Test mode and the operand selected by the CONTACT I/O FORCING setting is "On"
•
If the FORCE Cont Ip # setting is set to Open or Closed, the respective quality attribute of the data sent via IEC 61850
services is set to q.source = "substituted"
•
If the FORCE Cont Op # setting is set to Energized, De-energized, or Freeze, the respective quality attribute of the data
sent via IEC 61850 services is set to q.source = "substituted"
When the Breaker Status is substituted manually from a graphical front panel, the respective quality attribute of the
breaker position data sett via IEC 61850 services is set to q.source = "substituted."
The IED MODE setting can be selected through
5
•
Front panel
•
EnerVista UR Setup software
•
FlexLogic operands
•
IEC 61850 control to LLN0.Mod
•
"INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM" setting (under SIMULATION > SUBSCRIBE TO SIMULATED VALUES menu)
TEST MODE INPUT — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that can put the UR into Test mode as per the logic diagram.
Any FlexLogic operand can be assigned to enable forcible Test mode, that is driven by any remote inputs, logic outputs,
front panel (user-programmable push buttons), and so on.
TEST-BLK MODE INPUT — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand that can put the UR into Test-Blocked mode as per the
logic diagram. Any FlexLogic operand can be assigned to enable test isolated mode, that is driven by any remote inputs,
logic outputs, front panel (user-programmable push buttons) and so on.
MODE CTRL VIA MMS — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand for an IEC 61850 client to control the IED mode. When the
operand is low/off, IED mode control from the IEC 61850 client is disabled, and the control request to LLN0.Mod.ctlVal
returns return a negative response. When high/on, IED mode control by an IEC 61850 client is accepted.
CONTACT I/O FORCING — When in Test mode, the operand selected by this setting dictates further response of the UR to
testing conditions, as described in the Force Contact Inputs and Force Contact Outputs sections that follow. When no
operand is specified in this setting, forcing of inputs and outputs during Test mode are not available.
The test mode state is indicated on the relay front panel by a combination of the Test Mode LED indicator, the In-Service
LED indicator, and by the critical fail relay, as shown in the table.
Table 5-24: Test mode operation
IED MODE
setting
In-Service LED
Test Mode LED
Critical fail relay
CONTACT I/O
FORCING setting
Contact input and output
behavior
On
Unaffected
Off
Normal
No effect
Normal
Test-Blocked
Off
On
De-energized
No effect
Contact outputs disabled
Test
Off
Flashing
De-energized
Off
Normal
On
Controlled by forcing
features
Following a restart or power-up, the CONTACT I/O FORCING setting remains at the last value before restart, but force
contact input and force contact output settings revert to Normal state.
Before uploading settings to the Online Window from the Offline Window of the software, ensure that the settings
in this panel in the Offline Window have been set to required values. Otherwise, undesired relay operation can
occur.
5-214
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
TESTING
IED BEHAVIOR — Displays the actual behavior of the IED based on different inputs to control the IED MODE. Note that the test
mode can be changed through the front panel, EnerVista software, FlexLogic operands, IEC 61850 control to LLN0.Mod,
and INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM setting, with the following behavior.
Table 5-25: IED fields based on input
Change to IED MODE
Behavior
Using front panel
IED MODE and IED BEHAVIOR change in software
Using software
IED MODE and IED BEHAVIOR change on front panel
Using operand
IED MODE does not change in software or front panel, IED BEHAVIOR reflects change
Using INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM setting
IED MODE and IED BEHAVIOR do not change in software or front panel
5.10.1.1 IED mode process
The IED MODE setting is changed to Test or Test-Blocked (depending upon the selected setting value for "INITIATE TEST
MODE ON SIM") when the relay is put into simulation mode. After this, the IED MODE is controlled by the TESTING  IED MODE
CONFIG menu.
The IED MODE selection is illustrated in the logic diagram.
The SR Latch that drives the UR into Test mode or On mode are reset-dominant, which means that Test-Blocked mode has
the highest priority over Test and On modes, when simultaneous commands are active. For example, if both the FlexLogic
operands assigned to the TEST MODE INPUT and TEST-BLK MODE INPUT settings are ON, then the IED MODE is Test-Blocked.
If Any Major error FlexLogic operand is set, then IED MODE is set to Test-Blocked.
Following UR restart or power-up, the IED MODE remains latched at the last value, until change is trigged by another input/
command.
When the relay simulation mode is enabled (LPHD.Sim.stVal = TRUE), the "INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM" setting triggers
respective test mode. If the relay is already in Test or Test-Blocked mode, the priority scheme defined in the IED MODE
processing logic decides the resulting IED mode.
In summary, enabling the Test or Test-Blocked mode in the TESTING  IED MODE CONFIG menu has no impact on the
simulation mode. However, enabling the simulation mode triggers the respective test mode selected by the "INITIATE TEST
MODE ON SIM" setting and the resulting IED mode is decided by the IED MODE process logic diagram. Once the simulation
mode is enabled, the user can switch independently among IED modes using the IED MODE CONFIG settings while the
simulation mode continues.
As shown in the logic diagram, the "INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM" setting triggers the respective IED mode only when the
relay is entering into simulation mode (meaning on the positive edge trigger of RLY IN SIM MODE FlexLogic operand) or there
is a change in the "INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM" setting value. Once simulation mode is enabled, any command to change
the IED Mode triggers the respective IED mode. When the simulation mode is disabled, the test mode initiated by "INITIATE
TEST MODE ON SIM" setting resets.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-215
5
TESTING
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
Figure 5-108: IED mode processing logic
IEC 618 50 protocol
LLN0.Mod.ctlVal = Test
AND
A’’
SETTINGS
LLN0.Mod.stVal= Test
TEST MODE INPU T:
A
Off=0
OR
A’
OR
SET
OR
LLN0.Beh.stVal= Test
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IED Beh Test
AND
SETTINGS
SET
IED MODE:
(From front panel o r EnerVista)
Test-Blo cked
RES ET
Re set dominant
RES ET
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IED Beh Test-Blocked
Set dominant
C
On
OR
AND
A
A’
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IED Beh Test
Test
D
OR
SIM_Test_Q
AND
C’’
A’
D’’
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
ANY MAJOR ERROR
LLN0.Mod.stVal= Test-Blocked
SETTINGS
C
TEST-BLK MODE INP UT:
OR
C’
SET
OR
Off=0
LLN0.Beh.stVal= Test-Blo cked
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IED Beh Test-Blo cked
AND
OR
OR
IEC 618 50 protocol
LLN0.Mod.ctlVal = Test-Blocked
RES ET
Re set dominant
C’’
AND
SET
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IED Beh Test-Blocked
C’
AND
RES ET
Set dominant
A
D
OR
A’’
IEC 618 50 protocol
LLN0.Mod.ctlVal = On
OR
A
AND
5
SIM_Test_Blk_Q
C’
AND
D’’
D
LLN0.Beh.stVal= On
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IED Beh On
SET
D’’
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IED Beh Test-Blocked
SETTINGS
MOD E CTRL VIA MMS:
(From front panel o r EnerVista)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
IED Beh Test
OR
RES ET
Re set dominant
Off=0
A’’
OR
C’’
FLEXLOGIC OPERAN D
IED IN SIM MOD E
D’’
SET
AND
SIM_Test_Q
SETTINGS
RES ET
INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM:
(From front panel o r EnerVista)
Set dominant
SET
Disabled
Test
SIM_Test_Blk_Q
AND
Test-Blocked
RES ET
Set dominant
FLEXLOGIC OPERAN D
IED IN SIM MOD E
Legend:
OR
Rising edge trigger.
Ho lds state for one pass.
859 785A1.vsdx
5.10.2 Force contact inputs
SETTINGS  TESTING  FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
 FORCE CONTACT
 INPUTS

FORCE Cont Ip 1
Normal
Range: Normal, Open, Closed

FORCE Cont Ip 2
Normal
Range: Normal, Open, Closed


FORCE Cont Ip xx
Normal
Range: Normal, Open, Closed
The force contact inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs.
While in Test mode, the relay contact inputs can be pre-programmed to respond in the following ways:
5-216
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SIMULATION
•
If set to “Normal,” the input remains fully operational. It is controlled by the voltage across its input terminals and can
be turned on and off by external circuitry. Select this value if a given input must be operational during the test. This
includes, for example, an input initiating the test, or being a part of a user pre-programmed test sequence.
•
If set to “Open,” the input is forced to report as opened (Logic 0) while the operand selected by CONTACT I/O FORCING
setting is On, regardless of the voltage across the input terminals. While the selected operand is Off, the input behaves
as it does when in service.
•
If set to “Closed,” the input is forced to report as closed (Logic 1) while the operand selected by CONTACT I/O FORCING
setting is On regardless of the voltage across the input terminals. While the selected operand is Off, the input behaves
as it does when in service.
Following a restart or power-up, the CONTACT I/O FORCING setting remains at the last value before restart, but force
contact input and force contact output settings revert to Normal state.
5.10.3 Force contact outputs
SETTINGS  TESTING  FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
 FORCE CONTACT
 OUTPUTS

FORCE Cont Op 1
Normal
Range: Normal, Energized, De-energized, Freeze

FORCE Cont Op 2
Normal
Range: Normal, Energized, De-energized, Freeze


FORCE Cont Op xx
Normal
Range: Normal, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
The force contact outputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact outputs.
While in Test mode, the relay contact outputs can be pre-programmed to respond in the following ways:
•
If set to “Normal,” the contact output remains fully operational. It operates when its control operand is logic 1 and
resets when its control operand is logic 0.
•
If set to “Energized,” the output closes and remains closed while the operand selected by the CONTACT I/O FORCING
setting is On, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. While the selected
operand is Off, the output behaves as it does when in service.
•
If set to “De-energized,” the output opens and remains opened while the operand selected by the CONTACT I/O
FORCING setting is On, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. While the
selected operand is Off, the output behaves as it does when in service.
•
If set to “Freeze,” the output retains its position at the instant before the IED MODE was Test and the operand selected
by the CONTACT I/O FORCING setting was On, regardless of later changes in the status of the operand configured to
control the output contact. While the selected operand is Off, the output behaves as it does when in service.
Following a restart or power-up, the CONTACT I/O FORCING setting remains at the last value before restart, but force
contact input and force contact output settings revert to Normal state.
5.11 Simulation
SETTINGS  SIMULATION
 SETTINGS
 SIMULATION

 SUBSCRIBE TO
 SIMULATED VALUES
See below

 PUBLISH
 SIMULATED VALUES
See page 5-219
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-217
5
SIMULATION
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
5.11.1 Subscribe to simulated values
SETTINGS  SIMULATION  SUBSCRIBE TO SIMULATED VALUES
 SUBSCRIBE TO
 SIMULATED VALUES

SIMULATION MODE:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SIM MODE INPUT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic operand

SIM CTRL VIA MMS:
On
Range: FlexLogic operand

INITIATE TEST MODE
ON SIM: Test-Blocked
Range: Disabled, Test, Test-Blocked

SIMULATION MODE
STATUS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The C30 is provided with optional IEC 61850 communications that include simulation. The option is specified at
the time of ordering. The field reads "Unavailable" when IEC 61850 is not present.
Prior to UR 7.7, when the UR TEST MODE FUNCTION is set to "Test-Blocked" or "Test," the sim bit in the header of all
transmitted GOOSE messages is set to "TRUE," so that the UR plays the simulator role during the testing and
commissioning phases. The "Sim" data attribute in the relay is set (<MasterLD>/LPHD1.Sim.stVal = TRUE), so that if GOOSE
messages are received with the "simulation" flag set, these are used in place of the normal messages. The quality attribute
values that are transmitted via GOOSE services are set to "valid" + "test."
5
In UR 7.7 and later, the UR test mode and GOOSE simulation mode are isolated. The sim bit in the transmitted GOOSE
messages and the relay "Sim" attribute (<MasterLD>/LPHD1.Sim.stVal) are controlled via new Modbus settings and MMS
control requests. They no longer depend on the UR TEST MODE FUNCTION or IED MODE.
The settings also display in the software when the C30 is set to IEC 61850 Edition 2. When using IEC 61850 Edition 1, the
settings are read-only.
SIMULATION MODE — When set to Disabled, the relay "Sim" attribute (<MasterLD>/LPHD1.Sim.StVal) is set to False and the
GOOSE/SV messages received with simulation flag/bit set are ignored.
When set to Enabled, the relay "Sim" attribute (<MasterLD>/LPHD1.Sim.StVal) is set to True, so that if GOOSE/SV messages
are received with the "simulation" flag/bit set, these are used in place of the normal messages.
SV messages has a simulation bit in the Reserved 1 field.
SIM MODE INPUT — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand. When set, the relay Simulation mode is enabled and, if the
messages (either GOOSE or SV) are received with the simulation bit true, messages from simulation devices are used in
place of actual messages. Any FlexLogic operand can be assigned to enable simulation mode, that is, driven by any
remote inputs, logic outputs, front panel (user-programmable pushbuttons), and so on.
SIM CTRL VIA MMS — This setting selects a FlexLogic operand for the IEC 61850 client to control the simulation mode.
When set to Off, simulation mode selection via IEC 61850 client is disabled and control request to LPHD.Sim.ctlVal returns
return negative response.
When set to On, simulation mode selection via IEC 61850 client is accepted.
This setting can be set from the front panel, EnerVista UR Setup software, FlexLogic operand, and IEC61850 control to
LPHD.Sim.ctlVal.
INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM — This setting initiates the selected test mode when simulation mode is enabled.
When set to Disabled, any command (from an IEC 61850 client, front panel, or Flex Operand) to set the simulation mode
enables the Sim mode irrespective of the current IED mode.
When set to Test or Test-Blocked, any command to set the simulation mode selects respective test mode, if the relay is not
already in Test or Test-Blocked mode. If the relay is already in Test or Test-Blocked mode by any user command (from IEC
61850 client, front panel, or Flex Operand), the respective priority defined in test mode processing decides the resultant
test mode.
5-218
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SIMULATION
In summary, enabling the Test or Test-Blocked mode via the IED MODE setting (from front panel or EnerVista), via a
IEC61850 client command to LLN0.Mod.ctlVal, or via TEST MODE INPUT and TEST-BLK MODE INPUT settings (FlexLogic
operands) has no impact on the simulation mode. However, enabling the simulation mode using the SIMULATION MODE
setting (from front panel or EnerVista), via an IEC61850 client command to LPHD.Sim.ctlVal, or via SIM MODE INPUT setting
(FlexLogic operand) enables the selected test mode by the INITIATE TEST MODE ON SIM setting. A user can independently
disable the test or test-blocked mode by any specified command type, but the relay simulation mode continues and
accepts the simulated values in place of actual values until the simulation mode is disabled.
SIMULATION MODE STATUS — This is an actual value that indicates the present simulation mode of the relay.
Figure 5-109: Simulation mode logic
SETTING
SIMULATION MODE
(From front panel or EnerVista)
Enabled=1
OR
A
SETTING
SIM MOD E INPUT
Off=0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
From IEC 61850 protocol
LPHD1.Sim.ctlVal = TRUE
IED IN SIM MOD E
LPHD1.Sim.stVal
SETTING
AND
SET
5
SIM CTRL VIA MM S
(From front panel or EnerVista)
A
Enabled=1
OR
RES ET
Set dominant
AND
From IEC 61850 protocol
LPHD1.Sim.ctlVal = FALSE
859789A1.vsdx
5.11.2 Publish simulated values
SETTINGS  SIMULATION  PUBLISH SIMULATED VALUES
 PUBLISH
 SIMULATED VALUES

TxGOOSE SIM MODE:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled

SIM Q.VALIDITY:
NONE
Range: NONE, GOOD, INVALID, QUESTIONABLE

SIM Q.TEST:
NONE
Range: NONE, TRUE, FALSE
TxGOOSE SIM MODE — When set to Disabled, the sim bits in all transmitted GOOSE messages are set to FALSE.
When set to Enabled, the sim bits in all transmitted GOOSE messages are set to TRUE.
This setting can be modified through the front panel, EnerVista UR Setup software, IEC 61850 client control to <MasterLD>/
LPHD1.TxGoSim.
SIM Q.VALIDITY — This setting simulates the validity bits of the quality attribute values included in all transmitted GOOSE
messages. When set to NONE, the q.Validity bits are set based on the logical node behavior value. When set to any other
value, the q.Validity bits of quality attributes included in all transmitted GOOSE messages are set to the selected value.
This setting is used when TxGOOSE SIM MODE is set to Enabled. It can be modified through the front panel and EnerVista UR
Setup software.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5-219
SIMULATION
CHAPTER 5: SETTINGS
SIM Q.TEST — This setting simulates the Test bit of the quality attribute values included in all transmitted GOOSE messages.
When set to NONE, the q.Test bit is set based on the relay TEST MODE FUNCTION / IED MODE. When set to any other value,
the q.Test bit of quality attributes included in all transmitted GOOSE messages is set to the selected value.
This setting is used when TxGOOSE SIM MODE is set to Enabled. It can be modified through the front panel and EnerVista UR
Setup software.
5
5-220
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C30 Controller System
Chapter 6: Actual values
Actual values
This chapter outlines viewing of data on the front panel, software, and/or web browser.
6.1 Actual Values menu
 ACTUAL VALUES
 FRONT PANEL



Access in EnerVista
See page 6-3

 IED

See page 6-4

 CONTACT INPUTS

See page 6-4

 VIRTUAL INPUTS

See page 6-4

 RxGOOSE BOOLEANS

See page 6-5

 RxGOOSE DPS

See page 6-5

 TELEPROTECTION
 INPUTS
See page 6-5

 CONTACT OUTPUTS

See page 6-6

 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS

See page 6-6

 RxGOOSE STATUS

See page 6-6

 RxGOOSE
 STATISTICS
See page 6-6

 DIGITAL COUNTERS

See page 6-7

 ACTUAL VALUES
 STATUS

C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6-1
ACTUAL VALUES MENU

 ACTUAL VALUES
 METERING

6

 ACTUAL VALUES
 REMOTE RESOURCES
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES

 SELECTOR SWITCHES

See page 6-7

 FLEX STATES

See page 6-7

 ETHERNET

See page 6-8

 REAL TIME CLOCK
 SYNCHRONIZING
See page 6-8

 DIRECT INPUTS

See page 6-9

 DIRECT DEVICES
 STATUS
See page 6-9

 EGD PROTOCOL
 STATUS
See page 6-10

 TELEPROT CH TESTS

See page 6-10

 COMM STATUS
 REMAINING CONNECT
See page 6-11

 PRP STATUS

See page 6-11

 TxGOOSE STATUS

See page 6-12

 PROTOCOL

See page 6-12

 FLEXELEMENTS

See page 6-12

 RxGOOSE Analogs

See page 6-13

 TRANSDUCER I/O
 DCMA INPUTS
See page 6-13

 TRANSDUCER I/O
 RTD INPUTS
See page 6-13

 FIELD UNIT U1
 ID: U 1
See page 6-14


 FIELD UNIT U8
 ID: U 8

 EVENT RECORDS

See page 6-14


 OSCILLOGRAPHY

See page 6-16


 DATA LOGGER

See page 6-16

 MODEL INFORMATION

See page 6-17

 FIRMWARE REVISIONS

See page 6-18

 ACTUAL VALUES
 RECORDS
 ACTUAL VALUES
 PRODUCT INFO
For status reporting, ‘On’ represents Logic 1 and ‘Off’ represents Logic 0.
6-2
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
FRONT PANEL
6.2 Front panel
6.2.1 Enhanced and basic front panels
The front panel can be viewed and used in the EnerVista software, for example to view an error message displayed on the
front panel. Settings cannot be changed in this interface.
To view the front panel in EnerVista software:
1.
Click Actual Values > Front Panel.
2.
Click the pushbutton or LCD area to enlarge it.
Figure 6-1: Front panel use in the software (C60 shown)
6
6.2.2 Graphical front panel
The graphical front panel is a hardware option.
Annunciator alarms can be acknowledged and reset, and LEDs and pushbuttons can be viewed.
To view alarms for the graphical front panel in EnerVista:
1.
Access Actual Values > Graphical Panel > Annunciator Panel. Alarms are listed, allowing remote acknowledgement/
reset.
2.
Click the Acknowledge or Reset button for an alarm.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6-3
STATUS
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
Figure 6-2: Annunciator alarms displayed in the software)
To view LEDs and pushbuttons on the graphical front panel in EnerVista:
1.
Access Actual Values > Graphical Panel > LEDs or Pushbuttons. The window displays.
6.3 Status
6.3.1 IED
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  IED
 IED


IED BEHAVIOUR:
On
Range: On, Test, Test-Blocked

SIMULATION MODE
STATUS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Displays with IEC 61850
IED BEHAVIOUR — Displays the SETTINGS  TESTING  IED MODE CONFIG  IED MODE value.
SIMULATION MODE STATUS — Displays the SETTINGS  SIMULATION  SUBSCRIBE TO SIMULATED VALUES  SIMULATION MODE
value, meaning if simulation mode is enabled or disabled on a device.
6
6.3.2 Contact inputs
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  CONTACT INPUTS
 CONTACT INPUTS


Cont Ip 1
Off
Range: On, Off


Cont Ip xx
Off
Range: On, Off
The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
input. For example, ‘Cont Ip 1’ refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the contact input.
6.3.3 Virtual inputs
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  VIRTUAL INPUTS
 VIRTUAL INPUTS


Virt Ip 1
Off
Range: On, Off


6-4
Virt Ip 128
Off
Range: On, Off
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
The present status of the 128 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
input. For example, ‘Virt Ip 1’ refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name. The second line of the display indicates
the logic state of the virtual input.
6.3.4 RxGOOSE boolean inputs
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  RxGOOSE BOOLEANS
 RxGOOSE BOOLEANS


RxGOOSE BOOLEAN 1
STATUS: Off
Range: On, Off


RxGOOSE BOOLEAN 256
STATUS: Off
Range: On, Off
This menu displays when the product includes an IEC 61850 software option.
6.3.5 RxGOOSE DPS inputs
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  RxGOOSE DPS
 RxGOOSE DPS


RxGOOSE DPS 1
Status: intermediate
Range: On, Off, intermediate, Bad


RxGOOSE DPS 16
Status: intermediate
Range: On, Off, intermediate, Bad
This menu displays when the product includes an IEC 61850 software option.
6
6.3.6 Teleprotection inputs
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  TELEPROTECTION INPUTS
 TELEPROTECTION
 INPUTS

TELEPROTECTION
INPUT 1-1: Off
Range: On, Off


TELEPROTECTION
INPUT 1-16: Off
Range: On, Off

TELEPROTECTION
INPUT 2-1: Off
Range: On, Off


TELEPROTECTION
INPUT 2-16: Off
Range: On, Off
The present state of teleprotection inputs from communication channels 1 and 2 are shown here. The state displayed is
that of corresponding remote output unless the channel is declared failed.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6-5
STATUS
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
6.3.7 Contact outputs
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  CONTACT OUTPUTS
 CONTACT OUTPUTS


Cont Op 1
Off
Range: On, Off, VOff, VOn, IOn, IOff


Cont Op xx
Off
Range: On, Off, VOff, VOn, IOn, IOff
The present state of the contact outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
output. For example, ‘Cont Op 1’ refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of
the display indicates the logic state of the contact output.
For form-A contact outputs, the state of the voltage and current detectors is displayed as Off, VOff, IOff, On, IOn, and VOn.
For form-C contact outputs, the state is displayed as Off or On.
6.3.8 Virtual outputs
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS


Virt Op 1
Off
Range: On, Off


Virt Op 256
Off
Range: On, Off
The present state of each virtual output displays here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
output. For example, ‘Virt Op 1’ refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic equation for that output.
6
6.3.9 RxGOOSE status
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  RxGOOSE STATUS
 RxGOOSE
 STATUS

All RxGOOSE Online:
Yes
Range: Yes, No

RxGOOSE 1 Status:
Offline
Range: Online, Offline


RxGOOSE64 Status:
Offline
Range: Online, Offline
This menu displays when the product includes an IEC 61850 software option.
The All RxGOOSE Online actual value does not consider RxGOOSE that are not configured or are not used by any RxGOOSE
Input.
6.3.10 RxGOOSE statistics
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  RxGOOSE STATISTICS  RxGOOSE 1(64)
 RxGOOSE 1

6-6

RxGOOSE 1
stNum
0
Range: 0 up to 4,294,967,295
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS

RxGOOSE 1
sqNum
0
Range: 0 up to 4,294,967,295
This menu displays when the product includes an IEC 61850 software option.
stNum — State number. The most recently received value in GOOSE message field stNum. The publisher increments stNum
each time that the state of one or more of the GOOSE message members is sent with a revised value.
sqNum — Sequence number. The most recently received value in GOOSE message field sqNum. The publisher sets sqNum
to zero each time the state of one or more of the GOOSE message members is sent with a new value, and it increments it
whenever a GOOSE message is resent without any member value change.
6.3.11 Digital counters
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIGITAL COUNTERS  DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1(8)
 DIGITAL COUNTERS
 Counter 1

Counter 1

Counter 1

Counter 1 FROZEN:
1970/01/01 00:00:00
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

Counter 1
Range: 0 to 4294967295 in steps of 1
0
0
0
ACCUM:
FROZEN:
MICROS:
The present status of the eight digital counters displays here. The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter
name, includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label also appears). Also included, is the date and time
stamp for the frozen count. The COUNTER 1 MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp.
6
6.3.12 Selector switches
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  SELECTOR SWITCHES
 SELECTOR SWITCHES


SELECTOR SWITCH 1
POSITION: 0/7
Range: Current Position / 7

SELECTOR SWITCH 2
POSITION: 0/7
Range: Current Position / 7
The display shows both the current position and the full range. The current position only (an integer from 0 through 7) is the
actual value.
6.3.13 Flex States
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  FLEX STATES
 FLEX STATES


PARAM 1: Off
Off
Range: On, Off

PARAM 256: Off
Off

Range: On, Off
There are 256 FlexStateTM bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6-7
STATUS
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
6.3.14 Ethernet
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  ETHERNET
 ETHERNET


ETHERNET PRI LINK
STATUS: Fail
Range: Fail, OK

ETHERNET SEC LINK
STATUS: OK
Range: Fail, OK

ETHERNET TER LINK
STATUS: Fail
Range: Fail, OK
These values indicate the status of the first, second, and third Ethernet ports.
6.3.15 Real time clock synchronizing
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  REAL TIME CLOCK SYNCHRONIZING
 REAL TIME CLOCK
 SYNCHRONIZING
6

RTC SYNC SOURCE:
None
Range: None, Port 1(3) PTP Clock, IRIG-B, Other,
Process Bus Module Clock, SNTP1, SNTP2

GRANDMASTER ID:
0000000000000000
Range: any 8 octet value

ACCURACY:
999999999 ns
Range: 0 to 999,999,999 ns

PORT 1 PTP STATE:
No Signal
Range: Disabled, No Signal, Calibrating, Synch’d (No
Pdelay), Synchronized

PORT 2 PTP STATE:
No Signal
Range: Disabled, No Signal, Calibrating, Synch’d (No
Pdelay), Synchronized

PORT 3 PTP STATE:
No Signal
Range: Disabled, No Signal, Calibrating, Synch’d (No
Pdelay), Synchronized

PTP - IRIG-B DELTA:
500000000 ns
Range: -500,000,000 to +500,000,000 ns
This menu displays when the product includes an IEEE 1588 software option.
RTC SYNC SOURCE — The time synchronizing source the relay is using at present. Possible sources include Port 1 PTP Clock
to Port 3 PTP Clock. A value of Other means a less precise source (IEC 103, IEC 104, Modbus, DNP). An actual value displays
when the relay includes the IEEE 1588 software option.
GRANDMASTER ID — The grandmasterIdentity code being received from the present PTP grandmaster, if any. When the
relay is not using any PTP grandmaster, this actual value is zero. The grandmasterIdentity code is specified by PTP to be
globally unique, so one can always know which clock is grandmaster in a system with multiple grandmaster-capable
clocks.
ACCURACY — The estimated maximum time error at present in the RTC, considering the quality information imbedded in the
received time signal. The value 999,999,999 indicates that the magnitude of the estimated error is one second or more, or
that the error cannot be estimated.
PORT 1…3 PTP STATE — The present state of the port’s PTP clock. The PTP clock state is:
•
Disabled if the port’s function setting is Disabled
•
No Signal if enabled but no signal from an active master has been found and selected
•
Calibrating if an active master has been selected but lock is not at present established
•
Synch’d (No Pdelay) if the port is synchronized, but the peer delay mechanism is non-operational
•
Synchronized if synchronized
6-8
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
PTP - IRIG-B DELTA — The time difference, measured in nanoseconds, between the fractional seconds portion of the time
being received via PTP and that being received via IRIG-B. A positive value indicates that PTP time is fast compared to IRIGB time.
6.3.16 Direct inputs
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT INPUTS
 DIRECT INPUTS


AVERAGE MSG RETURN
TIME CH1: 0 ms

UNRETURNED MSG
COUNT CH1:
0

CRC FAIL COUNT
CH1:
0

AVERAGE MSG RETURN
TIME CH2: 0 ms

UNRETURNED MSG
COUNT CH2:
0

CRC FAIL COUNT
CH2:
0

DIRECT INPUT 1
On

DIRECT INPUT 64
On

The AVERAGE MSG RETURN TIME is the time taken for direct output messages to return to the sender in a direct input/output
ring configuration (this value is not applicable for non-ring configurations). This is a rolling average calculated for the last
ten messages. There are two return times for dual-channel communications modules.
The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the direct output messages that do not
make the trip around the communications ring. The CRC FAIL COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the
direct output messages that have been received but fail the CRC check. High values for either of these counts can indicate
on a problem with wiring, the communication channel, or one or more relays. The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT and CRC FAIL
COUNT values can be cleared using the CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS command.
The DIRECT INPUT 1 to DIRECT INPUT values represent the state of each direct input.
6.3.17 Direct devices status
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
 DIRECT DEVICES
 STATUS

DIRECT DEVICE 1
STATUS: Offline
Range: Offline, Online


DIRECT DEVICE 16
STATUS: Offline
Range: Offline, Online
These actual values represent the state of direct devices 1 through 16.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6-9
6
STATUS
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
6.3.18 EGD protocol status
6.3.18.1 Fast exchange
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  EGD PROTOCOL STATUS  PRODUCER STATUS  FAST EXCHANGE 1
 FAST EXCHANGE 1


FAST EXCHANGE 1
SIGNATURE: 0

FAST EXCHANGE 1
DATA LENGTH: 0
These values provide information for debugging an Ethernet Global Data (EGD) network. The EGD signature and packet size
for the fast EGD exchange display.
6.3.18.2 Slow exchange
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  EGD PROTOCOL STATUS  PRODUCER STATUS  SLOW EXCHANGE 1(2)
 SLOW EXCHANGE 1


SLOW EXCHANGE 1
SIGNATURE: 0

SLOW EXCHANGE 1
DATA LENGTH: 0
These values provide information for debugging an EGD network. The EGD signature and packet size for the slow EGD
exchanges display.
6.3.19 Teleprotection channel tests
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  TELEPROT CH TESTS
 TELEPROT CH TESTS

6

CHANNEL 1
STATUS: n/a
Range: n/a, FAIL, OK

CHANNEL 1 LOST
PACKETS: 1
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

CHANNEL 2
STATUS: n/a
Range: n/a, FAIL, OK

CHANNEL 2 LOST
PACKETS: 1
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1

VALIDITY OF CHANNEL
CONFIGURATION: FAIL
Range: n/a, FAIL, OK
The status information for two channels is shown here.
CHANNEL 1 STATUS — This represents the receiver status of each channel. If the value is “OK,” teleprotection is enabled and
data is being received from the remote terminal; If the value is “FAIL,” teleprotection enabled and data is not being received
from the remote terminal. If “n/a,” teleprotection is disabled.
CHANNEL 1 LOST PACKETS — Data is transmitted to the remote terminals in data packets at a rate of two packets per cycle.
The number of lost packets represents data packets lost in transmission; this count can be reset to 0 through the
COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS menu.
VALIDITY OF CHANNEL CONFIGURATION — This value displays the current state of the communications channel identification
check, and hence validity. If a remote relay ID does not match the programmed ID at the local relay, the “FAIL” message
displays. The “N/A” value appears if the local relay ID is set to a default value of “0,” the channel is failed, or if the
teleprotection inputs/outputs are not enabled.
6-10
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
6.3.20 Remaining connection status
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  COMM STATUS REMAINING CONNECT
 COMM STATUS
 REMAINING CONNECT

MMS TCP (max 5)
5
Range: 0 to 5

Modbus TCP (max 4)
4
Range: 0 to 4

DNP TCP (max 2)
2
Range: 0 to 2

IEC-104 TCP (max 2)
2
Range: 0 to 2

SFTP (max 4)
4
Range: 0 to 4
These values specify the remaining number of TCP connections still available for each protocol. The display depends on
the options applicable to your device. Each time a connection is used, the remaining number of connections decrements.
When released, the remaining number of connections increments. If no connection is made over the specific protocol, the
number equals the maximum number available for the specific protocol.
For example, the maximum number of Modbus TCP connections is 4. Once an EnerVista session is opened on a computer
connected to the UR over Ethernet, the Modbus TCP status shows 3. If the EnerVista application is closed, the Modbus TCP
status shows 4.
For the graphical front panel, the remaining connections refer to TCP connections only.
MMS TCP — The number of IEC 61850 connections remaining.
6.3.21 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)
The Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) defines a redundancy protocol for high availability in substation automation
networks.
6
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  PRP STATUS
 PRP STATUS


Total Rx Port A:
0
Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

Total Rx Port B:
0
Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

Mismatches Port A:
0
Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

Mismatches Port B:
0
Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled

Total Errors:
0
Range: 0 to 4G, blank if PRP disabled
This menu displays when the product includes a PRP software option.
Total Received Port A is a counter for total messages received (either from DANPs or from SANs) on Port A.
Total Received Port B is a counter for total messages received (either from DANPs or from SANs) on Port B.
Total Errors is a counter for total messages received with an error (bad port code, frame length too short).
Mismatches Port A is a counter for total messages received with an error on Port A (PRP frame, but port received through
and LAN ID in the frame do not match).
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6-11
METERING
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
Mismatches Port B is a counter for total messages received with an error on Port B (PRP frame, but port received through
and LAN ID in the frame do not match).
6.3.22 TxGOOSE status
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  TxGOOSE STATUS
 TxGOOSE STATUS


R-TxGOOSE 1
ARP:
Off
Range: On, Off


R-TxGOOSE 16
ARP:
Off
Range: On, Off
This menu displays when the product includes an IEC 61850 software option.
This status is relevant to R-GOOSE reception when configured for SSM or ASM reception modes. It is not relevant for GOOSE
or for R-GOOSE in unicast reception mode.
ARP — The unicast mode of R-GOOSE transmission requires Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) for the resolution of the
network layer address into the MAC layer address. R-TxGOOSE## ARP status On indicates that ARP responses are being
received and the destination MAC address for R-GOOSE transmissions has been obtained. This status remains Off if
TxGOOSE## is not configured for R-GOOSE. It also remains Off if setting R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP is set to a multicast address. In
the case where setting R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP is configured with a unicast address and this status indicates Off, TxGOOSE##
transmission will be off, and therefore communication network diagnosis needs to be carried out.
This status is only applicable for R-GOOSE transmission with setting R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP set to a unicast IP address. It is not
applicable for GOOSE or for R-GOOSE when setting R-TxGOOSE1 DST IP is multicast.
6
6.3.23 Protocol
ACTUAL VALUES  STATUS  PROTOCOL
 PROTOCOL


IEC61850 EDITION:
Edition2
Range: Edition1, Edition2
This menu displays when the product includes an IEC 61850 software option.
Displays the IEC 61850 edition currently being used, as set under Settings > Product Setup > Communications > Protocol
> IEC61850 SCL Edition. This value displays only on the front panel.
6.4 Metering
6.4.1 FlexElements
ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  FLEXELEMENTS  FLEXELEMENT 1(16)
 FLEXELEMENT 1


FLEXELEMENT 1
OpSig:
0.000
The operating signals for the FlexElements are displayed in pu values using the following definitions of the base units.
6-12
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
METERING
Table 6-1: FlexElement base units
Base unit
Description
DCmA
BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and –IN inputs.
FREQUENCY
fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE
BASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR
PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs
BASE = 100°C
SOURCE CURRENT
IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE POWER
PBASE = maximum value of VBASE  IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE
VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
6.4.2 RxGOOSE analogs
ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  RxGOOSE Analogs
 RxGOOSE
 Analogs

RxGOOSE Analog 1
0.000


RxGOOSE Analog 32
0.000

RxGOOSE An1 ExpnSt:
Off
This menu displays when the product includes an IEC 61850 software option.
6
The RxGOOSE Analog values display in this menu. The RxGOOSE Analog values are received via IEC 61850 GOOSE
messages sent from other devices.
6.4.3 Transducer inputs and outputs
ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS  DCMA INPUT xx
 DCMA INPUT xx


DCMA INPUT xx
0.000 mA
Actual values for each DCmA input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID
and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.
ACTUAL VALUES  METERING  TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS  RTD INPUT xx
 RTD INPUT xx


RTD INPUT xx
-50 °C
Actual values for each RTD input channel that is enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed channel ID
and the bottom line as the value.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6-13
REMOTE RESOURCES
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
6.5 Remote resources
6.5.1 Field unit
ACTUAL VALUES  REMOTE RESOURCES  FIELD UNIT U1(U8)
 FIELD UNIT U1
 ID: U 1

FIELD UNIT STATUS:
DISABLED

BRICK SERIAL NUMBER:

BRICK ORDER CODE:
CC-05

BRICK DIGITAL CORE:
0

LOCAL TRANSCEIVER:
TX POWER:
0.0 dBm

BRICK TRANSCEIVER
RX POWER:
0.0 dBm

BRICK TRANSCEIVER
RX POWER:
0.0 dBm

LOCAL TRANSCEIVER
RX POWER:
0.0 dBm
Range: Disabled, Enabled
This menu displays when using a Process Bus Module for a HardFiber Brick.
6
6.6 Records
6.6.1 Event records
6.6.1.1 Enhanced and basic front panels
ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  EVENT RECORDS
 EVENT RECORDS


EVENT: XXX
XXX


EVENT: 3
POWER ON

EVENT: 2
POWER OFF

EVENT: 1
EVENTS CLEARED
Date and time stamps


EVENT 3
DATE: 2000/07/14

EVENT 3
TIME: 14:53:00.03405
The event records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in chronological order
from most recent to oldest. When all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record is removed as a new record is
added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated with the
event trigger. See the COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records.
Only major output operands generate events, not every operand. Elements that assert output per phase, for example, log
operating phase output only without asserting the common three-phase operand event.
See also the system log (syslog) information in the previous chapter.
6-14
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
RECORDS
The event records are viewable in the software and in a web browser. The figure shows the event records in the software.
Figure 6-3: Event records viewed in EnerVista software
To view events in a web browser:
1.
Enter the IP address of the device.
To download an oscillography waveform:
1.
Click the Oscillography icon in the Data column (not shown in the figure).
6
6.6.1.2 Graphical front panel
To display the event records page, press the Home pushbutton then the Event Record Tab pushbutton.
The newest event is always at the top.
Up and Down pushbuttons move the event selector up and down. When the selector is at the bottom of the display, the
Down pushbutton also scrolls the page, and similarly when the active selector is at the top of the display the Up
pushbutton scroll the page.
A selected event is highlighted in yellow and becomes active by pressing the Up or Down pushbutton.
There are two event markers, one green, the other cyan. To mark some an event, use the Up and Down pushbuttons to
select it (highlight in yellow), then press the green or cyan Mark Event Tab pushbutton. The mark color hides the selector
until the selector is moved. A field at the top of the page shows the interval between the two marks.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6-15
RECORDS
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
Figure 6-4: Event record
6.6.2 Oscillography
6.6.2.1 Enhanced and basic front panels
ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  OSCILLOGRAPHY
 OSCILLOGRAPHY

6

FORCE TRIGGER?
No

NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:
0

AVAILABLE RECORDS:
0

CYCLES PER RECORD:
0

LAST CLEARED DATE:
2019/07/14 15:40:16
Range: No, Yes
This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available. The cycles
per record value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the Oscillography
section of chapter 5 for details.
A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting “Yes” to the FORCE TRIGGER? command. See the COMMANDS  CLEAR
RECORDS menu for information on clearing the oscillography records.
To view a waveform:
2.
Access Actual Values > Records > Oscillography in the EnerVista software.
3.
In the window that opens, select the record number. The highest number is the most recent record (Newest Record
Number).
4.
Click the Read button to get the waveform. When available, waveforms are displayed graphically, and otherwise error
messages display.
5.
In the waveform window that opens, you can save the file, for example with the CFG extension.
6.6.3 Data logger
ACTUAL VALUES  RECORDS  DATA LOGGER
 DATA LOGGER

6-16

OLDEST SAMPLE TIME:
2019/01/14 13:45:51
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
PRODUCT INFORMATION

NEWEST SAMPLE TIME:
2019/01/14 15:21:19
The OLDEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time at which the oldest available samples were taken. It is static until the log gets
full, at which time it starts counting at the defined sampling rate.
The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME represents the time the most recent samples were taken. It counts up at the defined sampling
rate. If the data logger channels are defined, then both values are static.
See the COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing data logger records.
6.7 Product information
6.7.1 Model information
ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  MODEL INFORMATION
 MODEL INFORMATION


ORDER CODE LINE 1:
C30-A00-AAA-A0A-A0A-
Range: standard GE order code format

ORDER CODE LINE 2:
A0A-A0A-A0A
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

ORDER CODE LINE 3:
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

ORDER CODE LINE 4:
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters

SERIAL NUMBER:
Range: standard GE serial number format

ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS
000000000000
Range: standard Ethernet MAC address format

MANUFACTURING DATE:
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

OPERATING TIME:
0:00:00
Range: HH:MM:SS

PMU FEATURE ACTIVE:
No
Range: Yes, No

CT/ VT ADVANCED DIAG
ACTIVE: No
Range: Yes, No

LAST SETTING CHANGE:
2019/01/01 23:11:19
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

PBM MAC ADDRESS:
664422113344
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
6
The order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date and time of manufacture, and operating time are shown here.
The rear panel on the device contains similar information. The information is read-only in the software and modifiable on
the front panel. For example, the order code can be corrected using the front panel.
ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS — UR devices with firmware 7.0x and above have three Ethernet ports that can be used on three
networks. The MAC address displays for port 1. The MAC address for port 2 is one higher. The MAC address for port 3 is one
higher than port 2. In redundant mode, the MAC addresses for ports 2 and 3 are the same as port 2.
PBM MAC ADDRESS — The MAC address for the Process Bus Module.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6-17
PRODUCT INFORMATION
CHAPTER 6: ACTUAL VALUES
6.7.2 Firmware revisions
6.7.2.1 Enhanced and basic front panels
ACTUAL VALUES  PRODUCT INFO  FIRMWARE REVISIONS
 FIRMWARE REVISIONS


C30
REVISION: 7.9x
Range: 0.00 to 655.35
Revision number of the application firmware.

MODIFICATION FILE
NUMBER: 0
Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE)
Value is 0 for each standard firmware release.

BOOT PROGRAM
REVISION: 7.02
Range: 0.00 to 655.35
Revision number of the boot program firmware.

FRONT PANEL PROGRAM
REVISION: 2.01
Range: 0.00 to 655.35
Revision number of front panel program firmware.

COMPILE DATE:
2019/09/15 04:55:16
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Date and time when product firmware was built.

BOOT DATE:
2017/09/15 16:41:32
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Date and time when the boot program was built.

FPGA PROGRAM
REVISION: 02.02
Range: 0.00 to 655.35
Revision number for FPGA.

FPGA DATE:
2016/09/15 16:41:32
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Date and time when the FPGA was built.
The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have been
installed. PB and process bus refer to the Process Bus Module.
6.7.2.2 Graphical front panel
With a graphical front panel (GFP), the following additional items display in the software.
6
6-18

GFP PROGRAM
REVISION: 7.80
Range: 0.00 to 655.35

GFP COMPILE DATE:
2018/09/15 04:55:16
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

GFP BOOT PROGRAM
REVISION: 655.35
Range: 0.00 to 655.35

GFP BOOT COMP. DATE:
2016/09/15 04:55:16
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C30 Controller System
Chapter 7: Commands and targets
Commands and targets
This chapter outlines the Commands and Targets menus and self-tests/error messages. Commands related to the IEC
61850 protocol are outlined in the IEC 61850 section of the Settings chapter. Log/error messages for IEC 61850 are
outlined in the UR Family Communications Guide.
7.1 Commands menu
COMMANDS


 COMMANDS
 VIRTUAL INPUTS

 COMMANDS
 CLEAR RECORDS

 COMMANDS
 SET DATE AND TIME

 COMMANDS
 RELAY MAINTENANCE

 COMMANDS
 SECURITY
The commands menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected from
unauthorized access via the command password; see the Security section of chapter 5 for details. The following flash
message appears after successfully command entry.
COMMAND
EXECUTED
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
7-1
COMMANDS MENU
CHAPTER 7: COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7.1.1 Virtual inputs
COMMANDS  VIRTUAL INPUTS
 COMMANDS
 VIRTUAL INPUTS

Virt Ip 1
Off
Range: Off, On

Virt Ip 2
Off
Range: Off, On

Virt Ip 128
Off

Range: Off, On
The states of up to 128 virtual inputs are changed here. The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The
second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input. This status is a state off (logic 0) or on (logic 1).
7.1.2 Clear records
COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS
 COMMANDS
 CLEAR RECORDS
7

CLEAR EVENT RECORDS?
No
Range: No, Yes

CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY?
No
Range: No, Yes

CLEAR DATA LOGGER?
No
Range: No, Yes

CLEAR UNAUTHORIZED
ACCESS? No
Range: No, Yes

CLEAR DIRECT I/O
COUNTERS? No
Range: No, Yes.
Valid only for units with Direct Input/Output module.

CLEAR TELEPROTECT
COUNTERS? No
Range: No, Yes

 CLEAR IEC61850
 XWSI OPCNT
See below

 CLEAR IEC61850
 XCBR OPCNT
See below

CLEAR ALL RELAY
RECORDS? No
Range: No, Yes
This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the event records. Data is cleared by changing a
command setting to “Yes” and pressing the ENTER key. After clearing data, the command setting automatically reverts to
“No.”
COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS  CLEAR IEC61850 XWSI OPCNT
 CLEAR IEC61850
 XWSI OPCNT

CLEAR XSWI 1
OpCnt? No
Range: No, Yes


7-2
CLEAR XSWI 24
OpCnt? No
Range: No, Yes
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 7: COMMANDS AND TARGETS
COMMANDS MENU
COMMANDS  CLEAR RECORDS  CLEAR IEC61850 XCBR OPCNT
 CLEAR IEC61850
 XCBR OPCNT

CLEAR XCBR 1
OpCnt? No

CLEAR XCBR 8
OpCnt? No
Range: No, Yes

Range: No, Yes
The Clear XSWI commands clear the disconnect operation counters for each phase and the three-phase counter. Similarly,
the Clear XCBR commands clear the circuit breaker operation counters for each phase and the three-phase counter.
7.1.3 Set date and time
COMMANDS  SET DATE AND TIME
 COMMANDS
 SET DATE AND TIME

SET DATE AND TIME:
2000/01/14 13:47:03
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
The date and time can be entered on the front panel keypad. The time setting is based on the 24-hour clock. The complete
date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this command. The new time and date take effect when the
ENTER key is pressed.
The clock also can be synchronized to the local computer time among several UR devices. Use the Synchronize Devices
entry in the Online Window area of the EnerVista software. (Click the button at the top of the window that opens.)
When the relay is synchronizing to an external time source such as PTP, IRIG-B, or SNTP, the manually entered time or the
manually synchronized time is over-written.
The timescale of the entered time is local time, including daylight savings time where and when applicable.
7.1.4 Relay maintenance
COMMANDS  RELAY MAINTENANCE
 COMMANDS
 RELAY MAINTENANCE

PERFORM LAMP TEST?
No
Range: No, Yes

PERFORM LCD TEST?
Off
Range: Off, Red, Green, Blue, White & Text Pattern,
Black & Text Pattern, TV Test Pattern

PERFORM PUSHBUTTON
TEST? No
Range: No, Yes

UPDATE ORDER CODE?
No
Range: No, Yes

REBOOT RELAY?
No
Range: No, Yes

SERVICE COMMAND
0
Range: 0, 101, 20511

SAVE VOLATILE DATA?
No
Range: No, Yes
7
This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands for the lamp test and order code are
activated by changing a command setting to “Yes” and pressing the ENTER key. The command setting then automatically
reverts to “No.” The service command is activated by entering a numerical code and pressing the ENTER key.
Not all commands display in the software; use the front panel when required.
PERFORM LAMP TEST — Turns on all front panel LEDs and display pixels for a short duration.
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
7-3
COMMANDS MENU
CHAPTER 7: COMMANDS AND TARGETS
PERFORM LCD TEST — This command detects either stuck-ON or stuck-OFF pixels (dead pixels) in the display screen on the
graphical front panel. RED/GREEN/BLUE is to display the solid background color in the whole screen. WHITE & TEXT
PATTERN shows the white background and black texts. BLACK & TEXT PATTERN shows the black background and white
texts. TV TEST PATTERN displays a standard television test pattern (SMPTE color bars). The test screen can be canceled by
pressing any pushbutton or after 30 seconds of inactivity.
PERFORM PUSHBUTTON TEST — This command tests the pushbuttons on the graphical front panel. During testing, press the
corresponding pushbutton according to the prompt text. A failure message is given if the expected action is not detected
in one minute. Holding the ESCAPE button for five seconds to interrupt the test sequence. The designated function of a
specific pushbutton is bypassed in the test.
UPDATE ORDER CODE — Use this command to read and update the order code, for example when hardware modules have
been changed inside the relay. It causes the relay to scan the backplane for the modules and update the order code to
match. All settings are defaulted with an update. When an update occurs, the following message displays and the relay
restarts.
UPDATING...
PLEASE WAIT
There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the ORDER
CODE NOT UPDATED message displays.
REBOOT RELAY — Restarts the relay so that changes to configuration settings can take effect. In most cases, if changes are
made to the configuration settings these changes do not take effect unless the relay is rebooted.
With the CyberSentry option, the Administrator and Operator roles can initiate the Reboot Relay command.
SERVICE COMMAND — Performs specific C30 service actions. Presently, there are two service actions available. Code
"20511" returns all settings to their factory default value and restarts the relay (then you re-enter IP address, restart, set
unit to "Programmed"). Code “101” is used to clear factory diagnostic information stored in the non-volatile memory. If a
code other than these two is entered, the command is ignored and no action is taken. Various self-checking diagnostics
are performed in the background while the C30 is running, and diagnostic information is stored on the non-volatile
memory from time to time based on the self-checking result. Although the diagnostic information is cleared before the C30
is shipped from the factory, the user can want to clear the diagnostic information for themselves under certain
circumstances. For example, you clear diagnostic information after replacement of hardware. Once the diagnostic
information is cleared, all self-checking variables are reset to their initial state and diagnostics restart from scratch.
7
SAVE VOLATILE DATA — Saves this data to compact flash memory prior to shutdown. This allows the saved data to be as
recent as possible instead of relying on the periodic timer to save the data.
7.1.5 Security
COMMANDS  SECURITY
 SECURITY


ADMINISTRATOR
LOGOFF: No
Range: Yes, No

ENGINEER
LOGOFF: No
Range: Yes, No

OPERATOR
LOGOFF: No
Range: Yes, No

CLEAR SECURITY DATA:
No
Range: Yes, No
With the CyberSentry option, this setting is available to enable or disable the following commands.
ADMINISTRATOR LOGOFF — Selecting ‘Yes’ allows the Supervisor to forcefully logoff an administrator session.
ENGINEER LOGOFF — Selecting ‘Yes’ allows the Supervisor to forcefully logoff an engineer session.
7-4
C30 CONTROLLER SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 7: COMMANDS AND TARGETS
TARGETS MENU
OPERATOR LOGOFF — Selecting ‘Yes’ allows the Supervisor to forcefully logoff an operator session.
CLEAR SECURITY DATA — Selecting ‘Yes’ allows the Supervisor to forcefully clear all the security logs and clears all the
operands associated with the self-tests.
7.2 Targets menu
TARGETS


PHASE TOC4
OP: A B -
Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
Example shown.

DIGITAL ELEMENT 48:
LATCHED
Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
Example shown.


A target enables the EnerVista UR Setup software to monitor automatically and display the status of any active target
messages of all the devices inserted into that ">